2020 Nissan Armada User Manual

2020 ARMADA

OWNER’S MANUAL

and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

WARNING

Operating, servicing and main-

taining a passenger vehicle or

off-highway motor vehicle can

expose you to chemicals in-

cluding engine exhaust, carbon

monoxide, phthalates, and

lead, which are known to the

State of California to cause

cancer and birth defects or

other reproductive harm. To

minimize exposure, avoid

breathing exhaust, do not idle

the engine except as neces-

sary, service your vehicle in a

well-ventilated area and wear

gloves or wash your hands

frequently when servicing your

vehicle. For more information

go to www.P65Warnings.ca.

gov/passenger-vehicle.

This manual was prepared to help you

understand the operation and mainte-

nance of your vehicle so that you may

enjoy many miles of driving pleasure.

Please read through this manual before

operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Book-

let explains details about the warranties

covering your vehicle. Additionally, a

separate Customer Care/Lemon Law

Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to

resolve any concerns you may have

with your vehicle, as well as clarify your

rights under your state’s lemon law.

In addition to factory installed options,

your vehicle may also be equipped with

additional accessories installed by NISSAN

or by your NISSAN dealer prior to delivery.

It is important that you familiarize your-

self with all disclosures, warnings, cau-

tions and instructions concerning proper

use of such accessories prior to operating

the vehicle and/or accessory. It is recom-

mended that you see a NISSAN dealer for

details concerning the particular acces-

sories with which your vehicle is

equipped.

Your NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle

best. When you require any service or

have any questions, we will be glad to

assist you with the extensive resources

available to us.

READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Before driving your vehicle, read your

Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure

familiarity with controls and maintenance

requirements, assisting you in the safe

operation of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION

REMINDERS!

Follow these important driving rules

to help ensure a safe and comforta-

ble trip for you and your passengers!

. NEVER drive under the influence

of alcohol or drugs.

. ALWAYS observe posted speed

limits and never drive too fast

for conditions.

. ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving and avoid using vehicle

features or taking other actions

that could distract you.

. ALWAYS use your seat belts and

appropriate child restraint sys-

tems. Pre-teen children should

be seated in the rear seat.

. ALWAYS provide information

about the proper use of vehicle

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION

65 WARNING

Foreword

safety features to all occupants

of the vehicle.

. ALWAYS review this Owner’s Man-

ual for important safety informa-

tion.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD

DRIVING

This vehicle will handle and maneuver

differently from an ordinary passenger

car because it has a higher center of

gravity for off-road use. As with other

vehicles with features of this type,

failure to operate this vehicle correctly

may result in loss of control or an

accident. Be sure to read “On-pave-

ment and off-road driving precau-

tions”, “Avoiding collision and rollover”

and “Driving safety precautions” in the

“5. Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHI-

CLE

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification could affect its perfor-

mance, safety or durability, and may

even violate governmental regula-

tions. In addition, damage or perfor-

mance problems resulting from

modification will not be covered under

the NISSAN warranties.

WARNING

Installing an aftermarket On-Board

Diagnostic (OBD) plug-in device that

uses the port during normal driving,

for example remote insurance com-

pany monitoring, remote vehicle di-

agnostics, telematics or engine

reprogramming, may cause interfer-

ence or damage to vehicle systems.

We do not recommend or endorse

the use of any aftermarket OBD

plug-in devices, unless specifically

approved by NISSAN. The vehicle

warranty may not cover damage

caused by any aftermarket plug-in

device.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

This manual includes information for all

features and equipment available on

this model. Features and equipment in

your vehicle may vary depending on

model, trim level, options selected, or-

der, date of production, region or avail-

ability. Therefore, you may find

information about features or equip-

ment that are not included or installed

on your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustra-

tions in this manual are those in effect at

the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the

right to change specifications, perfor-

mance, design or component suppliers

without notice and without obligation.

From time to time, NISSAN may update

or revise this manual to provide owners

with the most accurate information cur-

rently available. Please carefully read and

retain with this manual all revision up-

dates sent to you by NISSAN to ensure

you have access to accurate and up-to-

date information regarding your vehicle.

Current versions of vehicle Owner’s Man-

uals and any updates can also be found in

the Owner section of the NISSAN website

at https://owners.nissanusa.com/now-

ners/navigation/manualsGuide. If you

have questions concerning any informa-

tion in your Owner’s Manual, contact

NISSAN Consumer Affairs. See the NISSAN

CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM page in this

Owner’s Manual for contact information.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT

THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this

manual. They are used in the following

ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence

of a hazard that could cause death or

serious personal injury. To avoid or

reduce the risk, the procedures must

be followed precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence

of a hazard that could cause minor

or moderate personal injury or da-

mage to your vehicle. To avoid or

reduce the risk, the procedures must

be followed carefully.

SIC0697

If you see the symbol above, it means “Do

not do this” or “Do not let this happen”.

If you see a symbol similar to those above

in an illustration, it means the arrow

points to the front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to

those above indicate movement or ac-

tion.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to

those above call attention to an item in

the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVI-

SORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium

batteries, may contain perchlorate ma-

terial. The following advisory is pro-

vided: “Perchlorate Material - special

handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.

gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”

Manual may be reproduced or stored in a

retrieval system, or transmitted in any

form, or by any means, electronic, me-

chanical, photocopying, recording or

otherwise, without the prior written per-

mission of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

NISSAN CARES ...

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your

NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and

service needs.

However, if there is something that your

NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or

you would like to provide NISSAN directly

with comments or questions, please con-

tact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Depart-

ment using our toll-free number:

For U.S. customers

1-800-NISSAN-1

(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers

1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will

ask for the following information:

. Your name, address, and telephone

number

. Vehicle identification number (at-

tached to the top of the instrument

panel on the driver’s side)

. Date of purchase

. Current odometer reading

. Your NISSAN dealer’s name

. Your comments or questions

You can write to NISSAN with the infor-

mation at:

For U.S. customers

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

or via e-mail at:

nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.

com

For Canadian customers

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

or via e-mail at:

information.centre@nissancana-

da.com

If you prefer, visit us at:

www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers)

www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN

and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN

vehicle.

Illustrated table of contents

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint

system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice

recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Do-it-yourself

Maintenance and schedules

Technical and consumer information

Table of

Contents

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

Seats, seat belts and Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS) ..................................................................................... 0-2

Exterior front .................................................................................... 0-3

Exterior rear ...................................................................................... 0-4

Passenger compartment ....................................................... 0-5

Cockpit .................................................................................................. 0-6

Instrument panel ......................................................................... 0-7

Meters and gauges .................................................................... 0-8

Engine compartment ............................................................... 0-9

VK56VD engine ..................................................................... 0-9

Warning and indicator lights ........................................... 0-10

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

JVC1212X

1. Seat belt for 3rd row center seat (P.1-26)

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bags (P.1-54)

3. Head Restraints (P.1-14)

— Front-seat Active Head Restraints

(P.1-19)

4. Seat belts (P.1-20)

5. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bags (P.1-54)

6. Supplemental front-impact air bags

(P.1-54)

7. Child restraint anchor points (for top

tether strap child restraint) (P.1-46, P.1-50)

8. 3rd row seats (P.1-7)

— Child restraints (P.1-32)

9. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system (P.1-35)

10. Armrest (2nd row seat) (P.1-11)

11. 2nd row seats (P.1-5)

— Child restraints (P.1-32)

12. Seat belt pretensioner (P.1-69)

13. Front armrest (P.1-11)

14. Front seats (P.1-4)

— Occupant classification sensors

(weight sensors) (P.1-60)

15. Front passenger air bag status light

(P.1-62)

SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL

RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

JVC0953X

1. Hood (P.3-21)

2. Windshield wiper and washer

— Switch operation (P.2-33)

— Window washer fluid (P.8-10)

— Windshield wiper deicer (if so equipped)

(P.2-36)

3. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P.2-65)

4. Power windows (P.2-63)

5. Roof rack (P.2-60)

6. Sensors

— Camera aiding sonar function (models

with Intelligent Around View Monitor)

(P.4-25)

— Sonar system (if so equipped) (P.5-127)

7. Towing hook (P.6-19)

8. Front view camera (if so equipped) (P.4-10)

9. Fog light (if so equipped) (P.2-41)

10. Headlights and turn signal lights (P.2-37)

11. Tires

— Wheel and tires (P.8-30, P.10-8)

— Flat tire (P.6-3)

— Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) (P.2-15, P.5-5)

12. Outside mirrors (P.3-38)

— Side view camera (P.4-10)

— Welcome light (if so equipped) (P.2-67)

13. Side turn signal lights (P.8-24)

14. Doors

— Keys (P.3-2)

— Door locks (P.3-4)

— Intelligent Key system (P.3-7)

— Remote keyless entry system (P.3-15)

— Remote engine start (if so equipped)

(P.3-19)

15. Child safety rear door locks (P.3-6)

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

EXTERIOR FRONT

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

JVC1091X

1. Fuel-filler door (P.3-26)

— Fuel information (P.10-3)

2. Antenna (P.4-43)

3. Rear combination light (P.8-24)

4. Rear window defroster (P.2-36)

5. Satellite antenna (P.4-44)

6. Rear view camera (P.4-3, P.4-10)

7. Intelligent Rear View Mirror camera (if so

equipped) (P.3-32)

8. High-mounted stop light (P.8-24)

9. Liftgate (P.3-22)

— Intelligent Key system (P.3-7)

10. Rear window wiper and washer

— Switch operation (P.2-36)

— Window washer fluid (P.8-10)

11. Spare tire (under the vehicle) (P.6-3)

12. Sensors

— Camera aiding sonar function (models

with Intelligent Around View Monitor)

(P.4-25)

— Intelligent Back-up Intervention (I-BI) (if

so equipped) (P.5-53)

— Sonar system (if so equipped) (P.5-127)

13. Towing hook (P.6-19)

14. Trailer hitch (P.10-22)

EXTERIOR REAR

JVC1211X

1. Cargo light (P.2-70)

2. Cup holders (3rd row seat) (P.2-54)

3. Rear ventilators (P.4-34)

4. Coat hooks (P.2-59)

5. Rear personal lights (P.2-68)

6. Tray (P.2-58)

7. Door armrest

— Power window controls (P.2-63)

— Power door lock switch (P.3-5)

— Outside mirror remote control switch

(driver’s side) (P.3-38)

8. Automatic drive positioner switch (if so

equipped) (P.3-40)

9. Sun visors (P.3-30)

10. Map lights (P.2-68)

11. Moonroof switch (if so equipped) (P.2-65)

12. SOS call switch (if so equipped) (See

NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual)

13. Sunglasses holder (P.2-55)

14. Inside mirror (P.3-31)

— Intelligent Rear View Mirror (if so

equipped) (P.3-32)

— HomeLink® universal transceiver (if so

equipped) (P.2-70, P.2-74)

15. Cargo area

— Power outlet (P.2-50)

— Cargo floor box (P.2-60)

— Luggage hooks (P.2-59)

— Jacking tools (P.6-5)

16. Rear console box (if so equipped) (P.2-57)

— Cup holders (2nd row seat) (P.2-53)

— Pocket (P.2-57)

17. Cup holders (2nd row seat) (if so

equipped) (P.2-53)

18. Mobile Entertainment System (MES) (if so

equipped) (See NissanConnect® Owner’s

Manual)

19. Console box (P.2-56)

— Power outlet (P.2-50)

— USB charging connector (P.2-52)

— Rear Media Interface (See NissanCon-

nect® Owner’s Manual)

— Rear automatic air conditioning sys-

tem (if so equipped) (P.4-39)

20. Front cup holders (P.2-53)/Tray (P.2-58)

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

WAA0101X

1. Power liftgate switch (if so equipped)

(P.3-22)

2. Heated steering wheel switch (if so

equipped) (P.2-42)

3. Instrument brightness control switch

(P.2-40)

4. TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip odometer

(P.2-6)

5. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch

— Headlight (P.2-37)

— Turn signal (P.2-41)

— Fog light (if so equipped) (P.2-41)

6. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left

side)

— Audio control steering switch (See

NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual)

— Hands-Free Phone System switch (See

NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual)

7. Trip computer switch (P.2-28)

8. Wiper and washer switch (P.2-33)

9. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right

side)

— Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system

(P.5-63)

10. Dynamic driver assistance switch (if so

equipped)

— Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) sys-

tem (if so equipped) (P.5-23)

— Intelligent Distance Control (I-DC) sys-

tem (if so equipped) (P.5-85)

— Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-

BSI) system (if so equipped) (P.5-40)

11. Shift lever (P.5-17)

12. Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) shift switch (if so

equipped) (P.5-116)/SNOW mode switch

(P.2-46)/TOW MODE switch (P.2-47)/Vehi-

cle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch

(P.5-133)

13. Power liftgate main switch (if so

equipped) (P.3-22)

14. Warning systems switch (if so equipped)

(P.2-46)

— Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (if so

equipped) (P.5-23)

— Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so

equipped) (P.5-32)

15. Rear door alert switch (P.2-48)

16. Electric tilting/telescopic steering wheel

switch (P.3-29)

COCKPIT

JVC1093X

1. Side ventilator (P.4-34)

2. Meters and gauges (P.2-5)

3. Center ventilator (P.4-34)

4. Center multi-function control panel (See

NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual)

5. Center display (See NissanConnect® Own-

er’s Manual)

— Intelligent Around View Monitor (if so

equipped) (P.4-10)

— RearView Monitor (if so equipped)

(P.4-3)

— Navigation system (if so equipped) (See

NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual)

6. Hazard warning flasher switch (P.6-2)

7. Defroster switch (P.2-36)/Deicer switch (if

so equipped) (P.2-36)

8. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P.1-54)

9. Fuse box (P.8-20)

10. Parking brake (P.5-22)

11. Hood release handle (P.3-21)

12. Steering wheel

— Horn (P.2-42)

— Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-54)

— Power steering (P.5-130)

13. Push-button ignition switch (P.5-13)

14. Climate controlled seat switch (if so

equipped) (P.2-45)/Heated seat switch (if

so equipped) (P.2-43)

15. Front passenger air bag status light

(P.1-62)

16. Power outlet (P.2-50)

17. USB connection port (See NissanCon-

nect® Owner’s Manual)

18. Cup holder (P.2-53)/Tray (P.2-58)

19. Heater and air conditioner (P.4-35)

20. Audio system (See NissanConnect® Own-

er’s Manual)

21. Glove box (P.2-56)

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

INSTRUMENT PANEL

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

SIC4368

1. Tachometer (P.2-7)

2. Warning and indicator lights (P.2-10)

3. Speedometer (P.2-6)

4. Engine coolant temperature gauge (P.2-7)

5. Voltmeter (P.2-9)

6. Vehicle information display (P.2-20)/Od-

ometer/twin trip odometer (P.2-6)

7. Engine oil pressure gauge (P.2-8)

8. Fuel gauge (P.2-8)

METERS AND GAUGES

JVC0965X

VK56VD ENGINE

1. Window washer fluid reservoir (P.8-10)

2. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-18)

3. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-6)

4. Power steering fluid reservoir (P.8-8)

5. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-6)

6. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-9)

7. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-18)

8. Battery (P.8-11)

9. Radiator filler cap (P.8-4)

10. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-4)

11. Drive belts (P.8-13)

12. Air cleaner (P.8-15)

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

Warning

light

Name

Page

Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light

2-11

Automatic Emergency

Braking (AEB) system

warning light

2-11

Automatic Transmission

(AT) check warning light

2-11

Automatic Transmission

(AT) oil temperature warn-

ing light

2-11

Automatic Transmission

(AT) park warning light

2-12

Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/

Intelligent Blind Spot Inter-

vention (I-BSI) system

warning light (orange; if so

equipped)

2-12

Brake warning light

2-12

Charge warning light

2-13

Intelligent Distance Control

(I-DC) system warning light

(orange; if so equipped)

2-13

Engine oil pressure warning

light

2-13

Warning

light

Name

Page

Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)

warning light (4WD models)

2-14

Intelligent Cruise Control

(ICC) system warning light

(orange)

2-14

Intelligent Key warning

light

2-14

Lane Departure Warning

(LDW) indicator light (or-

ange; if so equipped)

2-14

Low tire pressure warning

light

2-15

Master warning light

2-16

Seat belt warning light

2-16

Supplemental air bag

warning light

2-17

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) warning light

2-17

Indica-

tor light

Name

Page

Automatic Transmission

(AT) position indicator light

2-18

Intelligent Blind Spot Inter-

vention (I-BSI) ON indicator

light (green; if so equipped)

2-18

Check suspension indicator

light

2-18

Exterior light indicator

2-18

Front fog light indicator

light (if so equipped)

2-18

Front passenger air bag

status light

2-18

High beam indicator light

2-18

Intelligent Lane Interven-

tion (I-LI) ON indicator light

(green; if so equipped)

2-18

Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL)

2-18

Security indicator light

2-19

SNOW mode indicator light

2-19

TOW mode indicator light

2-19

Turn signal/hazard indica-

tor lights

2-19

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) off indicator light

2-20

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

1 Safety — seats, seat belts and supple-
mental restraint system
Seats ....................................................................................................... 1-3
Front seats .................................................................................. 1-4
2nd row seats .......................................................................... 1-5
3rd row seats ........................................................................... 1-7
Armrest ....................................................................................... 1-11
Flexible seating ..................................................................... 1-12
Head restraints/headrests ................................................. 1-14
Adjustable head
restraint/headrest components ............................. 1-16
Non-adjustable head
restraint/headrest components ............................. 1-16
Remove ....................................................................................... 1-16
Install............................................................................................. 1-17
Adjust............................................................................................ 1-17
Front-seat Active Head Restraint .......................... 1-19
Seat belts ......................................................................................... 1-20
Precautions on seat belt usage .............................. 1-20
Pregnant women ................................................................ 1-22
Injured persons ..................................................................... 1-22
Three-point type seat belt .......................................... 1-22
Seat belt extenders ........................................................... 1-29
Seat belt maintenance ................................................... 1-29
Child safety ..................................................................................... 1-30
Infants .......................................................................................... 1-31
Small children ........................................................................ 1-31
Larger children ................................................................... 1-31
Child restraints ........................................................................... 1-32
Precautions on child restraints ............................. 1-33
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) system ................................................................ 1-35
Top tether strap child restraint ............................ 1-37
Rear-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH ......................................................................... 1-38
Rear-facing child restraint installation
using the seat belts ........................................................ 1-40
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH ......................................................................... 1-43
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using the seat belts ........................................................ 1-46
Booster seats ....................................................................... 1-51
Supplemental restraint system ..................................... 1-54
Precautions on supplemental
restraint system ................................................................ 1-54
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats) ........................................................................... 1-60
Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag and roof-mounted
curtain side-impact and rollover
supplemental air bag systems .............................. 1-68
Seat belts with pretensioners
(front seats) ........................................................................... 1-69

Supplemental air bag warning labels ................ 1-70

Supplemental air bag warning light .................... 1-71

Repair and replacement procedure .................. 1-72

SSS0133

WARNING

. Do not ride in a moving vehicle

when the seatback is reclined.

This can be dangerous. The

shoulder belt will not be against

your body. In an accident, you

could be thrown into it and re-

ceive neck or other serious inju-

ries. You could also slide under

the lap belt and receive serious

internal injuries.

. For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the

seat should be upright. Always sit

well back and upright in the seat

with both feet on the floor and

adjust the seat belt properly. See

“Precautions on seat belt usage”

(P.1-20).

. After adjustment, gently rock in

the seat to make sure it is se-

curely locked.

. Do not leave children unattended

inside the vehicle. They could

unknowingly activate switches

or controls. Unattended children

could become involved in serious

accidents.

. To help avoid risk of injury or

death through unintended opera-

tion of the vehicle and/or its

systems, do not leave children,

people who require the assis-

tance of others or pets unat-

tended in your vehicle.

Additionally, the temperature in-

side a closed vehicle on a warm

day can quickly become high

enough to cause a significant risk

of injury or death to people and

pets.

. The seatback should not be re-

clined any more than needed for

comfort. Seat belts are most ef-

fective when the passenger sits

well back and straight up in the

seat. If the seatback is reclined,

the risk of sliding under the lap

belt and being injured is in-

creased.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

SEATS

1-4 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

FRONT SEATS

Front power seat adjustment

Operating tips:

. The power seat motor has an auto-

reset overload protection circuit. If the

motor stops during operation, wait 30

seconds, then reactivate the switch.

. Do not operate the power seat switch

for a long period of time when the

engine is off. This will discharge the

battery.

See “Automatic drive positioner” (P.3-40)

for the seat position memory function.

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions,

be sure not to contact any moving

parts to avoid possible injuries and/

or damages.

SSS1051

Forward and backward:

Moving the switch

forward or back-

ward will slide the seat forward or back-

ward to the desired position.

Reclining:

Move the recline switch

backward until

the desired angle is obtained. To bring the

seatback forward again, move the switch

forward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment

of the seatback for occupants of different

sizes for added comfort and to help

obtain proper seat belt fit. (See “Precau-

tions on seat belt usage” (P.1-20).) Also,

the seatback can be reclined to allow

occupants to rest when the vehicle is

stopped and the transmission is in the P

(Park) position.

SSS1052

Seat lifter:

1. Pull up or push down the adjusting

switch to adjust the seat height until

the desired position is achieved.

2. Tilt up or down the adjusting switch to

adjust the front angle of the seat until

the desired position is achieved (for

driver’s seat).

SSS1053

Lumbar support:

The lumbar support feature provides low-

er back support to the occupants.

Push the front or back end of the switch

to adjust the seatback lumbar area.

2ND ROW SEATS

WARNING

. Never allow anyone to ride in the

cargo area or on the rear seat

when it is in the fold-down posi-

tion. Use of these areas by pas-

sengers without proper restraints

could result in serious injury in an

accident or sudden stop.

. When returning the seatbacks to

the upright position, be certain

they are completely secured in

the latched position. If they are

not completely secured, passen-

gers may be injured in an acci-

dent or sudden stop.

. Properly secure all cargo to help

prevent it from sliding or shifting.

Do not place cargo higher than

the seatbacks. In a sudden stop

or collision, unsecured cargo

could cause personal injury.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

1-6 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS1081

Captain’s seat

SSS1065

Bench seat

Reclining

Pull the reclining lever and position the

seatback at the desired angle. Release the

reclining lever after positioning the seat

at the desired angle.

To return the seatback, pull the lever.

The reclining feature allows adjustment

of the seatback for occupants of different

sizes to help obtain proper seat belt fit.

(See “Precautions on seat belt usage” (P.1-

20).) The seatback may also be reclined to

allow occupants to rest when the vehicle

is parked.

WARNING

. Do not ride in a moving vehicle

when the seatback is reclined.

This can be dangerous. The

shoulder belt will not be against

your body. In an accident, you

could be thrown into it and re-

ceive neck or other serious inju-

ries. You could also slide under

the lap belt and receive serious

internal injuries.

. For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the

seat should be upright. Always sit

well back and upright in the seat

with both feet on the floor and

adjust the seat belt properly. See

“Precautions on seat belt usage”

(P.1-20).

. After adjustment, check to be

sure the seat is securely locked.

Entry to 3rd row seat

CAUTION

. Do not drive with the 2nd row

seat tipped up.

. Be careful not to allow the 2nd

row seat to pinch, hit any part of

your body or other people when

operating the 2nd row seat. Make

sure the seat path is clear of all

objects before moving the seat.

The 2nd row seat can be tipped forward

for easy entry to or exit from the 3rd row

seat.

SSS1066

To enter the 3rd row seat, pull the lever

or located on the 2nd row seat and fold

the seatback forward

at an angle over

the seat base. Then lift up the seat base

and tip the 2nd row seat forward

. This

will release the back of the seat so it may

be tipped forward.

To exit the 3rd row seat, pull the lever

and fold the seatback forward onto the

seat base. Then lift up on the seat base

and tip it forward.

SSS1068

3RD ROW SEATS

Manual seat adjustment (if so

equipped)

Reclining:

Pull the strap

and position the seatback

at the desired angle. Release the strap

after positioning the seat at the desired

angle.

The reclining feature allows adjustment

of the seatback for occupants of different

sizes to help obtain proper seat belt fit.

(See “Precautions on child restraints” (P.1-

33).) The seatback may also be reclined to

allow occupants to rest when the vehicle

is parked.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

1-8 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

. Do not ride in a moving vehicle

when the seatback is reclined.

This can be dangerous. The

shoulder belt will not be against

your body. In an accident, you

could be thrown into it and re-

ceive neck or other serious inju-

ries. You could also slide under

the lap belt and receive serious

internal injuries.

. For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the

seat should be upright. Always sit

well back and upright in the seat

with both feet on the floor and

adjust the seat belt properly. See

“Precautions on seat belt usage”

(P.1-20).

. After adjustment, check to be

sure the seat is securely locked.

SSS1069

Folding:

Pull the strap

and fold the seatback.

Return the seatback until it securely locks

in position.

WARNING

. Never allow anyone to ride in the

cargo area or on the third row

seat when it is in the folddown

position. Use of these areas by

passengers without proper re-

straints could result in serious

injury in an accident or sudden

stop.

. Properly secure all cargo with

ropes or straps to help prevent it

from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seat-

backs. In a sudden stop or colli-

sion, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

. When returning the seatbacks to

the upright position, be certain

they are completely secured in

the latched position. If they are

not completely secured, passen-

gers may be injured in an acci-

dent or sudden stop.

SSS1116

Power seat adjustment (if so

equipped)

The 3rd row power folding seat controls

are located behind the 2nd row seat (both

the driver’s and front passenger’s side) on

the 3rd row cup holder console

. There

are also controls located on the rear

quarter trim panel behind the 3rd row

seats (passenger’s side)

Before operating the 3rd row seats:

. Make sure the 2nd row seatback is not

reclined.

. Lower the 3rd row head restraint to

the full down position.

. Disconnect and secure the center seat

belt and tongues into the retractor

base. See “3rd row center seat belt”

(P.1-26).

— Always reconnect the center seat

belt when the seat is returned to

the upright position

. Make sure that there are no objects

on the seatback cushion.

SSS1095

Reclining:

Push and hold the rear side of the switch

beside the 3rd row cup holders until the

desired seatback angle (up to 20 degrees)

is obtained. To move the seatback for-

ward again, push and hold the front side

of the switch

until the desired angle is

obtained.

WARNING

. After adjustment, check to be

sure the seat is securely locked.

. Do not ride in a moving vehicle

when the seatback is reclined.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

1-10 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

This can be dangerous. The

shoulder belt will not be against

your body. In an accident, you

could be thrown into it and re-

ceive neck or other serious inju-

ries. You could also slide under

the lap belt and receive serious

internal injuries.

. For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the

seat should be upright. Always sit

well back and upright in the seat

with both feet on the floor and

adjust the seat belt properly. See

“Precautions on seat belt usage”

(P.1-20).

SSS1118

Folding:

Push and hold the front side of the switch

located on the passenger side of the

cargo room. The corresponding seatback

(R: right side, L: left side) will be folded

down automatically.

Push and hold the rear side of the switch

. The seatback will be returned auto-

matically. The seatback will rise up while

holding the switch.

NOTE:

Operating the power folding seats can

discharge the vehicle battery if the

engine is not running.

CAUTION

When operating the rear power seat-

back return, make sure that the

vehicle is stopped and the transmis-

sion is in the P (Park) position.

WARNING

. Never allow anyone to ride in the

cargo area or on the rear seat

when it is in the fold-down posi-

tion. Use of these areas by pas-

sengers without proper restraints

could result in serious injury in an

accident or sudden stop.

. When returning the seatbacks to

the upright position, be certain

they are completely secured in

the latched position. If they are

not completely secured, passen-

gers may be injured in an acci-

dent or sudden stop.

. Properly secure all cargo to help

prevent it from sliding or shifting.

Do not place cargo higher than

the seatbacks. In a sudden stop

or collision, unsecured cargo

could cause personal injury.

JVR0557X

ARMREST

Front seats

The console box lid can be used as an

armrest.

SSS1070

2nd row seat (if so equipped)

Pull and draw the armrest forward until it

is horizontal.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

1-12 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

FLEXIBLE SEATING

WARNING

. Never allow anyone to ride in the

cargo area or on the rear seats

when they are in the fold-down

position. In a collision, people

riding in these areas without

proper restraints are more likely

to be seriously injured or killed.

. Do not allow people to ride in any

area of your vehicle that is not

equipped with seats and seat

belts. Be sure everyone in your

vehicle is in a seat and using a

seat belt properly.

. Do not fold down the rear seats

when occupants are in the rear

seat area or any cargo is on the

rear seats.

. Head restraints should be ad-

justed properly as they may pro-

vide significant protection

against injury in an accident. Al-

ways replace and adjust them

properly if they have been re-

moved for any reason.

. If the head restraints are re-

moved for any reason, they

should be securely stored to pre-

vent them from causing injury to

passengers or damage to the

vehicle in case of sudden braking

or an accident.

. When returning the seatbacks to

the upright position, be certain

they are completely secured in

the latched position. If they are

not completely secured, passen-

gers may be injured in an acci-

dent or sudden stop.

. Properly secure all cargo to help

prevent it from sliding or shifting.

Do not place cargo higher than

the seatbacks. In a sudden stop

or collision, unsecured cargo

could cause personal injury.

. When folding the bench seat

seatback down for maximum sto-

rage, make sure the seat base is

in the latched position by rocking

the seat base. If the seat base is

not properly secured, cargo

stored on top of a folded seat-

back may become a projectile

causing personal injury or vehicle

damage.

CAUTION

. When folding the 2nd row seat for

maximum cargo hauling, be sure

that cargo does not contact the

center console of the captain’s

seat (if so equipped) to avoid

possible damage to the console.

. When folding or returning the

seat(s) to the upright position, to

avoid injury to yourself and

others:

— Make sure that the seat path

is clear before moving the

seat.

— Be careful not to allow hands

or feet to get caught or

pinched in the seat.

Stowing 2nd and 3rd row seats

To stow 2nd and 3rd row seats for

maximum cargo capacity:

SSS1119

1. Push and hold the corresponding

switch located on the instrument

panel below the audio system. The

seatback will fold down and tip for-

ward. See “Entry to 3rd row seat” (P.1-

6).

SSS1120

2. Push the folded seat down until it

locks in position.

SSS1121

3. Power operation (if so equipped): Fold

the 3rd row seat flat using the

switches located in the cargo area.

See “Power seat adjustment” (P.1-9).

Manual operation (if so equipped):

Fold the 3rd row seat flat using the

strap located on the 3rd row seat-

backs. See “Manual seat adjustment”

(P.1-7).

4. Return 3rd row seats to seating posi-

tions by raising the 3rd row seatbacks

to an upright position using the

switches or straps. Make sure the

seatback is locked in position. See

“Power seat adjustment” (P.1-9) or

“Manual seat adjustment” (P.1-7).

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

1-14 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

5. Return the 2nd row seat to a seating

position by raising the 2nd row seat-

backs to an upright position. Make

sure the seatback is locked in position.

CAUTION

When folding the 2nd row seat for

maximum cargo hauling, be sure

that cargo does not contact the

center console of the captain’s seat

(if so equipped) to avoid possible

damage to the console.

WARNING

Head restraint/headrest supplement

the other vehicle safety systems.

They may provide additional protec-

tion against injury in certain rear end

collisions. Adjustable head re-

straints/headrests must be adjusted

properly, as specified in this section.

Check the adjustment after someone

else uses the seat. Do not attach

anything to the head restraint/head-

rest stalks or remove the head re-

straint/headrest. Do not use the seat

if the head restraint/headrest has

been removed. If the head restraint/

headrest was removed, reinstall and

properly adjust the head restraint/

headrest before an occupant uses

the seating position. Failure to follow

these instructions can reduce the

effectiveness of the head restraint/

headrest. This may increase the risk

of serious injury or death in a colli-

sion.

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

JVR0403X

The illustration shows the seating posi-

tions equipped with head restraint/head-

rest.

Indicates the seating position is

equipped with a head restraint.

Indicates the seating position is

equipped with a headrest.

. Your vehicle is equipped with a head

restraint/headrest that may be inte-

grated, adjustable or non-adjustable.

. Adjustable head restraints/headrests

have multiple notches along the stalk

to lock them in a desired adjustment

position.

. The non-adjustable head restraints/

headrests have a single locking notch

to secure them to the seat frame.

. Proper Adjustment:

— For the adjustable type, align the

head restraint/headrest so the

center of your ear is approximately

level with the center of the head

restraint/headrest.

— If your ear position is still higher

than the recommended alignment,

place the head restraint/headrest

at the highest position.

. If the head restraint/headrest has

been removed, ensure that it is re-

installed and locked in place before

riding in that designated seating posi-

tion.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

1-16 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0992

ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/

HEADREST COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Multiple notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

JVR0203X

NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD RE-

STRAINT/HEADREST COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Single notch

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

SSS1037

REMOVE

CAUTION

The front head restraints with a rear

display are not designed to be pulled

out. The rear display may be da-

maged if the head restraint is for-

cibly pulled out.

Use the following procedure to remove

the head restraint/headrest.

1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to

the highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint/headrest

from the seat.

4. Store the head restraint/headrest

properly in a secure place so it is not

loose in the vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head

restraint/headrest before an occu-

pant uses the seating position.

SSS0996

INSTALL

1. Align the head restraint/headrest

stalks with the holes in the seat. Make

sure that the head restraint/headrest

is facing the correct direction. The

stalk with the adjustment notch

must be installed in the hole with the

lock knob

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push

the head restraint/headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint/

headrest before an occupant uses

the seating position.

SSS0997

ADJUST

For adjustable head restraint/headrest

Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the

center is level with the center of your ears.

If your ear position is still higher than the

recommended alignment, place the head

restraint/headrest at the highest posi-

tion.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

1-18 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

JVR0259X

For non-adjustable head restraint/

headrest

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is

positioned so the lock knob is engaged in

the notch before riding in that designated

seating position.

SSS1035

Raise

To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull

it up.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is

positioned so the lock knob is engaged in

the notch before riding in that designated

seating position.

SSS1036

Lower

To lower, push and hold the lock knob

and push the head restraint/headrest

down.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is

positioned so the lock knob is engaged in

the notch before riding in that designated

seating position.

SSS0508

FRONT-SEAT ACTIVE HEAD RE-

STRAINT

The Active Head Restraint moves forward

utilizing the force that the seatback

receives from the occupant in a rear-end

collision. The movement of the head

restraint helps support the occupant’s

head by reducing its backward move-

ment and helping absorb some of the

forces that may lead to whiplash-type

injuries.

Active Head Restraints are effective for

collisions at low to medium speeds in

which it is said that whiplash injury occurs

most.

Active Head Restraints operate only in

certain rear-end collisions. After the colli-

sion, the head restraints return to their

original position.

Adjust the Active Head Restraints prop-

erly as described earlier in this section.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

1-20 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly

adjusted, and you are sitting upright and

well back in your seat with both feet on

the floor, your chances of being injured or

killed in an accident and/or the severity of

injury may be greatly reduced. NISSAN

strongly encourages you and all of your

passengers to buckle up every time you

drive, even if your seating position in-

cludes a supplemental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian pro-

vinces or territories specify that seat

belts be worn at all times when a

vehicle is being driven.

SSS0136A

SSS0134A

SEAT BELTS

WARNING

. Every person who drives or rides

in this vehicle should use a seat

belt at all times. Children should

be properly restrained in the rear

seat and, if appropriate, in a child

restraint.

. The seat belt should be properly

adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to

do so may reduce the effective-

ness of the entire restraint sys-

tem and increase the chance or

severity of injury in an accident.

Serious injury or death can occur

if the seat belt is not worn prop-

erly.

. Always route the shoulder belt

over your shoulder and across

your chest. Never put the belt

behind your back, under your

arm or across your neck. The belt

should be away from your face

and neck, but not falling off your

shoulder.

. Position the lap belt as low and

snug as possible AROUND THE

HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt

worn too high could increase the

risk of internal injuries in an

accident.

. Be sure the seat belt tongue is

securely fastened to the proper

buckle.

. Do not wear the seat belt inside

out or twisted. Doing so may

reduce its effectiveness.

. Do not allow more than one

person to use the same seat belt.

. Never carry more people in the

vehicle than there are seat belts.

. If the seat belt warning light

glows continuously while the

ignition is turned ON with all

doors closed and all seat belts

fastened, it may indicate a mal-

function in the system. Have the

system checked. It is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

. No changes should be made to

the seat belt system. For exam-

ple, do not modify the seat belt,

add material or install devices

that may change the seat belt

routing or tension. Doing so may

affect the operation of the seat

belt system. Modifying or tam-

pering with the seat belt system

may result in serious personal

injury.

. Once a seat belt pretensioner has

activated, it cannot be reused and

must be replaced together with

the retractor. It is recommended

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

. All seat belt assemblies, including

retractors and attaching hard-

ware, should be inspected after

any collision. It is recommended

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service. NISSAN recommends that

all seat belt assemblies in use

during a collision be replaced

unless the collision was minor

and the belts show no damage

and continue to operate properly.

Seat belt assemblies not in use

during a collision should also be

inspected and replaced if either

damage or improper operation is

noted.

. All child restraints and attaching

hardware should be inspected

after any collision. Always follow

the restraint manufacturer’s in-

spection instructions and repla-

cement recommendations. The

child restraints should be re-

placed if they are damaged.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

1-22 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0016

SSS0014

PREGNANT WOMEN

NISSAN recommends that pregnant wo-

men use seat belts. The seat belt should

be worn snug, and always position the lap

belt as low as possible around the hips,

not the waist, and place the shoulder belt

over your shoulder and across your chest.

Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your

abdominal area. Contact your doctor for

specific recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

NISSAN recommends that injured persons

use seat belts, depending on the injury.

Check with your doctor for specific re-

commendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WARNING

. Every person who drives or rides

in this vehicle should use a seat

belt at all times.

. Do not ride in a moving vehicle

when the seatback is reclined.

This can be dangerous. The

shoulder belt will not be against

your body. In an accident, you

could be thrown into it and re-

ceive neck or other serious inju-

ries. You could also slide under

the lap belt and receive serious

internal injuries.

. For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the

seat should be upright. Always sit

well back and upright in the seat

with both feet on the floor and

adjust the seat belt properly.

JVR0183X

WARNING

Do not allow children to play with the

seat belts. Most seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking

Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If

the seat belt becomes wrapped

around a child’s neck with the ALR

mode activated, the child can be

seriously injured or killed if the seat

belt retracts and becomes tight. This

can occur even if the vehicle is

parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to

release the child. For the center of

the 3rd row bench seat, the connec-

tor tongue

may also be released.

Release the connector tongue by

inserting a suitable tool (such as a

key) into the connector buckle

.If

the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or

is already unbuckled, release the

child by cutting the seat belt with a

suitable tool (such as a knife or

scissors) to release the seat belt.

SSS0292

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. (See “Seats” (P.1-3).)

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the

retractor and insert the tongue into

the buckle until you hear and feel the

latch engage.

The retractor is designed to lock

during a sudden stop or on im-

pact. A slow pulling motion per-

mits the belt to move, and allows

you some freedom of movement

in the seat.

If the seat belt cannot be pulled

from its fully retracted position,

firmly pull the belt and release it.

Then smoothly pull the belt out of

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

1-24 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

the retractor.

SSS0290

3. Position the lap belt portion low and

snug on the hips as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward

the retractor to take up extra slack. Be

sure the shoulder belt is routed over

your shoulder and across your chest.

The three-point type seat belts have two

modes of operation:

. Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

. Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

mode allows the seat belt to extend and

retract to allow the driver and passengers

some freedom of movement in the seat.

The ELR locks the seat belt when the

vehicle slows down rapidly or during

impacts.

The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode (child restraint mode) locks the

seat belt for child restraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated the seat

belt cannot be extended again until the

seat belt tongue is detached from the

buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt

returns to the ELR mode after the seat

belt fully retracts. For additional informa-

tion, see “Child restraints” (P.1-32).

The ALR mode should be used only for

child restraint installation. During nor-

mal seat belt use by an occupant, the

ALR mode should not be activated. If it

is activated, it may cause uncomforta-

ble seat belt tension.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be

certain that seatbacks are comple-

tely secured in the latched position.

If they are not completely secured,

passengers may be injured in an

accident or sudden stop.

SSS0326

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the seat belt, push the

button on the buckle. The seat belt

automatically retracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock

seat belt movement by two separate

methods:

. When the belt is pulled quickly from

the retractor.

. When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the seat

belts, check the operation as follows:

. Grasp the shoulder belt and pull for-

ward quickly. The retractor should

lock and restrict further belt move-

ment.

If the retractor does not lock during this

check, get the system checked. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service, or to learn more about

seat belt operation.

SSS1109

Center of 2nd row seat (if so

equipped)

Selecting correct set of seat belts:

The center seat belt buckle is identified by

the CENTER mark

. The center seat belt

tongue can be fastened only into the

center seat belt buckle.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

1-26 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0391

3rd row center seat belt

The 3rd row center seat belt has a

connector tongue

and a seat belt

tongue

. Both the connector tongue

and the seat belt tongue must be se-

curely latched for proper seat belt opera-

tion.

SSS0241

WARNING

. Always fasten the connector ton-

gue and the seat belt in the order

shown.

. Always make sure both the con-

nector tongue and the seat belt

tongue are secured when using

the seat belt or installing a child

restraint. Do not use the seat belt

or child restraint with only the

seat belt tongue attached. This

could result in serious personal

injury in case of an accident or a

sudden stop.

SSS1077

Stowing 3rd row center seat belt:

When folding down the 3rd row seat, the

3rd center seat belt can be retracted into

a stowed position.

1. Hold the connector tongue

so that

the seat belt does not retract sud-

denly when the tongue is released

from the connector buckle. Release

the connector tongue by inserting a

suitable tool such as key

into the

connector buckle.

2. Store the seat belt tongue into the

tongue holder

first .

3. Store the connector tongue into the

retractor base

WARNING

Do not unfasten the 3rd center seat

belt connector except when folding

down the 3rd seat.

SSS1078

Attaching 3rd row center seat belt:

Always be sure the 3rd center seat belt

connector tongue and connector buckle

are attached. Disconnect only when fold-

ing down the 3rd row seat.

To connect the buckle:

1. Pull out the connector tongue from

the retractor base

2. Pull out the seat belt tongue from the

tongue holder

3. Pull the seat belt and fasten the

connector buckle until it clicks

The center seat belt connector tongue

and buckle are identified by the

and

mark.

The center seat belt connector tongue

can be attached only into the 3rd center

seat belt connector buckle.

To fasten the seat belt, see “Fastening the

seat belts” (P.1-23).

WARNING

. When attaching the 3rd center

seat belt connector, be certain

that the seatbacks are comple-

tely secured in the latched posi-

tion and the 3rd center seat belt

connector is completely secured.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

1-28 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

. If the 3rd center seat belt con-

nector and the seatbacks are not

secured in the correct position,

serious personal injury may result

in an accident or sudden stop.

SSS1097

Storing 3rd row seat belt buckles

Before folding down the seat, put the

buckles in the storage of the seat cushion

to avoid dropping it under the seat

cushion.

SSS0896

Shoulder belt height adjustment

(for front seats and 2nd row seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should

be adjusted to the position best for you.

(See “Precautions on seat belt usage” (P.1-

20).)

To adjust, push the button

, and then

move the shoulder belt anchor to the

desired position, so that the belt passes

over the center of the shoulder. The belt

should be away from your face and neck,

but not falling off of your shoulder.

Release the adjustment button to lock

the shoulder belt anchor into position.

WARNING

. After adjustment, release the ad-

justment button and try to move

the shoulder belt anchor up and

down to make sure it is securely

fixed in position.

. The shoulder belt anchor height

should be adjusted to the posi-

tion best for you. Failure to do so

may reduce the effectiveness of

the entire restraint system and

increase the chance or severity of

injury in an accident.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position,

it is not possible to properly fit the lap-

shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender

that is compatible with the installed seat

belts is available that can be purchased.

The extender adds approximately 8 in

(200 mm) of length and may be used for

either the driver or front passenger seat-

ing position. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for assistance with pur-

chasing an extender if an extender is

required.

WARNING

. It is recommended that only

NISSAN seat belt extenders, made

by the same company which

made the original equipment seat

belts, be used with the NISSAN

seat belts.

. Adults and children who can use

the standard seat belt should not

use an extender. Such unneces-

sary use could result in serious

personal injury in the event of an

accident.

. Never use seat belt extenders to

install child restraints. If the child

restraint is not secured properly,

the child could be seriously in-

jured or killed in a collision or a

sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

. To clean the seat belt webbing, apply

a mild soap solution or any solution

recommended for cleaning upholstery

or carpets. Then, wipe with a cloth and

allow the seat belts to dry in the

shade. Do not allow the seat belts to

retract until they are completely dry.

. If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt

guide of the seat belt anchors, the

seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the

shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry

cloth.

. Periodically check to see that the

seat belt and the metal components

such as buckles, tongues, retractors,

flexible wires and anchors work prop-

erly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts

or other damage on the webbing is

found, the entire seat belt assembly

should be replaced.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

1-30 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

JVR0183X

WARNING

Do not allow children to play with the

seat belts. Most seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking

Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If

the seat belt becomes wrapped

around a child’s neck with the ALR

mode activated, the child can be

seriously injured or killed if the seat

belt retracts and becomes tight. This

can occur even if the vehicle is

parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to

release the child. For the center of

the 3rd row bench seat, the connec-

tor tongue

may also be released.

Release the connector tongue by

inserting a suitable tool (such as a

key) into the connector buckle

.If

the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or

is already unbuckled, release the

child by cutting the seat belt with a

suitable tool (such as a knife or

scissors) to release the seat belt.

Children need adults to help protect

them.

They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in

this manual, child safety information is

available from many other sources, in-

cluding doctors, teachers, government

traffic safety offices, and community or-

ganizations. Every child is different, so be

sure to learn the best way to transport

your child.

There are three basic types of child

restraint systems:

. Rear-facing child restraint

. Forward-facing child restraint

. Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the

child’s size. Generally, infants up to about

1 year and less than 20 lbs (9 kg) should

be placed in rear-facing child restraints.

Forward-facing child restraints are avail-

able for children who outgrow rear-facing

child restraints and are at least 1 year old.

Booster seats are used to help position a

vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who

can no longer use a forward-facing child

restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special

protection. The vehicle’s seat belts

may not fit them properly. The

shoulder belt may come too close

to the face or neck. The lap belt may

not fit over their small hip bones. In

an accident, an improperly fitting

seat belt could cause serious or fatal

injury. Always use appropriate child

restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require the use of approved

child restraints for infants and small

children. See “Child restraints” (P.1-32).

A child restraint may be secured in the

vehicle by using either the LATCH (Lower

Anchor and Tethers for CHildren) system

or with the vehicle seat belt. See “Child

restraints” (P.1-32) for more information.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens

and children be restrained in the rear

CHILD SAFETY

seat. Studies show that children are

safer when properly restrained in the

rear seat than in the front seat.

This is especially important because

your vehicle has a supplemental re-

straint system (Air bag system) for the

front passenger. See “Supplemental re-

straint system” (P.1-54).

INFANTS

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be

placed in a rear-facing child restraint.

NISSAN recommends that infants be

placed in child restraints that comply with

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dards. You should choose a child restraint

that fits your vehicle and always follow

the manufacturer’s instructions for instal-

lation and use.

SMALL CHILDREN

Children that are over 1 year old and

weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain

in a rear-facing child restraint as long as

possible up to the height or weight limit

of the child restraint. Children who out-

grow the height or weight limit of the

rear-facing child restraint and are at least

1 year old should be secured in a forward-

facing child restraint with a harness. Refer

to the manufacturer’s instructions for

minimum and maximum weight and

height recommendations. NISSAN recom-

mends that small children be placed in

child restraints that comply with Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Cana-

dian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You

should choose a child restraint that fits

your vehicle and always follow the man-

ufacturer’s instructions for installation

and use.

LARGER CHILDREN

Children should remain in a forward-

facing child restraint with a harness until

they reach the maximum height or

weight limit allowed by the child restraint

manufacturer.

Once a child outgrows the height or

weight limit of the harness-equipped

forward-facing child restraint, NISSAN

recommends that the child be placed in

a commercially available booster seat to

obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt

to fit properly, the booster seat should

raise the child so that the shoulder belt is

properly positioned across the chest and

the top, middle portion of the shoulder.

The shoulder belt should not cross the

neck or face and should not fall off the

shoulder. The lap belt should lie snugly

across the lower hips or upper thighs, not

the abdomen.

A booster seat can only be used in

seating positions that have a three-point

type seat belt. The booster seat should fit

the vehicle seat and have a label certify-

ing that it complies with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

A booster seat should be used until the

child can pass the seat belt fit test below:

. Are the child’s back and hips against

the vehicle seatback?

. Is the child able to sit without slouch-

ing?

. Do the child’s knees bend easily over

the front edge of the seat with feet flat

on the floor?

. Can the child safely wear the seat belt

(lap belt low and snug across the hips

and shoulder belt across mid-chest

and shoulder)?

. Is the child able to use the properly

adjusted head restraint/headrest?

. Will the child be able to stay in position

for the entire ride?

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

1-32 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

JVR0473X

If you answered no to any of these

questions, the child should remain in a

booster seat using a three-point type

seat belt.

NOTE:

Laws in some communities may follow

different guidelines. Check local and

state regulations to confirm your child

is using the correct restraint system

before traveling.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on

any seat and do not allow a child in

the cargo area. The child could be

seriously injured or killed in a sudden

stop or collision.

SSS0099

SSS0100

CHILD RESTRAINTS

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RE-

STRAINTS

WARNING

. Failure to follow the warnings

and instructions for proper use

and installation of child restraints

could result in serious injury or

death of a child or other passen-

gers in a sudden stop or collision:

— The child restraint must be

used and installed properly.

Always follow all of the child

restraint manufacturer’s in-

structions for installation and

use.

— Infants and children should

never be held on anyone’s

lap. Even the strongest adult

cannot resist the forces of a

collision.

— Do not put a seat belt around

both a child and another pas-

senger.

— NISSAN recommends that all

child restraints be installed in

the rear seat. Studies show

that children are safer when

properly restrained in the rear

seat than in the front seat. If

you must install a forward-

facing child restraint in the

front seat, see “Forward-fa-

cing child restraint installation

using the seat belts” (P.1-46).

— Even with the NISSAN Ad-

vanced Air Bag System, never

install a rear-facing child re-

straint in the front seat. An

inflating air bag could ser-

iously injure or kill a child. A

rear-facing child restraint

must only be used in the rear

seat.

— Be sure to purchase a child

restraint that will fit the child

and vehicle. Some child re-

straints may not fit properly

in your vehicle.

— Child restraint anchor points

are designed to withstand

loads from child restraints

that are properly fitted.

— Never use the anchor points

for adult seat belts or har-

nesses.

— A child restraint with a top

tether strap should not be

used in the front passenger

seat.

— Keep seatbacks as upright as

possible after fitting the child

restraint.

— Infants and children should

always be placed in an appro-

priate child restraint while in

the vehicle.

. When the child restraint is not in

use, keep it secured with the

LATCH system or a seat belt. In a

sudden stop or collision, loose

objects can injure occupants or

damage the vehicle.

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle

can become very hot. Check the

seating surface and buckles before

placing a child in the child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal

child restraint anchor system, referred to

as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren) system. Some child

restraints include rigid or webbing-

mounted attachments that can be con-

nected to these anchors.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

1-34 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

For details, see “Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) system ”

(P.1-35).

If you do not have a LATCH compatible

child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can

be used.

Several manufacturers offer child re-

straints for infants and small children of

various sizes. When selecting any child

restraint, keep the following points in

mind:

. Choose only a restraint with a label

certifying that it complies with Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dard 213.

. Check the child restraint in your

vehicle to be sure it is compatible with

the vehicle’s seat and seat belt sys-

tem.

. If the child restraint is compatible with

your vehicle, place your child in the

child restraint and check the various

adjustments to be sure the child

restraint is compatible with your child.

Choose a child restraint that is de-

signed for your child’s height and

weight. Always follow all recom-

mended procedures.

. If the combined weight of the child

and child restraint is less than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg), you may use either the

LATCH lower anchors or the seat belt

to install the child restraint (not both

at the same time).

. If the combined weight of the child

and child restraint is greater than 65

lbs (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt

(not the lower anchors) to install the

child restraint.

. Be sure to follow the child restraint

manufacturer’s instructions for instal-

lation.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces

or territories require that infants and

small children be restrained in an ap-

proved child restraint at all times while

the vehicle is being operated. Canadian

law requires the top tether strap on

forward-facing child restraints be se-

cured to the designated anchor point

on the vehicle.

SSS1113

LATCH system lower anchor locations - captain’s

seats

SSS1114

LATCH system lower anchor locations - bench seat

Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren (LATCH) SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with special

anchor points that are used with the

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system compatible child re-

straints. This system may also be referred

to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible

system. With this system, you do not have

to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the

child restraint unless the combined

weight of the child and child restraint

exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined

weight of the child and child restraint is

greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the

vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors)

to install the child restraint. Be sure to

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

The LATCH lower anchor points are

provided to install child restraints in the

following positions only:

. 2nd row captain’s seats (if so

equipped)

. 2nd row bench seat outboard posi-

tions only (if so equipped)

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use and in-

stallation of child restraints could

result in serious injury or death of a

child or other passengers in a sud-

den stop or collision:

. Attach LATCH system compatible

child restraints only at the loca-

tions shown in the illustration.

. Do not secure a child restraint in

the center rear seating position

using the LATCH lower anchors.

The child restraint will not be

secured properly.

. Inspect the lower anchors by in-

serting your fingers into the low-

er anchor area. Feel to make sure

there are no obstructions over

the anchors such as seat belt

webbing or seat cushion material.

The child restraint will not be

secured properly if the lower

anchors are obstructed.

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child

restraints. Under no circumstances

are they to be used to attach adult

seat belts, or other items or equip-

ment to the vehicle. Doing so could

damage the child restraint an-

chorages. The child restraint will not

be properly installed using the da-

maged anchorage, and a child could

be seriously injured or killed in a

collision.

LATCH lower anchor location

The LATCH lower anchor points are

provided to install child restraints in the

rear outboard seating positions only. Do

not attempt to install a child restraint in

the center seating position using the

LATCH lower anchors.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

1-36 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

JVR0631X

LATCH lower anchor cover removal

The LATCH lower anchor points are

located under the covers labelled ISOFIX

at the bottom of the rear outboard seat

cushions. To access a LATCH lower an-

chor point, insert your finger into the

cover and pull the cover off.

CAUTION

Store the loose LATCH covers (for

example, in the console box) where

they will not get damaged to avoid

losing them. (See “Console box” (P.2-

56).)

SSS0643

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

Installing child restraint LATCH

lower anchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include

two rigid or webbing-mounted attach-

ments that can be connected to two

anchors located at certain seating posi-

tions in your vehicle. With this system, you

do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to

secure the child restraint. Check your

child restraint for a label stating that it is

compatible with LATCH. This information

may also be in the instructions provided

by the child restraint manufacturer.

SSS0644

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment

When installing a child restraint, carefully

read and follow the instructions in this

manual and those supplied with the child

restraint.

JVR0619X

2nd row captain’s seat

JVR0620X

2nd row bench seat

JVR0621X

3rd row bench seat

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RE-

STRAINT

If the manufacturer of your child restraint

requires the use of a top tether strap, it

must be secured to an anchor point.

WARNING

. In the 3rd row bench seat, a child

restraint with a top tether strap

can only be used in the outboard

seating position (right side). Do

not place it in the outboard seat-

ing position (left side) and center

position and attempt to angle the

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

1-38 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

tether strap to the outboard seat-

ing position (right side).

. Child restraint anchorages are

designed to withstand only those

loads imposed by correctly fitted

child restraints. Under no circum-

stances are they to be used to

attach adult seat belts, or other

items or equipment to the vehi-

cle. Doing so could damage the

child restraint anchorages. The

child restraint will not be properly

installed using the damaged an-

chorage, and a child could be

seriously injured or killed in a

collision.

. Properly secure cargo and do not

allow it to contact the top tether

strap when it is attached to the

top tether anchor. Cargo that is

not properly secured or cargo

that contacts the top tether strap

may damage the top tether strap

during a collision. Your child

could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision if the child

restraint top tether strap is da-

maged.

Top tether anchor point locations

Anchor points are located in the following

locations:

. 2nd row bench seat (if so equipped)

on the seatback of the outboard

seating positions as shown.

. 2nd row captain’s seats (if so

equipped) on the seatback of the

outboard seating positions as shown.

. 3rd row bench seat on the seatback of

the outboard seating position (right

side) as shown.

If you have any questions when instal-

ling a top tether strap child restraint on

the rear seat, it is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING LATCH

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the

“Child safety” and “Child restraints” sec-

tions before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the

combined weight of the child and the

child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If

the combined weight of the child and the

child restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5

kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child re-

straint. Be sure to follow the child re-

straint manufacturer’s instructions for

installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing

child restraint in the 2nd row seats using

the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint man-

ufacturer’s instructions.

JVR0635X

Rear-facing web-mounted — step 2

2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-

tachments to the LATCH lower an-

chors. Check to make sure the LATCH

attachment is properly attached to

the lower anchors.

JVR0636X

Rear-facing rigid-mounted — step 2

SSS0639

Rear-facing — step 3

3. For child restraints that are equipped

with webbing-mounted attachments,

remove any additional slack from the

anchor attachments. Press downward

and rearward firmly in the center of

the child restraint with your hand to

compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while tightening the

webbing of the anchor attachments.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

1-40 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0650

Rear-facing — step 4

4. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push

it from side to side while holding the

child restraint near the LATCH attach-

ment path. The child restraint should

not move more than 1 inch (25 mm),

from side to side. Try to tug it forward

and check to see if the LATCH attach-

ment holds the restraint in place. If the

restraint is not secure, tighten the

LATCH attachment as necessary, or

put the restraint in another seat and

test it again. You may need to try a

different child restraint or try installing

by using the vehicle seat belt (if

applicable). Not all child restraints fit

in all types of vehicles.

5. Check to make sure the child restraint

is properly secured prior to each use. If

the child restraint is loose, repeat

steps 1 through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT

BELTS

WARNING

. The three-point seat belt with

Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) must be used when instal-

ling a child restraint. Failure to

use the ALR mode will result in

the child restraint not being prop-

erly secured. The restraint could

tip over or be loose and cause

injury to a child in a sudden stop

or collision. Also, it can change

the operation of the front pas-

senger air bag. See “Front pas-

senger air bag and status light”

(P.1-62).

. When installing a child restraint

system in the 3rd center seat

position, both the center seat belt

connector tongue and buckle

tongue must be secured. See

“3rd row center seat belt” (P.1-26).

SSS0100

Rear-facing — step 1

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the

“Child safety” (P.1-30) and “Child restraints”

(P.1-32) before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the

combined weight of the child and the

child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If

the combined weight of the child and the

child restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5

kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child re-

straint. Be sure to follow the child re-

straint manufacturer’s instructions for

installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing

child restraint using the vehicle seat belts

in the rear seats:

1. Child restraints for infants must be

used in the rear-facing direction and

therefore must not be used in the

front seat. Position the child restraint

on the seat. Always follow the re-

straint manufacturer’s instructions.

SSS0654

Rear-facing — step 2

2. Route the seat belt tongue through

the child restraint and insert it into the

buckle until you hear and feel the

latch engage. Be sure to follow the

child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for belt routing.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

1-42 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0655

Rear-facing — step 3

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is

fully extended. At this time, the seat

belt retractor is in the Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child

restraint mode). It reverts to the

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

mode when the seat belt is fully

retracted.

SSS0656

Rear-facing — step 4

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up

on the shoulder belt to remove any

slack in the belt.

SSS0657

Rear-facing — step 5

5. Remove any additional slack from the

seat belt; press downward and rear-

ward firmly in the center of the child

restraint to compress the vehicle seat

cushion and seatback while pulling up

on the seat belt.

SSS0658

Rear-facing — step 6

6. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push

it from side to side while holding the

child restraint near the seat belt path.

The child restraint should not move

more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to

side. Try to tug it forward and check to

see if the belt holds the restraint in

place. If the restraint is not secure,

tighten the seat belt as necessary, or

put the restraint in another seat and

test it again. You may need to try a

different child restraint. Not all child

restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure that the child

restraint is properly secured prior to

each use. If the seat belt is not locked,

repeat steps 1 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and

the seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode

(child restraint mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD RE-

STRAINT INSTALLATION USING

LATCH

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the

“Child safety” and “Child restraints” sec-

tions before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the

combined weight of the child and the

child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If

the combined weight of the child and the

child restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5

kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child re-

straint. Be sure to follow the child re-

straint manufacturer’s instructions for

installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-

facing child restraint using the LATCH

system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint man-

ufacturer’s instructions.

JVR0637X

Forward-facing web-mounted — step 2

2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-

tachments to the LATCH lower an-

chors. Check to make sure the LATCH

attachment is properly attached to

the lower anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with a

top tether strap, route the top tether

strap and secure the tether strap to

the tether anchor point. See “Installing

top tether strap” (P.1-46). Do not install

child restraints that require the use of

a top tether strap in seating positions

that do not have a top tether anchor.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

1-44 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

JVR0638X

Forward-facing rigid-mounted — step 2

3. The back of the child restraint should

be secured against the vehicle seat-

back.

If necessary, adjust or remove the

head restraint to obtain the correct

child restraint fit. If the head restraint

is removed, store it in a secure place.

Be sure to reinstall the head re-

straint when the child restraint is

removed. See “Head restraints/head-

rests” (P.1-14) for head restraint adjust-

ment information.

If the seating position does not have

an adjustable head restraint or a

headrest and it is interfering with the

proper child restraint fit, try another

seating position or a different child

restraint.

SSS0647

Forward-facing — step 4

4. For child restraints that are equipped

with webbing-mounted attachments,

remove any additional slack from the

anchor attachments. Press downward

and rearward firmly in the center of

the child restraint with your knee to

compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while tightening the

webbing of the anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to

remove any slack.

SSS0638

Forward-facing — step 6

6. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push

it from side to side while holding the

child restraint near the LATCH attach-

ment path. The child restraint should

not move more than 1 inch (25 mm),

from side to side. Try to tug it forward

and check to see if the LATCH attach-

ment holds the restraint in place. If the

restraint is not secure, tighten the

LATCH attachment as necessary, or

put the restraint in another seat and

test it again. You may need to try a

different child restraint. Not all child

restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint

is properly secured prior to each use. If

the child restraint is loose, repeat

steps 1 through 6.

JVR0619X

2nd row captain’s seat

JVR0620X

2nd row bench seat

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

1-46 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Installing top tether strap

First, secure the child restraint with the

LATCH lower anchors (2nd row captain’s

or bench outboard seating positions

only).

1. If necessary, raise or remove the head

restraint or headrest to position the

top tether strap over the top of the

seatback. If the head restraint or

headrest is removed, store it in a

secure place. Be sure to reinstall the

head restraint or headrest when the

child restraint is removed. See “Head

restraints/headrests” (P.1-14) for head

restraint or headrest adjustment, re-

moval and installation information.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether

anchor point on the back of each

seatback behind the child restraint.

3. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to

remove any slack. Make sure the head

restraint or headrest does not contact

the top tether strap.

If you have any questions when instal-

ling a top tether strap on the rear seat,

it is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD RE-

STRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE

SEAT BELTS

WARNING

. The three-point seat belt with

Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) must be used when instal-

ling a child restraint. Failure to

use the ALR mode will result in

the child restraint not being prop-

erly secured. The restraint could

tip over or be loose and cause

injury to a child in a sudden stop

or collision. Also, it can change

the operation of the front pas-

senger air bag. See “Front pas-

senger air bag and status light”

(P.1-62)

. When installing a child restraint

system in the 3rd center position,

both the center seat belt connec-

tor tongue and buckle tongue

must be secured. See “3rd row

center seat belt” (P.1-26).

SSS0640

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) — step 1

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the

“Child safety” and “Child restraints” sec-

tions before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the

combined weight of the child and the

child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If

the combined weight of the child and the

child restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5

kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child re-

straint. Be sure to follow the child re-

straint manufacturer’s instructions for

installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-

facing child restraint using the vehicle

seat belt in the rear seats or in the front

passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint in

the front seat, it should be placed in

a forward-facing direction only.

Move the seat to the rearmost posi-

tion. Child restraints for infants must

be used in the rear-facing direction

and, therefore, must not be used in

the front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint man-

ufacturer’s instructions.

The back of the child restraint should

be secured against the vehicle seat-

back.

If necessary, adjust or remove the

head restraint or headrest to obtain

the correct child restraint fit. If the

head restraint or headrest is removed,

store it in a secure place. Be sure to

reinstall the head restraint or head-

rest when the child restraint is re-

moved. See “Head restraints/

headrests” (P.1-14) for head restraint

or headrest adjustment, removal and

installation information.

If the seating position does not have

an adjustable head restraint or a

headrest and it is interfering with the

proper child restraint fit, try another

seating position or a different child

restraint.

SSS0360B

Forward-facing — step 3

3. Route the seat belt tongue through

the child restraint and insert it into the

buckle until you hear and feel the

latch engage. Be sure to follow the

child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for belt routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with a

top tether strap, route the top tether

strap and secure the tether strap to

the tether anchor point (rear seat

installation only). See “Installing top

tether strap” (P.1-50). Do not install

child restraints that require the use of

a top tether strap in seating positions

that do not have a top tether anchor.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

1-48 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0651

Forward-facing — step 4

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is

fully extended. At this time, the seat

belt retractor is in the Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child

restraint mode). It reverts to Emer-

gency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode

when the seat belt is fully retracted.

SSS0652

Forward-facing — step 5

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up

on the shoulder belt to remove any

slack in the belt.

SSS0653

Forward-facing — step 6

6. Remove any additional slack from the

seat belt; press downward and rear-

ward firmly in the center of the child

restraint with your knee to compress

the vehicle seat cushion and seatback

while pulling up on the seat belt.

7. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to

remove any slack.

SSS0641

Forward-facing — step 8

8. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push

it from side to side while holding the

child restraint near the seat belt path.

The child restraint should not move

more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to

side. Try to tug it forward and check to

see if the belt holds the restraint in

place. If the restraint is not secure,

tighten the seat belt as necessary, or

put the restraint in another seat and

test it again. You may need to try a

different child restraint. Not all child

restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

9. Check to make sure the child restraint

is properly secured prior to each use. If

the seat belt is not locked, repeat

steps 2 through 8.

SSS1099

Forward-facing — step 10

10. If the child restraint is installed in the

front passenger seat, place the igni-

tion switch in the ON position. The

front passenger air bag status light

should illuminate. If this light is not

illuminated, see “Front passenger air

bag and status light” (P.1-62). Move

the child restraint to another seating

position. Have the system checked. It

is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

After the child restraint is removed and

the seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR

mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

1-50 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

JVR0619X

2nd row captain’s seat

JVR0620X

2nd row bench seat

JVR0621X

3rd row bench seat

Installing top tether strap

WARNING

In the 3rd row bench seat, a child

restraint with a top tether strap can

only be used in the outboard seating

position (right side). Do not place it in

the outboard seating position (left

side) and center position and at-

tempt to angle the tether strap to

the outboard seating position (right

side).

First, secure the child restraint with the

seat belt.

1. If necessary, raise or remove the head

restraint or headrest to position the

top tether strap over the top of the

seatback. If the head restraint or

headrest is removed, store it in a

secure place. Be sure to reinstall the

head restraint or headrest when the

child restraint is removed. See “Head

restraints/headrests” (P.1-14) for head

restraint or headrest adjustment, re-

moval and installation information.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether

anchor point on the back of each

seatback (2nd row seat) or right side

seatback (3rd row seat) behind the

child restraint.

3. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to

remove any slack. Make sure the head

restraint or headrest does not contact

the top tether strap.

If you have any questions when instal-

ling a top tether strap on the rear seat,

it is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

BOOSTER SEATS

Precautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not

used properly, the risk of a child

being injured in a sudden stop or

collision greatly increases:

. Make sure the shoulder portion of

the belt is away from the child’s

face and neck and the lap portion

of the belt does not cross the

stomach.

. Make sure the shoulder belt is not

behind the child or under the

child’s arm.

. A booster seat must only be

installed in a seating position that

has a lap/shoulder belt.

LRS0455

Booster seats of various sizes are offered

by several manufacturers. When selecting

any booster seat, keep the following

points in mind:

. Choose only a booster seat with a

label certifying that it complies with

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard

213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard 213.

. Check the booster seat in your vehicle

to be sure it is compatible with the

vehicle’s seat and seat belt system.

LRS0453

. Make sure the child’s head will be

properly supported by the booster

seat or vehicle seat. The seatback

must be at or above the center of

the child’s ears. For example, if a low

back booster seat

is chosen, the

vehicle seatback must be at or above

the center of the child’s ears. If the

seatback is lower than the center of

the child’s ears, a high back booster

seat

should be used.

. If the booster seat is compatible with

your vehicle, place your child in the

booster seat and check the various

adjustments to be sure the booster

seat is compatible with your child.

Always follow all recommended pro-

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

1-52 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

cedures.

LRS0464

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces

or territories require that infants and

small children be restrained in an ap-

proved child restraint at all times while

the vehicle is being operated.

The instructions in this section apply to

booster seat installation in the rear seats

or the front passenger seat.

Booster seat installation

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode when using a booster seat

with the seat belts.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the

“Child safety”, “Child restraints” and “Boos-

ter seats” sections earlier in this section

before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster

seat in the rear seat or in the front

passenger seat:

SSS0640

1. If you must install a booster seat in

the front seat, move the seat to the

rearmost position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat.

Only place it in a forward-facing

direction. Always follow the booster

seat manufacturer’s instructions.

LRS0454

Front passenger position

3. The booster seat should be positioned

on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the

head restraint or headrest to obtain

the correct booster seat fit. If the head

restraint or headrest is removed, store

it in a secure place. Be sure to

reinstall the head restraint or head-

rest when the booster seat is re-

moved. See “Head restraints/

headrests” (P.1-14) for head restraint

or headrest adjustment, removal and

installation information.

If the seating position does not have

an adjustable head restraint or a

headrest and it is interfering with the

proper booster seat fit, try another

seating position or a different booster

seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat

belt low and snug on the child’s hips.

Be sure to follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions for ad-

justing the seat belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the

seat belt toward the retractor to take

up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder

belt is positioned across the top,

middle portion of the child’s shoulder.

Be sure to follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions for ad-

justing the seat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and

instructions for properly fastening a

seat belt shown in “Seat belts” (P.1-20).

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

1-54 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS1099

7. If the booster seat is installed in the

front passenger seat, place the igni-

tion switch in the ON position. The

front passenger air bag status light

may or may not illuminate de-

pending on the size of the child and

the type of booster seat used. See

“Front passenger air bag and status

light” (P.1-62).

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL

RESTRAINT SYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

section contains important information

concerning the following systems.

. Driver and passenger supplemental

front-impact air bag (NISSAN Ad-

vanced Air Bag System)

. Front seat-mounted side-impact sup-

plemental air bag

. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bag

. Seat belt with pretensioner

Supplemental front-impact air bag sys-

tem: The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-

tem can help cushion the impact force to

the head and chest of the driver and front

passenger in certain frontal collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact sup-

plemental air bag system: This system

can help cushion the impact force to the

chest and pelvis area of the driver and

front passenger in certain side impact

collisions. The supplemental side air bag

is designed to inflate on the side where

the vehicle is impacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag system:

This system can help cushion the impact

force to the head of occupants in front

and rear (2nd and 3rd) outboard seating

positions in certain side impact or rollover

collisions. In a side impact, the curtain air

bags are designed to inflate on the side

where the vehicle is impacted. In a roll-

over, the curtain air bags on both sides

are designed to inflate. Under both side-

impact and rollover situations, the curtain

air bags will remain inflated for a short

period of time.

These supplemental restraint systems are

designed to supplement the crash pro-

tection provided by the driver and pas-

senger seat belts and are not a

substitute for them. Seat belts should

always be correctly worn and the occu-

pant seated a suitable distance away

from the steering wheel, instrument pa-

nel and door finishers. (See “Seat belts”

(P.1-20) for instructions and precautions

on seat belt usage.)

The supplemental air bags operate only

when the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

After placing the ignition switch in the

ON position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates. The supple-

mental air bag warning light will turn

off after about 7 seconds if the systems

are operational.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

SSS0131

SSS0132

WARNING

. The front air bags ordinarily will

not inflate in the event of a side

impact, rear impact, rollover, or

lower severity frontal collision.

Always wear your seat belts to

help reduce the risk or severity of

injury in various kinds of acci-

dents.

. The front passenger air bag will

not inflate if the front passenger

air bag status light is lit or if the

front passenger seat is unoccu-

pied. See “Front passenger air

bag and status light” (P.1-62).

. The seat belts and the front air

bags are most effective when you

are sitting well back and upright

in the seat. The front air bags

inflate with great force. Even with

the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag

System, if you are unrestrained,

leaning forward, sitting sideways

or out of position in any way, you

are at greater risk of injury or

death in a crash. You may also

receive serious or fatal injuries

from the front air bag if you are

up against it when it inflates.

Always sit back against the seat-

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

1-56 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

back and as far-away as practical

from the steering wheel or instru-

ment panel. Always use the seat

belts.

. The driver and front passenger

seat belt buckles are equipped

with sensors that detect if the

seat belts are fastened. The Ad-

vanced Air Bag System monitors

the severity of a collision and seat

belt usage then inflates the air

bags. Failure to properly wear

seat belts can increase the risk

or severity of injury in an acci-

dent.

. The front passenger seat is

equipped with occupant classifi-

cation sensors (weight sensors)

that turn the front passenger air

bag OFF under some conditions.

This sensor is only used in this

seat. Failure to be properly

seated and wearing the seat belt

can increase the risk or severity

of injury in an accident. See

“Front passenger air bag and

status light” (P.1-62).

. Keep hands on the outside of the

steering wheel. Placing them in-

side the steering wheel rim could

increase the risk of injury if the

front air bag inflates.

SSS0007

SSS0006

SSS0008

SSS0009

SSS0099

SSS0100

WARNING

. Never let children ride unrest-

rained or extend their hands or

face out of the window. Do not

attempt to hold them in your lap

or arms. Some examples of dan-

gerous riding positions are

shown in the illustrations.

. Children may be severely injured

or killed when the front air bags,

side air bags or curtain air bags

inflate if they are not properly

restrained. Pre-teens and chil-

dren should be properly re-

strained in the rear seat, if

possible.

. Even with the NISSAN Advanced

Air Bag System, never install a

rear-facing child restraint in the

front seat. An inflating front air

bag could seriously injure or kill

your child. See “Child restraints”

(P.1-32) for details.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

1-58 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0832

SSS0833

SSS0140

SSS0162

SSS0159

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bags and roof-

mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bags:

. The side air bags ordinarily will

not inflate in the event of a front

impact, rear impact, rollover, or

lower severity side collision. Al-

ways wear your seat belts to help

reduce the risk or severity of

injury in various kinds of acci-

dents.

. The curtain air bags ordinarily will

not inflate in the event of a front

impact, rear impact, or lower

severity side collision. Always

wear your seat belts to help

reduce the risk or severity of

injury in various kinds of acci-

dents.

. The seat belts, the side air bags

and curtain air bags are most

effective when you are sitting

well back and upright in the seat.

The side air bags and curtain air

bags inflate with great force. Do

not allow anyone to place their

hand, leg or face near the side air

bags on the side of the seatback

of the front seat or near the side

roof rails. Do not allow anyone

sitting in the front seats or rear

outboard seats to extend their

hand out of the window or lean

against the door. Some examples

of dangerous riding positions are

shown in the previous illustra-

tions.

. When sitting in the rear seat, do

not hold onto the seatback of the

front seat. If the side air bag

inflates, you may be seriously

injured. Be especially careful with

children, who should always be

properly restrained. Some exam-

ples of dangerous riding posi-

tions are shown in the

illustrations.

. Do not use seat covers on the

front seatbacks. They may inter-

fere with side air bags inflation.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

1-60 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

JVR0399X

1. Crash zone sensor

2. Supplemental front-impact air bag mod-

ules (NISSAN Advanced Air Bags)

3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag inflators

4. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag modules

5. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bags

6. Door satellite sensors

7. Seat belt pretensioners

8. Satellite sensors

9. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

10. Occupant classification sensors (weight

sensors)

11. Occupant classification system control

unit

NISSAN ADVANCED AIR BAG SYS-

TEM (front seats)

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the

passenger’s advanced air bag sys-

tem, please observe the following

items.

. Do not allow a passenger in the

rear seat to push or pull on the

seatback pocket.

. Do not place heavy loads heavier

than 9.1 lbs (4 kg) on the seat-

back, head restraint or in the

seatback pocket.

. Do not store cargo behind the

seat that can press into the seat-

back.

. Do not position the front passen-

ger seat so it contacts the rear

seat. If the front seat does con-

tact the rear seat, the air bag

system may determine a sensor

malfunction has occurred and the

front passenger air bag status

light may illuminate and the sup-

plemental air bag warning light

may flash.

. If a forward facing child restraint

is installed in the front passenger

seat, do not position the front

passenger seat so the child re-

straint contacts the instrument

panel. If the child restraint does

contact the instrument panel, the

system may determine the seat is

occupied and the passenger air

bag may deploy in a collision.

Also the front passenger air bag

status light may not illuminate.

See “Child restraints” (P.1-32) for

information about installing and

using child restraints.

. Confirm the operating condition

with the front passenger air bag

status light.

. If you notice that the front pas-

senger air bag status light is not

operating as described in this

section, it is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer to check the

passenger seat Advanced Air Bag

System.

. Until you have confirmed with

your dealer that your passenger

seat advanced air bag is working

properly, position the occupants

in the rear seating positions.

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN

Advanced Air Bag System for the driver

and front passenger seats. This system is

designed to meet certification require-

ments under U.S. regulations. It is also

permitted in Canada. All of the informa-

tion, cautions and warnings in this

manual apply and must be followed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air

bag is located in the center of the

steering wheel. The passenger supple-

mental front-impact air bag is mounted in

the instrument panel above the glove

box. The front air bags are designed to

inflate in higher severity frontal collisions,

although they may inflate if the forces in

another type of collision are similar to

those of a higher severity frontal impact.

They may not inflate in certain frontal

collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is

not always an indication of proper front

air bag operation.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

monitors information from the Air bag

Control Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle sen-

sors and the occupant classification sen-

sors (weight sensors). Inflator operation is

based on the severity of a collision and

seat belt usage for the driver. For the

front passenger, the occupant classifica-

tion sensors are also monitored. Based on

information from the sensors, only one

front air bag may inflate in a crash,

depending on the crash severity and

whether the front occupants are belted

or unbelted. Additionally, the front pas-

senger air bag may be automatically

turned OFF under some conditions, de-

pending on the information provided by

the occupant classification sensors. If the

front passenger air bag is OFF, the front

passenger air bag status light will be

illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the

light will not be illuminated, but the air

bag will be off). (See “Front passenger air

bag and status light” (P.1-62) for further

details.) One front air bag inflating does

not indicate improper performance of the

system.

If you have any questions about your air

bag system, it is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer to obtain information

about the system. If you are considering

modification of your vehicle due to a

disability, you may also contact NISSAN.

Contact information is contained in the

front of this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud

noise may be heard, followed by release

of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and

does not indicate a fire. Care should be

taken not to inhale it, as it may cause

irritation and choking. Those with a

history of a breathing condition should

get fresh air promptly.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61

1-62 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Front air bags, along with the use of seat

belts, help to cushion the impact force on

the head and chest of the front occu-

pants. They can help save lives and

reduce serious injuries. However, an in-

flating front air bag may cause facial

abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags

do not provide restraint to the lower

body.

Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat

belts should be correctly worn and the

driver and passenger seated upright as

far as practical away from the steering

wheel or instrument panel. The front air

bags inflate quickly in order to help

protect the front occupants. Because of

this, the force of the front air bag inflating

can increase the risk of injury if the

occupant is too close to, or is against,

the air bag module during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a

collision.

The front air bags operate only when

the ignition switch is in the ON position.

After placing the ignition switch in the

ON position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates. The supple-

mental air bag warning light will turn

off after about 7 seconds if the system

is operational.

SSS1099

Front passenger air bag status light

Front passenger air bag and status

light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is de-

signed to automatically turn OFF

under some conditions. Read this

section carefully to learn how it

operates. Proper use of the seat,

seat belt and child restraints is ne-

cessary for most effective protec-

tion. Failure to follow all

instructions in this manual concern-

ing the use of seats, seat belts and

child restraints can increase the risk

or severity of injury in an accident.

Status light:

The front passenger seat is equipped with

the occupant classification sensors

(weight sensors) that turn the front

passenger air bag on or off depending

on the weight applied to the front pas-

senger seat. The status of the front

passenger air bag (ON or OFF) is indicated

by the front passenger air bag status light

which is located on the instrument

panel. After the ignition switch is placed in

the ON position, the front passenger air

bag status light on the instrument panel

illuminates for about 7 seconds and then

turns off or illuminates depending on the

front passenger seat occupied status.

The light operates as follows:

. Unoccupied passenger seat: The

light is OFF and the front passenger

air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a

crash.

. Passenger seat occupied by a small

adult, child or child restraint as out-

lined in this section: The

light

illuminates to indicate that the front

passenger air bag is OFF and will not

inflate in a crash.

. Occupied passenger seat and the

passenger meets the conditions out-

lined in this section: The

light is

OFF to indicate that the front passen-

ger air bag is operational.

In addition to the above, certain objects

placed on the front passenger seat may

also cause the light to operate as de-

scribed above depending on their weight.

For additional information related to the

normal operation and troubleshooting of

this occupant classification sensor sys-

tem, please refer to “Normal operation”

(P.1-64) and “Troubleshooting” (P.1-65) in

this section.

Front passenger air bag:

The front passenger air bag is designed

to automatically turn OFF when the

vehicle is operated under some condi-

tions as described below as permitted by

U.S. regulations. If the front passenger air

bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a crash. The

driver air bag and other air bags in your

vehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help

reduce the risk of injury or death from an

inflating air bag to certain front passen-

ger seat occupants, such as children, by

requiring the air bag to be automatically

turned OFF.

The occupant classification sensors

(weight sensors) are on the seat cushion

frame under the front passenger seat and

are designed to detect an occupant and

objects on the seat. For example, if a child

is in the front passenger seat, the Ad-

vanced Air Bag System is designed to turn

the passenger air bag OFF in accordance

with the regulations. Also, if a child

restraint of the type specified in the

regulations is on the seat, the occupant

classification sensors can detect it and

cause the air bag to turn OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants

who are properly seated and using the

seat belt as outlined in this manual

should not cause the passenger air bag

to be automatically turned OFF. For small

adults it may be turned OFF, however, if

the occupant does not sit in the seat

properly (for example, by not sitting up-

right, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or

by otherwise being out of position), this

could cause the sensor to turn the air bag

OFF. Always be sure to be seated and

wearing the seat belt properly for the

most effective protection by the seat belt

and supplemental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and

children be properly restrained in a rear

seat. NISSAN also recommends that ap-

propriate child restraints and booster

seats be properly installed in a rear seat.

If this is not possible, the occupant

classification sensors are designed to

operate as described above to turn the

front passenger air bag OFF for specified

child restraints. Failing to properly secure

child restrains and to use the ALR mode

may allow the restraint to tip or move in

an accident or sudden stop. This can also

result in the passenger air bag inflating in

a crash instead of being OFF. (See “Child

restraints” (P.1-32) for proper use and

installation.)

If the front passenger seat is not occu-

pied, the passenger air bag is designed

not to inflate in a crash. However, heavy

objects placed on the seat could result in

air bag inflation, because of the object

being detected by the occupant classifi-

cation sensors. Other conditions could

also result in air bag inflation, such as if a

child is standing on the seat, or if two

children are on the seat, contrary to the

instructions in this manual. Always be

sure that you and all vehicle occupants

are seated and restrained properly.

Using the front passenger air bag status

light, you can monitor when the front

passenger air bag is automatically turned

OFF with the seat occupied. The light will

not illuminate when the front passenger

seat is unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63

1-64 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

front passenger air bag status light is

illuminated (indicating that the air bag is

OFF), it could be that the person is a small

adult, or is not sitting on the seat

properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the

front seat, the front passenger air bag

status light may or may not be illumi-

nated, depending on the size of the child

and the type of child restraint being used.

If the front passenger air bag status light

is not illuminated (indicating that the air

bag might inflate in a crash), it could be

that the child restraint or seat belt is not

being used properly. Make sure that the

child restraint is installed properly, the

seat belt is used properly and the occu-

pant is positioned properly. If the front

passenger air bag status light is still not

illuminated, reposition the occupant or

child restraint in a rear seat.

If the front passenger air bag status light

will not illuminate even though you be-

lieve that the child restraint, the seat belts

and the occupant are properly positioned,

the system may be sensing an unoccu-

pied seat (in which case the air bag is

OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that

the system is OFF by using a special tool.

However, until you have confirmed with

your dealer that your air bag is working

properly, reposition the occupant or child

restraint in a rear seat.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

and front passenger air bag status light

will take a few seconds to register a

change in the front passenger seat sta-

tus. However, if the seat becomes unoc-

cupied, the front passenger air bag status

light will remain off.

If a malfunction occurs in the front

passenger air bag system, the supple-

mental air bag warning light

, located

in the meter and gauges area will blink.

Have the system checked. It is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

Normal operation:

In order for the occupant classification

sensor system to classify the front pas-

senger based on weight, please follow the

precautions and steps outlined below:

Precautions:

. Make sure that there are no objects

weighing over 9.1 lbs (4 kg) hanging on

the seat or placed in the seatback

pocket.

. Make sure that a child restraint or

other object is not pressing against

the rear of the seatback.

. Make sure that a rear passenger is not

pushing or pulling on the back of the

front passenger seat.

. Make sure that the front passenger

seat or seatback is not forced back

against an object on the seat or floor

behind it.

. Make sure that there is no object

placed under the front passenger

seat.

Steps:

1. Adjust the seat as outlined. (See

“Seats” (P.1-3).) Sit upright, leaning

against the seatback, and centered

on the seat cushion with your feet

comfortably extended to the floor.

2. Make sure there are no objects on

your lap.

3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined. (See

“Seat belts” (P.1-20).)

4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds

allowing the system to classify the

front passenger before the vehicle is

put into motion.

5. Ensure proper classification by check-

ing the front passenger air bag status

light.

NOTE:

This vehicle’s occupant classification

sensor system locks the classification

during driving so it is important that

you confirm that the front passenger is

properly classified prior to driving. Also,

the occupant classification sensor sys-

tem may recalculate the weight of the

occupant when the vehicle comes to a

stop (i.e. stop light, stop sign, etc.), so

the front passenger seat occupant

should continue to remain seated as

outlined above.

Troubleshooting:

If you think the front passenger air bag

status light is incorrect:

1. If the light is ON with no front passenger

and no objects on the front passenger

seat:

This may be due to the following condi-

tions that may be interfering with the

weight sensors:

. An object weighing over 9.1 lbs (4 kg)

hanging on the seat or placed in the

seatback pocket.

. A child restraint or other object press-

ing against the rear of the seatback.

. A rear passenger pushing or pulling

on the back of the front passenger

seat.

. Forcing the front seat or seatback

against an object on the seat or floor

behind it.

. An object placed under the front

passenger seat.

. An object placed between the seat

cushion and center console or be-

tween the seat cushion and the door.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a

stop when it is safe to do so. Check and

correct any of the above conditions.

Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed dur-

ing which the front passenger air bag

status light will remain lit for about 7

seconds initially.

If the light is still ON after this, it is

recommended that the vehicle be

checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible.

2. If the light is ON with an adult occupying

the front passenger seat:

. Occupant is a small adult — the front

passenger air bag status light is func-

tioning as intended. The front passen-

ger air bag is suppressed.

However, if the occupant is not a small

adult, then this may be due to the

following conditions that may be interfer-

ing with the weight sensors:

. Occupant is not sitting upright, lean-

ing against the seatback, and cen-

tered on the seat cushion with his/her

feet comfortably extended to the

floor.

. A child restraint or other object press-

ing against the rear of the seatback.

. A rear passenger pushing or pulling

on the back of the front passenger

seat.

. Forcing the front seat or seatback

against an object on the seat or floor

behind it.

. An object placed under the front

passenger seat.

. An object placed between the seat

cushion and center console or be-

tween the seat cushion and the door.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a

stop when it is safe to do so. Check and

correct any of the above conditions.

Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed dur-

ing which the front passenger air bag

status light will remain lit for about 7

seconds initially.

If the light is still ON after this, the person

should be advised not to ride in the front

passenger seat and it is recommended

that the vehicle be checked by a NISSAN

dealer as soon as possible.

3. If the light is OFF with a small adult, child

or child restraint occupying the front

passenger seat.

This may be due to the following condi-

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65

1-66 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

tions that may be interfering with the

weight sensors:

. Small adult or child is not sitting

upright, leaning against the seatback,

and centered on the seat cushion with

his/her feet comfortably extended to

the floor.

. The child restraint is not properly

installed, as outlined. (See “Child re-

straints” (P.1-32).)

. An object weighing over 9.1 lbs (4 kg)

hanging on the seat or placed in the

seatback pocket.

. A child restraint or other object press-

ing against the rear of the seatback.

. A rear passenger pushing or pulling

on the back of the front passenger

seat.

. Forcing the front seat or seatback

against an object on the seat or floor

behind it.

. An object placed under the front

passenger seat.

. An object placed between the seat

cushion and center console.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a

stop when it is safe to do so. Check and

correct any of the above conditions.

Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed dur-

ing which the front passenger air bag

status light will remain lit for about 7

seconds initially.

If the light is still OFF after this, the small

adult, child or child restraint should be

repositioned in the rear seat and it is

recommended that the vehicle be

checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible.

Other supplemental front-impact

air bag precautions

WARNING

. Do not place any objects on the

steering wheel pad or on the

instrument panel. Also, do not

place any objects between any

occupant and the steering wheel

or instrument panel. Such objects

may become dangerous projec-

tiles and cause injury if the front

air bags inflate.

. Do not place objects with sharp

edges on the seat. Also, do not

place heavy objects on the seat

that will leave permanent impres-

sions in the seat. Such objects

can damage the seat or occupant

classification sensors (weight

sensors). This can affect the op-

eration of the air bag system and

result in serious personal injury.

. Do not use water or acidic clea-

ners (hot steam cleaners) on the

seat. This can damage the seat or

occupant classification sensors.

This can also affect the operation

of the air bag system and result in

serious personal injury.

. Immediately after inflation, sev-

eral front air bag system compo-

nents will be hot. Do not touch

them; you may severely burn

yourself.

. No unauthorized changes should

be made to any components or

wiring of the supplemental air

bag system. This is to prevent

accidental inflation of the supple-

mental air bag or damage to the

supplemental air bag system.

. Do not make unauthorized

changes to your vehicle’s electri-

cal system, suspension system or

front end structure. This could

affect proper operation of the

front air bag system.

. Tampering with the air bag sys-

tem may result in serious perso-

nal injury. Tampering includes

changes to the steering wheel

and the instrument panel assem-

bly by placing material over the

steering wheel pad and above the

instrument panel or by installing

additional trim material around

the air bag system.

. Removing or modifying the front

passenger seat may affect the

function of the air bag system

and result in serious personal

injury.

. Modifying or tampering with the

front passenger seat may result

in serious personal injury. For

example, do not change the front

seats by placing material on the

seat cushion or by installing ad-

ditional trim material, such as

seat covers, on the seat that is

not specifically designed to as-

sure proper air bag operation.

Additionally, do not stow any

objects under the front passen-

ger seat or the seat cushion and

seatback. Such objects may inter-

fere with the proper operation of

the occupant classification sen-

sors.

. No unauthorized changes should

be made to any components or

wiring of the seat belt system.

This may affect the front air bag

system. Tampering with the seat

belt system may result in serious

personal injury.

. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and

around the front air bag. It is also

recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for installation of electrical

equipment. The Supplemental

Restraint System (SRS) wiring

harnesses* should not be modi-

fied or disconnected. Unauthor-

ized electrical test equipment

and probing devices should not

be used on the air bag system.

. A cracked windshield should be

replaced immediately by a quali-

fied repair facility. A cracked

windshield could affect the func-

tion of the supplemental air bag

system.

* The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identifica-

tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the front air

bag system and guide the buyer to the

appropriate sections in this Owner’s Man-

ual.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-67

1-68 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS1092

FRONT SEAT-MOUNTED SIDE-IM-

PACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG AND

ROOF-MOUNTED CURTAIN SIDE-

IMPACT AND ROLLOVER SUPPLE-

MENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

The side air bags are located in the

outside of the seatback of the front seats.

The curtain air bags are located in the

side roof rails. All of the information,

cautions and warnings in this manual

apply and must be followed. The side air

bags and curtain air bags are designed to

inflate in higher severity side collisions,

although they may inflate if the forces in

another type of collision are similar to

those of a higher severity side impact.

They are designed to inflate on the side

where the vehicle is impacted. They may

not inflate in certain side collisions on the

side where the vehicle is impacted.

Curtain air bags are also designed to

inflate in certain types of rollover colli-

sions or near rollovers. As a result, certain

vehicle movements (for example, during

severe off roading) may cause the curtain

air bags to inflate.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not

always an indication of proper side air

bag and curtain air bag operation.

When side air bags and curtain air bags

inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,

followed by release of smoke. This smoke

is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.

Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it

may cause irritation and choking. Those

with a history of a breathing condition

should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat

belts, help to cushion the impact force on

the chest and pelvis of the front occu-

pants. Curtain air bags help to cushion

the impact force to the head of occu-

pants in the front and rear (2nd and 3rd)

outboard seating positions. They can help

save lives and reduce serious injuries.

However, an inflating side air bags and

curtain air bags may cause abrasions or

other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air

bags do not provide restraint to the lower

body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn

and the driver and passenger seated

upright as far as practical away from the

side air bag. Rear seat passengers should

be seated as far away as practical from

the door finishers and side roof rails. The

side air bags and curtain air bags inflate

quickly in order to help protect the

occupants. Because of this, the force of

the side air bags and curtain air bags

inflating can increase the risk of injury if

the occupant is too close to, or is against,

these air bag modules during inflation. In

a rollover, the curtain air bags on both

sides are designed to inflate. Under both

side-impact situations, the curtain air

bags will remain inflated for a short

period of time.

The side air bags and curtain air bags

operate only when the ignition switch is

in the ON position.

After placing the ignition switch in the

ON position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates. The air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7

seconds if the systems are operational.

WARNING

. Do not place any objects near the

seatback of the front seats. Also,

do not place any objects (an

umbrella, bag, etc.) between the

front door finisher and the front

seat. Such objects may become

dangerous projectiles and cause

injury if side air bag inflates.

. Right after inflation, several side

air bags and curtain air bag sys-

tem components will be hot. Do

not touch them; you may severely

burn yourself.

. No unauthorized changes should

be made to any components or

wiring of side air bag and curtain

air bags. This is to prevent da-

mage to or accidental inflation of

the side air bag and curtain air

bag systems.

. Do not make unauthorized

changes to your vehicle’s electri-

cal system, suspension system or

side panel. This could affect prop-

er operation of the side air bag

and curtain air bag systems.

. Tampering with the air bag sys-

tem may result in serious perso-

nal injury. For example, do not

change the front seats by placing

material near the seatback or by

installing additional trim materi-

al, such as seat covers, around

the side air bags.

. Removing or modifying the front

passenger seat may affect the

function of the air bag system

and result in serious personal

injury.

. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and

around the side air bag and

curtain air bag. It is also recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for installation of electrical equip-

ment. The Supplemental Re-

straint System (SRS) wiring

harnesses* should not be modi-

fied or disconnected. Unauthor-

ized electrical test equipment

and probing devices should not

be used on the side-impact air

bag system.

* The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identifica-

tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the side air

bag and curtain air bag systems and

guide the buyer to the appropriate sec-

tions in this Owner’s Manual.

SEAT BELTS WITH PRETENSIONERS

(front seats)

WARNING

. The pretensioners cannot be re-

used after activation. They must

be replaced together with the

retractor and buckle as a unit.

. If the vehicle becomes involved in

a collision but a pretensioner is

not activated, be sure to have the

pretensioner system checked

and, if necessary, replaced. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

. No unauthorized changes should

be made to any components or

wiring of the pretensioner sys-

tem. This is to prevent damage to

or accidental activation of the

pretensioners. Tampering with

the pretensioner system may re-

sult in serious personal injury.

. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and

around the pretensioner system.

It is also recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for installation of

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-69

1-70 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

electrical equipment. Unauthor-

ized electrical test equipment

and probing devices should not

be used on the pretensioner sys-

tem.

. If you need to dispose of a pre-

tensioner or scrap the vehicle, it is

recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. Correct

pretensioner disposal procedures

are set forth in the appropriate

NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect

disposal procedures could cause

personal injury.

The pretensioner system may activate

with the supplemental air bag system in

certain types of collisions. Working with

the seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the

seat belt when the vehicle becomes

involved in certain types of collisions,

helping to restrain front seat occupants.

The pretensioner is encased with the seat

belt retractor and buckle anchor. These

seat belts are used the same way as

conventional seat belts.

When a pretensioner activates, smoke is

released and a loud noise may be heard.

The smoke is not harmful, and it does not

indicate a fire. Care should be taken not

to inhale it as it may cause irritation and

choking. Those with a history of a breath-

ing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

After pretensioner activation, load limiters

allow the seat belt to release webbing (if

necessary) to reduce forces against the

chest.

The supplemental air bag warning light

is used to indicate malfunctions in

the pretensioner system. (See “Supple-

mental air bag warning light” (P.1-71) for

more details.) If the operation of the

supplemental air bag warning light indi-

cates there is a malfunction, have the

system checked. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the preten-

sioner system and guide the buyer to the

appropriate sections in this Owner’s Man-

ual.

SSS1016

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental

front-impact air bag system are placed in

the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

SRS air bag

The warning labels are located on the

surface of the sun visors.

WARNING

Do not use a rear-facing child re-

straint on a seat protected by an air

bag in front of it. If the air bag

deploys, it may cause serious injury

or death.

SPA1097

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,

displaying

in the instrument panel,

monitors the circuits for the air bag

systems, pretensioners and all related

wiring.

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warn-

ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds

and then turns off. This means the system

is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur,

the air bag and/or pretensioner systems

need servicing:

. The supplemental air bag warning

light remains on after approximately

7 seconds.

. The supplemental air bag warning

light flashes intermittently.

. The supplemental air bag warning

light does not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the air bag and/

or pretensioner systems may not operate

properly. They must be checked and

repaired. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning

light is on, it could mean that the

front air bag, side air bag, curtain air

bag and/or pretensioner systems

will not operate in an accident. To

help avoid injury to yourself or

others, have your vehicle checked

as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-71

1-72 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PRO-

CEDURE

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain

air bags and pretensioners are designed

to activate on a one-time-only basis. As a

reminder, unless it is damaged, the sup-

plemental air bag warning light will re-

main illuminated after inflation has

occurred. These systems should be re-

paired and/or replaced as soon as possi-

ble. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

When maintenance work is required on

the vehicle, the front air bags, side air

bags, curtain air bags, pretensioners and

related parts should be pointed out to the

person conducting the maintenance. The

ignition switch should always be in the

LOCK position when working under the

hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

. Once a front air bag, side air bag

or curtain air bag has inflated, the

air bag module will not function

again and must be replaced. Ad-

ditionally, the activated preten-

sioner must also be replaced. The

air bag module and pretensioner

should be replaced. It is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service. However, the air

bag module and pretensioner

system cannot be repaired.

. The front air bag, side air bag,

curtain air bag and the preten-

sioner should be inspected if

there is any damage to the front

end or side portion of the vehicle.

It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

. If you need to dispose of a sup-

plemental air bag or pretensioner

or scrap the vehicle, it is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN deal-

er. Correct supplemental air bag

and pretensioner system dispo-

sal procedures are set forth in the

appropriate NISSAN Service Man-

ual. Incorrect disposal procedures

could cause personal injury.

. If there is an impact to your

vehicle from any direction, your

Occupant Classification Sensor

(OCS) should be checked to verify

it is still functioning correctly. It is

recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

The OCS should be checked even

if no air bags deploy as a result of

the impact. Failure to verify prop-

er OCS function may result in an

improper air bag deployment re-

sulting in injury or death.

2 Instruments and controls
Cockpit .................................................................................................. 2-3
Instrument panel .......................................................................... 2-4
Meters and gauges ..................................................................... 2-5
Speedometer and odometer ........................................ 2-6
Tachometer ................................................................................ 2-7
Engine coolant temperature gauge ....................... 2-7
Fuel gauge ................................................................................... 2-8
Engine oil pressure gauge .............................................. 2-8
Voltmeter...................................................................................... 2-9
Meter/ring illumination and needle sweep....... 2-9
Warning lights, indicator lights and
audible reminders ..................................................................... 2-10
Checking lights ..................................................................... 2-11
Warning lights ........................................................................ 2-11
Indicator lights ...................................................................... 2-17
Audible reminders .............................................................. 2-20
Vehicle information display ............................................... 2-20
Operational indicators .................................................... 2-23
Maintenance indicators ................................................. 2-26
Trip computer ........................................................................ 2-28
Security systems ........................................................................ 2-30
Vehicle Security System ................................................ 2-30
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System .................... 2-31
Wiper and washer switch ................................................... 2-33
Windshield wiper and washer operation ...... 2-34
Rain-sensing auto wiper system (if
so equipped) ......................................................................... 2-34
Rear window wiper and
washer operation ............................................................. 2-36
Rear window and outside mirror
defroster switch ......................................................................... 2-36
Windshield deicer switch (if so equipped)............. 2-36
Headlight and turn signal switch ................................ 2-37
Headlight switch ............................................................... 2-37
Instrument brightness control .............................. 2-40
Turn signal switch ........................................................... 2-41
Fog light switch (if so equipped) ......................... 2-41
Heated steering wheel (if so equipped) .................. 2-42
Horn ..................................................................................................... 2-42
Heated seats ................................................................................. 2-43
Front (if so equipped).................................................... 2-43
Rear (if so equipped) ...................................................... 2-44
Climate controlled seats (if so equipped) ............. 2-45
Warning systems switch (if so equipped) ............. 2-46
SNOW mode switch ................................................................ 2-46
TOW mode switch .................................................................... 2-47
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch ........ 2-47

Rear door alert ............................................................................ 2-48
Turning the rear door alert
system ON/OFF .................................................................... 2-48
System operation ............................................................... 2-49
How to temporarily disable the rear door
alert system............................................................................. 2-49
Power outlet .................................................................................. 2-50
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
charging connector .......................................................... 2-52
Storage .............................................................................................. 2-53
Cup holders ............................................................................. 2-53
Sunglasses holder .............................................................. 2-55
Glove box ................................................................................... 2-56
Console box ............................................................................. 2-56
Tray ................................................................................................ 2-58
Coat hooks ............................................................................... 2-59
Luggage hooks ..................................................................... 2-59
Cargo floor box .................................................................... 2-60
Roof rack ................................................................................... 2-60
Rear bumper cover ........................................................... 2-61
Windows ............................................................................................ 2-63
Power windows .................................................................... 2-63
Moonroof (if so equipped) .................................................. 2-65
Power moonroof ................................................................. 2-65
Welcome light (if so equipped) ....................................... 2-67
Battery saver system ..................................................... 2-67
Interior lights ................................................................................. 2-68
Interior light switch ........................................................... 2-68
Console light ........................................................................... 2-69
Map lights ............................................................................... 2-69
Rear personal lights ....................................................... 2-69
Vanity mirror lights ................................................................. 2-70
Cargo light ..................................................................................... 2-70
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver (Type A) (if
so equipped) ................................................................................. 2-70
Programming HomeLink® ......................................... 2-71
Programming HomeLink® for Canadian
customers and gate openers ................................. 2-72
Operating the HomeLink®
Universal Transceiver .................................................... 2-73
Programming troubleshooting ............................. 2-73
Clearing the programmed information .......... 2-73
Reprogramming a single
HomeLink® button ........................................................... 2-73
If your vehicle is stolen ................................................ 2-74
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver (Type B) (if
so equipped) ................................................................................. 2-74
Programming HomeLink® ......................................... 2-75
Programming HomeLink® for Canadian
customers and gate openers ................................. 2-77
Operating the HomeLink®
Universal Transceiver .................................................... 2-77
Programming troubleshooting ............................. 2-77
Clearing the programmed information .......... 2-77
Reprogramming a single
HomeLink® button ........................................................... 2-78
Using the garage door
two-way communication ........................................... 2-78
If your vehicle is stolen ................................................ 2-79

WAA0101X

1. Power liftgate switch (if so equipped)

2. Heated steering wheel switch (if so

equipped)

3. Instrument brightness control switch

4. TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip odometer

5. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch

— Headlight

— Turn signal

— Fog light (if so equipped)

6. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left

side)

— Audio control steering switch

— Hands-Free Phone System switch

7. Trip computer switch

8. Wiper and washer switch

9. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right

side)

— Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system

10. Dynamic driver assistance switch (if so

equipped)

— Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) sys-

tem (if so equipped)

— Intelligent Distance Control (I-DC) sys-

tem (if so equipped)

— Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-

BSI) system (if so equipped)

11. Shift lever

12. Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) shift switch (if so

equipped)/SNOW mode switch/TOW

MODE switch/Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) OFF switch

13. Power liftgate main switch (if so

equipped)

14. Warning systems switch (if so equipped)

— Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (if so

equipped)

— Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so

equipped)

15. Rear door alert switch

16. Electric tilting/telescopic steering wheel

switch

Instruments and controls 2-3

COCKPIT

2-4 Instruments and controls

JVC1093X

1. Side ventilator

2. Meters and gauges

3. Center ventilator

4. Center multi-function control panel

5. Center display

— Intelligent Around View Monitor (if so

equipped)

— RearView Monitor (if so equipped)

— Navigation system (if so equipped)

6. Hazard warning flasher switch

7. Defroster switch/Deicer switch (if so

equipped)

8. Front passenger supplemental air bag

9. Fuse box

10. Parking brake

11. Hood release handle

12. Steering wheel

— Horn

— Driver supplemental air bag

— Power steering

13. Push-button ignition switch

14. Climate controlled seat switch (if so

equipped)/Heated seat switch (if so

equipped)

15. Front passenger air bag status light

16. Power outlet

17. USB connection port

18. Cup holder/Tray

19. Heater and air conditioner

20. Audio system

21. Glove box

INSTRUMENT PANEL

SIC4368

1. Tachometer*

2. Warning and indicator lights

3. Speedometer*

4. Engine coolant temperature gauge*

5. Voltmeter*

6. Vehicle information display/Odometer/

twin trip odometer

7. Engine oil pressure gauge*

8. Fuel gauge*

*: The needle indicators may move

slightly after the ignition switch is

placed in the OFF position. This is not

a malfunction.

CAUTION

. For cleaning, use a soft cloth,

dampened with water. Never use

a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine,

thinner or any kind of solvent or

paper towel with a chemical

cleaning agent. They will scratch

or cause discoloration to the lens.

. Do not spray any liquid such as

water on the meter lens. Spraying

liquid may cause the system to

malfunction.

Instruments and controls 2-5

METERS AND GAUGES

2-6 Instruments and controls

SIC4369

Speedometer

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed

in miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers

per hour (km/h).

JVI0543X

Odometer/twin trip odometer

The odometer and twin trip odometer

are displayed on the vehicle informa-

tion display when the ignition switch is in

the ON position.

The odometer records the total distance

the vehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the dis-

tance of individual trips.

Changing the display:

Pushing the TRIP RESET switch

at the

bottom left of the combination meter

panel changes the display as follows:

TRIP A ? TRIP B ? TRIP A

Resetting the trip odometer:

Pushing the TRIP RESET switch

for

more than 1 second resets the trip

odometer to zero.

Average fuel economy and distance to

empty information is also available. (See

“Vehicle information display” (P.2-20).)

SIC4371

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed in

revolutions per minute (RPM). Do not rev

the engine into the red zone

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the

red zone, shift to a higher gear or

reduce engine speed. Operating the

engine in the red zone may cause

serious engine damage.

SIC4372

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant

temperature.

The engine coolant temperature is within

the normal range when the gauge needle

points within the zone

shown in the

illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies

with the outside air temperature and

driving conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates engine coolant

temperature near the hot (H) end of

the normal range, reduce vehicle

speed to decrease temperature. If

gauge is over the normal range, stop

the vehicle as soon as safely possi-

ble. If the engine is overheated,

continued operation of the vehicle

may seriously damage the engine.

See “If your vehicle overheats” (P.6-

14) for immediate action required.

Instruments and controls 2-7

2-8 Instruments and controls

SIC4374

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate

fuel level in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during

braking, turning, acceleration, or going

up or down hills.

The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty)

after the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF position.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge

registers “0” (Empty).

The low fuel warning

appears on the

vehicle information display when the fuel

tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is

convenient, preferably before the gauge

reaches “0”. There will be a small reserve

of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge

needle reaches “0”.

The

indicates that the fuel-filler door

is located on the driver’s side of the

vehicle.

CAUTION

. If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the

malfunction indicator light

(MIL) may come on. Refuel as

soon as possible. After a few

driving trips, the

light should

turn off. If the light remains on

after a few driving trips, have the

vehicle inspected. It is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

. For additional information, see

“Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL)” (P.2-18).

SIC4375

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine lubrica-

tion system oil pressure while the engine

is running. When the engine speed is high,

the engine oil pressure is also high. When

it is low, the gauge indicates the low (L) oil

pressure.

The engine oil pressure is normal when

the gauge needle points within the zone

shown in the illustration.

CAUTION

. This gauge is not designed to

indicate low engine oil level. Use

the dipstick to check the oil level.

(See “Engine oil” (P.8-6).)

. If the gauge needle does not

move with the proper amount of

engine oil, have the vehicle

checked. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service. Continued vehicle opera-

tion in such a condition could

cause serious damage to the en-

gine.

SIC4376

VOLTMETER

When the ignition switch is placed in the

ON position, the volt meter indicates the

battery voltage. When the engine is run-

ning, it indicates the generator voltage.

While cranking the engine, the volt drop

below the normal range. If the needle is

not in the normal range (10.5 to 15.5 volt)

while the engine is running, it may

indicate that the charging system is not

functioning properly. Have the system

checked. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

METER/RING ILLUMINATION AND

NEEDLE SWEEP

The ring illumination surrounding meters

and gauges illuminates when the driver’s

door is closed after getting into the

vehicle with the Intelligent Key carried in.

When the engine is started, the indicator

needles will sweep in the speedometer

and tachometer and the ring illumination

will be brightened gradually. This function

can be turned off. (See “Trip computer”

(P.2-28).)

Instruments and controls 2-9

2-10 Instruments and controls

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warn-

ing light

Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) warning light

(4WD models)

Exterior light indicator

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system

warning light (orange)

Front fog light indicator light (if so

equipped)

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)

system warning light

Intelligent Key warning light

Front passenger air bag status light

Automatic transmission check warn-

ing light

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indica-

tor light (orange; if so equipped)

High beam indicator light

Automatic Transmission (AT) oil tem-

perature warning light

Low tire pressure warning light

Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) ON

indicator light (green; if so equipped)

Automatic Transmission (AT) park

warning light

Master warning light

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/Intelligent

Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) system

warning light (orange; if so equipped)

Seat belt warning light

Security indicator light

Brake warning light

Supplemental air bag warning light

SNOW mode indicator light

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warn-

ing light

TOW mode indicator light

Charge warning light

Automatic transmission position indi-

cator light

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Intelligent Distance Control (I-DC)

system warning light (orange; if so

equipped)

Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-

BSI) ON indicator light (green; if so

equipped)

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off

indicator light

Engine oil pressure warning light Check suspension indicator light

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR

LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

CHECKING LIGHTS

With all doors closed, apply the parking

brake, fasten the seat belts and place the

ignition switch in the ON position without

starting the engine. The following lights (if

so equipped) will come on:

, or , , , , ,

The following lights (if so equipped) will

come on briefly and then go off:

, or , , , , , ,

, ,

If any light does not come on or operates

in a way other than described, it may

indicate a burned-out bulb and/or a

system malfunction. It is recommended

you have the system checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

Some indicators and warnings are also

displayed on the vehicle information dis-

play between the speedometer and tach-

ometer. (See “Vehicle information display”

(P.2-20).)

WARNING LIGHTS

or Anti-lock Braking Sys-

tem (ABS) warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light illuminates and then

turns off. This indicates the ABS is opera-

tional.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while

the engine is running, or while driving, it

may indicate the ABS is not functioning

properly. Have the system checked. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-

lock function is turned off. The brake

system then operates normally, but with-

out anti-lock assistance. (See “Brake sys-

tem” (P.5-130).)

Automatic Emergency Braking

(AEB) system warning light

This light comes on when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position. It

turns off after the engine is started.

This light illuminates when the Automatic

Emergency Braking (AEB) system is set to

OFF on the center display.

If the light illuminates when the AEB

system is ON, it may indicate that the

system is unavailable. See “Automatic

Emergency Braking (AEB)” (P.5-98) for

more details.

Automatic Transmission (AT)

check warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the

ON position, the light comes on for 2

seconds. If the light comes on at any

other time, it may indicate the transmis-

sion is not functioning properly. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer

to check and repair the transmission.

Automatic Transmission (AT)

oil temperature warning light

This light illuminates when the Automatic

Transmission (AT) oil temperature is too

high. If the light illuminates while driving,

reduce the vehicle speed as soon as

safely possible until the light turns off.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation when

the AT oil temperature warning light

is on may damage the AT.

Instruments and controls 2-11

2-12 Instruments and controls

Automatic Transmission (AT)

park warning light (4WD models)

This light indicates that the Automatic

Transmission (AT) parking function is not

engaged. If the transfer control is not

secured in any driving position while the

AT shift lever is in the “P” (Park) position,

the transmission will disengage and the

wheels will not lock.

If the AT park warning light illuminates

with the shift lever in the P (Park)

position, shift the Four-Wheel Drive

(4WD) shift switch to the AUTO, 4H or

4L position again with the shift lever in

the N (Neutral) position. (See “NISSAN all-

mode 4WD®” (P.5-116).)

Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/

Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention

(I-BSI) system warning light (or-

ange; if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is placed in the

ON position, the indicator light will first

illuminate in orange and turn green

before turning off. This indicates that

the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Intelli-

gent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) sys-

tems are operational.

If the light comes on in orange and

remains on, it may indicate that the BSW

and I-BSI systems are not functioning

properly. Although the vehicle is still

driveable, have the systems checked. It

is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service. See “Blind Spot Warning

(BSW)” (P.5-32) and “Intelligent Blind Spot

Intervention (I-BSI)” (P.5-40).

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking

brake and the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator:

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the light comes on when the

parking brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light:

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the light warns of a low brake

fluid level. If the light comes on while the

engine is running with the parking brake

not applied, stop the vehicle and perform

the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. If brake

fluid is low, add fluid and have the

system checked. It is recommended

you have this service performed by a

NISSAN dealer. (See “Brake fluid” (P.8-

9).)

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have

the warning system checked. It is

recommended you have this service

performed by a NISSAN dealer.

Low hydraulic pressure warning indica-

tor:

If the brake warning light illuminates

when the engine is running, or while

driving with the parking brake is released,

check the brake fluid level. If the brake

fluid level is sufficient, it may indicate low

hydraulic pressure in the brake booster. It

is recommended that you have the brake

system checked by a NISSAN dealer

promptly.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

indicator:

When the parking brake is released and

the brake fluid level is sufficient, if both

the brake warning light and the Anti-lock

Braking System (ABS) warning light illu-

minate, it may indicate the ABS is not

functioning properly. Have the brake

system checked, and if necessary re-

paired. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service. (See “Anti-

lock Braking System (ABS) warning light”

(P.2-11).)

WARNING

. Your brake system may not be

working properly if the warning

light is on. Driving could be dan-

gerous. If you judge it to be safe,

drive carefully to the nearest

service station for repairs. Other-

wise, have your vehicle towed

because driving it could be dan-

gerous.

. Pressing the brake pedal with the

engine stopped and/or low brake

fluid level may increase your

stopping distance and braking

will require greater pedal effort

as well as pedal travel.

. If the brake fluid level is below the

minimum or MIN mark on the

brake fluid reservoir, do not drive

until the brake system has been

checked. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

Charge warning light

If the light comes on while the engine is

running, it may indicate the charging

system is not functioning properly. Turn

the engine off and check the alternator

belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing or

if the light remains on, have your vehicle

serviced immediately. It is recommended

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the alter-

nator belt is loose, broken or miss-

ing.

Intelligent Distance Control (I-

DC) system warning light (orange; if

so equipped)

This light comes on if there is a malfunc-

tion in the Intelligent Distance Control (I-

DC) system.

If the warning light illuminates, park the

vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off,

restart the engine, resume driving and

turn on the I-DC system again.

If it is not possible to turn on the system

or the warning light stays on, it may

indicate that the system is malfunction-

ing. Although the vehicle is still drive-

able under normal conditions, have the

vehicle checked. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

See “Intelligent Distance Control (I-DC)”

(P.5-85).

Engine oil pressure warning

light

This light warns of low engine oil pres-

sure. If the light flickers or comes on

during normal driving, pull off the road in

a safe area, stop the engine immediately

and call a NISSAN dealer or other author-

ized repair shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light is

not designed to indicate a low oil level.

Use the dipstick to check the oil level.

(See “Engine oil” (P.8-6).)

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine

oil pressure warning light on could

cause serious damage to the engine

almost immediately. Such damage is

not covered by warranty. Turn off the

engine as soon as it is safe to do so.

Instruments and controls 2-13

2-14 Instruments and controls

Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) warn-

ing light (4WD models)

The warning light comes on when the

ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-

tion. It turns off soon after the engine is

started.

If the 4WD system malfunctions, or the

diameter of the front and the rear wheels

are different, the warning light will either

remain illuminated or blink. (See “NISSAN

all-mode 4WD®” (P.5-116).)

CAUTION

. If the warning light comes on

while driving there may be a

malfunction in the 4WD system.

Reduce the vehicle speed and

have your vehicle checked as

soon as possible. It is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

. If the 4WD warning light turns on

when driving on dry or hard

surfaced roads:

— in the 4H(I) position, shift the

4WD shift switch to AUTO

— in the 4L(O) position, stop the

vehicle and shift the transmis-

sion shift lever to the N (Neu-

tral) position and shift the

4WD shift switch to AUTO

. If the warning light is still on after

the above operations, have your

vehicle checked as soon as pos-

sible. It is recommended you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

system warning light (orange)

This light comes on if there is a malfunc-

tion in the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

system.

If the warning light comes on, park the

vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off,

restart the engine, resume driving and set

the ICC system again.

If it is not possible to set the system or

the indicator stays on, it may indicate

that the system is malfunctioning.

Although the vehicle is still driveable

under normal conditions, have the ve-

hicle checked. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Intelligent Key warning light

After the ignition switch is placed in the

ON position, this light comes on for about

2 seconds and then turns off.

This light warns of a malfunction with the

Intelligent Key system.

If the light comes on while the engine is

stopped, it may be impossible to start the

engine. If the light comes on while the

engine is running, you can drive the

vehicle. However in these cases, have

the system checked as soon as possible.

It is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

indicator light (orange; if so

equipped)

When the ignition switch is placed in the

ON position, the light will come on in

orange, turn green, and then turn off. This

indicates that the Lane Departure Warn-

ing (LDW) and Intelligent Lane Interven-

tion (I-LI) systems are operational.

While the LDW and/or I-LI system is on,

the light will blink in orange and a

warning chime will sound if the vehicle is

traveling close to either the left or the

right of a traveling lane with detectable

lane markers.

If the light comes on in orange and

remains on, it may indicate that the LDW

and I-LI systems are not functioning

properly. Although the vehicle is still

driveable, have the systems checked. It

is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

See “Lane Departure Warning (LDW)/In-

telligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)” (P.5-23).

Low tire pressure warning

light

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that

monitors the tire pressure of all tires

except the spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns

of low tire pressure or indicates that the

TPMS is not functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the

ON position, this light illuminates for

about 1 second and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning:

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the warning light will illuminate.

A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning also

appears in the vehicle information dis-

play. If you select the tire pressure in-

formation in the center display, the Low

Pressure information will be displayed.

The tire pressure for each tire will also

be displayed.

When the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates, you should stop and adjust

the tire pressure to the recommended

COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label. The low tire

pressure warning light does not automa-

tically turn off when the tire pressure is

adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the

recommended pressure, the vehicle must

be driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25

km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off

the low tire pressure warning light. Use a

tire pressure gauge to check the tire

pressure.

The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning ap-

pears each time the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position as long as the

low tire pressure warning light remains

illuminated.

For additional information, see “Vehicle

information display” (P.2-20), “Tire Pres-

sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.5-5)

and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) ” (P.6-3).

TPMS malfunction:

If the TPMS is not functioning properly,

the low tire pressure warning light will

flash for approximately 1 minute when the

ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-

tion. The light will remain on after 1

minute. Have the system checked. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service. The CHECK TIRE PRES-

SURE warning does not appear if the low

tire pressure warning light illuminates to

indicate a TPMS malfunction.

For additional information, see “Tire Pres-

sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.5-5).

WARNING

. If the light does not illuminate

with the ignition switch placed in

the ON position, have the vehicle

checked as soon as possible. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

. If the light illuminates or Low

Pressure information is displayed

on the monitor screen while driv-

ing, avoid sudden steering man-

euvers or abrupt braking, reduce

vehicle speed, pull off the road to

a safe location and stop the

vehicle as soon as possible. Driv-

ing with under-inflated tires may

permanently damage the tires

and increase the likelihood of tire

failure. Serious vehicle damage

could occur and may lead to an

Instruments and controls 2-15

2-16 Instruments and controls

accident and could result in ser-

ious personal injury. Check the

tire pressure for all four tires.

Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label to turn the low

tire pressure warning light OFF. If

the light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire

pressure, a tire may be flat or

the TPMS may be malfunctioning.

If you have a flat tire, replace it

with a spare tire as soon as

possible. If no tire is flat and all

tires are properly inflated, it is

recommended you consult a

NISSAN dealer.

. Since the spare tire is not

equipped with the TPMS, when a

spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, the TPMS will not

function and the low tire pressure

warning light will flash for ap-

proximately 1 minute. The light

will remain on after 1 minute.

Have your tires replaced and/or

TPMS system reset as soon as

possible. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for these

services.

. Replacing tires with those not

originally specified by NISSAN

could affect the proper operation

of the TPMS.

CAUTION

. The TPMS is not a substitute for

the regular tire pressure check.

Be sure to check the tire pressure

regularly.

. If the vehicle is being driven at

speeds of less than 16 MPH (25

km/h), the TPMS may not operate

correctly.

. Be sure to install the specified

size of tires to the four wheels

correctly.

Master warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the master warning light illumi-

nates if any of the following are displayed

on the vehicle information display:

. No key warning

. Low fuel warning

. Low washer fluid warning

. Parking brake release warning

. Door/liftgate open warning

. Front radar obstruction warning

. Headlight warning

. Loose fuel cap warning

. Check tire pressure warning

. Intelligent Back-up Intervention (I-BI)

not available warning (if so equipped)

. Intelligent Back-up Intervention (I-BI)

malfunction warning (if so equipped)

. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)

system warning

. Extended storage fuse warning (if so

equipped)

See “Vehicle information display” (P.2-20).

Seat belt warning light and

chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten

seat belts. The light illuminates whenever

the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, and will remain illuminated until

the driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the

same time, the chime will sound for about

6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is

securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light for the front

passenger will illuminate if the seat belt is

not fastened when the front passenger’s

seat is occupied. For approximately 5

seconds after the ignition switch is placed

in the ON position, the system does not

activate the warning light for the front

passenger.

See “Seat belts” (P.1-20) for precautions on

seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bag warning

light

After placing the ignition switch in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warn-

ing light will illuminate. The supplemental

air bag warning light will turn off after

about 7 seconds if the air bag and/or

pretensioner systems are operational.

If any of the following conditions occur,

the air bag and/or pretensioner systems

needs servicing.

. The supplemental air bag warning

light remains on after approximately

7 seconds.

. The supplemental air bag warning

light flashes intermittently.

. The supplemental air bag warning

light does not come on at all.

It is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for these services.

Unless checked and repaired, the supple-

mental restraint system (air bag system)

and/or the pretensioners may not func-

tion properly.

For additional information, see “Supple-

mental restraint system” (P.1-54).

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning

light is on, it could mean that the

front air bag, side air bag, curtain air

bag systems and/or pretensioner

systems will not operate in an acci-

dent. To help avoid injury to yourself

or others, have your vehicle checked.

It is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) warning light illuminates and then

turns off.

The light will blink when the VDC system

or the traction control system is operat-

ing, thus alerting the driver that the

vehicle is nearing its traction limits. The

road surface may be slippery.

When the VDC warning light illuminates

when the VDC system is turned on, this

light alerts the driver to the fact that the

VDC system’s fail-safe mode is operating,

for example the VDC or hill start assist

system may not be functioning properly.

Have the system checked. It is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service. If a malfunction occurs in the

system, the VDC system function will be

canceled but the vehicle is still driveable.

For additional information, see “Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) system” (P.5-133).

INDICATOR LIGHTS

Automatic Transmission (AT)

position indicator light

When the ignition switch is placed in the

ON position, the indicator shows the shift

lever position.

In the manual shift mode, when the

transmission does not shift to the se-

lected gear due to a transmission protec-

tion mode, the AT position indicator light

will blink and a buzzer will sound.

See “Automatic transmission” (P.5-18) for

further details.

Instruments and controls 2-17

2-18 Instruments and controls

Intelligent Blind Spot Inter-

vention (I-BSI) ON indicator light

(green; if so equipped)

The light comes on in green when the

Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI)

system is turned on. The light turns off

when the system is turned off.

NOTE:

This light is common with the BSW/I-BSI

system warning light (orange). (See

“Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/Intelligent

Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) system

warning light” (P.2-12).)

For more details, see “Intelligent Blind

Spot Intervention (I-BSI)” (P.5-40).

Check suspension indicator

light

When the ignition switch is placed in the

ON position, the light comes on for 2

seconds.

Exterior light indicator

This indicator illuminates when the head-

light switch is turned to the AUTO,

position and the front parking lights,

instrument panel lights, rear combination

lights, license plate lights or headlights

are on. The indicator turns off when these

lights are turned off.

Front fog light indicator light

(if so equipped)

The front fog light indicator light illumi-

nates when the front fog lights are on.

(See “Fog light switch” (P.2-41).)

Front passenger air bag sta-

tus light

The front passenger air bag status light

(

) located on the instrument panel will

be lit and the passenger front air bag will

be OFF depending on how the front

passenger seat is being used.

For front passenger air bag status light

operation, see “NISSAN Advanced Air Bag

System (front seats)” (P.1-60).

High beam indicator light

This light comes on when the headlight

high beam is on and goes out when the

low beam is selected.

Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-

LI) ON indicator light (green; if so

equipped)

The light comes on in green when the

Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system

is turned on. The light turns off when the

system is turned off.

NOTE:

This light is common with the Lane

Departure Warning (LDW) indicator light

(orange). (See “Lane Departure Warning

(LDW) indicator light” (P.2-14).)

For more details, see “Lane Departure

Warning (LDW)/Intelligent Lane Interven-

tion (I-LI)” (P.5-23).

Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL)

If the malfunction indicator light comes

on steady or blinks while the engine is

running, it may indicate a potential emis-

sion control malfunction.

The malfunction indicator light may also

come on steady if the fuel-filler cap is

loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out

of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler

cap is installed and closed tightly, and

that the vehicle has at least 3 US gallons

(14 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light

should turn off if no other potential

emission control system malfunction ex-

ists.

If this indicator light remains on for 20

seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds

when the engine is not running, it indi-

cates that the vehicle is not ready for an

emission control system inspection/

maintenance test. (See “Readiness for

Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test” (P.10-

32).)

Operation:

The malfunction indicator light will come

on in one of two ways:

. Malfunction indicator light on steady

— An emission control system mal-

function has been detected. Check

the fuel-filler cap if the LOOSE FUEL

CAP warning appears in the vehicle

information display. If the fuel-filler

cap is loose or missing, tighten or

install the cap and continue to drive

the vehicle. The

light should turn

off after a few driving trips. If the

light does not turn off after a few

driving trips, have the vehicle in-

spected. It is recommended you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service. You

do not need to have your vehicle

towed to the dealer.

. Malfunction indicator light blinking —

An engine misfire has been detected

which may damage the emission

control system.

To reduce or avoid emission control

system damage:

1) Do not drive at speeds above 45

MPH (72 km/h).

2) Avoid hard acceleration or decel-

eration.

3) Avoid steep uphill grades.

4) If possible, reduce the amount of

cargo being hauled or towed.

The malfunction indicator light may

stop blinking and remain on.

Have the vehicle inspected. It is re-

commended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service. You do not need to

have your vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without

having the emission control system

checked and repaired as necessary

could lead to poor driveability, re-

duced fuel economy, and possible

damage to the emission control sys-

tem.

Security indicator light

The light blinks when the ignition switch

is in the ACC, OFF and LOCK position. This

function indicates the security system

equipped on the vehicle is operational.

If the security system is malfunctioning,

this light will remain on while the ignition

switch is in the ON position. For additional

information, see “Security systems” (P.2-

30).

SNOW mode indicator light

When selecting SNOW mode while the

engine is running, this light will illuminate.

(See “SNOW mode” (P.5-127).)

TOW mode indicator light

This light will illuminate when the TOW

MODE is selected while the engine is

running. (See “TOW mode” (P.5-126).)

Turn signal/hazard indicator

lights

The light flashes when the turn signal

switch lever or hazard switch is turned on.

Instruments and controls 2-19

2-20 Instruments and controls

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

off indicator light

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) off indicator light illuminates and

then turns off.

The light comes on when the VDC off

switch is pushed to OFF. This indicates

that the VDC system is not operating.

When the 4L position is selected with the

Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) shift switch, the

VDC system is disabled and the VDC off

indicator light illuminates. (4WD models)

For additional information, see “Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) system” (P.5-133).

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Key reminder chime

A chime will sound if the driver side door

is opened while the ignition switch is

placed in the ACC position. Make sure

the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position, and take the Intelligent Key with

you when leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime

A chime will sound when the driver side

door is opened with the light switch in the

or position and the ignition

switch in the ACC, OFF or LOCK position.

Turn the light switch off when you leave

the vehicle.

Parking brake reminder chime

The chime will sound if the vehicle is

driven at more than 4 MPH (7 km/h) with

the parking brake applied. Stop the vehi-

cle and release the parking brake.

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear

warnings. When a brake pad requires

replacement, it will make a high pitched

scraping sound when the vehicle is in

motion. This scraping sound will first

occur only when the brake pedal is

depressed. After more wear of the brake

pad, the sound will always be heard even

if the brake pedal is not depressed. Have

the brakes checked as soon as possible if

the warning sound is heard.

SIC4379

The vehicle information display located

between the speedometer and odometer,

and shows the indicators for the driving

systems, Intelligent Key operation and

various warnings and information.

For detailed information about each sys-

tem, see the following sections:

. Automatic Transmission (AT)

— “Warning lights, indicator lights and

audible reminders” (P.2-10).

— “Driving the vehicle” (P.5-17).

. Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)

— “NISSAN all-mode 4WD®” (P.5-116).

. Intelligent Back-up Intervention (I-BI)

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

— “Intelligent Back-up Intervention (I-

BI)” (P.5-53).

. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

— “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)”

(P.5-63).

. Intelligent Distance Control (I-DC)

— “Intelligent Distance Control (I-DC)”

(P.5-85).

. Intelligent Key system

— “Intelligent Key system” (P.3-7).

— “Push-button ignition switch” (P.5-

13).

. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)

— “Automatic Emergency Braking

(AEB)” (P.5-98).

. Intelligent Forward Collision Warning

(I-FCW)

— “Intelligent Forward Collision Warn-

ing (I-FCW)” (P.5-106).

Instruments and controls 2-21

2-22 Instruments and controls

JVI1894X

OPERATIONAL INDICATORS

1. Engine start operation indicator

This indicator appears when the shift

lever is in the P (Park) position.

This indicator means that the engine will

start by pushing the ignition switch with

the brake pedal depressed.

2. NO KEY warning

This warning appears in either of the

following conditions.

No key inside the vehicle:

The warning appears when the door is

closed with the Intelligent Key left outside

the vehicle and the ignition switch in the

ACC or ON position. Make sure that the

Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.

Unregistered Intelligent Key:

The warning appears when the ignition

switch is pushed from the LOCK position

and the Intelligent Key cannot be recog-

nized by the system. You cannot start the

engine with an unregistered key. Use the

registered Intelligent Key.

See “Intelligent Key system” (P.3-7) for

more details.

3. SHIFT “P” warning

This warning appears when the ignition

switch is pushed to stop the engine with

the shift lever in any position except the P

(Park) position.

If this warning appears, move the shift

lever to the P (Park) position or push the

ignition switch to the ON position.

An inside warning chime will also sound.

(See “Intelligent Key system” (P.3-7).)

4. “PUSH” warning

This warning appears when the shift lever

is moved to the P (Park) position with the

ignition switch in the ACC position after

the SHIFT “P” warning appears.

To push the ignition switch to the OFF

position, perform the following proce-

dure:

SHIFT “P” warning ? (Move the shift lever

to “P”) ? PUSH warning ? (Push the

ignition switch ? ignition switch position

is turned to ON) ? PUSH warning ?

(Push the ignition switch ? ignition

switch position is turned to OFF)

5. Intelligent Key battery discharge

indicator

This indicator appears when the Intelli-

gent Key battery is running out of power.

If this indicator appears, replace the

battery with a new one. (See “Intelligent

Key battery replacement” (P.8-21).)

6. Engine start operation for Intelli-

gent Key system indicator

This indicator appears when the Intelli-

gent Key battery is running out of power

and when the Intelligent Key System and

vehicle are not communicating normally.

If this indicator appears, touch the igni-

tion switch with the Intelligent Key while

depressing the brake pedal. (See “Intelli-

gent Key battery discharge” (P.5-15).)

7. Remote engine start indicator (if

so equipped)

This indicator appears when the engine

has been started using the remote engine

start function. To start the vehicle, de-

press the brake pedal and place the

ignition switch in the ON position.

For more details, see “Remote engine

start” (P.3-19).

Instruments and controls 2-23

2-24 Instruments and controls

8. Parking brake release warning

This warning appears when the vehicle

speed is above 4 MPH (7 km/h) and the

parking brake is applied.

9. Low fuel warning

This warning appears when the fuel level

in the tank is getting low. Refuel as soon

as it is convenient, preferably before the

fuel gauge reaches the 0 (Empty) position.

There is a small reserve of fuel remain-

ing in the tank when the fuel gauge

reaches the 0 (Empty) position.

10. Low washer fluid warning

This warning appears when the washer

tank fluid is at a low level. Add washer

fluid as necessary. (See “Window washer

fluid” (P.8-10).)

11. Door/liftgate open warning

(ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion)

This warning appears if any of the doors

and/or the liftgate are open or not closed

securely. The vehicle icon indicates which

door or the liftgate is open on the display.

12. Loose fuel cap warning

This warning appears when the fuel-filler

cap is not tightened correctly after the

vehicle has been refueled. (See “Fuel-filler

cap” (P.3-27).)

13. Check tire pressure warning

This warning appears when the low tire

pressure warning light in the meter

illuminates and low tire pressure is de-

tected. The warning appears each time

the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position as long as the low tire pressure

warning light remains illuminated. If this

warning appears, stop the vehicle and

adjust the tire pressure to the recom-

mended COLD tire pressure shown on the

Tire and Loading Information label. (See

“Low tire pressure warning light” (P.2-15)

and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” (P.5-5).)

14. Extended storage fuse warning

(if so equipped)

This warning may appear if the extended

storage fuse switch is not pushed in

(switched on). When this warning ap-

pears, push in (switch on) the extended

storage fuse switch to turn off the warn-

ing. For more information, see “Extended

storage fuse switch” (P.8-21).

15. Intelligent Back-up Intervention

(I-BI) not available warning (if so

equipped)

This warning appears when the Intelli-

gent Back-up Intervention (I-BI) system is

temporarily not available.

For more details, see “Intelligent Back-up

Intervention (I-BI)” (P.5-53).

16. Intelligent Back-up Intervention

(I-BI) malfunction warning (if so

equipped)

This warning appears when the Intelli-

gent Back-up Intervention (I-BI) system is

not functioning properly.

For more details, see “Intelligent Back-up

Intervention (I-BI)” (P.5-53).

17. Headlight warning

This warning appears if the LED head-

lights are malfunctioning. It is recom-

mended you have the system checked

by a NISSAN dealer.

18. Front radar obstruction warning

This warning appears when the sensor

area of the front bumper is covered with

dirt or is obstructed, making it impossible

to detect a vehicle ahead.

The following systems will be automati-

cally canceled.

. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system

. Intelligent Distance Control (I-DC) sys-

tem (if so equipped)

. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)

system

. Intelligent Forward Collision Warning

(I-FCW) system

For more details, see “Intelligent Cruise

Control (ICC)” (P.5-63), “Intelligent Distance

Control (I-DC)” (P.5-85), “Automatic Emer-

gency Braking (AEB)” (P.5-98) or “Intelli-

gent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)”

(P.5-106).

19. “TIMER” indicator

This indicator appears when the set

“TIMER” indicator activates. You can set

the time for up to 6 hours. (See “Trip

computer” (P.2-28).)

20. Low outside temperature

warning

This warning appears if the outside tem-

perature is below 37°F (3°C). The warning

can be set not to be displayed. (See “Trip

computer” (P.2-28).)

21. Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) shift

indicator (4WD models)

This indicator shows the Four-Wheel

Drive (4WD) driving mode (AUTO, 4HI or

4LO) that is selected by the 4WD shift

switch. (See “NISSAN all-mode 4WD®” (P.5-

116).)

22. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

system MAIN switch indicator

The Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) sys-

tem main switch indicator (CRUISE) is

displayed when the ICC main switch is

pushed. When the main switch is pushed

again, the indicator disappears. While the

CRUISE indicator is displayed, the ICC

system is operational.

The cruise control set indicator (SET) is

displayed while the vehicle is controlled

by the conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode of the ICC system.

For more details, see “Intelligent Cruise

Control (ICC)” (P.5-63).

23. Intelligent Distance Control (I-

DC) system switch indicator (if so

equipped)

The indicator is displayed when the

Intelligent Distance Control (I-DC) system

switch is pushed on. When the switch is

pushed again, the indicator disappears.

While the indicator is displayed, the I-DC

system is operational. (See “Intelligent

Distance Control (I-DC)” (P.5-85).)

24. Intelligent Back-up Intervention

(I-BI) system indicator (if so

equipped)

The I-BI ON indicator (SYSTEM ON) ap-

pears when the shift lever is in the R

(Reverse) position with the Intelligent

Back-up Intervention (I-BI) system turned

on.

If the I-BI system is turned off, the I-BI OFF

indicator (SYSTEM OFF) appears.

For more details, see “Intelligent Back-up

Intervention (I-BI)” (P.5-53).

25. Rear door alert is activated

When the rear door alert system is

enabled, this message appears when the

rear door alert system is active and can

remind the driver to check the rear seat.

NOTE:

This system is disabled until a driver

enables it using the rear door alert

switch.

For more details, see “Rear door alert”

(P.2-48).

Instruments and controls 2-25

2-26 Instruments and controls

26. Check back seat for all articles

When the rear door alert system is

enabled, this message appears when the

vehicle comes to a complete stop, the

shift lever is moved from the D (Drive) or R

(Reverse) position to P (Park) position, and

the driver exits the vehicle. This message

alerts the driver, after a period of time, to

check for items in the rear seat after the

audible alert has been provided.

NOTE:

This rear door alert system is disabled

until a driver enables it using the rear

door alert switch.

For more details, see “Rear door alert”

(P.2-48).

SIC4325

MAINTENANCE INDICATORS

1. Engine oil replacement indicator

This indicator appears when the custo-

mer set time comes for changing the

engine oil. You can set or reset the

distance for changing the engine oil.

(See “Trip computer” (P.2-28).)

2. Oil filter replacement indicator

This indicator appears when the custo-

mer set time comes for replacing the oil

filter. You can set or reset the distance for

replacing the oil filter. (See “Trip compu-

ter” (P.2-28).)

3. Tire replacement indicator

This indicator appears when the custo-

mer set distance comes for replacing

tires. You can set or reset the distance

for replacing tires. (See “Trip computer”

(P.2-28).)

WARNING

The tire replacement indicator is not

a substitute for regular tire checks,

including tire pressure checks. See

“Changing wheels and tires” (P.8-37).

Many factors including tire inflation,

alignment, driving habits and road

conditions affect tire wear and when

tires should be replaced. Setting the

tire replacement indicator for a cer-

tain driving distance does not mean

your tires will last that long. Use the

tire replacement indicator as a guide

only and always perform regular tire

checks. Failure to perform regular

tire checks, including tire pressure

checks could result in tire failure.

Serious vehicle damage could occur

and may lead to a collision, which

could result in serious personal in-

jury or death.

4. “OTHER” indicator

This indicator appears when the custo-

mer set time comes for replacing items

other than the engine oil, oil filter and

tires. You can set or reset the distance for

replacing the items. (See “Trip computer”

(P.2-28).)

More maintenance reminders are also

available on the center display. (See

NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.)

SIC4494

Instruments and controls 2-27

2-28 Instruments and controls

SIC4420

TRIP COMPUTER

Switches for the trip computer are lo-

cated on the right side of the combina-

tion meter panel. To operate the trip

computer, push the switches as shown

above.

switch

When the ignition switch is pushed to the

ON position, modes of the trip computer

can be selected by pushing the

switch .

Each time the

switch is pushed, the

display will change as follows:

Current fuel consumption ? Average fuel

consumption and speed ? Elapsed time

and trip odometer ? Distance to empty

(dte) ? Outside air temperature (ICY) ?

Setting ? Warning check

1. Current and average fuel con-

sumption

The current and average fuel consump-

tion mode shows the current and aver-

age fuel consumption.

2. Average fuel consumption (MPG

or l (liter)/100 km) and speed (MPH

or km/h)

Fuel consumption:

The average fuel consumption mode

shows the average fuel consumption

since the last reset. Resetting is done by

pushing the

switch for longer than

1 second. (The average speed is also reset

at the same time.)

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

At about the first 1/3 mile (500 m) after a

reset, the display shows “——”.

Speed:

The average speed mode shows the

average vehicle speed since the last reset.

Resetting is done by pushing the

switch for longer than 1 second. (The

average fuel consumption is also reset at

the same time.)

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

The first 30 seconds after a reset, the

display shows “——”.

3. Elapsed time and trip odometer

(MILES or km)

Elapsed time:

The elapsed time mode shows the time

since the last reset. The displayed time

can be reset by pushing the

switch

for longer than 1 second. (The trip od-

ometer is also reset at the same time.)

Trip odometer:

The trip odometer mode shows the total

distance the vehicle has been driven since

the last reset. Resetting is done by push-

ing the

switch for longer than 1

second. (The elapsed time is also reset at

the same time.)

4. Distance to empty (dte — MILES

or km)

The distance to empty (dte) mode pro-

vides you with an estimation of the

distance that can be driven before refuel-

ing. The dte is constantly being calcu-

lated, based on the amount of fuel in the

fuel tank and the actual fuel consump-

tion.

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

The dte mode includes a low range

warning feature. If the fuel level is low, the

warning is displayed on the screen.

When the fuel level drops even lower, the

dte display will change to “——”.

. If the amount of fuel added is small,

the display just before the ignition

switch is pushed to the OFF position

may continue to be displayed.

. When driving uphill or rounding

curves, the fuel in the tank shifts,

which may momentarily change the

display.

5. Outside air temperature (ICY — °F

or °C)

The outside air temperature is displayed

in °F or °C in the range of −22 to 131°F (−30

to 55°C).

The outside air temperature mode in-

cludes a low temperature warning fea-

ture. If the outside air temperature is

below 37°F (3°C), the warning is displayed

on the screen.

The outside temperature sensor is lo-

cated in front of the radiator. The sensor

may be affected by road or engine heat,

wind directions and other driving condi-

tions. The display may differ from the

actual outside temperature or the tem-

perature displayed on various signs or

billboards.

6. Setting

Setting is available while the engine is

running.

Setting cannot be made while driving. A

message “SETTING CAN ONLY BE OPER-

ATED WHEN STOPPED” is also displayed

on the vehicle information display.

The

switch and switch are

used in the setting mode to select and

decide a menu.

SKIP:

Push the

switch to move to the

warning check mode.

Push the

switch to select other

menus.

ALERT:

There are 3 submenus under the alert

menu.

. BACK

Select this submenu to return to the

top page of the setting mode.

. TIMER

Select this submenu to specify when

the “TIMER” indicator activates.

. ICY

Select this submenu to display the low

outside temperature warning.

MAINTENANCE:

There are 5 submenus under the main-

tenance menu.

. BACK

Select this submenu to return to the

top page of the setting mode.

. TIRE

Select this submenu to set or reset the

distance for replacing tires.

. FILTER

Select this submenu to set or reset the

distance for replacing the oil filter.

. OIL

Select this submenu to set or reset the

distance for changing the engine oil.

. OTHER

Select this submenu and set or reset

the distance for replacing items other

than the engine oil, oil filter and tires.

OPTIONS:

There are 4 submenus under the display

menu.

. BACK

Select this submenu to return to the

top page of the setting mode.

. LANGUAGE

Select this submenu to choose Eng-

lish, French or Spanish for display.

Instruments and controls 2-29

2-30 Instruments and controls

. UNIT

Select this submenu to choose the

unit.

. EFFECTS

Select this submenu to turn on and off

the needle sweep function when

starting the engine.

7. Warning check

SKIP:

Push the

switch to move to the

warning check mode.

Push the

switch to select other

menus.

DETAIL:

This item is available only when a warning

is displayed.

Select this menu to see the details of

warnings.

SIC2133

Your vehicle has two types of security

systems, as follows:

. Vehicle security system

. NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

The security condition will be shown by

the security indicator light.

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides

visual and audio alarm signals if someone

opens the doors, hood, or liftgate when

the system is armed. It is not, however, a

motion detection type system that acti-

vates when a vehicle is moved or when a

vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but

cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the

theft of interior or exterior vehicle com-

ponents in all situations. Always secure

your vehicle even if parking for a brief

period. Never leave your Intelligent Key(s)

in the vehicle, and always lock it when

unattended. Be aware of your surround-

ings, and park in secure, well-lit areas

whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protec-

tion, such as component locks, identifica-

tion markers, and tracking systems, are

available at auto supply stores and speci-

alty shops. Your NISSAN dealer may also

offer such equipment. Check with your

insurance company to see if you may be

eligible for discounts for various theft

protection features.

SECURITY SYSTEMS

SIC2045

How to arm the vehicle security

system

1. Close all windows.

The system can be armed even if the

windows are open.

2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF

position.

3. Remove the Intelligent Key from the

vehicle.

4. Close all doors, hood and liftgate. Lock

all doors. The doors can be locked

with the Intelligent Key, door handle

request switch, power door lock

switch or mechanical key.

5. Confirm that the security indicator

light comes on. The security indicator

light stays on for about 30 seconds.

The vehicle security system is now

pre-armed. After about 30 seconds

the vehicle security system automati-

cally shifts into the armed phase. The

security light begins to flash once

every approximately 3 seconds. If,

during this 30-second pre-arm time

period, the door is unlocked, or the

ignition switch is pushed to ACC or

ON, the system will not arm.

Even when the driver and/or passen-

gers are in the vehicle, the system will

activate with all doors, hood, and lift-

gate locked with the ignition switch in

the LOCK position. When pushing the

ignition switch to the ACC or ON posi-

tion, the system will be released.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the

following alarm:

. The headlights blink and the horn

sounds intermittently.

. The alarm automatically turns off

after approximately 50 seconds. How-

ever, the alarm reactivates if the

vehicle is tampered with again.

The alarm is activated by:

. Unlocking the door or opening the

liftgate without using the button on

the Intelligent Key, the door handle

request switch or the mechanical key.

(Even if the door is opened by releas-

ing the door inside lock knob, the

alarm will activate.)

. Opening the hood.

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm will stop when a door is

unlocked by pushing the unlock button

on the Intelligent Key, the door handle

request switch or using the mechanical

key, or when the ignition switch is pushed

to the ACC or ON position.

If the system does not operate as

described above, it is recommended

you have it checked by a NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYS-

TEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

will not allow the engine to start without

the use of the registered Intelligent Key.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Instruments and controls 2-31

2-32 Instruments and controls

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference,

and (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Ca-

nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) this device may not

cause interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation of the device.

SIC2045

Security indicator light

The security indicator light is located on

the meter panel. It indicates the status of

the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.

The light blinks after the ignition switch

was in the ACC, OFF and LOCK position.

This function indicates the security sys-

tems equipped on the vehicle are opera-

tional.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

is malfunctioning, this light will remain on

while the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

If the light still remains on and/or the

engine will not start, seek service for

the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

as soon as possible. Please bring all

registered keys that you have. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer

solution may freeze on the window

and obscure your vision which may

lead to an accident. Warm the win-

dow with the defroster before you

wash the window.

CAUTION

. Do not operate the washer con-

tinuously for more than 30 sec-

onds.

. Do not operate the washer if the

reservoir tank is empty.

. Do not fill the window washer

reservoir tank with washer fluid

concentrates at full strength.

Some methyl alcohol based

washer fluid concentrates may

permanently stain the grille if

spilled while filling the window

washer reservoir tank.

. Pre-mix washer fluid concen-

trates with water to the manu-

facturer’s recommended levels

before pouring the fluid into the

window washer reservoir tank. Do

not use the window washer re-

servoir tank to mix the washer

fluid concentrate and water.

If the wiper operation is interrupted by

snow or ice, the wiper may stop moving

to protect its motor. If this occurs, turn

the wiper switch to the OFF position

and remove the snow or ice that is on

and around the wiper arms. In approxi-

mately 1 minute, turn the switch on

again to operate the wiper.

JVI1010X

Type A (if so equipped)

JVI1011X

Type B (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-33

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

2-34 Instruments and controls

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER

OPERATION

The windshield wiper and washer oper-

ates when the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper

at the following speed:

INT (Type A) (if so equipped) — intermit-

tent operation can be adjusted by turning

the knob toward

(Slower) or (Faster).

When the speed sensing wiper interval

function is turned on, the intermittent

operation speed varies in accordance

with the vehicle speed. (For example,

when the vehicle speed is high, the

intermittent operation speed will be fas-

ter.) To turn this function on and off, see

NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.

AUTO (Type B) (if so equipped) — For

models with the rain-sensing auto wiper

system, see “Rain-sensing auto wiper

system” (P.2-34).

LO — continuous low speed operation

HI — continuous high speed operation

MIST — one sweep operation of the wiper

Pull the lever toward you to operate the

washer. Then the wiper will also operate

several times.

To operate the washer, pull the lever

toward the back of the vehicle

until

the desired amount of washer fluid is

spread on the windshield. The wiper will

automatically operate several times.

Wiper drip wipe system:

The wiper will also operate once about 3

seconds after the washer and wiper are

operated. This operation is to wipe

washer fluid that has dripped on the

windshield.

JVI1013X

RAIN-SENSING AUTO WIPER SYS-

TEM (if so equipped)

The rain-sensing auto wiper system can

automatically turn on the wipers and

adjust the wiper speed depending on

the rainfall and the vehicle speed by using

the rain sensor located on the upper part

of the windshield.

To set the rain-sensing auto wiper sys-

tem, push the lever down to the AUTO

position

. The wiper will sweep once

while the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

The rain sensor sensitivity level can be

adjusted by turning the knob toward the

front

(High) or toward the rear (Low).

. High — High sensitive operation

. Low — Low sensitive operation

To turn the rain-sensing auto wiper

system off, push up the lever to the OFF

position, or pull down the lever to the LO

or HI position.

CAUTION

Do not touch the rain sensor and

around it when the wiper switch is in

the AUTO position and the ignition

switch is in the ON position. The

wipers may operate unexpectedly

and cause to an injury or may da-

mage a wiper.

. The rain-sensing auto wipers are

intended for use during rain. If the

switch is left in the AUTO position,

the wipers may operate unexpect-

edly when dirt, fingerprints, oil film

or insects are stuck on or around the

sensor. The wipers may also operate

when exhaust gas or moisture affect

the rain sensor.

. The rain-sensing auto wipers may

not operate if rain does not hit the

rain sensor even if it is raining.

. When the windshield glass is coated

with water repellent, the speed of

the rain-sensing auto wipers may be

higher even though the amount of

the rainfall is small.

. Be sure to turn off the rain-sensing

auto wiper system when you use a

car wash.

. Using genuine wiper blades is re-

commended for proper operation of

the rain-sensing auto wiper system.

(See “Windshield wiper blades” (P.8-

16) for wiper blade replacement.)

JVI1014X

Type A (if so equipped)

JVI1015X

Type B (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-35

2-36 Instruments and controls

REAR WINDOW WIPER AND WASHER

OPERATION

If the rear window wiper operation is

interrupted by snow etc., the wiper may

stop moving to protect its motor. If this

occurs, turn the wiper switch to OFF and

remove the snow etc. on and around

the wiper arms. After about 1 minute,

turn the switch ON again to operate the

wiper.

The rear window wiper and washer

operate when the ignition switch is in

the ON position.

Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF

position to operate the wiper.

Intermittent (INT) — intermittent opera-

tion (not adjustable)

Low (ON) — continuous low speed opera-

tion

Push the switch forward to operate the

washer. Then the wiper will also operate

several times.

SIC4385

To defog/defrost the rear window glass

and outside mirrors, start the engine and

push the switch

on. The indicator light

will come on. Push the switch again to

turn the defroster off.

It will automatically turn off in approxi-

mately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the

rear window, be careful not to

scratch or damage the rear window

defroster.

SIC4385

The windshield deicer switch (defroster

switch) operates when the ignition switch

is in the ON position.

The deicer is used to remove ice from the

windshield when a wiper is frozen to the

windshield.

When the switch

is pushed, the indica-

tor light

illuminates and the deicer

operates for approximately 15 minutes.

The rear window defroster will activate at

the same time. After the preset time has

passed, the deicer will turn off automati-

cally. To turn off the deicer manually,

push the deicer switch again, and the

indicator light turns off.

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE

MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH

WINDSHIELD DEICER SWITCH (if so

equipped)

CAUTION

. When operating the deicer con-

tinuously, be sure to start the

engine. Otherwise, it may cause

the battery to discharge.

. When cleaning the inner side of

the window, be careful not to

scratch or damage the electrical

conductors on the surface of the

window.

SIC3668

Type A (if so equipped)

JVI1505X

Type B (if so equipped)

HEADLIGHT SWITCH

Lighting

Turn the switch to the position:

The front parking, side marker, tail, license

plate and instrument lights will come on.

Turn the switch to the position:

Headlights will come on and all the other

lights remain on.

Instruments and controls 2-37

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

2-38 Instruments and controls

SIC3669

Intelligent Auto Headlight system

The Intelligent Auto Headlight system

allows the headlights to be set so they

turn on and off automatically.

To set the Intelligent Auto Headlight

system:

1. Make sure the headlight switch is in

the AUTO position

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON

position.

3. The Intelligent Auto Headlight system

automatically turns the headlights on

and off.

To turn the Intelligent Auto Headlight

system off, turn the headlight switch to

the OFF,

or position.

The Intelligent Auto Headlight system can

turn on the headlights automatically

when it is dark and turn off the headlights

when it is light.

The headlights will also be turned on

automatically at twilight or in rainy

weather (when the windshield wiper is

operated continuously).

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position and one of the doors is opened

and this condition is continued, the head-

lights remain on for 5 minutes.

Automatic headlights off delay:

You can keep the headlights on for up to

180 seconds after you place the ignition

switch in the OFF position and open any

door then close all the doors.

You can adjust the period of the auto-

matic headlights off delay from 0 seconds

(OFF) to 180 seconds. The factory default

setting is 45 seconds.

For automatic headlights off delay

setting, see NissanConnect® Owner’s

Manual.

SIC3784A

Be sure not to put anything on top of

the photo sensor

located on the top

of the instrument panel. The photo

sensor controls the Intelligent Auto

Headlight system; if it is covered, the

photo sensor reacts as if it is dark and

the headlights will illuminate.

SIC3670

Headlight beam select

To select the low beam, put the lever in

the neutral position as shown.

To select the high beam, push the lever

forward while the switch is in the

position. Pull it back to select the low

beam.

Pulling the lever toward you will flash the

headlight high beam even when the

headlight switch is in the OFF position.

Battery saver system

A chime will sound when the driver side

door is opened with the light switch in the

or position and the ignition

switch in the OFF or LOCK position.

When the headlight switch is in the

position while the ignition switch is in

the ON position, the lights will automati-

cally turn off after a period of time when

the ignition switch has been pushed to

the OFF position.

When the headlight switch remains in the

or position after the lights auto-

matically turn off, the lights will turn on

when the ignition switch is pushed to the

ON position.

CAUTION

. When you turn on the headlight

switch again after the lights auto-

matically turn off, the lights will

not turn off automatically. Be

sure to turn the light switch to

the OFF position when you leave

the vehicle for extended periods

of time, otherwise the battery will

be discharged.

. Never leave the light switch on

when the engine is not running

for extended periods of time even

if the headlights turn off auto-

matically.

Daytime running light system

The daytime running lights automatically

illuminate when the engine is started with

the parking brake released. The daytime

running lights operate with the headlight

switch in the OFF position or in the

position. Turn the headlight switch to the

position for full illumination when

driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before the

engine is started, the daytime running

lights do not illuminate. The daytime

running lights illuminate once the parking

brake is released. The daytime running

lights will remain on until the ignition

switch is pushed to the OFF position.

WARNING

When the daytime running light sys-

tem is active, tail lights on your

vehicle are not on. It is necessary at

dusk to turn on your headlights.

Failure to do so could cause an

accident injuring yourself and

others.

Instruments and controls 2-39

2-40 Instruments and controls

SIC3270

SIC4378

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CON-

TROL

The instrument brightness control switch

can be operated when the ignition switch

is in the ON position. When the switch is

operated, the vehicle information display

switches to the brightness adjustment

mode.

Push the upper switch

to brighten the

instrument panel lights. The bar

moves

to the + side. When reaching the max-

imum brightness, “MAX” appears on the

display

Push the lower switch

to dim the

instrument panel lights. The bar

moves

to the − side. When reaching the minimum

brightness, “MIN” appears on the display

. However, “MIN” does not appear during

the nighttime.

The vehicle information display returns to

the normal display under the following

conditions:

. when the instrument brightness con-

trol switch is not operated for more

than 5 seconds.

. when the

or switch on the

right side of the combination meter

panel is pushed.

SIC3671

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

Move the lever up or down to signal the

turning direction. When the turn is com-

pleted, the turn signals cancel automati-

cally.

Lane change signal

. Move the lever up or down until the

turn signal begins to flash, but the

lever does not latch, to signal a lane

change. Hold the lever until the lane

change is completed.

. Move the lever up or down until the

turn signal begins to flash, but the

lever does not latch, and release the

lever. The turn signal will automati-

cally flash three times.

Choose the appropriate method to signal

a lane change based on road and traffic

conditions.

SIC3672

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)

To turn the fog lights on, turn the head-

light switch to the

position, then turn

the switch to the

position. To turn

them off, turn the switch to the OFF

position.

The headlights must be on with the low

beams selected for the fog lights to

operate. The fog lights automatically turn

off when the high beam headlights are

selected.

Instruments and controls 2-41

2-42 Instruments and controls

SIC4401

The heated steering wheel system is

designed to operate only when the sur-

face temperature of the steering wheel is

below 68°F (20°C).

Push the heated steering wheel switch to

warm the steering wheel after the engine

starts. The indicator light

on the switch

will illuminate.

If the surface temperature of the steering

wheel is below 68°F (20°C), the system will

heat the steering wheel and cycle off and

on to maintain a temperature above 68°F

(20°C). The indicator light will remain on

as long as the system is on.

Push the switch again to turn the heated

steering wheel system off manually. The

indicator light will turn off.

NOTE:

If the surface temperature of the steer-

ing wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the

switch is turned on, the system will not

heat the steering wheel. This is not a

malfunction.

SIC4444

To sound the horn, push the center pad

area of the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing

so could affect proper operation of

the supplemental front air bag sys-

tem. Tampering with the supple-

mental front air bag system may

result in serious personal injury.

HEATED STEERING WHEEL (if so equipped)

HORN

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use

the seat heater if you or the occu-

pants cannot monitor elevated seat

temperatures or have an inability to

feel pain in body parts that contact

the seat. Use of the seat heater by

such people could result in serious

injury.

CAUTION

. The battery could run down if the

seat heater is operated while the

engine is not running.

. Do not use the seat heater for

extended periods or when no one

is using the seat.

. Do not put anything on the seat

which insulates heat, such as a

blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc.

Otherwise, the seat may become

overheated.

. Do not place anything hard or

heavy on the seat or pierce it with

a pin or similar object. This may

result in damage to the heater.

. Any liquid spilled on the heated

seat should be removed immedi-

ately with a dry cloth.

. When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, thinner, or any similar

materials.

. If any malfunctions are found or

the heated seat does not operate,

turn the switch off and have the

system checked. It is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

SIC2770

FRONT (if so equipped)

The front seats can be warmed by built-in

heaters. The switches located on the

instrument panel can be operated inde-

pendently of each other.

1. Start the engine.

2. Select heat range.

For high heat, push the HI (High)

side of the switch

For low heat, push the LO (Low) side

of the switch

The indicator light will illuminate

when the heater is on.

3. To turn off the heater, return the

switch to the level position. Make sure

Instruments and controls 2-43

HEATED SEATS

2-44 Instruments and controls

the indicator light turns off.

SIC2770

REAR (if so equipped)

The 2nd row outboard seats are warmed

by built-in heaters. The switches located

on the back side of the center console

can be operated independently of each

other.

1. Start the engine.

2. Select heat range.

For high heat, push the HI (High)

side of the switch.

For low heat, push the LO (Low) side

of the switch.

The indicator light in the switch

will

illuminate when the heater is on.

3. To turn off the heater, return the

switch to the level position. Make sure

the indicator light turns off.

The heater is controlled by a thermo-

stat, automatically turning the heater

on and off. The indicator light will

remain on as long as the switch is on.

When the vehicle’s interior is warmed,

or before you leave the vehicle, be

sure to turn off the switch.

SIC4334

The climate controlled seat warms up or

cools down the front seats by built-in

heaters or blowing cool air from the

surface of the seat. The switches located

on the instrument panel can be operated

independently of each other.

1. Start the engine.

2. Turn the control knob

to the heat

side

or to the cool side . The

indicator light

on the control knob

will illuminate.

3. Adjust the temperature using the

control knob

4. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed

or cooled, and/or before you leave the

vehicle, be sure to turn the control

knob to the OFF position (center). The

indicator light

on the control knob

goes off at the OFF position.

The climate controlled seat has air

filters. If the climate controlled seat is

not functioning properly, it may indi-

cate the air filters may be clogged. To

check the air filters for the climate

controlled seat, it is recommended

you visit a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use

the climate controlled seats if you or

the occupants cannot monitor seat

temperatures or have an inability to

feel pain in those body parts in

contact with the seat. Use of the

climate controlled seats by such

people could result in serious injury.

CAUTION

. The battery could run down if the

climate controlled seat is oper-

ated while the engine is not run-

ning.

. Do not use the climate controlled

seat for extended periods or

when no one is using the seat.

. Do not put anything on the seat

which insulates heat, such as a

blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc.

Otherwise, the seat may become

overheated.

. Do not place anything hard or

heavy on the seat or pierce it with

a pin or similar object. This may

result in damage to the climate

controlled seat.

. Any liquid spilled on the seat

should be removed immediately

with a dry cloth.

. The climate controlled seat has

an air filter. Do not operate cli-

mate controlled seat without an

air filter. This may result in da-

mage to the system.

. When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, thinner, or any similar

materials.

. If any malfunctions are found or

the climate controlled seat does

not operate, turn the switch off

and have the system checked. It

is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-45

CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS (if

so equipped)

2-46 Instruments and controls

SSD0956

The warning systems switch is used to

turn on and off the warning systems

(Lane Departure Warning (LDW) and Blind

Spot Warning (BSW) systems) that are

activated using the settings menu on

the center display.

When the warning systems switch is

turned off, the indicator

on the switch

is off. The indicator will also be off if all of

the warning systems are deactivated

using the settings menu.

The LDW system will sound a warning

chime and blink the Lane Departure

Warning (LDW) indicator light (orange) to

alert the driver if the vehicle is traveling

close to either the left or the right of a

traveling lane with detectable lane mar-

kers. (See “Lane Departure Warning

(LDW)/Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)”

(P.5-23).)

The BSW system will turn on the side

indicator lights, located next to the out-

side mirrors, if the radar sensors detect a

vehicle in the detection zone. If the turn

signal is activated in the direction of the

detected vehicle, a chime sounds twice

and the side indicator light will flash. (See

“Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” (P.5-32).)

SIC4454

For driving or starting the vehicle on

snowy roads or slippery areas, push on

the SNOW mode switch. The SNOW mode

indicator light will illuminate. When the

SNOW mode is activated, engine output is

controlled to avoid wheel spin.

Push off the SNOW mode for normal

driving.

WARNING SYSTEMS SWITCH (if so

equipped)

SNOW MODE SWITCH

SIC4474

TOW MODE should be used when pulling

a heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load.

Driving the vehicle in TOW MODE with no

trailer/load or light trailer/light load will

not cause any damage. However, fuel

economy may be reduced, and the trans-

mission/engine driving characteristics

may feel unusual.

Push the TOW MODE switch to activate

TOW MODE. The indicator light on the

TOW MODE switch illuminates when TOW

MODE is selected. Push the TOW MODE

switch again to turn TOW MODE OFF.

TOW MODE is automatically canceled

when the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF position.

SIC4455

The vehicle should be driven with the

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system on

for most driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the

VDC system reduces the engine output to

reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will

be reduced even if the accelerator is

depressed to the floor. If maximum en-

gine power is needed to free a stuck

vehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC

OFF switch. The

indicator will illumi-

nate.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart

the engine to turn on the system. (See

“Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system”

(P.5-133).)

Instruments and controls 2-47

TOW MODE SWITCH

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

OFF SWITCH

2-48 Instruments and controls

The rear door alert system functions

under certain conditions to indicate there

may be an object or passenger in the rear

seat(s). Check the seat(s) before exiting

the vehicle. The rear door alert system is

initially disabled. The driver can enable

the system using the rear door alert

switch. (See “Turning the rear door alert

system ON/OFF” (P.2-48).)

JVP0649X

Rear door alert switch

Rear door alert switch indicator light

switch

TURNING THE REAR DOOR ALERT

SYSTEM ON/OFF

To turn on the rear door alert system,

push the rear door alert switch

. The

rear door alert switch indicator light

will

illuminate.

To turn off the system, push the rear door

REAR DOOR ALERT

alert switch again. The rear door alert

switch indicator light will go off.

When the system is turned ON:

. The system is activated when a rear

door is opened and closed within 10

minutes of the vehicle being driven.

For additional information, refer to

“System operation” (P.2-49).

. If a rear door is opened and closed but

the vehicle is not driven within ap-

proximately 10 minutes, the system

will not be activated. A rear door must

be opened and closed and the vehicle

driven within 10 minutes for the sys-

tem to be activated.

NOTE:

. When turning on or off the system,

the system will retain current set-

tings even if the engine is restarted.

. If the battery terminal is discon-

nected and connected after the sys-

tem is turned on, the system will be

turned off and initialized. To use the

rear door alert system after the

battery terminal is disconnected

and connected for servicing by the

customer or a NISSAN dealer, push

the rear door alert switch to turn on

the system.

SYSTEM OPERATION

When the rear door alert system is

activated and the driver exits the vehicle

after arriving at a destination:

. When the driver places the vehicle in

the P (Park) position, a message ap-

pears in the vehicle information dis-

play for a driver to select “DISMISS

MESSAGE” or “DISABLE ALERT” if de-

sired.

. With the system enabled, when the

driver exits the vehicle, an audible alert

(horn sound) will occur unless a rear

door is opened and closed within a

short time to deactivate the alert.

. If the doors are locked before the alert

is deactivated by opening a rear door,

the horn will sound.

. If the system is activated but the

liftgate is opened before opening a

rear door, the audible horn alert will be

delayed until after the liftgate is

closed.

. If the audible horn alert occurs, a

message will also appear in the vehi-

cle information display that states,

“CHECK BACK SEAT FOR All ARTICLES”.

SIC4420

HOW TO TEMPORARILY DISABLE

THE REAR DOOR ALERT SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to tempora-

rily disable the rear door alert system.

1. When the driver places the vehicle in

the P (Park) position, a message ap-

pears in the vehicle information dis-

play for a driver to select “DISMISS

MESSAGE” or “DISABLE ALERT” if de-

sired.

2. Push the

switch to toggle

between “DISMISS MESSAGE” and “DIS-

ABLE ALERT”.

3. Push the

switch to enter.

Instruments and controls 2-49

2-50 Instruments and controls

Using switch , a driver can

select “DISMISS MESSAGE” to clear

the display for a period of time. If no

selection is made, this message

automatically turns off after a per-

iod of time.

Using switch , a driver can

select “DISABLE ALERT” to disable

the horn alert for the remainder of

the current trip.

WARNING

. There may be times when there is

an object or passenger in the rear

seat(s) but the audible alert does

not sound. For example, this may

occur if rear seat passengers

enter or exit the vehicle during a

trip.

. The system does not directly

detect objects or passengers in

the rear seat(s). Instead, it can

detect when a rear door is

opened and closed, indicating

that there may be something in

the rear seat(s).

NOTE:

There may be times when the horn

sounds but there are no objects or

passengers in the rear seat(s).

CAUTION

. Use power outlet with the engine

running to avoid discharging the

vehicle battery.

. Avoid using power outlet when

the air conditioner, headlights or

rear window defroster is on.

. Before inserting or disconnecting

a plug, be sure the electrical

accessory being used is turned

OFF.

. When not in use, be sure to close

the cap. Do not allow water or any

liquid to contact the outlet.

POWER OUTLET

SIC4389

Instrument panel

SIC4456

Back side of front console

SIC4391

Luggage room

Type A (if so equipped)

The power outlet is used for powering

electrical accessories such as cellular

telephones.

CAUTION

. The outlet and plug may be hot

during or immediately after use.

. Do not use with accessories that

exceed a combined power draw

of 12 volts, 120W (10A) for all the

power outlets. Do not use double

adapters or more than one elec-

trical accessory.

. This power outlet is not designed

for use with a cigarette lighter

unit.

. Push the plug in as far as it will

go. If good contact is not made,

the plug may overheat or the

internal temperature fuse may

blow.

Instruments and controls 2-51

2-52 Instruments and controls

SIC2648

Main switch

Type B (if so equipped)

The power outlet (plug type) is located on

the back side of the front console. It can

operate when the ignition switch in the

ON position and the main switch (located

in the console box) is ON.

The specification of this power outlet is

for use of a 120 volt, 150W (1.25A) power

draw.

To turn on or off the power supply to the

outlet, push the ON

or OFF side of the

main switch. When the switch is turned to

the ON position, the indicator light

will

illuminate.

JVI1638X

Power outlet

Pull up the cover and plug in.

After using the power outlet, be sure to

turn off the main switch.

CAUTION

. Do not use with accessories that

exceed a 120 volt, 150W (1.25A)

power draw.

. Use this power outlet with the

engine running. (If the engine is

stopped, this could result in a

discharged battery.)

JVI1604X

USB (Universal Serial Bus) CHAR-

GING CONNECTOR

The USB connector can be used only

for charging an external device.

Open the cover to access the USB con-

nector.

Connect a USB device into the connector.

Charging will start automatically (max-

imum output up to 5 volt, 12W, 2.4A).

The external device will be charged con-

tinuously while the ignition switch is in

the ACC or ON position.

Some mobile devices cannot be charged

depending on their specifications.

CAUTION

. Do not force a USB device into the

connector. Inserting the USB de-

vice tilted or up-side-down into

the connector may damage the

connector. Make sure that the

USB device is connected correctly

into the connector.

. Do not use a reversible USB cable.

Using the reversible USB cable

may damage the connector.

. Do not grab the USB connector

cover when pulling the USB de-

vice out of the connector. This

could damage the connector and

the cover.

CUP HOLDERS

CAUTION

. Avoid abrupt starting and braking

when the cup holder is being

used to prevent spilling the drink.

If the liquid is hot, it can scald you

or your passenger.

. Use only soft cups in the cup

holder. Hard objects can injure

you in an accident.

. Do not recline the rear seatback

when you use the cup holders on

the rear armrest. Doing so may

cause the beverages to spill over,

and if they are hot, they may

scald the passengers.

JVI1688X

Front

To open the cup holder, push the lid .

To close, lower the cup holder lid and

push it down lightly.

The cup holder is not designed to store

personal items.

Instruments and controls 2-53

STORAGE

2-54 Instruments and controls

SIC3118

2nd row seat

Type A (if so equipped):

To open the cup holder, push the lid

The flap will be folded down when insert-

ing a large container.

To close, lower the cup holder lid and

push it down lightly.

To clean the front cup holder, pull up the

inside tray

and remove it.

The cup holder is not designed to store

personal items.

SIC2915

Type B (if so equipped):

To open the cup holder, pull the lid.

SIC4419

3rd row seat

SIC4501

Soft bottle holder

CAUTION

. Do not use bottle holder for any

other objects that could be

thrown about in the vehicle and

possibly injure people during

sudden braking or an accident.

. Do not use bottle holder for open

liquid containers.

JVI0619X

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

To open the sunglasses holder, push and

release. Only store one pair of sunglasses

in the holder.

WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closed

while driving to avoid obstructing

the driver’s view and to help prevent

an accident.

CAUTION

. Do not use for anything other

than glasses.

. Do not leave glasses in the sun-

glasses holder while parking in

direct sunlight. The heat may

damage the glasses.

Instruments and controls 2-55

2-56 Instruments and controls

SIC4393

GLOVE BOX

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driv-

ing to help prevent injury in an

accident or a sudden stop.

To open the glove box, pull the handle

To close, push the lid in until the lock

latches.

To lock

/unlock the glove box, use the

mechanical key. For the mechanical key

usage, see “Keys” (P.3-2).

JVI1711X

CONSOLE BOX

Front

Type A (if so equipped):

To open the console box lid, push up the

knob

and pull up the lid.

To close, push the lid down until the lock

latches.

JVI1509X

Type B (if so equipped):

To open the console box lid from the

front seat, push up the knob

and pull

up the lid.

To open the console box lid from the 2nd

row seat, push the knob

To close, push the lid down until the lock

latches.

SIC4422

Rear (if so equipped)

To open the lid, push the knob up and

pull up the lid.

To close, push the lid down until the lock

latches.

Instruments and controls 2-57

2-58 Instruments and controls

SIC4423

Pocket:

To open the pocket, pull the knob

To close, push the lid until the lock

latches.

JVI1687X

TRAY

To open the tray, push the lid . To close,

push the lid down.

JVI1690X

To open the tray, push the lid . To close,

push the lid down.

SIC3505

COAT HOOKS

The coat hooks are equipped at the rear

assist grips.

CAUTION

Do not place items which are more

than 2 lb (1 kg) on the hook.

SIC4446

LUGGAGE HOOKS

WARNING

. Always make sure that the cargo

is properly secured. Use the sui-

table ropes and hooks.

. Unsecured cargo can become

dangerous in an accident or sud-

den stop.

. Never allow anyone to ride in the

luggage area. It is extremely dan-

gerous to ride in a cargo area

inside of a vehicle. In a collision,

people riding in these areas are

more likely to be seriously injured

or killed.

. Do not allow people to ride in any

area of your vehicle that is not

equipped with seats and seat

belts.

. The child restraint top tether

strap may be damaged by con-

tact with items in the cargo area.

Secure any items in the cargo

area. Your child could be seriously

injured or killed in a collision if the

top tether strap is damaged.

. Be sure everyone in your vehicle

is in a seat and using a seat belt

properly.

CAUTION

Do not apply a total load of more

than 22 lb (10 kg)

or 7 lb (3 kg) to

the hook.

Instruments and controls 2-59

2-60 Instruments and controls

JVI1204X

CARGO FLOOR BOX

Push the handle to open the cargo floor

board

JVI1515X

ROOF RACK

Do not apply any load directly to the roof

side rails. Cross bars must be installed

before applying load/cargo/luggage to

the roof of the vehicle. Genuine NISSAN

accessory cross bars are available

through a NISSAN dealer. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

additional information.

The service load capacity for the roof side

rails is 221 lb (100 kg), however do not

exceed the accessory cross bars load

capacity.

Be careful that your vehicle does not

exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) or its Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR front and rear). The GVWR and

GAWR are located on the F.M.V.S.S. or C.V.

M.S.S. certification label (located on the

driver’s door pillar). For additional infor-

mation regarding GVWR and GAWR, refer

to “Vehicle loading information” (P.10-13).

WARNING

. Always install the cross bars onto

the roof side rails before loading

cargo of any kind. Loading cargo

directly onto the roof side rails or

the vehicle’s roof may cause ve-

hicle damage.

. Drive extra carefully when the

vehicle is loaded at or near the

cargo carrying capacity, espe-

cially if the significant portion of

that load is carried on the roof

rack.

. Heavy loading of the roof rack

has the potential to affect the

vehicle stability and handling

during sudden or unusual hand-

ling maneuvers.

. Roof rack load should be evenly

distributed.

. Do not exceed maximum roof

rack load weight capacity.

. Properly secure all cargo with

ropes or straps to help prevent it

from sliding or shifting. In a sud-

den stop or collision, unsecured

cargo could cause personal in-

jury.

JVE0219X

REAR BUMPER COVER

The rear bumper cover helps prevent the

rear bumper from being scratched or

damaged when loading or unloading a

cargo.

1. Open the cargo floor board using the

handle

JVI1516X

2. Take the rear bumper cover from the

bag

stored in the cargo floor box.

Instruments and controls 2-61

2-62 Instruments and controls

JVI1517X

3. Install the rear bumper cover.

Place the cover over the surface

with the tag facing down.

Attach the hooks to the luggage

hooks

Secure the strap to the liftgate

striker

4. Cover the upper part of the rear

bumper as shown.

After loading or unloading the cargo, be

sure to remove the rear bumper cover

and store it in the storage place.

WARNING

. Never install the rear bumper

cover while the engine is running.

The exhaust gas could heat the

rear bumper cover and this may

cause a fire.

. Never drive with the rear bumper

cover left in place. There is a risk

that the liftgate will not close

correctly, and that carbon mon-

oxide may enter the cabin caus-

ing serious injury or death.

CAUTION

. Failure to follow the instructions

below could result in damage to

the rear bumper cover.

— Do not close the liftgate with

the rear bumper cover in-

stalled.

— Do not strike or apply exces-

sive force to the rear bumper

cover.

— Keep the rear bumper cover

away from heat or fire.

— To clean the rear bumper cov-

er, use a soft cloth, dampened

with a mild solution of neutral

detergent. Never use benzine,

thinner or any similar chemi-

cal.

— Remove any solvent such as

oil or gasoline spilled on the

surface of the rear bumper

cover as soon as possible.

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

. Make sure that all passengers

have their hands, etc. inside the

vehicle while it is in motion and

before closing the windows. Use

the window lock switch to pre-

vent unexpected use of the

power windows.

. To help avoid risk of injury or

death through unintended opera-

tion of the vehicle and or its

systems, including entrapment

in windows or inadvertent door

lock activation, do not leave chil-

dren, people who require the

assistance of others or pets un-

attended in your vehicle. Addi-

tionally, the temperature inside a

closed vehicle on a warm day can

quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury

or death to people and pets.

The power windows operate when the

ignition switch is in the ON position or for

about 45 seconds after the ignition

switch is pushed to the OFF position. If

the driver’s or front passenger’s door is

opened during this period of about 45

seconds, power to the windows is can-

celed.

SIC4352

1. Driver side window

2. Front passenger side window

3. Rear left passenger side window

4. Rear right passenger side window

5. Window lock button

Main power window switch (driver’s

side)

To open or close the window, push down

or pull up the switch and hold it. The

main switch (driver side switches) will

open or close all the windows.

Instruments and controls 2-63

WINDOWS

2-64 Instruments and controls

Locking passengers’ windows

When the lock button is pushed in, only

the driver side window can be opened or

closed. Push it in again to cancel.

SIC4353

Passenger side power window

switch

The passenger side switch will open or

close only the corresponding window. To

open or close the window, push down or

pull up the switch and hold it.

SIC4354

Automatic operation

To fully open or close the window, com-

pletely push down or pull up the switch

and release it; it need not be held. The

window will automatically open or close

all the way. To stop the window, just push

or lift the switch in the opposite direction.

A light push or pull on the switch will

cause the window to open or close until

the switch is released.

Auto reverse function

WARNING

There are some small distances im-

mediately before the closed position

which cannot be detected. Make sure

that all passengers have their hands,

etc., inside the vehicle before closing

the window.

If the control unit detects something

caught in the window as it is closing, the

window will be immediately lowered.

The auto reverse function can be acti-

vated when the window is closed by

automatic operation when the ignition

switch is in the ON position or for 45

seconds after the ignition switch is

pushed to the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or driv-

ing conditions, the auto reverse func-

tion may be activated if an impact or

load similar to something being caught

in the window occurs.

If the windows do not close auto-

matically

If the power window automatic function

(closing only) does not operate properly,

perform the following procedure to initi-

alize the power window system.

1. Push the ignition switch to start the

engine.

2. Close the door.

3. After starting the engine, open the

window completely by operating the

power window switch.

4. Pull the power window switch and

hold it to close the window, and then

hold the switch more than 3 seconds

after the window is closed completely.

5. Release the power window switch.

Operate the window by the automatic

function to confirm the initialization is

complete.

6. Perform steps 2 through 5 above for

other windows.

If the power window automatic function

does not operate properly after perform-

ing the procedure above, have your

vehicle checked. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

. In an accident you could be

thrown from the vehicle through

an open moonroof. Always use

seat belts and child restraints.

. Do not allow anyone to stand up

or extend any portion of their

body out of the moonroof open-

ing while the vehicle is in motion

or while the moonroof is closing.

CAUTION

. Remove water drops, snow, ice or

sand from the moonroof before

opening.

. Do not place any heavy object on

the moonroof or surrounding

area.

POWER MOONROOF

The moonroof only operates when the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

The moonroof is operational for about 45

seconds, even if the ignition switch is

pushed to the OFF position. If the driver’s

door or the passenger’s door is opened

Instruments and controls 2-65

MOONROOF (if so equipped)

2-66 Instruments and controls

during this period of about 45 seconds,

power to the moonroof is canceled.

JVI0614X

Sunshade

The sunshade will open automatically

when the moonroof is opened. However,

it must be closed manually.

Tilting the moonroof

To tilt up, first close the moonroof, then

push the switch to the TILT UP position

and release it; it need not be held. To tilt

down the moonroof, push the switch to

the TILT DOWN

position.

Sliding the moonroof

To fully open or close the moonroof, push

the switch to the OPEN

or CLOSE

position and release it; it need not be held.

The roof will automatically open or close

all the way. To stop the roof, push the

switch once more while it is opening or

closing.

Auto reverse function

WARNING

There are some small distances im-

mediately before the closed position

which cannot be detected. Make sure

that all passengers have their hands,

etc., inside the vehicle before closing

the moonroof.

If the control unit detects something

caught in the moonroof when it is closing,

the moonroof will be immediately

opened.

The auto reverse function can be acti-

vated when the moonroof is closed by

automatic operation when the ignition

switch is in the ON position or for about

45 seconds after the ignition switch is

pushed to the OFF position.

If the moonroof cannot be closed auto-

matically when the auto reverse function

activates due to a malfunction, push and

hold the switch to the CLOSE

position.

Depending on the environment or driv-

ing conditions, the auto reverse func-

tion may be activated if an impact or

load similar to something being caught

in the moonroof occurs.

If the moonroof does not operate

If the moonroof does not operate prop-

erly, perform the following procedure to

initialize the moonroof operation system.

1. If the moonroof is open, close it fully

by repeatedly pushing the moonroof

switch to the CLOSE

position.

2. Push and hold the switch to the

position.

3. Release the moonroof switch after the

moonroof moves slightly up and

down.

4. Push and hold the switch to the OPEN

position to fully tilt the moonroof

down.

5. Check if the moonroof switch oper-

ates normally.

If the moonroof does not operate prop-

erly after performing the procedure

above, have your moonroof checked and

repaired. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

SIC3642

To activate or deactivate the welcome

light function, perform the following pro-

cedure.

1. Place the ignition switch in the ON

position.

2. Open the driver’s side door.

3. Within 20 seconds after the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position,

push the door open request switch on

the driver’s side door handle for more

than 5 seconds with the driver’s door

open.

4. A chime sounds when the setting is

completed.

Once the welcome light function is active,

the puddle light

and the passenger

cabin illumination will illuminate when

you approach the vehicle with the Intel-

ligent Key (within approximately 3.3 ft (1

m) of the antenna built inside the door

handles) and the following conditions are

met.

. All doors are closed and locked.

. The ignition switch is in the LOCK or

OFF position.

. The Intelligent Key is outside the

vehicle.

. The puddle light operates within a set

duration.

BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM

The welcome light function will be deac-

tivated automatically to prevent battery

discharge under the following conditions.

To activate the welcome light function

again, unlock any door.

. If the welcome light function does not

operate within a set duration. Note

that the duration is set to 9 days as

the factory default setting.

. If the welcome light function is acti-

vated 15 consecutive times when you

approach and leave the vehicle with

the Intelligent Key without the doors

being unlocked.

Instruments and controls 2-67

WELCOME LIGHT (if so equipped)

2-68 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

. Turn off the lights when you leave

the vehicle.

. Do not use the lights for extended

periods of time with the engine

stopped. This could result in a

discharged battery.

JVI0760X

INTERIOR LIGHT SWITCH

ON switch

When the ON switch is pushed in, the

map lights and rear personal lights will

illuminate.

DOOR OFF switch

When the switch is not pushed in, the

map lights and rear personal lights will

illuminate for a period of time under the

following conditions:

. when the ignition switch is placed in

the OFF position.

. when doors are unlocked by pushing

the UNLOCK

button on the In-

telligent Key or door handle request

switch with the ignition switch in the

OFF position.

. when any door is opened and then

closed with the ignition switch in the

OFF position.

. when any door is opened with the

ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position.

— The lights will remain on while the

door is opened. When the door is

closed, the lights will turn off.

When the “Lamp ON When Door Unlocks”

key is set to the OFF position (see

NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual), the

lights will illuminate under the following

condition:

. any door is opened with the ignition

switch in any position

— remain on while the door is opened.

When the door is closed, the lights

go off.

When the switch

is pushed in, the map

lights and rear personal lights will not

illuminate under the above condition.

INTERIOR LIGHTS

JVI0759X

CONSOLE LIGHT

The console light will turn on whenever

the clearance lights or headlights are

illuminated.

JVI0758X

MAP LIGHTS

Push the button as illustrated to turn the

light on or off.

SIC3250

REAR PERSONAL LIGHTS

Push the button as illustrated to turn the

light on or off.

Instruments and controls 2-69

2-70 Instruments and controls

SIC4448

The light on the vanity mirror will turn on

when the cover on the vanity mirror is

opened.

When the cover is closed, the light will

turn off.

The lights will also turn off after a

period of time when the lights remain

illuminated to prevent the battery from

becoming discharged.

SIC4418

The cargo light switch has three posi-

tions: ON

, center and OFF .

ON position

When the switch is in the ON position

the cargo light will illuminate.

Center position

When the switch is in the center position

, the cargo light will illuminate when the

liftgate is opened.

OFF position

When the switch is in the OFF position

the cargo light will not illuminate.

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver

provides a convenient way to consolidate

the functions of up to three individual

hand-held transmitters into one built-in

device.

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:

. Will operate most Radio Frequency

(RF) devices such as garage doors,

gates, home and office lighting, entry

door locks and security systems.

. Is powered by your vehicle’s battery.

No separate batteries are required. If

the vehicle’s battery is discharged or is

disconnected, HomeLink® will retain

all programming.

When the HomeLink® Universal Trans-

ceiver is programmed, retain the origi-

nal transmitter for future programming

procedures (Example: new vehicle pur-

chases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the

programmed HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver buttons should be erased

for security purposes. For additional

information, refer to “Programming

HomeLink®” (P.2-71).

WARNING

. Do not use the HomeLink® Uni-

versal Transceiver with any gar-

age door opener that lacks safety

VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS CARGO LIGHT

HomeLink® UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

(Type A) (if so equipped)

stop and reverse features as re-

quired by federal safety stan-

dards. (These standards became

effective for opener models man-

ufactured after April 1, 1982). A

garage door opener which cannot

detect an object in the path of a

closing garage door and then

automatically stop and reverse,

does not meet current federal

safety standards. Using a garage

door opener without these fea-

tures increases the risk of serious

injury or death.

. During the programming proce-

dure your garage door or security

gate will open and close (if the

transmitter is within range). Make

sure that people or objects are

clear of the garage door, gate,

etc. that you are programming.

. Your vehicle’s engine should be

turned off while programming

the HomeLink® Universal Trans-

ceiver. Do not breathe exhaust

gases; they contain colorless

and odorless carbon monoxide.

Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It

can cause unconsciousness or

death.

PROGRAMMING HomeLink®

The following steps show generic instruc-

tions how to program a HomeLink®

button. If you have any questions or are

having difficulty programming your

HomeLink® buttons, refer to the

HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.

com/nissan or call 1-800-355-3515.

NOTE:

It is also recommended that a new

battery be placed in the hand-held

transmitter of the device being pro-

grammed to HomeLink® for quicker

programming and accurate transmis-

sion of the radio-frequency.

1. Position the end of your hand-held

transmitter 1-3 in (26-76 mm) away

from the HomeLink® surface, keeping

the HomeLink® indicator light

view.

JVI0428X

2. Using both hands, simultaneously

press and hold the desired HomeLink®

button and handheld transmitter but-

ton. DO NOT release until the

HomeLink® indicator light

flashes

slowly and then rapidly. When the

indicator light flashes rapidly, both

buttons may be released. (The rapid

flashing indicates successful pro-

gramming.)

NOTE:

Some devices to be programmed

may require you to replace Step 2

with the cycling procedure noted in

the “Programming HomeLink® for

Canadian customers and gate open-

ers” (P.2-72).

Instruments and controls 2-71

2-72 Instruments and controls

JVI0429X

3. Press and hold the programmed

HomeLink® button and observe the

indicator light.

If the indicator light is solid/

continuous, programming is com-

plete and your device should acti-

vate when the HomeLink® button is

pressed and released.

If the indicator light

blinks rapidly

for two seconds and then turns to a

solid/continuous light, continue

with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code

device. A second person may make

the following steps easier. Use a

ladder or other device. Do not stand

on your vehicle to perform the next

steps.

4. At the receiver located on the garage

door opener motor in the garage,

locate the “learn” or “smart” button

(the name and color of the button

may vary by manufacturer but it is

usually located near where the hang-

ing antenna wire is attached to the

unit). If there is difficulty locating the

button, reference the garage door

opener’s manual.

5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart”

button.

NOTE:

Once the button is pressed, you have

approximately 30 seconds to initiate

the next step.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press

and hold the programmed HomeLink®

button for two seconds and release.

Repeat the “press/hold/release” se-

quence up to 3 times to complete

the programming process. HomeLink®

should now activate your rolling code

equipped device.

7. If you have any questions or are

having difficulty programming your

HomeLink® buttons, refer to the

HomeLink® web site at: www.

homelink.com/nissan or call 1-800-

355-3515.

PROGRAMMING HomeLink® FOR

CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE

OPENERS

Canadian radio-frequency laws require

transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)

after several seconds of transmission –

which may not be long enough for

HomeLink® to pick up the signal during

programming. Similar to this Canadian

law, some U.S. gate operators are de-

signed to “time-out” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having

difficulties programming a gate operator

or garage door opener by using the

“Programming HomeLink®” procedures,

replace “Programming HomeLink®” Step

2 with the following:

NOTE:

When programming a garage door

opener, etc., unplug the device during

the “cycling” process to prevent possi-

ble damage to the garage door opener

components.

Step 2: Using both hands, simultaneously

press and hold the desired HomeLink®

button and the hand-held transmitter

button. During programming, your hand-

held transmitter may automatically stop

transmitting. Continue to press and hold

the desired HomeLink® button while you

press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-

held transmitter every two seconds until

the frequency signal has been learned.

The HomeLink® indicator light will flash

slowly and then rapidly after several

seconds upon successful programming.

DO NOT release until the HomeLink®

indicator light flashes slowly and then

rapidly. When the indicator light flashes

rapidly, both buttons may be released.

The rapid flashing indicates successful

programming.

Proceed with “Programming HomeLink®”

step 3 to complete.

Remember to plug the device back in

when programming is completed.

OPERATING THE HomeLink® UNI-

VERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver,

after it is programmed, can be used to

activate the programmed device. To op-

erate, simply press and release the appro-

priate programmed HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver button. The amber indicator

light will illuminate while the signal is

being transmitted.

For convenience, the hand-held transmit-

ter of the device may also be used at any

time.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLESHOOT-

ING

If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn

the hand-held transmitter information:

. replace the hand-held transmitter

batteries with new batteries.

. position the hand-held transmitter

with its battery area facing away from

the HomeLink® surface.

. press and hold both the HomeLink®

and hand-held transmitter buttons

without interruption.

. position the hand-held transmitter 1-3

in (26-76 mm) away from the

HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmit-

ter in that position for up to 15

seconds. If HomeLink® is not pro-

grammed within that time, try holding

the transmitter in another position -

keeping the indicator light in view at

all times.

If you have any questions or are having

difficulty programming your HomeLink®

buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site

at: www.homelink.com/nissan or 1-800-

355-3515.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED IN-

FORMATION

The following procedure clears the pro-

grammed information from both buttons.

Individual buttons cannot be cleared.

However, individual buttons can be re-

programmed, see “Reprogramming a sin-

gle HomeLink® button” (P.2-73).

To clear all programming

1. Press and hold the two outer

HomeLink® buttons until the indicator

light begins to flash in approximately

10 seconds. Do not hold for longer

than 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

HomeLink® is now in the programming

mode and can be programmed at any

time beginning with “Programming

HomeLink®” - Step 1.

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE

HomeLink® BUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver button, complete the follow-

ing.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®

button. Do not release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash

after 20 seconds. Without releasing

the HomeLink® button, proceed with

Instruments and controls 2-73

2-74 Instruments and controls

“Programming HomeLink®” - Step 1.

For questions or comments, contact

HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com/

nissan or 1-800-355-3515.

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver

button has now been reprogrammed.

The new device can be activated by

pushing the HomeLink® button that was

just programmed. This procedure will not

affect any other programmed HomeLink®

buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should

change the codes of any non-rolling code

device that has been programmed into

HomeLink®. Consult the Owner’s Manual

of each device or call the manufacturer or

dealer of those devices for additional

information.

When your vehicle is recovered, you will

need to reprogram the HomeLink® Uni-

versal Transceiver with your new trans-

mitter information.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference,

and (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Ca-

nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) this device may not

cause interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation of the device.

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver

provides a convenient way to consolidate

the functions of up to three individual

hand-held transmitters into one built-in

device.

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:

. Will operate most Radio Frequency

(RF) devices such as garage doors,

gates, home and office lighting, entry

door locks and security systems.

. Is powered by your vehicle’s battery.

No separate batteries are required. If

the vehicle’s battery is discharged or is

disconnected, HomeLink® will retain

all programming.

When the HomeLink® Universal Trans-

ceiver is programmed, retain the origi-

nal transmitter for future programming

procedures (Example: new vehicle pur-

chases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the

programmed HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver buttons should be erased

for security purposes. For additional

information, refer to “Programming

HomeLink®” (P.2-75).

WARNING

. Do not use the HomeLink® Uni-

versal Transceiver with any gar-

age door opener that lacks safety

HomeLink® UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

(Type B) (if so equipped)

stop and reverse features as re-

quired by federal safety stan-

dards. (These standards became

effective for opener models man-

ufactured after April 1, 1982). A

garage door opener which cannot

detect an object in the path of a

closing garage door and then

automatically stop and reverse,

does not meet current federal

safety standards. Using a garage

door opener without these fea-

tures increases the risk of serious

injury or death.

. During the programming proce-

dure your garage door or security

gate will open and close (if the

transmitter is within range). Make

sure that people or objects are

clear of the garage door, gate,

etc. that you are programming.

. Your vehicle’s engine should be

turned off while programming

the HomeLink® Universal Trans-

ceiver. Do not breathe exhaust

gases; they contain colorless

and odorless carbon monoxide.

Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It

can cause unconsciousness or

death.

PROGRAMMING HomeLink®

The following steps show generic instruc-

tions how to program a HomeLink®

button. If you have any questions or are

having difficulty programming your

HomeLink® buttons, refer to the

HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.

com/nissan or call 1-800-355-3515.

NOTE:

It is also recommended that a new

battery be placed in the hand-held

transmitter of the device being pro-

grammed to HomeLink® for quicker

programming and accurate transmis-

sion of the radio-frequency.

JVI1689X

HomeLink® buttons (1-3)

Indicator light (appears above each

HomeLink® button)

Status display (where the current condi-

tion of the HomeLink® is displayed)

Instruments and controls 2-75

2-76 Instruments and controls

JVI1639X

1. Press and release the desired

HomeLink® button. The indicator light

flashes in orange and “TRAINING” is

displayed on the mirror.

2. Position the end of your hand-held

transmitter 1 to 3 in (2 to 8 cm) away

from the HomeLink® button. For some

devices, it may have better commu-

nication when the hand-held trans-

mitter is positioned 6 to 12 in (15 to 30

cm) away from the HomeLink® button.

3. While the indicator light is flashing in

orange, press and hold the hand-held

transmitter button. DO NOT release

until the HomeLink® indicator light

changes from orange to green and

“TRAINED” is displayed on the mirror.

When the indicator light illuminates in

green, the hand-held transmitter but-

ton may be released.

NOTE:

Some devices to be programmed

may require you to replace the Step

3 with the cycling procedure noted

in “Programming HomeLink® for Ca-

nadian customers and gate open-

ers” (P.2-77).

4. Press and hold the programmed

HomeLink® button and observe the

indicator light.

If the indicator light remains green

(solid/continuous), programming is

complete and your device should

activate when the HomeLink® but-

ton is pressed and released.

If the indicator light rapidly flashes

in green, press and hold the pro-

grammed HomeLink® button for 2

seconds. Repeat the “press/hold/

release” sequence up to three times

to complete the programming pro-

cess. If the device operates, the

programming is complete. If the

device still does not operate, con-

tinue with Steps 5-7 for the device

being programmed to HomeLink®.

A second person may make the

following steps easier. Use a ladder

or other device. Do not stand on

your vehicle to perform the next

steps.

5. At the garage door opener motor in

the garage, locate the “Learn,” “Smart”

or “Program” button (the name and

color of the button may vary by

manufacturer but it is usually located

near where the hanging antenna wire

is attached to the unit). If there is

difficulty locating the button, refer-

ence the garage door opener’s man-

ual.

6. Firmly press and then release the

“Learn,” “Smart” or “Program” button.

NOTE:

Once the button is pressed, you have

approximately 30 seconds to initiate

the next step.

7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press

and hold the programmed HomeLink®

button for 2 seconds and release.

Repeat the “press/hold/release” se-

quence up to three times to complete

the programming process. Then your

device should operate when the

HomeLink® button is pressed and

released.

8. If you have any questions or are

having difficulty programming your

HomeLink® buttons, refer to the

HomeLink® web site at: www.

homelink.com/nissan or call 1-800-

355-3515.

PROGRAMMING HomeLink® FOR

CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE

OPENERS

Canadian radio-frequency laws require

transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)

after several seconds of transmission –

which may not be long enough for

HomeLink® to pick up the signal during

programming. Similar to this Canadian

law, some U.S. gate operators are de-

signed to “time-out” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having

difficulties programming a gate operator

or garage door opener by using the

“Programming HomeLink®” procedures,

replace “Programming HomeLink®” Step

3 with the following:

NOTE:

When programming a garage door

opener, etc., unplug the device during

the “cycling” process to prevent possi-

ble damage to the device components.

Step 3: While the HomeLink® indicator

light is flashing in orange, press and

release (“cycling”) the hand-held transmit-

ter button every 2 seconds. Continue to

press and release the hand-held trans-

mitter button until the HomeLink® indi-

cator light changes from orange to green.

When the indicator light illuminates in

green, hand-held transmitter button may

be released.

Proceed with “Programming HomeLink®”

step 4 to complete.

Remember to plug the device back in

when programming is completed.

OPERATING THE HomeLink® UNI-

VERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver,

after it is programmed, can be used to

activate the programmed device. To op-

erate, firmly press the appropriate pro-

grammed HomeLink® button. The

indicator light will illuminate in green with

three parenthesis

on the mirror

while the signal is being transmitted.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLESHOOT-

ING

If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn

the hand-held transmitter information:

. replace the hand-held transmitter

batteries with new batteries.

. position the hand-held transmitter

with its battery area facing away from

the HomeLink® button.

. press and hold the HomeLink® button

and hand-held transmitter button in

each step without interruption.

. position the hand-held transmitter 1

to 3 in (2 to 8 cm) away from the

HomeLink® button. Hold the transmit-

ter in that position for up to 15

seconds. If HomeLink® is not pro-

grammed within that time, try holding

the transmitter in another position -

for example, 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm)

away, keeping the HomeLink® button

in view at all times.

If you have any questions or are having

difficulty programming your HomeLink®

buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site

at: www.homelink.com/nissan or 1-800-

355-3515.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED IN-

FORMATION

The following procedure clears the pro-

grammed information from three but-

tons. Individual buttons cannot be

cleared. However, individual buttons can

be reprogrammed, see “Reprogramming

a single HomeLink® button” (P.2-78).

To clear all programming

1. Press and hold the two outer

HomeLink® buttons until the indicator

light begins to flash in green and

“CLEARED” is displayed on the mirror,

in approximately 10 seconds. Do not

hold for longer than 20 seconds.

Instruments and controls 2-77

2-78 Instruments and controls

2. Release both buttons.

HomeLink® is now in the programming

mode and can be programmed at any

time beginning with “Programming

HomeLink®” - Step 1.

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE

HomeLink® BUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLink® button, com-

plete the following.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®

button. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will illuminate in

green, and after 20 seconds it will

begin to flash in orange and “TRAIN-

ING” is displayed on the mirror.

3. Release the HomeLink® button and

proceed with “Programming

HomeLink®” — Step 3.

For questions or comments, contact

HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com/

nissan or 1-800-355-3515.

The HomeLink® button has now been

reprogrammed. The new device can be

activated by pressing the HomeLink®

button that was just programmed. This

procedure will not affect any other pro-

grammed HomeLink® buttons.

If a new device is not programmed to the

HomeLink® button, it will revert to the

previously stored programming.

USING THE GARAGE DOOR TWO-

WAY COMMUNICATION

HomeLink® has the function of commu-

nicating with garage door opener sys-

tems. If your garage door openers are

compatible with HomeLink®, the

HomeLink® can:

. receive and display “closing” or “open-

ing” status from your garage door

opener.

. recall and display the garage door

being “closed” or “opened”.

HomeLink® can receive the status from a

garage door opener at a range up to 820

ft (250 m), but it varies depending on the

environment. You may need to reduce

vehicle speed to successfully receive the

garage door opener communication.

Programming two-way communi-

cation

After programming a new HomeLink®

button, proceed with “Programming

HomeLink®” Step 6 to enable two-way

communication. If the garage door status

indicator appears on the left side on the

mirror when pressing the programmed

HomeLink® button, the two-way commu-

nication programming is complete.

JVI1640X

Using two-way communication

Press and hold the HomeLink® buttons (1

and 2) simultaneously for 2 seconds to

recall and display the last recorded gar-

age door status communicated to

HomeLink®. HomeLink® will display the

last recorded status for 3 seconds.

If two-way communication programming

is successful, HomeLink® will display the

status of your garage door opener with

the status indicator

, which changes

depending on the status. The garage

door opener status indicator shows the

garage door opener status as follows:

Flashing in orange – Closing

Flashing in orange – Opening

Illuminating in green – Closed

Illuminating in green – Opened

The status indicator stops to flash after

an open/close signal is received or no

signal is received within 30 seconds from

the garage door opener.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should

change the codes of any non-rolling code

device that has been programmed into

HomeLink®. Consult the Owner’s Manual

of each device or call the manufacturer or

dealer of those devices for additional

information.

When your vehicle is recovered, you will

need to reprogram the HomeLink® Uni-

versal Transceiver with your new trans-

mitter information.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference,

and (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Ca-

nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) this device may not

cause interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation of the device.

Instruments and controls 2-79

2-80 Instruments and controls

MEMO

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys ......................................................................................................... 3-2
Intelligent Key ........................................................................... 3-2
Valet hand-off........................................................................... 3-4
Doors ...................................................................................................... 3-4
Locking with mechanical key ...................................... 3-4
Opening and closing windows with the
mechanical key ........................................................................ 3-5
Locking with inside lock knob ..................................... 3-5
Locking with power door lock switch................... 3-5
Automatic door locks ......................................................... 3-6
Child safety rear door lock ........................................... 3-6
Intelligent Key system .............................................................. 3-7
Intelligent Key operating range ................................. 3-9
Door locks/unlocks precaution .................................. 3-9
Intelligent Key operation .............................................. 3-10
Battery saver system ....................................................... 3-12
Warning signals .................................................................... 3-12
Troubleshooting guide ................................................... 3-13
Remote keyless entry system ......................................... 3-15
How to use remote keyless entry system ...... 3-16
Remote engine start (if so equipped) ....................... 3-19
Remote engine start operating range............... 3-19
Remote starting the engine ....................................... 3-19
Extending engine run time ......................................... 3-20
Canceling a remote engine start ........................ 3-20
Conditions the remote engine start will
not work .................................................................................. 3-20
Hood .................................................................................................... 3-21
Liftgate .............................................................................................. 3-22
Operating manual liftgate ......................................... 3-22
Operating power liftgate (if so equipped) ...... 3-22
Auto closure ........................................................................ 3-25
Liftgate release lever ..................................................... 3-26
Fuel-filler door ............................................................................. 3-26
Opening the fuel-filler door...................................... 3-26
Fuel-filler cap ....................................................................... 3-27
Tilt/telescopic steering ........................................................ 3-29
Electric operation ............................................................. 3-30
Sun visors ........................................................................................ 3-30
Mirrors................................................................................................ 3-31
Inside mirror ......................................................................... 3-31
Outside mirrors .................................................................. 3-38
Vanity mirror ........................................................................ 3-40
Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) ........ 3-40
Entry/exit function .......................................................... 3-40
Memory storage ................................................................ 3-41
Setting memory function........................................... 3-42
System operation ............................................................. 3-42

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

A key number plate is supplied with your

keys. Record the key number and keep it

in a safe place (such as your wallet), not in

the vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is

recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for duplicates by using the key number.

NISSAN does not record any key numbers

so it is very important to keep track of

your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you

have lost all keys and do not have one to

duplicate from. If you still have a key, it

can be duplicated without knowing the

key number.

JVP0155X

Type A (if so equipped)

SPA2717

Type B (if so equipped)

SPA2406

Type C (if so equipped)

1. Intelligent Key (2)

2. Mechanical key (inside Intelligent Key) (2)

3. Key number plate (1)

INTELLIGENT KEY

Your vehicle can only be driven with the

Intelligent Keys which are registered to

your vehicle’s Intelligent Key system com-

ponents and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System components. As many as 4 In-

telligent Keys can be registered and used

with one vehicle. The new keys must be

registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use

with the Intelligent Key system and

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of

your vehicle. Since the registration pro-

cess requires erasing all memory in the

KEYS

Intelligent Key components when regis-

tering new keys, be sure to take all

Intelligent Keys that you have to the

NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

. Be sure to carry the Intelligent

Key with you when driving. The

Intelligent Key is a precision de-

vice with a built-in transmitter. To

avoid damaging it, please note

the following.

— The Intelligent Key is water

resistant; however, wetting

may damage the Intelligent

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets

wet, immediately wipe until it

is completely dry.

— Do not bend, drop or strike it

against another object.

— If the outside temperature is

below 14°F (−10°C), the battery

of the Intelligent Key may not

function properly.

— Do not place the Intelligent

Key for an extended period in

a place where temperatures

exceed 140°F (60°C).

— Do not change or modify the

Intelligent Key.

— Do not use a magnet key

holder.

— Do not place the Intelligent

Key near an electric appliance

such as a television set or

personal computer.

— Do not allow the Intelligent

Key to come into contact with

water or salt water, and do

not wash it in a washing

machine. This could affect

the system function.

. If an Intelligent Key is lost or

stolen, NISSAN recommends

erasing the ID code of that Intel-

ligent Key. This will prevent the

Intelligent Key from unauthorized

use to unlock the vehicle. For

information regarding the eras-

ing procedure, it is recommended

you visit a NISSAN dealer.

SPA2033

Mechanical key

To remove the mechanical key, release

the lock knob at the back of the Intelli-

gent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert

it into the Intelligent Key until the lock

knob returns to the lock position.

Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock

the doors and the glove box.

See “Doors” (P.3-4) and “Storage” (P.2-53).

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key

installed in the Intelligent Key.

VALET HAND-OFF

When you have to leave a key with a valet,

give them the Intelligent Key itself and

keep the mechanical key with you to

protect your belongings.

To prevent the glove box from being

opened during valet hand-off, follow the

procedures below.

1. Remove the mechanical key from the

Intelligent Key.

2. Lock the glove box with the mechan-

ical key.

3. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet,

keeping the mechanical key in your

pocket or bag for insertion into the

Intelligent Key when you retrieve your

vehicle.

See “Storage” (P.2-53).

WARNING

. Always have the doors locked

while driving. Along with the use

of seat belts, this provides great-

er safety in the event of an

accident by helping to prevent

persons from being thrown from

the vehicle. This also helps keep

children and others from unin-

tentionally opening the doors,

and will help keep out intruders.

. Before opening any door, always

look for and avoid oncoming

traffic.

. To help avoid risk of injury or

death through unintended opera-

tion of the vehicle and or its

systems, including entrapment

in windows or inadvertent door

lock activation, do not leave chil-

dren, people who require the

assistance of others or pets un-

attended in your vehicle. Addi-

tionally, the temperature inside a

closed vehicle on a warm day can

quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury

or death to people and pets.

SPA2457B

LOCKING WITH MECHANICAL KEY

The power door lock system allows you to

lock or unlock all doors simultaneously

using the mechanical key.

. Turning the driver’s door key cylinder

to the front of the vehicle

will lock all

doors.

. Turning the driver’s door key cylinder

once to the rear of the vehicle

will

unlock the driver’s door. After return-

ing the key to the neutral position

turning it to the rear again within 5

seconds will unlock all doors.

. You can switch the lock system to the

mode that allows you to open all the

doors when the key is turned once.

DOORS

(See NissanConnect® Owner’s Man-

ual.)

OPENING AND CLOSING WINDOWS

WITH THE MECHANICAL KEY

The driver’s door key operation also

allows you to open and close all door

windows.

To open the windows, turn the driver’s

door key cylinder to the rear of the vehicle

for longer than 1 second. The door is

unlocked and the window keeps opening

while turning the key.

This function can also be performed by

pushing and holding the door UNLOCK

button of the Intelligent Key. (See “Re-

mote keyless entry system” (P.3-15).)

To close the windows, turn the driver’s

door key cylinder to the front of the

vehicle for longer than 1 second. The

door is locked and the window keeps

closing while turning the key.

SPA2744

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

To lock the door individually, move the

inside lock knob to the lock position

To unlock, move the inside lock knob to

the unlock position

Be sure not to leave the Intelligent Key

inside the vehicle.

JVP0319X

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK

SWITCH

Operating the power door lock switch will

lock or unlock all the doors. The switches

are located on the driver’s and front

passenger’s door armrests.

To lock the doors, push the power door

lock switch to the lock position

Be sure not to leave the Intelligent Key

inside the vehicle.

To unlock the doors including the fuel-

filler door, push the power door lock

switch to the unlock position

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch (driver

or front passenger) is moved to the lock

position with any door open, all doors will

lock and unlock automatically. With the

Intelligent Key left in the vehicle and any

door open, all doors will unlock automa-

tically and a chime will sound after the

door is closed.

These functions help to prevent the

Intelligent Key from being accidentally

locked inside the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS

. All doors lock automatically when the

vehicle speed reaches 15 MPH (24

km/h).

. All doors unlock automatically when

the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position.

The automatic unlock function can be

deactivated or activated. To deactivate

or activate the automatic door unlock

system, perform the following procedure:

1. Close all doors.

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON

position.

3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step

2, push and hold the power door lock

switch to the

position (UNLOCK)

for more than 5 seconds.

4. When activated, the hazard indicator

will flash twice. When deactivated, the

hazard indicator will flash once.

5. The ignition switch must be placed in

the OFF and ON position again be-

tween each setting change.

When the automatic door unlock system

is deactivated, the doors do not unlock

when the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF position. To unlock the door manu-

ally, use the inside lock knob or the power

door lock switch (driver’s or front passen-

ger’s side).

SPA2745

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

Child safety rear door locks help prevent

doors from being opened accidentally,

especially when small children are in the

vehicle.

When the levers are in the lock position

, the rear doors can be opened only

from the outside.

To disengage, move the levers to the

unlock position

WARNING

. Radio waves could adversely af-

fect electric medical equipment.

Those who use a pacemaker

should contact the electric med-

ical equipment manufacturer for

the possible influences before

use.

. The Intelligent Key transmits

radio waves when the buttons

are pushed. The FAA advises that

the radio waves may affect air-

craft navigation and communica-

tion systems. Do not operate the

Intelligent Key while on an air-

plane. Make sure the buttons are

not operated unintentionally

when the unit is stored during a

flight.

The Intelligent Key system can operate all

the door locks using the remote control-

ler function or pushing the request switch

on the vehicle without taking the key out

from a pocket or purse. The operating

environment and/or conditions may af-

fect the Intelligent Key system operation.

Be sure to read the following before using

the Intelligent Key system.

CAUTION

. Be sure to carry the Intelligent

Key with you when operating the

vehicle.

. Never leave the Intelligent Key in

the vehicle when you leave the

vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communi-

cating with the vehicle as it receives radio

waves. The Intelligent Key system trans-

mits weak radio waves. Environmental

conditions may interfere with the opera-

tion of the Intelligent Key system under

the following operating conditions.

. When operating near a location where

strong radio waves are transmitted,

such as a TV tower, power station and

broadcasting station.

. When in possession of wireless equip-

ment, such as a cellular telephone,

transceiver, and CB radio.

. When the Intelligent Key is in contact

with or covered by metallic materials.

. When any type of radio wave remote

control is used nearby.

. When the Intelligent Key is placed near

an electric appliance such as a perso-

nal computer.

. When the vehicle is parked near a

parking meter.

In such cases, correct the operating

conditions before using the Intelligent

Key function or use the mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies

depending on the operating conditions,

the battery’s life is approximately 2 years.

If the battery is discharged, replace it with

a new one.

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously

receiving radio waves, if the key is left

near equipment which transmits strong

radio waves, such as signals from a TV

and personal computer, the battery life

may become shorter.

For information regarding replacement of

a battery, see “Intelligent Key battery

replacement” (P.8-21).

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be

registered and used with one vehicle. For

information about the purchase and use

of additional Intelligent Keys, contact a

NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

. Do not allow the Intelligent Key,

which contains electrical compo-

nents, to come into contact with

water or salt water. This could

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

affect the system function.

. Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

. Do not strike the Intelligent Key

sharply against another object.

. Do not change or modify the

Intelligent Key.

. Wetting may damage the Intelli-

gent Key. If the Intelligent Key

gets wet, immediately wipe until

it is completely dry.

. If the outside temperature is be-

low 14°F (−10°C), the battery of the

Intelligent Key may not function

properly.

. Do not place the Intelligent Key

for an extended period in an area

where temperatures exceed

140°F (60°C).

. Do not attach the Intelligent Key

with a key holder that contains a

magnet.

. Do not place the Intelligent Key

near equipment that produces a

magnetic field, such as a TV,

audio equipment and personal

computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,

NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code

of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle.

This may prevent the unauthorized use of

the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle.

For information regarding the erasing

procedure, it is recommended that you

contact a NISSAN dealer.

SPA2074

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING

RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be

used when the Intelligent Key is within

the specified operating range from the

request switch

When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged or strong radio waves are pre-

sent near the operating location, the

Intelligent Key system’s operating range

becomes narrower, and the Intelligent

Key may not function properly.

The operating range is within 31.50 in (80

cm) from each request switch

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the

door glass, handle or rear bumper the

request switches may not function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the

operating range, it is possible for anyone

who does not carry the Intelligent Key to

push the request switch to lock/unlock

the doors.

SPA2326

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAU-

TION

. Do not push the door handle request

switch with the Intelligent Key held in

your hand as illustrated. The close

distance to the door handle will cause

the Intelligent Key system to have

difficulty recognizing that the Intelli-

gent Key is outside the vehicle.

. After locking with the door handle

request switch, verify the doors are

securely locked by testing them.

. To prevent the Intelligent Key from

being left inside the vehicle, make sure

you carry the key with you and then

lock the doors.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

. Do not pull the door handle before

pushing the door handle request

switch. The door will be unlocked but

will not open. Release the door handle

once and pull it again to open the

door.

. The Intelligent Key system (opening/

closing doors with the door handle

request switch) can be set to remain

inactive. (See NissanConnect® Owner’s

Manual.)

. While the liftgate is in motion by using

the power liftgate button on the

Intelligent Key, the request switches

on the door handles may be disabled.

To unlock or lock the doors, use the

UNLOCK or LOCK button on the In-

telligent Key. See “How to use remote

keyless entry system” (P.3-16).

SPA2408

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION

You can lock or unlock the doors without

taking the key out from your pocket or

bag.

JVP0196X

JVP0197X

When you carry the Intelligent Key with

you, you can lock or unlock all doors by

pushing the door handle request switch

(driver’s or front passenger’s)

or the

liftgate request switch

within the range

of operation.

When you lock or unlock the doors or the

liftgate, the hazard indicator will flash and

the horn (or the outside chime) will sound

as a confirmation. For details, see “Setting

hazard indicator and horn mode” (P.3-17).

Welcome light and farewell light

function

When you lock or unlock the doors

including the liftgate, the parking lights,

tail lights, side marker light and the

license plate light will illuminate for a

period of time. The welcome light and

farewell light function can be disabled.

For information about disabling the wel-

come light and farewell light function, it is

recommended you see a NISSAN dealer.

Locking doors and fuel-filler door

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position, push the ignition switch to

the OFF position and make sure you

carry the Intelligent Key with you.*1

2. Close all the doors.*2

3. Push the door handle request switch

(driver’s or front passenger’s)

or the

liftgate request switch

while carry-

ing the Intelligent Key with you.*3

4. All the doors and fuel-filler door will

lock.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice

and the outside chime sounds twice.

*1: Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key

while the ignition switch is in the ACC or

ON position.

*2: Doors will not lock with the Intelligent

Key while any door is open.

*3: Doors will not lock by pushing the door

handle request switch with the Intelligent

Key inside the vehicle.

However, when an Intelligent Key is inside

the vehicle, doors can be locked with

another registered Intelligent Key.

CAUTION

. After locking the doors using the

request switch, make sure that

the doors have been securely

locked by operating the door

handles.

. When locking the doors using the

request switch, make sure to

have the Intelligent Key in your

possession before operating the

request switch to prevent the

Intelligent Key from being left in

the vehicle.

. The request switch is operational

only when the Intelligent Key has

been detected by the Intelligent

Key system.

Lockout protection:

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being

accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout

protection is equipped with the Intelligent

Key system.

When the driver’s side door is open, the

doors are locked, and then the Intelligent

Key is put inside the vehicle and all the

doors are closed; the lock will automati-

cally unlock and the door buzzer sounds.

NOTE:

The doors may not lock when the

Intelligent Key is in the same hand that

is operating the request switch to lock

the door. Put the Intelligent Key in a

purse, pocket or your other hand.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

CAUTION

The lockout protection may not

function under the following condi-

tions:

. When the Intelligent Key is placed

on top of the instrument panel.

. When the Intelligent Key is placed

inside the glove box or a storage

bin.

. When the Intelligent Key is placed

inside the door pockets.

. When the Intelligent Key is placed

inside or near metallic materials.

Unlocking doors and fuel-filler door

1. Push the door handle request switch

(driver’s or front passenger’s)

or the

liftgate request switch

once while

carrying the Intelligent Key with you.

When you approach the vehicle with

the Intelligent Key, the puddle light

and the passenger cabin illumination

will illuminate and stay on for a short

period of time (if so equipped). (See

“Welcome light” (P.2-67).)

2. The hazard indicator flashes once and

outside chime sounds once. The cor-

responding door will unlock.

The fuel-filler door will also unlock

when the driver’s door handle request

switch is pushed.

3. Push the door handle request switch

again within 60 seconds.

4. The hazard indicator flashes once and

outside chime sounds once again. All

the doors will unlock.

The liftgate can be unlocked and opened

by pushing the liftgate opener switch. See

“Liftgate” (P.3-22).

All doors will be locked automatically

unless one of the following operations is

performed within 1 minute after pushing

the request switch while the doors are

locked. If during this 1-minute time period,

the request switch is pushed, all doors will

be locked automatically after another 1

minute.

. Opening any door

. Pushing the ignition switch

Power liftgate open (if so equipped)

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the power liftgate opener switch

3. The liftgate will unlock and automati-

cally open.

4. The hazard indicator flashes 4 times

and the outside chime sounds.

BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM

When all the following conditions are met

for a period of time, the battery saver

system will cut off the power supply to

prevent battery discharge.

. The ignition switch is in the ACC

position, and

. All doors are closed, and

. The shift lever is in the P (Park)

position.

WARNING SIGNALS

To help prevent the vehicle from moving

unexpectedly by erroneous operation of

the Intelligent Key listed on the following

chart or to help prevent the vehicle from

being stolen, chime or beep sounds inside

and outside the vehicle and a warning

displays in the vehicle information display.

When a chime or beep sounds or the

warning displays, be sure to check the

vehicle and Intelligent Key.

See “Troubleshooting guide” (P.3-13) and

“Vehicle information display” (P.2-20).

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Symptom Possible cause

Action to take

When pushing the ignition

switch to stop the engine

The SHIFT P warning appears on the

display and the inside warning chime

sounds continuously or for a few sec-

onds.

The shift lever is not in the P (Park)

position.

Shift the shift lever to the P (Park)

position.

When shifting the shift lever

to the P (Park) position.

The inside warning chime sounds con-

tinuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or

ON position.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF

position.

When opening the driver’s

door to get out of the vehicle

The inside warning chime sounds con-

tinuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC

position.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF

position.

When closing the door after

getting out of the vehicle

The NO KEY warning appears on the

display, the outside chime sounds 3

times and the inside warning chime

sounds for a few seconds.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or

ON position.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF

position.

The “REAR DOOR ALERT IS ACTIVATED”

message appears on the display, the

horn sounds three times twice and

“CHECK BACK SEAT FOR ALL ARTICLES”

warning appears on the display.

The rear door alert is activated.

Open a rear door and check the rear

seat for all articles to clear the warn-

ing message.

The SHIFT P warning appears on the

display and the outside chime sounds

continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or

OFF position and the shift lever is

not in the P (Park) position.

Move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position and push the ignition switch

to the OFF position.

When closing the door with

the inside lock knob turned

to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for a few

seconds and all the doors unlock.

The Intelligent Key is inside the

vehicle or cargo area.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the request

switch or the LOCK

but-

ton on the Intelligent Key to

lock the door

The outside chime sounds for a few

seconds.

The Intelligent Key is inside the

vehicle.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

A door is not closed securely.

Close the door securely.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Symptom Possible cause

Action to take

When pushing the door han-

dle request switch to lock the

door

The outside chime sounds for a few

seconds.

The Intelligent Key is inside the

vehicle or cargo area.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

A door is not closed securely.

Close the door securely.

The door handle request switch is

pushed before the door is closed.

Push the door handle request switch

after the door is closed.

When pushing the ignition

switch to start the engine

The Intelligent Key battery indicator

appears on the display.

The battery charge is low.

Replace the battery with a new one.

(See “Battery” (P.8-11).)

The NO KEY warning appears on the

display and the inside warning chime

sounds for a few seconds.

The Intelligent Key is not in the

vehicle.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the ignition

switch

The Intelligent Key system warning light

in the meter illuminates in yellow.

It warns of a malfunction with the

Intelligent Key system.

It is recommended that you contact a

NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

The Intelligent Key transmits radio

waves when the buttons are pushed.

The FAA advises that radio waves

may affect aircraft navigation and

communication systems. Do not op-

erate the Intelligent Key while on an

airplane. Make sure the buttons are

not operated unintentionally when

the unit is stored for a flight.

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, fuel-

filler door, activate the panic alarm and

open the windows by pushing the but-

tons on the Intelligent Key from outside

the vehicle.

Before locking the doors, make sure the

Intelligent Key is not left in the vehicle.

The LOCK/UNLOCK button on the Intelli-

gent Key can operate at a distance of

approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the

vehicle. (The effective distance depends

upon the conditions around the vehicle.)

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be used

with one vehicle. For information con-

cerning the purchase and use of addi-

tional Intelligent Keys, contact a NISSAN

dealer.

The lock and unlock buttons on the

Intelligent Key will not operate when:

. the distance between the Intelligent

Key and the vehicle is over 33 ft (10 m).

. the Intelligent Key battery runs down.

After locking with the remote keyless

entry function, pull the door handle to

make sure the doors are securely locked.

The LOCK/UNLOCK operating range var-

ies depending on the environment. To

securely operate the lock and unlock

buttons, approach the vehicle to about 3

ft (1 m) from the door.

JVP0156X

Type A (if so equipped)

SPA2718

Type B (if so equipped)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SPA1926B

Type C (if so equipped)

LOCK button

UNLOCK button

Power liftgate button

PANIC button

Remote engine start button

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS

ENTRY SYSTEM

When you lock or unlock the doors or the

liftgate, the hazard indicator will flash and

the horn (or the outside chime) will sound

as a confirmation. For details, see “Setting

hazard indicator and horn mode” (P.3-17).

Locking doors and fuel-filler door

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position, push the ignition switch to

the OFF position and make sure you

carry the Intelligent Key with you.*

2. Close all the doors and the liftgate.

3. Push the LOCK

button on the

Intelligent Key.

4. All the doors, the liftgate and fuel-filler

door will lock.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice

and the horn chirps once.

*: Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key

while the ignition switch is in the ACC or

ON position.

Unlocking doors and fuel-filler door

1. Push the UNLOCK button on

the Intelligent Key once.

2. The hazard indicator flashes once. The

driver’s door and fuel-filler door will

unlock.

The puddle light and the passenger

cabin illumination will illuminate and

stay on for a short period of time (if so

equipped). (See “Welcome light” (P.2-

67).)

3. Push the UNLOCK

button on the

Intelligent Key again within 60 sec-

onds.

4. The hazard indicator flashes once

again. All the doors will unlock.

All doors will be locked automatically

unless one of the following operations is

performed within 1 minute after pushing

the UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key

while the doors are locked. If during this 1-

minute time period, the UNLOCK button

on the Intelligent Key is pushed, all doors

will be locked automatically after another

1 minute.

. Opening any door

. Pushing the ignition switch

Opening windows

To open the windows, push the door

UNLOCK

button on the Intelligent

Key for about 3 seconds after the door is

unlocked.

To stop opening, release the UNLOCK

button.

Window cannot be closed using the

Intelligent Key.

The door windows can be opened or

closed by turning the mechanical key in

a door lock. (See “Doors” (P.3-4).)

Opening/closing liftgate (if so

equipped)

1. Push the power liftgate button

for more than 1 second.

2. The liftgate will automatically open.

The hazard indicator flashes 4 times and

the outside chime sounds for approxi-

mately 3 seconds.

To close the liftgate, push the power

liftgate button

for more than 1

second.

The liftgate will automatically close.

If the button

is pushed while the

liftgate is being opened or closed, the

liftgate will reverse.

Using panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel

threatened, you may activate the alarm

to call attention as follows:

1. Push the PANIC

button on the

Intelligent Key for more than 1 sec-

ond.

2. The theft warning alarm and head-

lights will stay on for 25 seconds.

3. The panic alarm stops when:

It has run for 25 seconds, or

Any of the buttons on the Intelligent

Key are pushed. (Note: Panic button

or power liftgate button should be

pushed for more than 1 second.)

Remote engine start (if so

equipped)

The remote engine start button is

on the Intelligent Key if the vehicle has

remote engine start function. This func-

tion allows the engine to start from

outside the vehicle. See “Remote engine

start” (P.3-19) for more details.

Setting hazard indicator and horn

mode

This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and

horn mode when you first receive the

vehicle.

In hazard indicator and horn mode, when

the LOCK

button is pushed, the

hazard indicator flashes twice and the

horn chirps once. When the UNLOCK

button is pushed, the hazard indicator

flashes once.

If horns are not necessary, the system

can be switched to the hazard indicator

mode.

In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCK

button is pushed, the hazard indica-

tor flashes twice. When the UNLOCK

button is pushed, neither the hazard

indicator nor the horn operates.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Hazard indicator and horn mode:

DOOR LOCK

DOOR UNLOCK

Intelligent Key system

(Using door handle request switch)

HAZARD - twice

OUTSIDE CHIME - twice

HAZARD - once

OUTSIDE CHIME - once

Remote keyless entry system

(Using

or button)

HAZARD - twice

HORN - once

HAZARD - once

HORN - none

Hazard indicator mode:

DOOR LOCK

DOOR UNLOCK

Intelligent Key system

(Using door handle request switch)

HAZARD - twice

HAZARD - none

Remote keyless entry system

(Using

or button) HAZARD - twice

HAZARD - none

Switching procedure:

Push the LOCK

and UNLOCK

buttons on the Intelligent Key simulta-

neously for more than 2 seconds to

switch the mode from one to the other.

When pushing the buttons to set the

hazard indicator mode, the hazard indi-

cator flashes 3 times.

When pushing the buttons to set the

hazard indicator and horn mode, the

hazard indicator flashes once and the

horn chirps once.

WARNING

To avoid risk of injury or death, do

not use the remote engine start

function when the vehicle is in an

enclosed area such as a garage.

JVP0445X

The remote engine start

button is on

the Intelligent Key if the vehicle has

remote engine start function. This func-

tion allows the engine to start from

outside the vehicle.

Some systems, such as the air conditioner

system, will turn on during a remote

engine start, if the system was on the

last time the ignition switch was turned

off.

Laws in some local communities may

restrict the use of remote engine starters.

For example, some laws require a person

using remote engine start to have the

vehicle in view. Check local regulations for

any requirements.

Other conditions may affect the remote

engine start function. See “Conditions the

remote engine start will not work” (P.3-

20).

Other conditions can affect the perfor-

mance of the Intelligent Key transmitter.

See “Intelligent Key system” (P.3-7) for

additional information.

REMOTE ENGINE START OPERATING

RANGE

The remote engine start function can

only be used when the Intelligent Key is

within the specified operating range from

the vehicle.

When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged or other strong radio wave

sources are present near the operating

location, the Intelligent Key operating

range becomes narrower, and the Intelli-

gent Key may not function properly.

The remote engine start operating range

is approximately 197 ft (60 m) from the

vehicle.

REMOTE STARTING THE ENGINE

To use the remote start function to start

the engine, perform the following:

1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.

2. Push the “LOCK”

button to lock all

doors.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

REMOTE ENGINE START (if so equipped)

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3. Within 5 seconds push and hold the

remote engine start

button until

the turn signal lights flash and the tail

lights illuminate. If the vehicle is not

within view, push and hold the remote

engine start

button for at least 2

seconds.

The following events will occur when the

engine starts:

. The front parking lights will turn on

and remain on as long as the engine is

running.

. The doors will be locked and the air

conditioner system may turn on.

. The engine will continue to run for

about 10 minutes. Repeat the steps to

extend the time for an additional 10

minutes. See “Extending engine run

time” (P.3-20).

Depress and hold the brake pedal, then

place the ignition switch in the ON posi-

tion before driving. For further instruc-

tions, see “Driving the vehicle” (P.5-17).

EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME

The remote engine start function can be

extended one time by performing the

steps listed in “Remote starting the en-

gine” (P.3-19). Run time will be calculated

as follows:

. The first 10 minute run time will start

when the remote engine start func-

tion is performed.

. The second 10 minutes will start im-

mediately when the remote engine

start function is performed. For exam-

ple, if the engine has been running for

5 minutes, and 10 minutes are added,

the engine will run for a total of 15

minutes.

. Extending engine run time will count

towards the two remote engine start

limit.

A maximum of two remote engine starts,

or a single start with an extension, are

allowed between ignition cycles.

The ignition switch must be cycled to the

ON position and then back to the OFF

position before the remote engine start

procedure can be used again.

CANCELING A REMOTE ENGINE

START

To cancel a remote engine start, perform

one of the following:

. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle

and push and hold the remote engine

start

button until the front park-

ing lights turn off.

. Turn on the hazard indicator flashers.

. Cycle the ignition switch ON and then

OFF.

. The extended engine run time has

expired.

. The first 10 minute timer has expired.

. The engine hood has been opened.

. The shift lever is moved out of the P

(Park) position.

. The theft alarm sounds due to illegal

entry into the vehicle.

. The ignition switch is pushed without

an Intelligent Key in the vehicle.

. The ignition switch is pushed with an

Intelligent Key in the vehicle but the

brake pedal is not depressed.

CONDITIONS THE REMOTE ENGINE

START WILL NOT WORK

The remote engine start will not operate

if any of the following conditions are

present:

. The ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

. The hood is not securely closed.

. The hazard indicator flashers are on.

. The engine is still running. The engine

must be completely stopped. Wait at

least 6 seconds if the engine goes

from running to off. This is not applic-

able when extending engine run time.

. The remote engine start

button is

not pushed and held for at least 2

seconds.

. The remote engine start button is

not pushed and held within 5 seconds

of pushing the “LOCK”

button.

. The brake pedal is depressed.

. The doors are not closed and locked.

. The liftgate is open.

. The Intelligent Key system warning

light remains on in the vehicle infor-

mation display.

. An Intelligent Key is left inside the

vehicle.

. The theft alarm sounds due to illegal

entry into the vehicle.

. Two remote engine starts, or a single

remote engine start with an exten-

sion, have already been used.

. The shift lever is not in the P (Park)

position.

The remote engine start may display a

warning or indicator in the vehicle infor-

mation display. For an explanation of the

warning or indicator, see “Operational

indicators” (P.2-23).

JVP0463X

1. Pull the hood lock release handle

located below the instrument panel;

the hood will then spring up slightly.

2. Pull the lever

up at the front of the

hood with your fingertips and raise

the hood.

3. When closing the hood, slowly close

the hood down and make sure it locks

into place.

WARNING

. Make sure the hood is completely

closed and latched before driving.

Failure to do so could cause the

hood to fly open and result in an

accident.

. If you see steam or smoke com-

ing from the engine compart-

ment, to avoid injury do not

open the hood.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

HOOD

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING

. Always be sure the liftgate has

been closed securely to prevent it

from opening while driving.

. Do not drive with the liftgate

open. This could allow dangerous

exhaust gases to be drawn into

the vehicle. See “Exhaust gas

(carbon monoxide)” (P.5-4).

. Do not leave children unattended

inside the vehicle. They could

unknowingly activate switches

or controls. Unattended children

could become involved in serious

accidents.

. Always be sure that hands and

feet are clear of the door frame to

avoid injury while closing the

liftgate.

JVP0464X

OPERATING MANUAL LIFTGATE

To open the liftgate, unlock it and push

the liftgate opener switch

. Pull up the

liftgate to open.

The liftgate can be unlocked by:

. pushing the unlock button

on the

Intelligent Key twice.

. pushing the liftgate request switch

with the Intelligent Key carried on you.

. pushing the door handle request

switch twice with the Intelligent Key

carried on you.

. pushing the power door lock switch to

the unlock position.

. inserting the mechanical key into the

driver’s door key cylinder and turning

it to the rear of the vehicle twice.

To close the liftgate, pull down until it

securely locks.

OPERATING POWER LIFTGATE (if so

equipped)

To operate the power liftgate, the shift

lever must be in the P (Park) position.

The power liftgate will not operate if the

battery voltage is low.

LIFTGATE

SPA2547

Power liftgate main switch

The power liftgate operation can be

turned on or off by the power liftgate

main switch on the instrument panel.

When the power liftgate main switch is

pushed to the “OFF” position, the power

operation is not available by the power

liftgate switch on the liftgate and liftgate

opener switch.

The liftgate can still be operated by the

power liftgate switch on the instrument

panel and the power liftgate button on

the Intelligent Key.

SPA2548

Power liftgate switch — Instrument panel

JVP0465X

Liftgate opener switch

JVP0214X

Intelligent Key

SPA2796

Power liftgate switch — Liftgate

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Power open

When the liftgate is fully closed, the

liftgate will fully open automatically by:

. pushing the power liftgate switch

on the instrument panel

. pushing the liftgate opener switch

. pushing the power liftgate button

on the Intelligent Key for more than 1

second

The hazard flashes 4 times and the out-

side chime sounds when the liftgate

starts opening.

NOTE:

The liftgate can be opened by the

power liftgate switch

, the liftgate

opener switch

or the power liftgate

button

even if the liftgate is

locked. The liftgate will individually un-

lock and open.

Power close

When the liftgate is fully opened, the

liftgate will fully close automatically by:

. pushing the power liftgate switch

on the instrument panel

. pushing the power liftgate button

on the Intelligent Key for more than 1

second

. pushing the power liftgate switch

on the lower part of the liftgate

The hazard flashes 4 times and the out-

side chime sounds when the liftgate

starts closing.

NOTE:

When the liftgate is closed, it remains

unlocked. Manually lock the liftgate.

Reverse function

The power liftgate will reverse immedi-

ately if one of the following actions is

performed during power open or power

close.

. pushing the power liftgate switch

on the instrument panel

. pushing the power liftgate button

on the Intelligent Key.

. pushing the liftgate switch

on the

lower part of the liftgate

The outside chime sounds when the

liftgate starts to reverse.

Auto reverse function

The auto-reverse function enables the

liftgate to automatically reverse when

something is caught in the liftgate as it

is opening or closing. When the control

unit detects an obstacle, the liftgate will

reverse and return to the full open or full

close position.

If a second obstacle is detected, the

liftgate motion will stop and the drive

motor will disengage. The liftgate will

enter the manual mode.

A pinch sensor is mounted on each side

of the liftgate. If an obstacle is detected

by the pinch sensor during power close,

the liftgate will reverse and return to the

full open position immediately.

NOTE:

If the pinch sensor is damaged or

removed, the power close function will

not operate.

WARNING

There is a small distance immedi-

ately before the closed position that

cannot be detected. Make sure that

all passengers keep their hands, etc.,

clear from the liftgate opening be-

fore closing the liftgate.

Manual mode

If power operation is not available, the

liftgate can be operated manually. Power

operation may not be available if multiple

obstacles have been detected in a single

power cycle or if the battery voltage is

low. When the power liftgate main switch

is in the OFF position, the liftgate can be

opened manually by pushing the liftgate

opener switch. If the power liftgate open-

er switch is pushed during power open or

close, the power operation will be can-

celed and the liftgate can be operated

manually.

JVP0466X

Safe Mode

If the gas stays of the liftgate lose

pressure, the power liftgate safe mode is

activated. When the safe mode is acti-

vated, the liftgate intermittently closes.

Then the liftgate will be pulled to the

closed and latched position by a motor.

The power liftgate cannot be opened

using the switches at any time in the safe

mode.

Do not operate the liftgate again until it is

checked. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION

. If the power liftgate does not stay

open or if the liftgate unexpect-

edly closes at any time, do not

operate the liftgate. There may

be a pressure loss in one or both

of the liftgate gas stays. Have the

liftgate inspected. It is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

. Do not activate the power liftgate

if one or both of the liftgate gas

stays are removed. Damage to

the liftgate or power liftgate me-

chanisms may occur.

AUTO CLOSURE

If the liftgate is pulled down to a partly

open position, the liftgate will pull itself to

the closed position.

Do not apply excessive force when the

auto closure is operating. Excessive

force applied may cause the mechan-

ism to malfunction.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

CAUTION

. The liftgate will automatically

close from a partly open position.

To avoid pinching, keep hands

and fingers away from liftgate

opening.

. Do not let children operate the

liftgate.

SPA2751

LIFTGATE RELEASE LEVER

If the liftgate cannot be opened with the

door lock switch due to a discharged

battery, follow these steps.

1. Remove the cover

inside of the

liftgate using a suitable tool.

2. Move the lever

as illustrated to open

the liftgate.

It is recommended you contact a NISSAN

dealer as soon as possible for repair.

OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR

CAUTION

Lock all doors before going through

automatic car wash. Locking doors

helps prevent fuel-filler door from

opening and becoming damaged.

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

SPA2752

To open the fuel-filler door, unlock the

fuel-filler door by using one of the follow-

ing operations, then push the right side of

the door.

. Push the driver’s door handle request

switch with the Intelligent Key carried

with you.

. Push the passenger’s door handle

request switch or liftgate request

switch twice with the Intelligent Key

carried with you.

. Push the UNLOCK button on the

Intelligent Key.

. Insert the mechanical key into the

door lock cylinder and rotate it to-

wards the rear of the vehicle.

. Push the power door lock switch to

the UNLOCK position.

To lock, close the fuel-filler door securely

and lock all doors by operating the door

handle request switch, the LOCK button

on the Intelligent Key, the mechanical key

or the power door lock switch.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

WARNING

. Gasoline is extremely flammable

and highly explosive under cer-

tain conditions. You could be

burned or seriously injured if it is

misused or mishandled. Always

stop engine and do not smoke or

allow open flames or sparks near

the vehicle when refueling.

. Do not attempt to top off the fuel

tank after the fuel pump nozzle

shuts off automatically. Contin-

ued refueling may cause fuel

overflow, resulting in fuel spray

and possibly a fire.

. Use only an original equipment

type fuel-filler cap as a replace-

ment. It has a built-in safety valve

needed for proper operation of

the fuel system and emission

control system. An incorrect cap

can result in a serious malfunc-

tion and possible injury. It could

also cause the malfunction indi-

cator light to come on.

. Never pour fuel into the throttle

body to attempt to start your

vehicle.

. Do not fill a portable fuel contain-

er in the vehicle or trailer. Static

electricity can cause an explosion

of flammable liquid, vapor or gas

in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce

the risk of serious injury or death

when filling portable fuel contain-

ers:

— Always place the container on

the ground when filling.

— Do not use electronic devices

when filling.

— Keep the pump nozzle in con-

tact with the container while

you are filling it.

— Use only approved portable

fuel containers for flammable

liquid.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

CAUTION

. If fuel is spilled on the vehicle

body, flush it away with water to

avoid paint damage.

. Insert the cap straight into the

fuel-filler tube, then tighten until

the fuel-filler cap clicks. Failure to

tighten the fuel-filler cap properly

may cause the

malfunction

indicator light (MIL) to illuminate.

If the

light illuminates be-

cause the fuel-filler cap is loose

or missing, tighten or install the

cap and continue to drive the

vehicle. The

light should turn

off after a few driving trips. If the

light does not turn off after a

few driving trips, have the vehicle

inspected. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

. The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will

appear if the fuel-filler cap is not

properly tightened. It may take a

few driving trips for the message

to be displayed. Failure to tighten

the fuel-filler cap properly after

the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning

appears may cause the

Mal-

function Indicator Light (MIL) to

illuminate.

Turn the cap counterclockwise to re-

move. To tighten, turn the cap clockwise

until a single click is heard.

SPA2753

To remove the fuel-filler cap:

1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclock-

wise to remove.

2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap

holder

while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:

1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into

the fuel-filler tube.

2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until

a single click is heard.

SPA2815

LOOSE FUEL CAP warning

The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears on

the vehicle information display when the

fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly

after the vehicle has been refueled. It may

take a few driving trips for the warning to

be displayed.

To turn off the warning, perform the

following:

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap

as soon as possible. (See “Fuel-filler

cap” (P.3-27).)

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

3. Push the

switch on the right

side of the combination meter panel

for longer than 1 second to turn off the

LOOSE FUEL CAP warning after tigh-

tening the fuel cap.

WARNING

. Do not adjust the steering wheel

while driving. You could lose con-

trol of your vehicle and cause an

accident.

. Do not adjust the steering wheel

any closer to you than is neces-

sary for proper steering opera-

tion and comfort. The driver’s air

bag inflates with great force. If

you are unrestrained, leaning for-

ward, sitting sideways or out of

position in any way, you are at

greater risk of injury or death in a

crash. You may also receive ser-

ious or fatal injuries from the air

bag if you are up against it when

it inflates. Always sit back against

the seatback and as far away as

practical from the steering wheel.

Always use the seat belts.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SPA2754

ELECTRIC OPERATION

Tilt or telescopic operation

Move the lever to adjust the steering

wheel up or down, forward or rearward to

the desired position.

Entry/Exit function operation (if so

equipped):

The automatic drive positioner system

will make the steering wheel move up

automatically when the driver’s door is

opened with the ignition switch in the

LOCK position. This lets the driver get into

and out of the seat more easily.

For more information, see “Automatic

drive positioner” (P.3-40).

SIC3451

CAUTION

. Do not store the main sun visor

before storing the extension sun

visor.

. Do not pull the extension sun

visor forcedly downward.

1. To block out glare from the front,

swing down the main sun visor

2. To block glare from the side, remove

the main sun visor from the center

mount and swing it to the side

3. Draw out the extension sun visor

from the main sun visor to block from

further glare.

SUN VISORS

SPA2447

INSIDE MIRROR

Adjust the height and the angle of the

inside mirror to the desired position.

SPA2143

Manual anti-glare type (if so

equipped)

The night position will reduce glare

from the headlights of vehicles behind

you at night.

Use the day position

when driving in

daylight hours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when

necessary, because it reduces rear

view clarity.

SPA2450-A

Automatic anti-glare type (if so

equipped)

The inside mirror is designed so that it

automatically changes reflection accord-

ing to the intensity of the headlights of

the following vehicle.

The anti-glare system will be automati-

cally turned on when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position.

When the anti-glare system is turned on,

the indicator light

will illuminate and

excessive glare from the headlights of the

vehicle behind you will be reduced.

Push the “*” switch

to make the inside

rearview mirror operate normally. The

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31

MIRRORS

3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

indicator light will turn off. Push the “I”

switch

to turn the system on.

Do not allow any object to cover the

sensors

or apply glass cleaner on

them. Doing so will reduce the sensitiv-

ity of the sensor, resulting in improper

operation.

For the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver

operation, see “HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver (Type A)” (P.2-70).

Intelligent Rear View Mirror (if so

equipped)

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the

Intelligent Rear View Mirror could

result in serious injury or death.

. The Intelligent Rear View Mirror is

a convenience feature but it is not

a substitute for proper vehicle

operation. The system has areas

where objects cannot be viewed.

Check the blind spot of the In-

telligent Rear View Mirror before

vehicle operation. The driver is

always responsible for safe driv-

ing.

. Do not disassemble or modify the

Intelligent Rear View Mirror, the

camera unit or wirings. If you do,

it may result in accidents or fire.

In case you notice smoke or smell

coming from the Intelligent Rear

View Mirror, stop using the sys-

tem immediately. It is recom-

mended that you see a NISSAN

dealer for servicing.

. Do not operate the Intelligent

Rear View Mirror while driving.

Doing so can be a distraction

and it could lose control of your

vehicle and cause an accident or

serious injury.

. Do not gaze into the Intelligent

Rear View Mirror display during

driving. It may cause a distraction

and it could lose control of your

vehicle and cause an accident or

serious injury.

. Do not put a cigarette or flames

to the Intelligent Rear View Mir-

ror, the camera unit or wirings. It

may cause a fire.

. Be sure to adjust the Intelligent

Rear View Mirror before driving.

Switch the system to the conven-

tional rearview mirror mode and

be properly seated on the driver’s

seat. Then adjust the mirror so as

to see the rear window properly.

Driving without adjusting the mir-

ror may cause difficulty in watch-

ing the display at Intelligent Rear

View Mirror mode (camera view

mode) due to the reflection from

the surface of the mirror.

. If the Intelligent Rear View Mirror

malfunctions, immediately switch

the system to the conventional

rearview mirror mode.

. When strong light (for example,

sunlight or high beams from fol-

lowing vehicles) enters the cam-

era, a light beam or a glaring light

may appear on the monitor

screen of the Intelligent Rear

View Mirror. In that case, switch

the system to the conventional

rearview mirror mode appropri-

ately.

. If dirt, rain or snow accumulates

on the exterior glass surface cov-

ering the camera, the Intelligent

Rear View Mirror may not display

objects clearly. Use of the rear

window wiper/washer may im-

prove visibility, but if not, switch

the Intelligent Rear View Mirror to

the conventional rearview mirror

mode until a time the glass cov-

ering the camera can be cleaned.

JVP0515X

MENU button

Left button

Right button

Mode select lever

HomeLink® buttons (1-3)

Components:

Intelligent Rear View Mirror provides a

clear rearview from a camera located on

the rear of the vehicle. Intelligent Rear

View Mirror has two modes: conventional

rearview mirror mode and Intelligent Rear

View Mirror mode (camera view mode).

You can switch these two modes by the

mode select lever

For the operation of the HomeLink®

buttons

, see “HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver (Type B)” (P.2-74).

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33

3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

JVP0489X

How to change the mode:

The mode can be switched when the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

. Pull the mode select lever

to switch

to the Intelligent Rear View Mirror

mode (camera view mode).

. Push the mode select lever

switch to the conventional rearview

mirror mode.

JVP0506X

How to make settings of Intelligent Rear

View Mirror:

You can choose display settings of the

Intelligent Rear View Mirror such as

brightness, camera angle, textual indica-

tion ON or OFF and language.

When the Intelligent Rear View Mirror

mode is on, setting menu can be selected

by pushing the MENU button

. Each time

the MENU button

is pushed, the setting

menu will change as follows:

MENU (initial screen) ?BRIGHTNESS ?

DOWN/UP ? ROTATION ? INDICATION

? DIMMING MIRROR ? LANGUAGE ?

MENU (initial screen)

NOTE:

. To switch the image quality adjust-

ment items with the MENU button

push the button within 5 seconds

after completing the adjustment of

the previous item. If 5 seconds or

more pass, the monitor will return to

MENU (initial screen).

. When one of the HomeLink® buttons

is pushed, the monitor will display

the HomeLink® screen.

JVP0507X

BRIGHTNESS

The brightness of the display screen can

be adjusted.

. Push the left button

to dim the

screen.

. Push the right button

to brighten

the screen.

JVP0508X

DOWN/UP

The vertical camera angle of the display

screen can be adjusted.

. Push the left button

to down the

camera angle.

. Push the right button

to up the

camera angle.

JVP0510X

ROTATION

The camera angle of the display screen

can be rotated.

. Push the left button

to rotate the

camera angle to the left.

. Push the right button

to rotate the

camera angle to the right.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-35

3-36 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

JVP0511X

INDICATION

The textual indication can be turned on or

off on the Intelligent Rear View Mirror

display screen.

. Push the right button

to disable the

textual indication on the display

screen.

. Push the left button

to enable the

textual indication on the display

screen.

JVP0514X

DIMMING MIRROR

The mirror is designed so that it auto-

matically changes reflection according to

the intensity of the headlights of the

following vehicle. You can enable or

disable the automatic anti-glare mode.

. Push the left button

to enable the

automatic anti-glare mode.

. Push the right button

to disable the

automatic anti-glare mode.

JVP0512X

LANGUAGE

The language of the textual indication

can be selected on the Intelligent Rear

View Mirror display screen.

Select the language by using the

button. You can select either English or

French. The language setting will be

retained even if the engine is restarted.

Intelligent Rear View Mirror system

precautions:

NOTE:

. Long-term use of this system in

stopping engine may cause battery

to be discharged.

. Do not attach an antenna of wireless

device near the Intelligent Rear View

Mirror. Electric wave from wireless

device may cause disturbed image

in Intelligent Rear View Mirror.

. Do not push buttons excessively or

operating the lever roughly may

cause a system failure or the Intelli-

gent Rear View Mirror itself to drop.

. Never turn the body of Intelligent

Rear View Mirror by 90° or more. It

may damage the Intelligent Rear

View Mirror.

. Do not apply strong shocks to the

body of Intelligent Rear View Mirror.

It may cause a system failure.

. Do not apply heavy load to the

camera and camera-cover on the

rear of the vehicle. It may cause the

camera to be removed or may cause

a system failure.

. If it is difficult to see the Intelligent

Rear View Mirror display screen be-

cause of a strong external light,

switch the mode to the conventional

rearview mirror mode for better use.

. Close the sunshade (if so equipped)

when the Intelligent Rear View Mir-

ror display screen is unclear due to

strong external light.

JVP0559X

Flicker image (example)

. When LED headlights are viewed on

the Intelligent Rear View Mirror dis-

play, the images may flicker. This is

normal.

. Due to diffused reflection from ex-

ternal environment, images on the

screen may flicker. This is not a

malfunction.

. A quick movement of a thing may

not be able to display on the camera

view screen. This is not a malfunc-

tion.

. Turn on the headlights at twilight or

in a tunnel, etc.

. The Intelligent Rear View Mirror

mode (camera view mode) display

is different from the conventional

rearview mirror. Objects in the dis-

play may differ from actual distance.

Do not solely rely on the Intelligent

Rear View Mirror. Always rely on

your own operation to avoid acci-

dents.

. If the brightness of the camera view

display is adjusted to excessive

bright level, it may cause an eye-

strain in the driving. Adjust the

brightness properly.

. Use the rear window wiper when it

rains. If the camera view image is

still unclear when the rear window

wiper is in operation, check the

deterioration of the rear window

wiper blade.

. When using the rear window wiper,

images on the screen may flicker.

This is not a malfunction.

. Defog the rear window with defros-

ter when rear window is fogged. Use

the conventional rearview mirror

mode until the rear window is fully

defogged.

. The display of the Intelligent Rear

View Mirror may become hot. This is

not a malfunction.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-37

3-38 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

. The color of an object in the distance

or in the dark may be difficult to be

recognized. This is not a malfunc-

tion.

System maintenance (Intelligent Rear

View Mirror):

. Always keep the mirror and camera

area of the rear window clean.

. Clean the mirror and the camera lens

with a dry soft cloth.

. When clean the camera area of the

rear window, using a soft cloth dam-

pend with water and a few neutral

detergent. And after, the dry it up with

dry soft cloth.

. If the image on the Intelligent Rear

View Mirror display screen is still un-

clear even after cleaning the camera

area of the rear window, an oil film

may be adhering to the rear window

glass. Clean the rear window glass

with an oil film remover.

. Never use alcohol, benzine, thinner, or

any similar material to clean the

mirror or camera lens. It will cause a

discoloration, deterioration or a sys-

tem malfunction.

. Do not attach a sticker (including

transparent material) on the camera

area of the rear window.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

. Objects viewed in the outside

mirror on the passenger side are

closer than they appear. Be care-

ful when moving to the right.

Using only this mirror could cause

an accident. Use the inside mirror

or glance over your shoulder to

properly judge distances to other

objects.

. Do not adjust the mirrors while

driving. You could lose control of

your vehicle and cause an acci-

dent.

SPA2739

Adjusting outside mirrors

The outside mirror control switch is

located on the driver’s door armrest.

The outside mirror will operate only when

the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

Move the switch right or left to select the

right or left side mirror

, then adjust

using the control switch

Defrosting outside mirrors

The outside mirrors will be heated when

the rear window defroster switch is

operated. (See “Rear window and outside

mirror defroster switch” (P.2-36).)

SPA2738

Power foldable outside mirrors

CAUTION

. Do not touch the mirrors while

they are moving. Your hand may

be pinched, and the mirror may

malfunction.

. Do not drive with the mirrors

stored. You will be unable to see

behind the vehicle.

. If the mirrors were folded or

unfolded by hand, there is a

chance that the mirror will move

forward or backward during driv-

ing. If the mirrors were folded or

unfolded by hand, be sure to

adjust them again electrically be-

fore driving.

The outside mirror remote control oper-

ates when the ignition switch is in the

ACC or ON position.

To fold the outside mirrors, push the

outside mirror folding switch to the

“CLOSE” position

. To unfold, push to

the “OPEN” position

If mirrors are manually operated or

bumped, the mirror body can become

loose at the pivot point. To correct

electronic mirror operation, cycle the

mirrors by pushing “CLOSE” until comple-

tely closed, then push “OPEN” until the

mirrors are in the open position.

Reverse tilt-down feature (if so

equipped)

When backing up the vehicle, the right

and left outside mirrors will turn down-

ward automatically to provide better rear

visibility.

1. Place the ignition switch in the ON

position.

2. Move the shift lever to the R (Reverse)

position.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-39

3-40 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3. Choose the right or left outside mirror

by operating the outside mirror con-

trol switch.

4. The outside mirror surfaces move

downward.

When one of the following conditions has

occurred, the outside mirror surfaces will

return to their original positions.

. The shift lever is moved to any posi-

tion other than R (Reverse).

. The outside mirror control switch is

set to the center position.

. The ignition switch is placed in the

OFF position.

Automatic anti-glare (if so

equipped)

The outside rearview mirrors are de-

signed so that its automatically change

reflection according to the intensity of

the headlights of the vehicle following

you.

The anti-glare system will be automati-

cally turned on when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position.

SIC4448

VANITY MIRROR

To use the front vanity mirror, pull down

the sun visor and pull up the cover.

JVP0247X

SET/memory switches

The automatic drive positioner system

has three features:

. Entry/exit function

. Memory storage

. Setting memory function

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION

This system is designed so that the

driver’s seat and steering column will

automatically move when the automatic

transmission shift lever is in the P (Park)

position. This allows the driver to get into

and out of the driver’s seat more easily.

The driver’s seat will slide backward and

the steering wheel will move up when the

driver’s door is opened with the ignition

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if

so equipped)

switch in the LOCK position.

The driver’s seat and steering wheel will

return to the previous positions when the

ignition switch is pushed to the ACC

position.

The driver’s seat will not return to the

previous positions if the seat or steering

adjusting switch is operated when the

seat is at the exit position.

Cancel or activate entry/exit func-

tion

The shift lever must be in the P (Park)

position with the ignition switch in the

OFF position.

The entry/exit function can be activated

or canceled by pressing and holding the

SET switch for more than 10 seconds.

The entry/exit function can also be acti-

vated or canceled if the “Lift Steering

Wheel on Exit” key or “Slide Driver Seat

Back on Exit” key is turned to ON or OFF in

the Vehicle settings on the center display.

(See NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.)

Initialize entry/exit function

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if

the fuse opens, the entry/exit function

will not work though this function was set

on before. In such a case, after connect-

ing the battery or replacing with a new

fuse, open and close the driver’s door

more than two times after the ignition

switch is turned from the ON position to

the LOCK position. The entry/exit func-

tion will be activated.

MEMORY STORAGE

Two positions for the driver’s seat, steer-

ing column and outside mirrors can be

stored in the automatic drive positioner

memory. Follow these procedures to use

the memory system.

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position.

2. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering col-

umn and outside mirrors to the de-

sired positions by manually operating

each adjusting switch. For additional

information, see “Seats” (P.1-3) and

“Tilt/telescopic steering” (P.3-29) and

“Outside mirrors” (P.3-38).

3. Push the SET switch and, within 5

seconds, push the memory switch (1

or 2) fully for at least 1 second.

The indicator light for the pushed

memory switch will stay on for ap-

proximately 5 seconds after pushing

the switch.

When the memory is stored in the

memory switch (1 or 2), a buzzer will

sound.

If memory is stored in the same

memory switch, the previous memory

will be deleted.

Linking Intelligent Key to a stored

memory position

The Intelligent Key can be linked to a

stored memory position with the follow-

ing procedure.

1. Follow the steps for storing a memory

position.

2. While the indicator light for the mem-

ory switch being set is illuminated for

5 seconds, push the

button on the

Intelligent Key. If the indicator light

blinks, the Intelligent Key is linked to

that memory setting.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF

position, and then push the

button

on the Intelligent Key. The driver’s seat,

steering wheel and outside mirrors will

move to the memorized position.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-41

3-42 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Confirming memory storage

. Push the ignition switch to the ON

position and push the SET switch. If

the main memory has not been

stored, the indicator light will come

on for approximately 0.5 second.

When the memory has stored in posi-

tion, the indicator light will stay on for

approximately 5 seconds.

. If the battery cable is disconnected, or

if the fuse opens, the memory will be

canceled. In this case, reset the de-

sired position using the previous pro-

cedure.

. If optional Intelligent Keys are added

to your vehicle, the memory storage

procedure to switch 1 or 2 and linking

Intelligent Key procedure to a stored

memory position should be per-

formed again for each Intelligent Key.

For additional Intelligent Key informa-

tion, see “Keys” (P.3-2).

Selecting the memorized position

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position.

2. Use one of the following methods to

move the driver’s seat, the outside

mirrors and the steering wheel.

Push the memory switch (1 or 2)

fully for at least 1 second.

The driver’s seat, steering column and

outside mirrors will move to the

memorized position or to the exit

position when the entry/exit function

is set to active with the indicator light

flashing, and then the light will stay on

for approximately 5 seconds.

SETTING MEMORY FUNCTION

The status of the following settings can

be linked to the Intelligent Key and the

memorized settings can be available for

each Intelligent Key.

. Air conditioner system

. Navigation system (if so equipped)

. Audio system

To use the memory function, lock the

doors with the Intelligent Key that is

linked to the settings.

To enable the memorized settings:

1. Carry the Intelligent Key that is linked

to the settings, and unlock the doors

by pushing the driver’s door handle

request switch or “UNLOCK”

but-

ton on the Intelligent Key.

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON

position. “Connection with the key has

been done” will be displayed on the

screen and the memorized settings

are available (only when a new Intel-

ligent Key is used).

SYSTEM OPERATION

The automatic drive positioner system

will not work or will stop operating under

the following conditions:

. When the vehicle speed is above 0

MPH (0 km/h) or 4 MPH (7 km/h) for

some limited functions such linking an

Intelligent Key to the vehicle when the

power source is turned on from off or

during the Exit function.

. When any of the memory switches are

pushed while the automatic drive

positioner is operating.

. When the adjusting switch for the

driver’s seat and steering column is

turned on while the automatic drive

positioner is operating.

. When the seat has already been

moved to the memorized position.

. When no seat position is stored in the

memory switch.

. When the shift lever is moved from the

P (Park) position to any other position.

4 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio,
phone and voice recognition systems
NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual .................................... 4-2
Safety note ........................................................................................ 4-2
RearView Monitor (if so equipped) ................................. 4-3
RearView Monitor system operation ..................... 4-4
How to read the displayed lines ................................ 4-4
Difference between predictive and
actual distances ...................................................................... 4-5
How to park with predictive course lines .......... 4-6
Sonar indicator ........................................................................ 4-7
Adjusting the screen ........................................................... 4-8
Predictive course line settings .................................... 4-8
RearView Monitor system limitations .................... 4-8
System maintenance .......................................................... 4-9
Intelligent Around View Monitor (if
so equipped) .................................................................................. 4-10
Intelligent Around View Monitor
system operation ................................................................ 4-12
How to adjust the screen view ................................ 4-19
Intelligent Around View Monitor settings ....... 4-20
Intelligent Around View Monitor
system limitations .............................................................. 4-22
System maintenance ....................................................... 4-24
Camera aiding sonar function (models with
Intelligent Around View Monitor) .................................. 4-25
Sonar system operation ................................................ 4-25
Turning on and off the sonar function .......... 4-26
Sonar system limitations ........................................... 4-27
System temporarily unavailable ........................... 4-28
System maintenance .................................................... 4-28
Moving Object Detection (MOD) ................................... 4-29
MOD system operation ................................................ 4-30
Turning on and off the MOD system ............... 4-31
MOD system limitations .............................................. 4-32
System maintenance .................................................... 4-33
Ventilators ...................................................................................... 4-34
Center ventilators ............................................................ 4-34
Side ventilators .................................................................. 4-34
Rear ventilators .................................................................. 4-34
Heater and air conditioner ................................................ 4-35
Automatic air conditioner ......................................... 4-36
Rear automatic air conditioning system ....... 4-39
Operating tips ..................................................................... 4-43
Linking Intelligent Key (if so equipped)........... 4-43
In-cabin microfilter .......................................................... 4-43
Servicing air conditioner ............................................. 4-43
Antenna ............................................................................................ 4-43
Window antenna ............................................................... 4-43
Satellite antenna ............................................................... 4-44
Car phone or CB radio ......................................................... 4-44

4-2 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

For models with NissanConnect® with

Navigation (if so equipped) and Services

(if so equipped), refer to the NissanCon-

nect® Owner’s Manual regarding the fol-

lowing information.

. Audio system

. Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

. NissanConnect® Services

. SiriusXM Traffic

. SiriusXM® Travel Link

. SiriusXM® Radio

. Navigation system

. Voice Recognition System

. Information and settings viewable on

NissanConnect®

WARNING

. Do not disassemble or modify

this system. If you do, it may

result in accidents, fire, or electric

shock.

. Do not use this system if you

notice any abnormality, such as

a frozen screen or lack of sound.

Continued use of the system may

result in accident, fire or electric

shock.

. In case you notice any foreign

object in the system hardware,

spill liquid on it, or notice smoke

or smell coming from it, stop

using the system immediately. It

is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for servicing.

Ignoring such conditions may

lead to accidents, fire, or electric

shock.

. Park the vehicle in a safe location

and apply the parking brake to

view the images on the front

center display screen.

CAUTION

Do not use the system when the

engine is not running for extended

periods of time to prevent battery

discharge.

Do not attempt to operate the system in

extreme temperature conditions [below

−4°F (−20°C) and above 158°F (70°C)].

Operating this system under these con-

ditions may result in system malfunc-

tions.

NISSANCONNECT® OWNER’S MANUAL

SAFETY NOTE

JVH1688X

1. SETTING button

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the

RearView Monitor system could re-

sult in serious injury or death.

. The RearView Monitor is a conve-

nience but it is not a substitute

for proper backing. Always turn

and look out the windows, and

check mirrors to be sure that it is

safe to move before operating

the vehicle. Always back up

slowly.

. The system is designed as an aid

to the driver in showing large

stationary objects directly behind

the vehicle, to help avoid dama-

ging the vehicle.

. The distance guide line and the

vehicle width line should be used

as a reference only when the

vehicle is on a level paved sur-

face. The distance viewed on the

monitor is for reference only and

may be different than the actual

distance between the vehicle and

displayed objects.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)

4-4 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when

cleaning dirt or snow from the front

of camera.

The RearView Monitor system automati-

cally shows a rear view of the vehicle

when the shift lever is placed in the R

(Reverse) position.

The radio can still be heard while the

RearView Monitor is active.

JVH1395X

To display the rear view, the RearView

Monitor system uses a camera

located

just above the vehicle’s license plate.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM OP-

ERATION

With the ignition switch in the ON posi-

tion, move the shift lever to the R

(Reverse) position to operate the Rear-

View Monitor.

SAA1896

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED

LINES

Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle

width and distances to objects with

reference to the bumper line

are

displayed on the monitor.

Distance guide lines:

Indicate distances from the bumper.

. Red line

: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

. Yellow line

: approx. 3 ft (1 m)

. Green line

: approx. 7 ft (2 m)

. Green line

(if so equipped): approx.

10 ft (3 m)

Vehicle width guide lines

Indicate the approximate vehicle width

when backing up.

Predictive course lines

Indicate the predictive course when back-

ing up. The predictive course lines will be

displayed on the monitor when the shift

lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the

steering wheel is turned. The predictive

course lines will move depending on how

much the steering wheel is turned and

will not be displayed while the steering

wheel is in the neutral position.

The vehicle width guide lines and the

width of the predictive course lines are

wider than the actual width and course.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTIVE

AND ACTUAL DISTANCES

The displayed guidelines and their loca-

tions on the ground are for approximate

reference only. Objects on uphill or down-

hill surfaces or projecting objects will be

actually located at distances different

from those displayed in the monitor

relative to the guidelines (refer to illustra-

tions). When in doubt, turn around and

view the objects as you are backing up, or

park and exit the vehicle to view the

positioning of objects behind the vehicle.

JVH1214X

Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width

guide lines are shown closer than the

actual distance. Note that any object on

the hill is farther than it appears on the

monitor.

JVH1215X

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill,

the distance guide lines and the vehicle

width guide lines are shown farther than

the actual distance. Note that any object

on the hill is closer than it appears on the

monitor.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

4-6 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA1923

Backing up near a projecting object

The predictive course lines do not

touch the object in the display. However,

the vehicle may hit the object if it projects

over the actual backing up course.

JVH1216X

Backing up behind a projecting

object

The position is shown farther than the

position

in the display. However, the

position

is actually at the same dis-

tance as the position

. The vehicle may

hit the object when backing up to the

position

if the object projects over the

actual backing up course.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTIVE

COURSE LINES

WARNING

. If the tires are replaced with

different sized tires, the predic-

tive course line may not be dis-

played correctly.

. On a snow-covered or slippery

road, there may be a difference

between the predictive course

line and the actual course line.

. The displayed lines will appear

slightly off to the right because

the rearview camera is not in-

stalled in the rear center of the

vehicle.

SAA1897

1. Visually check that the parking space

is safe before parking your vehicle.

2. The rearview of the vehicle is dis-

played on the screen

when the shift

lever is moved to the R (Reverse)

position.

SAA1898

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting

the steering wheel so that the pre-

dictive course lines

enter the park-

ing space

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make

the vehicle width guide lines

parallel

to the parking space

while referring

to the predictive course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the

space completely, move the shift lever

to the P (Park) position and apply the

parking brake.

SONAR INDICATOR

When the sonar system is ON, the sonar

indicator will appear in the display. (See

“Sonar system” (P.5-127).)

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

4-8 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

JVH1690X

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

The display settings such as Brightness,

Contrast, Black Level, Tint and Color of

the RearView Monitor can be adjusted.

1. Push the SETTING button while the

RearView Monitor screen is displayed.

2. The Display settings menu is dis-

played. Select an item you wish to

adjust.

3. Adjust the selected item by touching

the “+” or “-” key.

Select “Reset Settings” key to return all

settings to default.

Display settings menu can also be ac-

cessed while the RearView Monitor

screen is not displayed. Push the SETTING

button and select “Camera/Sonar” key,

and then select “Display” key.

NOTE:

Do not adjust any of the display settings

of the RearView Monitor while the

vehicle is moving. Make sure the park-

ing brake is firmly applied.

PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE SET-

TINGS

To toggle on and off the predictive course

lines:

1. Push the SETTING button while the

RearView Monitor screen is not dis-

played.

2. Select “Camera/Sonar” key.

3. Select “Camera” key.

4. Select “Predictive Course Lines” key to

turn the feature on or off. When this

item is turned on, the predictive

course lines will be displayed on the

monitor.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM LIM-

ITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for RearView Monitor. Failure to

operate the vehicle in accordance

with these system limitations could

result in serious injury or death.

. The system cannot completely

eliminate blind spots and may

not show every object.

. Underneath the bumper and the

corner areas of the bumper can-

not be viewed on the RearView

Monitor because of its monitoring

range limitation. The system will

not show small objects below the

bumper, and may not show ob-

jects close to the bumper or on

the ground.

. Objects viewed in the RearView

Monitor differ from actual dis-

tance because a wide-angle lens

is used.

. Objects in the RearView Monitor

will appear visually opposite

compared to when viewed in the

rearview and outside mirrors.

. Use the displayed lines as a re-

ference. The lines are highly af-

fected by the number of

occupants, fuel level, vehicle po-

sition, road conditions and road

grade.

. Make sure that the liftgate is

securely closed when backing up.

. Do not put anything on the rear-

view camera. The rearview cam-

era is installed above the license

plate.

. When washing the vehicle with

high-pressure water, be sure not

to spray it around the camera.

Otherwise, water may enter the

camera unit causing water con-

densation on the lens, a malfunc-

tion, fire or an electric shock.

. Do not strike the camera. It is a

precision instrument. Otherwise,

it may malfunction or cause da-

mage resulting in a fire or an

electric shock.

The following are operating limitations

and do not represent a system malfunc-

tion:

. When the temperature is extremely

high or low, the screen may not clearly

display objects.

. When strong light is directly coming

on the camera, objects may not be

displayed clearly.

. Vertical lines may be seen in objects

on the screen. This is due to strong

reflected light from the bumper.

. The screen may flicker under fluores-

cent light.

. The colors of objects on the RearView

Monitor may differ somewhat from

the actual color of objects.

. Objects on the monitor may not be

clear in a dark environment.

. There may be a delay when switching

to the RearView Monitor.

. When activating the RearView Moni-

tor, the guide lines, the icons and the

messages may not be displayed for a

while.

. If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on

the camera, the RearView Monitor

may not display object clearly. Clean

the camera.

. Do not use wax on the camera win-

dow. Wipe off any wax with a clean

cloth dampened with mild detergent

diluted with water.

JVH1395X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

. Do not use alcohol, benzine or

thinner to clean the camera. This

will cause discoloration. To clean

the camera, wipe with a cloth

dampened with diluted mild

cleaning agent and then wipe

with a dry cloth.

. Do not damage the camera as the

monitor screen may be adversely

affected.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

4-10 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the

camera

, RearView Monitor may not

display objects clearly. Clean the camera

by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a

diluted mild cleaning agent and then

wiping it with a dry cloth.

JVH1689X

1. CAMERA button

2. SETTING button

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW

MONITOR (if so equipped)

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for the proper use of the

Intelligent Around View Monitor sys-

tem could result in serious injury or

death.

. The Intelligent Around View Moni-

tor is a convenience feature and

is not a substitute for proper

vehicle operation because it has

areas where objects cannot be

viewed. The four corners of the

vehicle in particular, are areas

where objects do not always ap-

pear in the bird’s-eye, front, or

rear views. Always check your

surroundings to be sure that it is

safe to move before operating

the vehicle. Always operate the

vehicle slowly.

. The driver is always responsible

for safety during parking and

other maneuvers.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the lens when clean-

ing dirt or snow from the front of the

camera.

The Intelligent Around View Monitor sys-

tem is designed as an aid to the driver in

situations such as slot parking or parallel

parking.

The monitor displays various views of the

position of the vehicle in a split screen

format. All views are not available at all

times.

Available views:

. Front view

An approximately 150-degree view of

the front of the vehicle.

. Rear view

An approximately 150-degree view of

the rear of the vehicle.

. Bird’s-eye view

The surrounding view of the vehicle

from above.

. Front-side view

The view around and ahead of the

front passenger’s side wheel.

. Front-wide view

An approximately 180-degree view of

the front of the vehicle.

. Rear-wide view

An approximately 180-degree view of

the rear of the vehicle.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

4-12 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

JVH1397X

To display the multiple views, the Intelli-

gent Around View Monitor system uses

cameras

located in the front grill, on the

vehicle’s outside mirrors and one just

above the vehicle’s license plate.

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW MONI-

TOR SYSTEM OPERATION

With the ignition switch in the ON posi-

tion, move the shift lever to the R

(Reverse) position or press the CAMERA

button to operate the Intelligent Around

View Monitor.

Available views

WARNING

. The distance guide lines and the

vehicle width lines should be

used as a reference only when

the vehicle is on a paved, level

surface. The apparent distance

viewed on the monitor may be

different than the actual distance

between the vehicle and dis-

played objects.

. Use the displayed lines and the

bird’s-eye view as a reference.

The lines and the bird’s-eye view

are greatly affected by the num-

ber of occupants, fuel level, vehi-

cle position, road condition and

road grade.

. If the tires are replaced with

different sized tires, the predic-

tive course lines and the bird’s-

eye view may be displayed incor-

rectly.

. When driving the vehicle up a hill,

objects viewed in the monitor are

further than they appear. When

driving the vehicle down a hill,

objects viewed in the monitor are

closer than they appear.

. Objects in the monitor will appear

visually opposite compared to

when viewed in the rearview and

outside mirrors.

. Use the mirrors or actually look to

properly judge distances to other

objects.

. The distance between objects

viewed in the rear view differs

from actual distance because a

wide-angle lens is used.

. On a snow-covered or slippery

road, there may be a difference

between the predictive course

line and the actual course line.

. The vehicle width and predictive

course lines are wider than the

actual width and course.

. The displayed lines on the rear

view will appear slightly off to the

right because the rearview cam-

era is not installed in the rear

center of the vehicle.

SAA1840

Front view

SAA1896

Rear view

Front and rear view:

Guiding lines that indicate the approx-

imate vehicle width and distances to

objects with reference to the vehicle body

line

are displayed on the monitor.

Distance guide lines

Indicate distances from the vehicle body.

. Red line

: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

. Yellow line

: approx. 3 ft (1 m)

. Green line

: approx. 7 ft (2 m)

. Green line

(if so equipped): approx.

10 ft (3 m)

Vehicle width guide lines

Indicate the approximate vehicle width.

Predictive course lines

Indicate the predictive course when op-

erating the vehicle. The predictive course

lines will be displayed on the monitor

when the steering wheel is turned. The

predictive course lines will move depend-

ing on how much the steering wheel is

turned and will not be displayed while the

steering wheel is in the straight-ahead

position.

The front view will not be displayed when

the vehicle speed is above 6 MPH (10

km/h).

NOTE:

When the monitor displays the front

view and the steering wheel turns

about 90 degrees or less from the

straight ahead position, both the right

and left predictive course lines

are

displayed. When the steering wheel

turns about 90 degrees or more, a line

is displayed only on the opposite side of

the turn.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

4-14 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WAE0224X

Bird’s-eye view:

The bird’s-eye view shows the overhead

view of the vehicle, which helps confirm

the vehicle position and the predictive

course to a parking space.

The vehicle icon

shows the position of

the vehicle. Note that the size of the

vehicle icon on the bird’s-eye view may

differ somewhat from the actual distance

to the vehicle.

The areas that the cameras cannot cover

are indicated in black.

The non-viewable area

is highlighted in

yellow for several seconds after the bird’s-

eye view is displayed. It will be shown only

the first time after the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position.

Predictive course lines (

and ) indicate

the predictive course when operating the

vehicle. The predictive course lines will be

displayed on the monitor when the steer-

ing wheel is turned. The predictive course

lines will move depending on how much

the steering wheel is turned and will not

be displayed while the steering wheel is in

the straight-ahead position.

When the monitor displays the front view

and the steering wheel turns about 90

degrees or less from the straight-ahead

position, the two green predictive course

lines

are shown in front of the vehicle.

When the steering wheel turns about 90

degrees or more, one green predictive

course line

is shown in front of the

vehicle and the other green predictive

course line

is shown at side of the

vehicle.

When the monitor displays the rear view,

the predictive course lines are shown at

back of the vehicle.

WARNING

. Objects in the bird’s-eye view will

appear further than the actual

distance.

. Tall objects, such as a curb or

vehicle, may be misaligned or not

displayed at the seam of the

views.

. Objects that are above the cam-

era cannot be displayed.

. The view for the bird’s-eye view

may be misaligned when the

camera position alters.

. A line on the ground may be

misaligned and is not seen as

being straight at the seam of the

views. The misalignment will in-

crease as the line proceeds away

from the vehicle.

JVH1141X

Front-side view:

Guiding lines:

Guiding lines that indicate the width and

the front end of the vehicle are displayed

on the monitor.

The front-of-vehicle line

shows the

front part of the vehicle.

The side-of-vehicle line

shows the

vehicle width including the outside mir-

rors.

The extensions

of both the front and

side

lines are shown with a green

dotted line.

CAUTION

The turn signal light may look like

the side-of-vehicle line. This is not a

malfunction.

JVH1142X

Front-wide view

JVH1143X

Rear-wide view

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

4-16 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Front-wide/rear-wide view:

The front-wide/rear-wide view shows a

wider area on the entire screen and

allows the checking of the blind corners

on the right and left sides. The front-

wide/rear-wide view displays an approxi-

mately 180-degree area while the front

view and the rear view display an ap-

proximately 150-degree area. The predic-

tive course lines are not displayed when

using the front-wide/rear-wide view.

Distance guide lines

Indicates distances from the vehicle body.

. Red line

: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

. Yellow line

: approx. 3 ft (1 m)

. Green line

: approx. 7 ft (2 m)

. Green line

(if so equipped): approx.

10 ft (3 m)

Vehicle width guide lines

Indicates the approximate vehicle width.

Difference between predicted and

actual distances

The displayed guidelines and their loca-

tions on the ground are for approximate

reference only. Objects on uphill or down-

hill surfaces or projecting objects will be

actually located at distances different

from those displayed in the monitor

relative to the guidelines (refer to illustra-

tions). When in doubt, turn around and

view the objects as you are backing up, or

park and exit the vehicle to view the

positioning of objects behind the vehicle.

JVH1214X

Backing up on a steep uphill:

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width

guide lines are shown closer than the

actual distance. Note that any object on

the hill is further than it appears on the

monitor.

JVH1215X

Backing up on a steep downhill:

When backing up the vehicle down a hill,

the distance guide lines and the vehicle

width guide lines are shown further than

the actual distance. Note that any object

on the hill is closer than it appears on the

monitor.

SAA1923

Backing up near a projecting object:

The predictive course lines

do not

touch the object in the display. However,

the vehicle may hit the object if it projects

over the actual backing up course.

JVH1216X

Backing up behind a projecting object:

The position

is shown further than the

position

in the display. However, the

position

is actually at the same dis-

tance as the position

. The vehicle may

hit the object when backing up to the

position

if the object projects over the

actual backing up course.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

4-18 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

How to park with predictive course

lines

WARNING

. If the tires are replaced with

different sized tires, the predic-

tive course lines may be dis-

played incorrectly.

. On a snow-covered or slippery

road, there may be a difference

between the predictive course

line and the actual course line.

. If the battery is disconnected or

becomes discharged, the predic-

tive course lines may be dis-

played incorrectly. If this occurs,

drive the vehicle on a straight

road for more than 5 minutes.

SAA1897

1. Visually check that the parking space

is safe before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is dis-

played on the screen

when the shift

lever is moved to the R (Reverse)

position.

SAA1898

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting

the steering wheel so that the pre-

dictive course lines

enter the park-

ing space

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make

the vehicle width guide lines

parallel

to the parking space

while referring

to the predictive course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the

space completely, move the shift lever

to the P (Park) position and apply the

parking brake.

WAE0225X

How to switch the display

The Intelligent Around View Monitor can

display two split views as well as a single

view of the front-wide view or rear-wide

view. Push the CAMERA button, change

the shift lever position, or select the

“Change View” key

to switch between

the available views.

For models with the Intelligent Back-up

Intervention (I-BI) system, “

” key may

be displayed on the Intelligent Around

View Monitor screen when the shift lever

is in the R (Reverse) position. For details of

the I-BI system, see “Intelligent Back-up

Intervention (I-BI)” (P.5-53).

JVH1690X

HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN VIEW

The display settings such as Brightness,

Contrast, Black Level, Tint and Color of

the Intelligent Around View Monitor can

be adjusted.

1. Push the SETTING button with the

Intelligent Around View Monitor

turned on.

2. The Display settings menu is dis-

played. Select an item you wish to

adjust.

3. Adjust the selected item by touching

the “+” or “-” key.

Select “Reset Settings” key to return all

settings to default.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19

4-20 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NOTE:

Do not adjust any of the display settings

of the Intelligent Around View Monitor

while the vehicle is moving. Make sure

the parking brake is firmly applied.

Display settings menu can also be ac-

cessed while the Intelligent Around View

Monitor screen is not displayed. See

“Intelligent Around View Monitor settings”

(P.4-20).

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW MONI-

TOR SETTINGS

To set up the Intelligent Around View

Monitor to your preferred settings, push

the SETTING button while the Intelligent

Around View Monitor screen is not dis-

played, select the “Camera/Sonar” key.

Items displayed on the screen may vary

depending on the specification and mod-

el.

Available setting items:

Setting item Action

Camera Back-up Collision Intervention Intelligent Back-up Intervention (I-BI) system on/off. See “Intelligent Back-up

Intervention (I-BI)” (P.5-53).

Moving Object Detection Turn the MOD system on/off. See “Moving Object Detection (MOD)” (P.4-29).

Non-viewable Area Reminder When this item is turned on, the non-viewable area is highlighted in yellow for

several seconds after the bird’s-eye view is displayed. It will be shown only the

first time after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

Predictive Course Lines When this item is turned on, the predictive course lines are displayed in the

front and the rear view and bird’s-eye view.

Automatic Display with Sonar The automatic sonar display can be turned on/off.

Sonar For the information about the sonar, see “Camera aiding sonar function

(models with Intelligent Around View Monitor)” (P.4-25).

Display Brightness Adjust display settings by touching the “+”/“-” key.

Contrast

Black Level

Tint

Color

Reset Settings Return all the settings to default.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

4-22 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW MONI-

TOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for Intelligent Around View

Monitor. Failure to operate the vehi-

cle in accordance with these system

limitations could result in serious

injury or death.

. Do not use the Intelligent Around

View Monitor with the outside

mirrors in the stored position,

and make sure that the liftgate

is securely closed when operating

the vehicle using the Intelligent

Around View Monitor.

. The apparent distance between

objects viewed on the Intelligent

Around View Monitor differs from

the actual distance.

. The cameras are installed on the

front grille, the outside mirrors

and above the rear license plate.

Do not put anything on the vehi-

cle that covers the cameras.

. When washing the vehicle with

high pressure water, be sure not

to spray it around the cameras.

Otherwise, water may enter the

camera unit causing water con-

densation on the lens, a malfunc-

tion, fire or an electric shock.

. Do not strike the cameras. They

are precision instruments. Doing

so could cause a malfunction or

cause damage resulting in a fire

or an electric shock.

The following are operating limitations

and do not represent a system malfunc-

tion:

. The screen displayed on the Intelligent

Around View Monitor will automati-

cally return to the previous screen 3

minutes after the CAMERA button has

been pushed while the shift lever is in

a position other than the R (Reverse)

position.

. There may be a delay when switching

between views.

. When the temperature is extremely

high or low, the screen may not

display objects clearly.

. When strong light directly shines on

the camera, objects may not be dis-

played clearly.

. The screen may flicker under fluores-

cent light.

. The colors of objects on the Intelligent

Around View Monitor may differ

somewhat from the actual color of

objects.

. Objects on the monitor may not be

clear and the color of the object may

differ in a dark environment.

. There may be differences in sharpness

between each camera view of the

bird’s-eye view.

. When activating the Intelligent Around

View Monitor, the icons and the mes-

sages may not be displayed for a

while.

. If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on

the camera, the Intelligent Around

View Monitor may not display objects

clearly. Clean the camera.

. Do not use wax on the camera lens.

Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth

that has been dampened with a

diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe

with a dry cloth.

JVH1399X

There are some areas where the system

will not show objects and the system

does not warn of moving objects. When in

the front or the rear view display, an

object below the bumper or on the

ground may not be viewed

. When in

the bird’s-eye view, a tall object near the

seam

of the camera viewing areas will

not appear in the monitor

JVH1633X

System temporarily unavailable

When the “ ” icon is displayed on the

screen, there will be abnormal conditions

in the Intelligent Around View Monitor.

This will not hinder normal driving opera-

tion but the system should be inspected.

It is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for inspecting.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

4-24 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

JVH1634X

When the “ ” icon is displayed on the

screen, the camera image may be receiv-

ing temporary electronic disturbances

from surrounding devices. This will not

hinder normal driving operation. How-

ever, if it occurs frequently, the system

should be inspected. It is recommended

you visit a NISSAN dealer.

JVH1397X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

. Do not use alcohol, benzine or

thinner to clean the camera. This

will cause discoloration. To clean

the camera, wipe with a cloth

dampened with diluted mild

cleaning agent and then wipe

with a dry cloth.

. Do not damage the camera as the

monitor screen may be adversely

affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of

the cameras

, the Intelligent Around

View Monitor may not display objects

clearly. Clean the camera by wiping with

a cloth dampened with a diluted mild

cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry

cloth.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the

sonar function as outlined in this

section could result in serious injury

or death.

. The sonar is a convenience fea-

ture. It is not a substitute for

proper parking.

. This function is designed as an

aid to the driver in detecting large

stationary objects to help avoid

damaging the vehicle.

. The driver is always responsible

for safety during parking and

other maneuvers.

. Always look around and check

that it is safe to move before

parking.

. Read and understand the limita-

tions of the sonar as contained in

this section.

The sonar function helps to inform the

driver of large stationary objects around

the vehicle when parking by issuing an

audible and visual alert.

WAE0226X

1. Center display

2. Sonar indicator

3. CAMERA button

4. SETTING button

SONAR SYSTEM OPERATION

The system gives the tone for front

objects when the shift lever is in the D

(Drive) position and both front and rear

objects when the shift lever is in the R

(Reverse) position.

When the camera image is shown on the

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

CAMERA AIDING SONAR FUNCTION (models

with Intelligent Around View Monitor)

4-26 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

center display, the system shows the

sonar indicator regardless of the shift

lever position.

The system is deactivated at speeds

above 6 MPH (10 km/h). It is reactivated

at lower speeds.

The colors of the sonar indicators and the

distance guide lines in the front, front-

wide, rear and rear-wide views indicate

different distances to the object.

When the objects are detected, the in-

dicator (green) appears and blinks and

the tone sounds intermittently. When the

vehicle moves closer to the object, the

color of the indicator turns yellow and the

rate of the blinking and the rate of the

tone increase. When the vehicle is very

close to the object, the indicator stops

blinking and turns red, and the tone

sounds continuously.

The intermittent tone will stop after 3

seconds when an object is detected by

only the sonar and the distance does not

change.

The tone will stop when the object is no

longer near the vehicle.

WAE0227X

TURNING ON AND OFF THE SONAR

FUNCTION

When the Sonar/MOD key is selected,

the indicator

will turn off and the sonar

will be turned off temporarily. The Moving

Object Detection (MOD) system will also

be turned off at the same time. (See

“Moving Object Detection (MOD)” (P.4-

29).) When the Sonar/MOD key

selected again, the indicator

will turn

on and the sonar will turn back on.

In the below cases, the sonar will be

turned back on automatically:

. When the shift lever is in the R

(Reverse) position.

. When the CAMERA button is pushed

and a screen other than the camera

view is shown on the display.

. When vehicle speed decreases below

approximately 6 MPH (10 km/h).

. When the ignition switch is placed in

the OFF position and turned back to

the ON position again.

To deactivate the sonar system comple-

tely, use the “Sonar” settings. See “Sonar

function settings” (P.4-27).

JVH1695X

Sonar function settings

To set up the sonar function to your

preferred settings, push the SETTING

button, select the “Camera/Sonar” key

and then select the “Sonar” key on the

center display.

Designs and items displayed on the

screen may vary depending on the mod-

els.

Sonar:

When this item is turned on, the front and

rear sonar is activated. When this item is

turned off (indicator turns off), the front

and rear sonar is deactivated. The amber

markers are displayed at the corners of

the vehicle icon and the sonar icon will

disappear from the Sonar/MOD key. The

next time the ignition switch is placed in

the ON position, “Sonar is OFF” is dis-

played briefly.

FR Sensor Only:

When this item is turned on, only the front

sonar is activated. The amber markers are

displayed at the rear corners of the

vehicle icon.

Interrupt Display:

When this item is turned on, the Intelligent

Around View Monitor will interrupt the

current view in the display to see the

surrounding area of the vehicle.

Sonar Sensitivity:

Adjust the sensitivity level of the sonar.

Sonar Volume:

Adjust the tone volume of the sonar.

SONAR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for the sonar function. Failure

to operate the vehicle in accordance

with these system limitations could

result in serious injury or death.

. Inclement weather or ultrasonic

sources such as an automatic car

wash, a truck’s compressed-air

brakes or a pneumatic drill may

affect the function of the system,

including reduced performance

or a false activation.

. This function is designed as an

aid to the driver in detecting large

stationary objects to help avoid

damaging the vehicle.

. The system is not designed to

prevent contact with small or

moving objects.

. The system will not detect small

objects below the bumper, and

may not detect objects close to

the bumper or on the ground.

. The system may not detect the

following objects:

— Fluffy objects such as snow,

cloth, cotton, grass or wool.

— Thin objects such as rope, wire

or chain.

— Wedge-shaped objects.

. If your vehicle sustains damage

to the bumper fascia, leaving it

misaligned or bent, the sensing

zone may be altered causing in-

accurate measurement of objects

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

4-28 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

or false alarms.

CAUTION

Excessive noise (such as audio sys-

tem volume or an open vehicle win-

dow) will interfere with the tone and

it may not be heard.

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAIL-

ABLE

When the amber markers are displayed at

the corners of the vehicle icon and the

function cannot be activated from the

“Sonar” settings (the setting items are

grayed out), the sonar system may be

malfunctioning.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

Keep the surface of the sonar sen-

sors (located on the front and rear

bumper fascia) free from accumula-

tions of snow, ice and dirt. Do not

scratch the surface of the sonar

sensors when cleaning. If the sen-

sors are covered, the accuracy of the

sonar function will be diminished.

JVH1689X

1. CAMERA button

2. SETTING button

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the

Moving Object Detection system

could result in serious injury or

death.

. The MOD system is not a substi-

tute for proper vehicle operation

and is not designed to prevent

contact with the objects sur-

rounding the vehicle. When man-

euvering, always use the outside

mirror and rearview mirror and

turn and check the surrounding

to ensure it is safe to maneuver.

. The system is deactivated at

speeds above 6 MPH (10 km/h).

It is reactivated at lower speeds.

. The MOD system is not designed

to detect the surrounding sta-

tionary objects.

The Moving Object Detection (MOD) sys-

tem can inform the driver of the moving

objects surrounding the vehicle when

driving out of garages, maneuvering into

parking lots and in other such instances.

The MOD system detects moving objects

by using image processing technology on

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD)

4-30 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

the image shown on the display.

MOD SYSTEM OPERATION

The MOD system will turn on automati-

cally under the following conditions:

. When the shift lever is in the R

(Reverse) position.

. When vehicle speed decreases below

approximately 5 MPH (8 km/h).

WAE0228X

Bird’s-eye view

WAE0229X

Front view / rear view

JVH1698X

Rear and front-side views

JVH1699X

Front-wide view / rear-wide view

When the MOD system detects moving

objects near the vehicle, the yellow frame

will be displayed on the view where the

objects are detected and a chime will

sound once. While the MOD system con-

tinues to detect moving objects, the

yellow frame continues to be displayed.

In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame

is displayed on each camera image (front,

rear, right, left) depending on where

moving objects are detected.

The yellow frame

is displayed on each

view in the front view, front-wide view,

rear view and rear-wide view modes.

While the sonar is beeping, the MOD

system does not chime.

A green MOD icon

is displayed in the

view where the MOD system is operative.

A gray MOD icon

is displayed in the view

where the MOD system is not operative.

If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD

icon

is not displayed.

The MOD system operates in the follow-

ing conditions when the camera view is

displayed:

. When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or

N (Neutral) position and the vehicle is

stopped, the MOD system detects the

moving objects in the bird’s-eye view.

. When the shift lever is in the D (Drive)

position and the vehicle speed is

below approximately 5 MPH (8 km/h),

the MOD system detects moving ob-

jects in the front view or front-wide

view.

. When the shift lever is in the R

(Reverse) position and the vehicle

speed is below approximately 5 MPH

(8 km/h), the MOD system detects

moving objects in the rear view or

rear-wide view. The MOD system will

not operate if the liftgate is open.

The MOD system does not detect moving

objects in the front-side view. The MOD

icon is not displayed on the screen when

in front-side view.

JVH1712X

TURNING ON AND OFF THE MOD

SYSTEM

When the MOD is active and the Sonar/

MOD key

is selected, the MOD system

will turn off temporarily and the indicator

will turn off. (A camera-aiding sonar will

turn off at the same time.) When the

Sonar/MOD key

is selected again, the

indicator will turn on and the MOD system

will turn back on.

To enable or disable the MOD, use the

“Camera” menu. See “MOD function

setting” (P.4-32).

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

4-32 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

MOD function setting

To set up the MOD function to your

preferred settings, push the SETTING

button, select “Camera/Sonar” key, and

then select the “Camera” key on the

center display.

JVH1713X

Moving Object Detection:

When this item is turned on, the MOD is

activated. When this item is turned off

(indicator turns off), the MOD system is

deactivated. When the MOD system is

deactivated, “MOD”

will disappear on

the Sonar/MOD key

and the MOD icon

will disappear as well.

When the sonar is turned off on the

setting menu as well, the Sonar/MOD

key

will disappear.

MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for MOD. Failure to operate the

vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in

serious injury or death.

. Do not use the MOD system when

towing a trailer. The system may

not function properly.

. Excessive noise (for example,

audio system volume or open

vehicle window) will interfere

with the chime sound, and it

may not be heard.

. The MOD system performance

will be limited according to en-

vironmental conditions and sur-

rounding objects such as:

— When there is low contrast

between background and the

moving objects.

— When there is blinking source

of light.

— When strong light such as

another vehicle’s headlight or

sunlight is present.

— When camera orientation is

not in its usual position, such

as when mirror is folded.

— When there is dirt, water drops

or snow on the camera lens.

— When the position of the mov-

ing objects in the display is

not changed.

. The MOD system might detect

flowing water droplets on the

camera lens, white smoke from

the muffler, moving shadows, etc.

. The MOD system may not func-

tion properly depending on the

speed, direction, distance or

shape of the moving objects.

. If your vehicle sustains damage

to the parts where the camera is

installed, leaving it misaligned or

bent, the sensing zone may be

altered and the MOD system may

not detect objects properly.

. When the temperature is extre-

mely high or low, the screen may

not display objects clearly. This is

not a malfunction.

JVH1397X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

. Do not use alcohol, benzine or

thinner to clean the camera. This

will cause discoloration. To clean

the camera, wipe with a cloth

dampened with diluted mild

cleaning agent and then wipe

with a dry cloth.

. Do not damage the camera as the

monitor screen may be adversely

affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of

the cameras

, the MOD system may not

operate properly. Clean the camera by

wiping with a cloth dampened with a

diluted mild cleaning agent and then

wiping with a dry cloth.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33

4-34 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA3348

CENTER VENTILATORS

Open/close the ventilators by moving the

control to either direction.

: This symbol indicates that the venti-

lators are closed. Moving the side

control to this direction will close the

ventilators.

: This symbol indicates that the venti-

lators are open. Moving the side

control to this direction will open the

ventilators.

Adjust the air flow direction of the venti-

lators by moving the center knob (up/

down, left/right) until the desired position

is achieved.

SAA3054

SIDE VENTILATORS

Open/close the ventilators by moving the

control to either direction.

: This symbol indicates that the venti-

lators are closed. Moving the side

control to this direction will close the

ventilators.

: This symbol indicates that the venti-

lators are open. Moving the side

control to this direction will open the

ventilators.

Adjust the air flow direction of the venti-

lators by moving the center knob (up/

down, left/right) until the desired position

is achieved.

JVH1313X

REAR VENTILATORS

Open/close the ventilators by moving the

control to either direction.

: This symbol indicates that the venti-

lators are closed. Moving the side

control to this direction will close the

ventilators.

: This symbol indicates that the venti-

lators are open. Moving the side

control to this direction will open the

ventilators.

VENTILATORS

SAA3055

Adjust the air flow direction of the venti-

lators by moving the center knob (up/

down, left/right) until the desired position

is achieved.

WARNING

. The air conditioner cooling func-

tion operates only when the en-

gine is running.

. Do not leave children or adults

who would normally require the

support of others alone in your

vehicle. Pets should not be left

alone either. On hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle

could quickly become high en-

ough to cause severe or possibly

fatal injuries to people or animals.

. Do not use the recirculation mode

for long periods as it may cause

the interior air to become stale

and the windows to fog up.

. Do not adjust the heating and air

conditioning controls while driv-

ing so that full attention may be

given to vehicle operation.

Start the engine and operate the heater

and air conditioner system.

NOTE:

. Odors from inside and outside the

vehicle can build up in the air condi-

tioner unit. Odor can enter the pas-

senger compartment through the

vents.

. When parking, set the heater and air

conditioner controls to turn off air

recirculation to allow fresh air into

the passenger compartment. This

should help reduce odors inside the

vehicle.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

4-36 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA3059

1. “AUTO” button/Temperature control dial

(driver’s side)

2. “

” front defroster button

3. “

” rear window defroster button (See

“Rear window and outside mirror defros-

ter switch” (P.2-36).)

4. “

” fan speed decrease button

5. “OFF” button

6. “

” fan speed increase button

7. “

” outside air circulation button

8. “

” air recirculation button

9. “DUAL” zone control ON/OFF button/

Temperature control dial (passenger’s

side)

10. “MODE” manual air flow control button

11. “REAR” control button

12. “A/C” air conditioner ON/OFF button

13. “

” upper vent button

AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER

Automatic operation

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating

(AUTO):

This mode may be used all year round.

The system works automatically to con-

trol the inside temperature, air flow dis-

tribution and fan speed after the

preferred temperature is set manually.

1. Push the “AUTO” button on. (The

indicator on the button will illuminate

and AUTO will be displayed.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial

(driver’s side) to set the desired tem-

perature.

The temperature of the passenger

compartment will be maintained

automatically. Air flow distribution

and fan speed will also be controlled

automatically.

3. You can individually set driver and

front passenger’s side temperature

using each temperature control but-

ton. When the “DUAL” button is pushed

or the passenger’s side temperature

control button is turned, the DUAL

indicator will come on. To turn off the

passenger’s side temperature control,

push the “DUAL” button.

4. To turn off the heater and air condi-

tioner system, push the “OFF” button.

A visible mist may be seen coming from

the ventilators in hot, humid conditions as

the air is cooled rapidly. This does not

indicate a malfunction.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging:

1. Push the “

” front defroster button.

(The indicator light on the button will

illuminate.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial to

set the desired temperature.

. To quickly remove ice from the out-

side of the windows, push the fan

speed increase button “

” and set it

to the maximum position.

. As soon as possible after the wind-

shield is clean, push the “AUTO” button

to return to the auto mode.

. When the “

” front defroster button

is pushed, the air conditioner will

automatically be turned on at outside

temperatures above 23°F (−5°C) to

defog the windshield, and the air

recirculate mode will automatically

be turned off.

Outside air is drawn into the passen-

ger compartment to improve the

defogging performance.

Manual operation

Fan speed control:

Push the fan speed increase “

”or

decrease “

” buttons to manually con-

trol the fan speed.

Push the “AUTO” button to return to

automatic control of the fan speed.

Temperature control:

Turn the temperature control dial to set

the desired temperature.

Air flow control:

Pushing the “MODE” manual air flow

control button selects the air outlet to:

: Air flows from center and side ventila-

tors.

: Air flows from center and side ventila-

tors and foot outlets.

: Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

: Air flows from defroster and foot outlets.

Air intake control:

. Push the “

” air recirculation button

to recirculate interior air inside the

vehicle. The “

” indicator light on the

button will come on. The air recircula-

tion mode cannot be activated when

the air conditioner is in the front

defrosting mode “

”.

. Push the “

” outside air circulation

button to draw outside air into the

passenger compartment. The “

”

indicator light on the button will come

on.

. To control the air intake automatically,

push and hold either the “

” air

recirculation button or the “

” out-

side air circulation button (whichever

indicator light is illuminated). The

indicator lights (both air recirculation

and outside air circulation buttons)

will flash twice, and then the air intake

will switch to automatic control.

Turning the system off

Push the OFF button.

Upper vent system

When the upper vent “ ” button is

pushed, the air flow against the driver’s

or passenger’s upper body becomes gen-

tle. The indicator light on the button will

illuminate.

In this mode, air from the upper ventilator

flows in order to control the cabin tem-

perature without blowing air directly on

the occupants.

Push the upper vent “

” button when

you want the air conditioner to work

quickly.

To turn the system off, push the upper

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

4-38 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

vent “ ” button to turn the indicator

light off.

JVH1630X

Operations on touch panel screen

Heater and air conditioner can be oper-

ated on the touch panel screen. Push the

“CLIMATE” button on the center multi-

function control panel and turn the dis-

play to the Climate screen.

For details of the touch panel screen

operation, see the separate NissanCon-

nect® Owner’s Manual.

JVH1720X

The following operations are available

with the touch panel screen.

Availability of the item depends on the

model and specifications.

Available items:

Touch to change the air flow mode.

. -

/ +

Touch to change the fan speed of the

air from the ventilators.

. Rear Climate

Touch to display the Rear Climate

screen. (See “Rear automatic air con-

ditioning system” (P.4-39).)

. A/C

Touch to turn the air conditioner on/

off.

. DUAL

Touch to turn the DUAL mode (pas-

senger’s side temperature control)

on/off.

. Upper Vent

Touch to turn the upper vent system

on/off. (See “Upper vent system” (P.4-

37).)

JVH1621X

REAR AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITION-

ING SYSTEM

Push the “REAR” button on the front air

conditioner control panel to turn on the

rear automatic air conditioning system.

(The REAR indicator light will illuminate.)

To control the rear automatic air con-

ditioning system with the front air condi-

tioner control panel, push the “CLIMATE”

button on the center multi-function con-

trol panel and touch “Rear Climate” key.

The display will switch to the Rear Climate

screen.

The rear automatic air conditioning sys-

tem can be adjusted with the front air

conditioner control panel when the Rear

Climate screen is displayed.

Push the “CLIMATE” button one more

time, the display will return to the Climate

screen.

The rear automatic air conditioning sys-

tem can also be adjusted by using the

rear air conditioner control panel located

on the rear of the center console. (See

“Rear air conditioner control panel opera-

tion” (P.4-42).)

This table shows the relation between the

front air conditioner control panel and

the rear air conditioner control panel.

Display status

Rear Climate

screen is dis-

played

Rear Climate

screen is not

displayed (Cli-

mate screen)

Front air

condition-

er control

panel

Only the rear

automatic air

conditioning

system can be

operated

Only the front

air conditioner

can be operated

Rear air

condition-

er control

panel

Cannot be op-

erated

Only the rear

automatic air

conditioning

system can be

operated

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

4-40 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Front air conditioner control panel

operation

Automatic operation:

1. Push the “REAR” button to turn on rear

automatic air conditioning system.

Push the “CLIMATE” button on the

center multi-function control panel

and select the “Rear Climate” key to

display the Rear Climate screen.

2. Push the “AUTO” button. (The AUTO

indicator light will illuminate and

“AUTO” will appear on the display.)

3. Turn the temperature control dial

(driver’s side) to set the desired tem-

perature.

Cooling and dehumidified heating:

1. Push the “REAR” button to turn on the

rear automatic air conditioning sys-

tem. Push the “CLIMATE” button on

the center multi-function control pa-

nel and touch “Rear Climate” key to

display the Rear Climate screen.

2. Turn the temperature control dial

(driver’s side) to set the desired tem-

perature.

3. Switch the air flow mode to

pushing the “MODE” button.

4. Push the “CLIMATE” button on the

center multi-function control panel

one more time to return to the

Climate screen. If the A/C indicator

light does not illuminate, push the

“A/C” button. (The A/C indicator light

will turn on.)

NOTE:

When the front air conditioner is off, the

rear automatic air conditioning system

only operates the fan. When you would

like to use the air conditioner, be sure to

push the “A/C” button on the front air

conditioner control panel to turn on the

A/C indicator light.

Manual operation:

. Temperature control

Turn the temperature control dial

(driver’s side) to set the desired tem-

perature.

. Fan speed control

Push the fan speed control “

”

button or “

” button to manually

control the fan speed.

. Air flow control

Push the “MODE” button to change the

air flow mode.

: The air outlet is fixed at foot level.

: The air outlet is fixed at both the head

and foot levels.

: The air outlet is fixed at the head level.

Touch panel operation

The rear automatic air conditioning sys-

tem can also be controlled on the Rear

Climate screen.

Touch the “Rear Climate” key on the

Climate screen to display the Rear Cli-

mate screen.

JVH1719X

Rear Climate screen

Available items:

. Temp Down

Touch to decrease the temperature

setting.

. Temp Up

Touch to increase the temperature

setting.

. ON/OFF

Touch to turn the rear automatic air

conditioning system on/off.

. Fan Down

The fan speed of the air from the

ventilators can be decreased.

. Fan Up

The fan speed of the air from the

ventilators can be increased.

. Auto

Touch to turn the auto mode on/off.

. Mode

Touch to select different air flow

mode.

SAA3327

1. “OFF” button

2. Fan speed control button

3. “AUTO” button

4. Display

5. “MODE” button

6. “TEMP” button

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

4-42 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Rear air conditioner control panel

operation

Rear control buttons:

The rear seat passengers can adjust the

rear automatic air conditioning system

using the control switches on the rear of

the center console.

The rear control buttons do not function

when the Rear Climate screen is shown

on the front display. To activate the rear

control buttons, push the “CLIMATE” but-

ton on the center multi-function control

panel and switch the screen to the

Climate screen.

. “OFF” button:

Rear automatic air conditioning sys-

tem off.

. “

” button:

Rear fan speed control up/down

. “AUTO” button:

Rear automatic air conditioning sys-

tem on, AUTO mode on

. “MODE” button:

Rear air flow control change

. “TEMP” button:

Rear temperature control up/down

Turning the system off

Use the following methods to turn the

rear automatic air conditioning system

off.

. Operating the front air conditioner

control panel:

Push the “OFF” button on the front air

conditioner control panel when the

Rear Climate screen is displayed.

. Operating the Rear Climate screen:

Touch the “ON/OFF” key on the Rear

Climate screen when the rear auto-

matic air conditioning system is on.

. Operating the rear air conditioner

control panel:

Push the “OFF” button on the rear air

conditioner control panel when the

Rear Climate screen is not displayed.

SAA3088

SAA3058

OPERATING TIPS

When the engine coolant temperature

and outside air temperature are low, the

air flow from the foot outlets may not

operate. However, this is not a malfunc-

tion. After the coolant temperature

warms up, the air flow from the foot

outlets will operate normally.

The sensors

and located on the

instrument panel help maintain a con-

stant temperature. Do not put anything

on or around the sensors.

LINKING INTELLIGENT KEY (if so

equipped)

The air conditioner system settings can

be memorized for each Intelligent Key.

For more details, see “Setting memory

function” (P.3-42).

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

The air conditioner system is equipped

with an in-cabin microfilter which collects

dirt, pollen, dust, etc.

To make sure the air conditioner heats,

defogs, and ventilates efficiently, replace

the filter in accordance with the specified

maintenance intervals listed in the “9.

Maintenance and schedules” section. It is

recommended to see a NISSAN dealer to

replace the filter.

The filter should be replaced if the air

flow decreases significantly or if win-

dows fog up easily when operating the

heater or air conditioner.

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN

is charged with a refrigerant designed

with the environment in mind. This re-

frigerant will not harm the earth’s

ozone layer. However, special charging

equipment and lubricant are required

when servicing your NISSAN air condi-

tioner. Using improper refrigerants or

lubricants will cause severe damage to

your air conditioner system. (See “Capa-

cities and recommended fluids/lubri-

cants” (P.10-2) for air conditioner system

refrigerant and lubricant recommenda-

tions.)

Your NISSAN dealer will be able to service

your environmentally friendly air condi-

tioner system.

WARNING

The system contains refrigerant un-

der high pressure. To avoid personal

injury, any air conditioner service

should be done only by an experi-

enced technician with the proper

equipment.

WINDOW ANTENNA

The antenna pattern is printed inside the

rear side glass.

CAUTION

. Do not place metalized film near

the 3rd row seat window or at-

tach any metal parts to it. This

may cause poor reception or

noise.

. When cleaning the inside of the

rear side window, be careful not

to scratch or damage the rear

side window antenna. Lightly

wipe along the antenna with a

dampened soft cloth.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43

ANTENNA

4-44 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA3602

SATELLITE ANTENNA

There is a satellite antenna on the rear

part of the vehicle roof.

When installing a car phone or a CB radio

in your vehicle, be sure to observe the

following cautions, otherwise the new

equipment may adversely affect the elec-

tronic control modules and electronic

control system harness.

WARNING

. A cellular phone should not be

used for any purpose while driv-

ing so full attention may be given

to vehicle operation. Some juris-

dictions prohibit the use of cellu-

lar phones while driving.

. If you must make a call while your

vehicle is in motion, the hands-

free cellular phone operational

mode (if so equipped) is highly

recommended. Exercise extreme

caution at all times so full atten-

tion may be given to vehicle

operation.

. If a conversation in a moving

vehicle requires you to take

notes, pull off the road to a safe

location and stop your vehicle

before doing so.

CAUTION

. Keep the antenna as far away as

possible from the electronic con-

trol modules.

. Keep the antenna wire more than

8 in (20 cm) away from the

electronic control system har-

ness. Do not route the antenna

wire next to any harness.

. Adjust the antenna standing-

wave ratio as recommended by

the manufacturer.

. Connect the ground wire from the

CB radio chassis to the body.

. For details, it is recommended

you visit a NISSAN dealer.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

5 Starting and driving
Precautions when starting and driving ...................... 5-4
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ................................ 5-4
Three-way catalyst ............................................................... 5-4
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ........... 5-5
Avoiding collision and rollover .................................... 5-8
On-pavement and off-road driving
precautions ................................................................................. 5-9
Off-road recovery .................................................................. 5-9
Rapid air pressure loss ...................................................... 5-9
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ..................... 5-10
Driving safety precautions .......................................... 5-10
Push-button ignition switch ............................................. 5-13
Operating range for engine start function ...... 5-13
Push-button ignition switch positions .............. 5-14
Emergency engine shut off ........................................ 5-15
Intelligent Key battery discharge ........................... 5-15
Before starting the engine ................................................. 5-16
Starting the engine .................................................................. 5-16
Remote engine start (if so equipped)................. 5-17
Driving the vehicle .................................................................... 5-17
Engine protection mode ............................................... 5-17
Automatic transmission ................................................ 5-18
Parking brake ............................................................................... 5-22
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)/Intelligent Lane
Intervention (I-LI) (if so equipped) ............................... 5-23
LDW system operation ................................................. 5-24
Turning the LDW system ON/OFF ...................... 5-25
How to enable/disable the LDW system ....... 5-26
I-LI system operation .................................................... 5-26
Turning the I-LI system ON/OFF .......................... 5-27
How to enable/disable the I-LI system .......... 5-28
LDW/I-LI system limitations ..................................... 5-28
System temporarily unavailable ........................... 5-30
System malfunction ....................................................... 5-31
System maintenance .................................................... 5-31
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so equipped) ........... 5-32
BSW system operation ................................................. 5-33
Turning the BSW system ON/OFF ...................... 5-34
How to enable/disable the BSW system ....... 5-34
BSW system limitations ............................................... 5-35
BSW driving situations .................................................. 5-36
System temporarily unavailable ........................... 5-39
System malfunction ....................................................... 5-39
System maintenance .................................................... 5-40
Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) (if
so equipped) ................................................................................. 5-40
I-BSI system operation ................................................. 5-42

Turning the I-BSI system ON/OFF......................... 5-43
How to enable/disable the I-BSI system ......... 5-44
I-BSI system limitations ................................................. 5-44
I-BSI driving situations .................................................... 5-46
System temporarily unavailable ............................. 5-51
System malfunction .......................................................... 5-52
System maintenance ....................................................... 5-52
Intelligent Back-up Intervention (I-BI) (if
so equipped) .................................................................................. 5-53
I-BI system operation ...................................................... 5-55
How to enable/disable the I-BI system ............ 5-59
I-BI system precautions ................................................. 5-60
System temporarily unavailable ............................. 5-61
System malfunction .......................................................... 5-62
System maintenance ....................................................... 5-62
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) ....................................... 5-63
How to select the cruise control mode ............ 5-65
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode ...... 5-65
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode .......................................................................... 5-81
Intelligent Distance Control (I-DC) (if
so equipped) .................................................................................. 5-85
I-DC system operation .................................................. 5-87
Turning the I-DC system ON/OFF ......................... 5-90
How to enable/disable the I-DC system .......... 5-91
I-DC system display and indicators ..................... 5-91
I-DC system limitations .................................................. 5-92
System temporarily unavailable ............................. 5-95
System malfunction .......................................................... 5-97
System maintenance .................................................... 5-97
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) ....................... 5-98
AEB system operation .................................................. 5-99
Turning the AEB system ON/OFF ................... 5-101
AEB system limitations ............................................ 5-101
System temporarily unavailable ....................... 5-103
System malfunction ................................................... 5-104
System maintenance ................................................ 5-105
Intelligent Forward Collision
Warning (I-FCW) ...................................................................... 5-106
I-FCW system operation ......................................... 5-108
Turning the I-FCW system ON/OFF ............... 5-109
I-FCW system limitations ........................................ 5-111
System temporarily unavailable ....................... 5-113
System malfunction ................................................... 5-113
System maintenance ................................................ 5-114
Break-in schedule ................................................................. 5-115
Fuel efficient driving tips ................................................ 5-115
Increasing fuel economy ................................................ 5-116
NISSAN all-mode 4WD® (if so equipped) ............ 5-116
NISSAN all-mode 4WD® system ........................ 5-117
4WD shift switch ........................................................... 5-121
4WD shift indicator ..................................................... 5-122
4WD warning light ....................................................... 5-122
Hill Start Assist system ..................................................... 5-124
Parking/parking on hills .................................................. 5-125
TOW mode .................................................................................. 5-126
SNOW mode .............................................................................. 5-127

Sonar system (if so equipped) .................................... 5-127
Sonar settings ................................................................... 5-128
Sonar indicator ................................................................. 5-129
Power steering ........................................................................ 5-130
Brake system ............................................................................ 5-130
Braking precautions ..................................................... 5-130
Parking brake break-in ............................................... 5-131
Brake assist ................................................................................ 5-131
Brake assist ......................................................................... 5-131
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ........................... 5-131
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ............... 5-133
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch ....................................................................................... 5-134
Cold weather driving ......................................................... 5-135
Freeing a frozen door lock ................................... 5-135
Antifreeze ............................................................................ 5-135
Battery................................................................................... 5-135
Draining of coolant water ..................................... 5-135
Tire equipment ............................................................... 5-135
Special winter equipment ..................................... 5-136
Driving on snow or ice ............................................. 5-136
Engine block heater (if so equipped) ........... 5-136

5-4 Starting and driving

WARNING

. Do not leave children or adults

who would normally require the

support of others alone in your

vehicle. Pets should not be left

alone either. They could acciden-

tally injure themselves or others

through inadvertent operation of

the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny

days, temperatures in a closed

vehicle could quickly become

high enough to cause severe or

possibly fatal injuries to people or

animals.

. Properly secure all cargo to help

prevent it from sliding or shifting.

Do not place cargo higher than

the seatbacks. In a sudden stop

or collision, unsecured cargo

could cause personal injury.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

. Do not breathe exhaust gases;

they contain colorless and odor-

less carbon monoxide. Carbon

monoxide is dangerous. It can

cause unconsciousness or death.

. If you suspect that exhaust fumes

are entering the vehicle, drive

with all windows fully open, and

have the vehicle inspected imme-

diately.

. Do not run the engine in closed

spaces such as a garage.

. Do not park the vehicle with the

engine running for any extended

length of time.

. Keep the liftgate closed while

driving, otherwise exhaust gases

could be drawn into the passen-

ger compartment. If you must

drive with the liftgate open, fol-

low these precautions:

1) Open all the windows.

2) Set the

air recirculation to

off and the fan control to high

to circulate the air.

. If electrical wiring or other cable

connections must pass to a trailer

through the seal on the liftgate or

the body, follow the manufac-

turer’s recommendation to pre-

vent carbon monoxide entry into

the vehicle.

. The exhaust system and body

should be inspected by a quali-

fied mechanic whenever:

— The vehicle is raised for ser-

vice.

— You suspect that exhaust

fumes are entering into the

passenger compartment.

— You notice a change in the

sound of the exhaust system.

— You have had an accident

involving damage to the ex-

haust system, underbody, or

rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission

control device installed in the exhaust

system. Exhaust gases in the three-way

catalyst are burned at high temperatures

to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

. The exhaust gas and the exhaust

system are very hot. Keep people,

animals or flammable materials

away from the exhaust system

components.

. Do not stop or park the vehicle

over flammable materials such as

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING

AND DRIVING

dry grass, waste paper or rags.

They may ignite and cause a fire.

CAUTION

. Do not use leaded gasoline. De-

posits from leaded gasoline ser-

iously reduce the three-way

catalyst’s ability to help reduce

exhaust pollutants.

. Keep your engine tuned up. Mal-

functions in the ignition, fuel in-

jection, or electrical systems can

cause overrich fuel flow into the

three-way catalyst, causing it to

overheat. Do not keep driving if

the engine misfires, or if notice-

able loss of performance or other

unusual operating conditions are

detected. Have the vehicle in-

spected. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

. Avoid driving with an extremely

low fuel level. Running out of fuel

could cause the engine to misfire,

damaging the three-way catalyst.

. Do not race the engine while

warming it up.

. Do not push or tow your vehicle

to start the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS-

TEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold

and inflated to the inflation pressure

recommended by the vehicle manufac-

turer on the vehicle placard or tire infla-

tion pressure label. (If your vehicle has

tires of a different size than the size

indicated on the vehicle placard or tire

inflation pressure label, you should deter-

mine the proper tire inflation pressure for

those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle

has been equipped with a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) that illumi-

nates a low tire pressure telltale when

one or more of your tires is significantly

under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low

tire pressure telltale illuminates, you

should stop and check your tires as soon

as possible, and inflate them to the

proper pressure. Driving on a significantly

under-inflated tire causes the tire to

overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-

ciency and tire tread life, and may affect

the vehicle’s handling and stopping abil-

ity.

Please note that the TPMS is not a

substitute for proper tire maintenance,

and it is the driver’s responsibility to

maintain correct tire pressure, even if

under-inflation has not reached the level

to trigger illumination of the TPMS low

tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with

a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate

when the system is not operating prop-

erly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is

combined with the low tire pressure tell-

tale. When the system detects a malfunc-

tion, the telltale will flash for

approximately one minute and then re-

main continuously illuminated. This se-

quence will continue upon subsequent

vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunc-

tion exists. When the malfunction indica-

tor is illuminated, the system may not be

able to detect or signal low tire pressure

as intended. TPMS malfunctions may

occur for a variety of reasons, including

the installation of replacement or alter-

nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that

prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-

erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction

telltale after replacing one or more tires

or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that

the replacement or alternate tires and

wheels allow the TPMS to continue to

function properly.

Starting and driving 5-5

5-6 Starting and driving

Additional information

. Since the spare tire is not equipped

with the TPMS, the TPMS does not

monitor the tire pressure of the spare

tire.

. The TPMS will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above 16

MPH (25 km/h). Also, this system may

not detect a sudden drop in tire

pressure (for example, a flat tire while

driving).

. The low tire pressure warning light

does not automatically turn off when

the tire pressure is adjusted. After the

tire is inflated to the recommended

pressure, the vehicle must be driven at

speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to

activate the TPMS and turn off the low

tire pressure warning light. Use a tire

pressure gauge to check the tire

pressure.

. The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning

appears in the vehicle information

display when the low tire pressure

warning light is illuminated and low

tire pressure is detected. The CHECK

TIRE PRESSURE warning turns off

when the low tire pressure warning

light turns off.

The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning

appears each time the ignition switch

is placed in the ON position as long as

the low tire pressure warning light

remains illuminated.

The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning

does not appear if the low tire pres-

sure warning light illuminates to in-

dicate a TPMS malfunction.

. Tire pressure rises and falls depending

on the heat caused by the vehicle’s

operation and the outside tempera-

ture. Do not reduce the tire pressure

after driving because the tire pressure

rises after driving. Low outside tem-

perature can lower the temperature

of the air inside the tire which can

cause a lower tire inflation pressure.

This may cause the low tire pressure

warning light to illuminate. If the

warning light illuminates in low ambi-

ent temperature, check the tire pres-

sure for all four tires.

. You can also check the pressure of all

tires (except the spare tire) on the

center display. (See NissanConnect®

Owner’s Manual.) The order of the tire

pressure figures displayed on the

screen may not correspond with the

actual order of the tire position.

For additional information, see “Low tire

pressure warning light” (P.2-15) and “Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ” (P.6-

3).

WARNING

. If the low tire pressure warning

light illuminates or Low Pressure

information is displayed on the

monitor screen while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneu-

vers or abrupt braking, reduce

vehicle speed, pull off the road

to a safe location and stop the

vehicle as soon as possible. Driv-

ing with under-inflated tires may

permanently damage the tires

and increase the likelihood of tire

failure. Serious vehicle damage

could occur and may lead to an

accident and could result in ser-

ious personal injury. Check the

tire pressure for all four tires.

Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label to turn the low

tire pressure warning light OFF. If

the light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire

pressure, a tire may be flat or

the TPMS may be malfunctioning.

If you have a flat tire, replace it

with a spare tire as soon as

possible. If no tire is flat and all

tires are properly inflated, it is

recommended you consult a

NISSAN dealer.

. Since the spare tire is not

equipped with the TPMS, when a

spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, the TPMS will not

function and the low tire pressure

warning light will flash for ap-

proximately 1 minute. The light

will remain on after 1 minute.

Have your tires replaced and/or

TPMS system reset as soon as

possible. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for these

services.

. Replacing tires with those not

originally specified by NISSAN

could affect the proper operation

of the TPMS.

. Do not inject any tire liquid or

aerosol tire sealant into the tires,

as this may cause a malfunction

of the tire pressure sensors.

CAUTION

. The TPMS may not function prop-

erly when the wheels are

equipped with tire chains or the

wheels are buried in snow.

. Do not place metalized film or

any metal parts (antenna, etc.) on

the windows. This may cause

poor reception of the signals

from the tire pressure sensors,

and the TPMS will not function

properly.

Some devices and transmitters may tem-

porarily interfere with the operation of

the TPMS and cause the low tire pressure

warning light to illuminate. Some exam-

ples are:

. Facilities or electric devices using

similar radio frequencies are near the

vehicle.

. If a transmitter set to similar frequen-

cies is being used in or near the

vehicle.

. If a computer (or similar equipment) or

a DC/AC converter is being used in or

near the vehicle.

Low tire pressure warning light may

illuminate in the following cases.

. If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel

and tire without TPMS.

. If the TPMS has been replaced and the

ID has not been registered.

. If the wheel is not originally specified

by NISSAN.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference,

and (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

Note: Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Ca-

nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) this device may not

cause interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation of the device.

Starting and driving 5-7

5-8 Starting and driving

TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert

When adding air to an under-inflated tire,

the TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert provides

visual and audible signals outside the

vehicle to help you inflate the tires to

the recommended COLD tire pressure.

Vehicle set-up:

1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level

place.

2. Apply the parking brake and place the

shift lever in the P (Park) position.

3. Place the ignition switch in the ON

position. Do not start the engine.

Operation:

1. Add air to the tire.

2. After a few seconds, the hazard in-

dicators will start flashing.

3. When the designated pressure is

reached, the horn beeps once and

the hazard indicators stop flashing.

4. Perform the above steps for each tire.

. If the tire is over-inflated more than

approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn

beeps and the hazard indicators flash

3 times. To correct the pressure, push

the core of the valve stem on the tire

briefly to release pressure. When the

pressure reaches the designated

pressure, the horn beeps once.

. If the hazard indicator does not flash

within approximately 15 seconds after

starting to inflate the tire, it indicates

that the TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert

is not operating.

. The TPMS will not activate the Easy Fill

Tire Alert under the following condi-

tions:

— If there is interference from an

external device or transmitter

— The air pressure from the inflation

device such as those using a power

socket is not sufficient to inflate the

tire

— If an electrical equipment is being

used in or near the vehicle

— There is a malfunction in the TPMS

system

— There is a malfunction in the horn

or hazard indicators

. If the TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert

does not operate due to TPMS inter-

ference, move the vehicle about 3 ft

(1m) backward or forward and try

again.

If the TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert is not

working, use a tire pressure gauge.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLL-

OVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a

safe and prudent manner may result

in loss of control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times.

Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid exces-

sive speed, high speed cornering, or

sudden steering maneuvers, because

these driving practices could cause you

to lose control of your vehicle. As with

any vehicle, a loss of control could

result in a collision with other vehicles

or objects, or cause the vehicle to roll-

over, particularly if the loss of control

causes the vehicle to slide sideways. Be

attentive at all times, and avoid driving

when tired. Never drive when under the

influence of alcohol or drugs (including

prescription or over-the-counter drugs

which may cause drowsiness). Always

wear your seat belt as outlined in the

“Seat belts” (P.1-20), and also instruct your

passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in

collisions and rollovers. In a rollover

crash, an unbelted or improperly belted

person is significantly more likely to be

injured or killed than a person properly

wearing a seat belt.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD

DRIVING PRECAUTIONS

Utility vehicles have a significantly high-

er rollover rate than other types of

vehicles.

They have higher ground clearance than

passenger cars to make them capable of

performing in a variety of on-pavement

and off-road applications. This gives them

a higher center of gravity than ordinary

cars. An advantage of higher ground

clearance is a better view of the road,

allowing you to anticipate problems.

However, they are not designed for cor-

nering at the same speeds as conven-

tional passenger cars any more than low-

slung sports cars are designed to perform

satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If

at all possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt

maneuvers, particularly at high speeds. As

with other vehicles of this type, failure to

operate this vehicle correctly may result

in loss of control or vehicle rollover. Seat

belts help reduce the risk of injury in

collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash,

an unbelted or improperly belted person

is significantly more likely to be injured or

killed than a person properly wearing a

seat belt.

Be sure to read “Driving safety precau-

tions” (P.5-10).

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY

While driving, the right side or left side

wheels may unintentionally leave the

road surface. If this occurs, maintain

control of the vehicle by following the

procedure below. Please note that this

procedure is only a general guide. The

vehicle must be driven as appropriate

based on the conditions of the vehicle,

road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering

wheel with both hands and try to hold

a straight course.

4. When appropriate, slowly release the

accelerator pedal to gradually slow

the vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the

vehicle to follow the road while the

vehicle speed is reduced. Do not

attempt to drive the vehicle back onto

the road surface until vehicle speed is

reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn

the steering wheel until both tires

return to the road surface. When all

tires are on the road surface, steer the

vehicle to stay in the appropriate

driving lane.

If you decide that it is not safe to

return the vehicle to the road sur-

face based on vehicle, road or

traffic conditions, gradually slow

the vehicle to a stop in a safe place

off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS

Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can

occur if the tire is punctured or is

damaged due to hitting a curb or pothole.

Rapid air pressure loss can also be caused

by driving on under-inflated tires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the

handling and stability of the vehicle,

especially at highway speeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by

maintaining the correct air pressure and

visually inspect the tires for wear and

damage. See “Wheels and tires” (P.8-30).

If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or

“blows-out” while driving maintain control

of the vehicle by following the procedure

below. Please note that this procedure is

only a general guide. The vehicle must be

driven as appropriate based on the con-

ditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

Starting and driving 5-9

5-10 Starting and driving

WARNING

The following actions can increase

the chance of losing control of the

vehicle if there is a sudden loss of tire

air pressure. Losing control of the

vehicle may cause a collision and

result in personal injury.

. The vehicle generally moves or

pulls in the direction of the flat

tire.

. Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

. Do not rapidly release the accel-

erator pedal.

. Do not rapidly turn the steering

wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering

wheel with both hands and try to hold

a straight course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the

accelerator pedal to gradually slow

the vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe

location off the road and away from

traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gra-

dually stop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers

and either contact a roadside emer-

gency service to change the tire or see

“Changing a flat tire” (P.6-4).

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND

DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of

alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the

bloodstream reduces coordination,

delays reaction time and impairs

judgement. Driving after drinking

alcohol increases the likelihood of

being involved in an accident injuring

yourself and others. Additionally, if

you are injured in an accident, alco-

hol can increase the severity of the

injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving.

However, you must choose not to drive

under the influence of alcohol. Every year

thousands of people are injured or killed

in alcohol-related accidents. Although the

local laws vary on what is considered to

be legally intoxicated, the fact is that

alcohol affects all people differently and

most people underestimate the effects of

alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t

mix! And that is true for drugs, too (over-

the-counter, prescription, and illegal

drugs). Don’t drive if your ability to oper-

ate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol,

drugs, or some other physical condition.

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Your NISSAN is designed for both normal

and off-road use. However, avoid driving

in deep water or mud as your NISSAN is

mainly designed for leisure use, unlike a

conventional off-road vehicle.

Remember that Two-Wheel Drive (2WD)

models are less capable than Four-Wheel

Drive (4WD) models for rough road driving

and extrication when stuck in deep snow,

mud, or the like.

Please observe the following precautions:

WARNING

. Drive carefully when off the road

and avoid dangerous areas. Every

person who drives or rides in this

vehicle should be seated with

their seat belt fastened. This will

keep you and your passengers in

position when driving over rough

terrain.

. Do not drive across steep slopes.

Instead drive either straight up or

straight down the slopes. Off-

road vehicles can tip over side-

ways much more easily than they

can forward or backward.

. Many hills are too steep for any

vehicle. If you drive up them, you

may stall. If you drive down them,

you may not be able to control

your speed. If you drive across

them, you may roll over.

. Do not shift ranges while driving

on downhill grades as this could

cause loss of control of the vehi-

cle.

. Stay alert when driving to the top

of a hill. At the top there could be

a drop-off or other hazard that

could cause an accident.

. If your engine stalls or you cannot

make it to the top of a steep hill,

never attempt to turn around.

Your vehicle could tip or roll over.

Always back straight down in R

(Reverse) range. Never back down

in N (Neutral), using only the

brake, as this could cause loss of

control.

. Heavy braking going down a hill

could cause your brakes to over-

heat and fade, resulting in loss of

control and an accident. Apply

brakes lightly and use a low

range to control your speed.

. Unsecured cargo can be thrown

around when driving over rough

terrain. Properly secure all cargo

so it will not be thrown forward

and cause injury to you or your

passengers.

. To avoid raising the center of

gravity excessively, do not exceed

the rated capacity of the roof rack

(if so equipped) and evenly dis-

tribute the load. Secure heavy

loads in the cargo area as far

forward and as low as possible.

Do not equip the vehicle with tires

larger than specified in this man-

ual. This could cause your vehicle

to roll over.

. Do not grip the inside or spokes

of the steering wheel when driv-

ing off-road. The steering wheel

could move suddenly and injure

your hands. Instead drive with

your fingers and thumbs on the

outside of the rim.

. Before operating the vehicle, en-

sure that the driver and all pas-

sengers have their seat belts

fastened.

. Always drive with the floor mats

in place as the floor may became

hot.

. Lower your speed when encoun-

tering strong crosswinds. With a

higher center of gravity, your

NISSAN is more affected by

strong side winds. Slower speeds

ensure better vehicle control.

. Do not drive beyond the perfor-

mance capability of the tires,

even with 4WD engaged.

. For 4WD equipped vehicles, do

not attempt to raise two wheels

off the ground and shift the

transmission to any drive or re-

verse position with the engine

running. Doing so may result in

drivetrain damage or unexpected

vehicle movement which could

result in serious vehicle damage

or personal injury.

. Do not attempt to test a 4WD

equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel

dynamometer (such as the dy-

namometers used by some

states for emissions testing), or

Starting and driving 5-11

5-12 Starting and driving

similar equipment even if the

other two wheels are raised off

the ground. Make sure you inform

test facility personnel that your

vehicle is equipped with 4WD

before it is placed on a dynam-

ometer. Using the wrong test

equipment may result in drive-

train damage or unexpected ve-

hicle movement which could

result in serious vehicle damage

or personal injury (4WD models).

. When a wheel is off the ground

due to an unlevel surface, do not

spin the wheel excessively.

. Accelerating quickly, sharp steer-

ing maneuvers or sudden braking

may cause loss of control.

. If at all possible, avoid sharp

turning maneuvers, particularly

at high speeds. Your vehicle has

a higher center of gravity than a

conventional passenger car. The

vehicle is not designed for cor-

nering at the same speeds as

conventional passenger cars.

Failure to operate this vehicle

correctly could result in loss of

control and/or a rollover acci-

dent.

. Always use tires of the same type,

size, brand, construction (bias,

bias-belted or radial), and tread

pattern on all four wheels. Install

tire chains on the rear wheels

when driving on slippery roads

and drive carefully.

. Be sure to check the brakes im-

mediately after driving in mud or

water. See “Brake system” (P.5-

130) for wet brakes.

. Avoid parking your vehicle on

steep hills. If you get out of the

vehicle and it rolls forward, back-

ward or sideways, you could be

injured.

. Whenever you drive off-road

through sand, mud or water as

deep as the wheel hub, more

frequent maintenance may be

required. See the maintenance

schedule shown in the "9. Main-

tenance and schedules" section.

. Spinning the rear wheels on slip-

pery surfaces may cause the 4WD

warning light to flash. The 4WD

system may also automatically

switch from the 4WD mode to

the 2WD mode. This could reduce

traction. Be especially careful

when towing a trailer (4WD mod-

els).

WARNING

Do not operate the push-button

ignition switch while driving the ve-

hicle except in an emergency. (The

engine will stop when the ignition

switch is pushed 3 consecutive times

or the ignition switch is pushed and

held for more than 2 seconds.) If the

engine stops while the vehicle is

being driven, this could lead to a

crash and serious injury.

Before operating the push-button igni-

tion switch, be sure to move the shift

lever to the P (Park) position.

SSD0436

OPERATING RANGE FOR ENGINE

START FUNCTION

The operating range for starting the

engine inside the vehicle

is shown in

the illustration.

. If the Intelligent Key is on the instru-

ment panel, cargo area, inside the

glove box or door pocket, or the

corner of interior compartment, it

may not be possible to start the

engine.

. If the Intelligent Key is near the door or

door glass outside the vehicle, it may

be possible to start the engine.

SSD1021

When the ignition switch is pushed with-

out depressing the brake pedal, the igni-

tion switch position will change as

follows:

. Push center once to change to ACC.

. Push center two times to change to

ON.

. Push center three times to change to

OFF. (No position illuminates.)

. Push center four times to return to

ACC.

. Open or close any door to return to

LOCK during the OFF position.

The ignition lock is designed so that the

ignition switch position cannot be

switched to LOCK until the shift lever is

Starting and driving 5-13

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

5-14 Starting and driving

moved to the P (Park) position.

When the ignition switch cannot be

pushed toward the LOCK position, pro-

ceed as follows:

1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park)

position.

2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF

position. The ignition switch position

indicator will not illuminate.

3. Open the door. The ignition switch will

change to the LOCK position.

The shift lever can be moved from the P

(Park) position if the ignition switch is in

the ON position and the brake pedal is

depressed.

If the battery of the vehicle is dis-

charged, the push-button ignition

switch cannot be turned from the LOCK

position.

Some indicators and warnings for opera-

tion are displayed on the vehicle informa-

tion display between the speedometer

and tachometer. (See “Vehicle informa-

tion display” (P.2-20).)

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

POSITIONS

LOCK (Normal parking position)

The ignition switch can only be locked in

this position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when

it is pushed to the ACC position while

carrying the Intelligent Key.

ACC (Accessories)

This position activates electrical acces-

sories such as the radio, when the engine

is not running.

ACC has a battery saver feature that will

turn the ignition switch to the OFF posi-

tion after a period of time under the

following conditions:

. all doors are closed.

. shift lever is in P (Park).

. turn signal/hazard indicator lights are

not flashing.

The battery saver feature will be can-

celled if any of the following occur:

. any door is opened.

. shift lever is moved out of P (Park).

. ignition switch changes position.

ON (Normal operating position)

This position turns on the ignition system

and electrical accessories.

ON has a battery saver feature that will

turn the ignition switch to the OFF posi-

tion, if the vehicle is not running, after

some time under the following condi-

tions:

. all doors are closed.

. shift lever is in P (Park).

. turn signal/hazard indicator lights are

not flashing.

The battery saver feature will be can-

celled if any of the following occur:

. any door is opened.

. shift lever is moved out of P (Park).

. ignition switch changes position.

OFF

The engine can be turned off in the

position.

The ignition lock is designed so that the

ignition switch cannot be switched to the

LOCK position until the shift lever is

moved to the P (Park) position.

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the

push-button ignition switch in ACC or

ON positions when the engine is not

running for an extended period. This

can discharge the battery.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

To shut off the engine in an emergency

situation while driving, perform the fol-

lowing procedure:

. Rapidly push the push-button ignition

switch 3 consecutive times in less

than 1.5 seconds, or

. Push and hold the push-button igni-

tion switch for more than 2 seconds.

JVS0404X

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DIS-

CHARGE

If the battery of the Intelligent Key is

discharged, or environmental conditions

interfere with the Intelligent Key opera-

tion, start the engine according to the

following procedure:

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position.

2. Firmly apply the foot brake.

3. Touch the ignition switch with the

Intelligent Key as illustrated. (A chime

will sound.)

4. Push the ignition switch while depres-

sing the brake pedal within 10 sec-

onds after the chime sounds. The

engine will start.

After step 3 is performed, when the

ignition switch is pushed without depres-

sing the brake pedal, the ignition switch

position will change to ACC.

NOTE:

. When the ignition switch is pushed

to the ACC or ON position or the

engine is started by the above pro-

cedures, the Intelligent Key battery

discharge indicator appears on the

vehicle information display even if

the Intelligent Key is inside the

vehicle. This is not a malfunction.

To turn off the Intelligent Key bat-

tery discharge indicator, touch the

ignition switch with the Intelligent

Key again.

. If the Intelligent Key battery dis-

charge indicator appears, replace

the battery as soon as possible.

(See “Battery” (P.8-11).)

Starting and driving 5-15

5-16 Starting and driving

. Make sure the area around the vehicle

is clear.

. Check fluid levels such as engine oil,

coolant, brake fluid and window

washer fluid as frequently as possible,

or at least whenever you refuel.

. Check that all windows and lights are

clean.

. Visually inspect tires for their appear-

ance and condition. Also check tires

for proper inflation.

. Lock all doors.

. Position seat and adjust head re-

straints/headrests.

. Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

. Fasten seat belts and ask all passen-

gers to do likewise.

. Check the operation of warning lights

when the ignition switch is pushed to

the ON position. (See “Warning lights,

indicator lights and audible remin-

ders” (P.2-10).)

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) or N

(Neutral) position. (P is recommended.)

The starter is designed not to operate

unless the shift lever is in either of the

above positions.

3. Push the ignition switch to the ON

position. Firmly depress the brake

pedal and push the ignition switch to

start the engine.

To start the engine immediately, push

and release the ignition switch while

depressing the brake pedal with the

ignition switch in any position.

If the engine is very hard to start in

extremely cold weather or when

restarting, depress the accelerator

pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to

the floor) and while holding, crank

the engine. Release the accelerator

pedal when the engine starts.

If the engine is very hard to start

because it is flooded, depress the

accelerator pedal all the way to the

floor and hold it. Push the ignition

switch to the ON position to start

cranking the engine. After 5 or 6

seconds, stop cranking by pushing

the ignition switch to OFF. After

cranking the engine, release the

accelerator pedal. Crank the engine

with your foot off the accelerator

pedal by depressing the brake

pedal and pushing the push-button

ignition switch to start the engine.

If the engine starts, but fails to run,

repeat the above procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more

than 15 seconds at a time. If the

engine does not start, push the

ignition switch to OFF and wait 10

seconds before cranking again,

otherwise the starter could be da-

maged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30

seconds after starting. Do not race the

engine while warming it up. Drive at

moderate speed for a short distance

first, especially in cold weather. In cold

weather, keep the engine running for

a minimum of 2 - 3 minutes before

shutting it off. Starting and stopping

the engine over a short period of time

may make the vehicle more difficult to

start.

When racing the engine up to 4,000

rpm or more under the no load

condition, the engine will enter the

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE

fuel cut mode.

5. To stop the engine, shift the shift lever

to the P (Park) position and push the

ignition switch to the OFF position.

In preparation for the next engine start,

the engine may have a slightly delayed

shutoff after placing the ignition switch in

the OFF position, depending on the driv-

ing conditions.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery dis-

charge and potential no-start condi-

tions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume

battery power when the engine is

not running (Phone chargers, GPS,

DVD players, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/

or only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to

be charged to maintain battery health.

REMOTE ENGINE START (if so

equipped)

Vehicles started with the remote engine

start function require the ignition switch

to be placed in the ON position before the

shift lever can be moved from the P (Park)

position. To place the ignition switch in

the ON position, perform the following

steps:

1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is

on you.

2. Firmly depress the brake pedal.

3. Push the ignition switch once to the

ON position.

For additional information about the

remote engine start function, see “Re-

mote engine start” (P.3-19).

ENGINE PROTECTION MODE

The engine has an engine protection

mode to reduce the chance of damage

if the coolant temperature becomes too

high (for example, when climbing steep

grades in high temperature with heavy

loads, such as when towing a trailer).

When the engine temperature reaches a

certain level:

. The engine coolant temperature

gauge will move toward the H posi-

tion.

. Engine power may be reduced.

. The air conditioning cooling function

may be automatically turned OFF for a

short time (the blower will continue to

operate).

Engine power and, under some condi-

tions, vehicle speed will decrease. Vehicle

speed can be controlled with the accel-

erator pedal, but the vehicle may not

accelerate at the desired speed. The

transmission will downshift or upshift as

it reaches prescribed shift points. You can

also shift manually.

As driving conditions change and engine

coolant temperature is reduced, vehicle

speed can be increased using the accel-

erator pedal, and air conditioning cooling

function will automatically be turned

back ON.

Starting and driving 5-17

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

5-18 Starting and driving

If:

1. The engine coolant temperature is not

reduced.

2. The air conditioning cooling function

does not turn back ON.

3. The engine oil pressure warning light

illuminates or engine coolant

temperature gauge does not return

to the normal range from the H

position, this may indicate a malfunc-

tion. Move the vehicle off the road to a

safe area and allow the engine to cool.

If after checking the oil and coolant,

the

remains on or engine coolant

temperature does not return to the

normal range, do not continue to

drive. It is recommended you contact

a NISSAN dealer.

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

may also come ON. You do not need to

have your vehicle towed, unless it re-

mains on, but have it inspected soon. It is

recommended you contact a NISSAN

dealer for this service. See “Warning lights,

indicator lights and audible reminders”

(P.2-10).

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced

engine power and vehicle speed.

The reduced speed may be lower

than other traffic, which could in-

crease the chance of a collision. Be

especially careful when driving. If the

vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv-

ing speed, pull to the side of the road

in a safe area. Allow the engine to

cool and return to normal operation.

See “If your vehicle overheats” (P.6-

14).

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine

oil pressure warning light on could

cause serious damage to the engine

almost immediately. Such damage is

not covered by warranty. Turn off the

engine as soon as it is safe to do so.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

7 speed automatic transmission

The automatic transmission in your vehi-

cle is electronically controlled by a trans-

mission control module to produce

maximum efficiency and smooth opera-

tion.

Shown on the following pages are the

recommended operating procedures for

this transmission. Follow these proce-

dures for maximum vehicle performance

and driving enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle

After starting the engine, fully depress the

foot brake pedal and push the shift lever

button before shifting the shift lever to

the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D (Drive) or

Manual shift mode position. Be sure the

vehicle is fully stopped before attempting

to shift the shift lever.

This automatic transmission model is

designed so that the foot brake pedal

must be depressed before shifting from

P (Park) to any drive position while the

ignition switch position is ON.

The shift lever cannot be moved out of

the P (Park) position and into any of the

other gear positions if the ignition

switch is pushed to the LOCK, OFF or

ACC position.

1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed

and push the shift lever button to shift

into a driving gear.

2. Release the parking brake and foot

brake, then gradually start the vehicle

in motion.

WARNING

. Do not depress the accelerator

pedal while shifting from P (Park)

or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D

(Drive) or manual shift mode. Al-

ways depress the brake pedal

until shifting is completed. Failure

to do so could cause you to lose

control and have an accident.

. Cold engine idle speed is high, so

use caution when shifting into a

forward or reverse gear before

the engine has warmed up.

. Never shift to either the P (Park)

or R (Reverse) position while the

vehicle is moving forward and P

(Park), D (Drive) position or man-

ual shift mode while the vehicle is

moving rearward. This could

cause an accident or damage

the transmission.

. Do not downshift abruptly on

slippery roads. This may cause a

loss of control.

CAUTION

. Except in an emergency, do not

shift to the N (Neutral) position

while driving. Coasting with the

transmission in the N (Neutral)

position may cause serious da-

mage to the transmission.

. To avoid possible damage to your

vehicle; when stopping the vehi-

cle on an uphill grade, do not hold

the vehicle by depressing the

accelerator pedal. The foot brake

should be used for this purpose.

SSD0945

Shift lever

To move the shift lever,

: Push the button while depressing the

brake pedal,

: Push the button,

: Just move the shift lever.

Shifting

The shift lever position indicator light

(next to the shift lever) will be illuminated

for approximately 30 minutes after the

ignition switch is turned off. The indicator

light may also illuminate when the vehicle

receives radio waves. This is not a mal-

function.

After starting the engine, fully depress the

Starting and driving 5-19

5-20 Starting and driving

brake pedal and shift the shift lever from

P (Park) to R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D

(Drive) or Manual shift mode position.

Push the button to shift into P (Park) or R

(Reverse). All other positions can be

selected without pushing the button.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the shift

lever is in any position while the

engine is not running. Failure to do

so could cause the vehicle to move

unexpectedly or roll away and result

in serious personal injury or property

damage.

CAUTION

Make sure the vehicle is completely

stopped and the transmission is in

the P (Park) position.

P (Park) position:

Use this position when the vehicle is

parked or when starting the engine. Make

sure the vehicle is completely stopped.

The brake pedal must be depressed and

the shift lever button pushed in to move

the shift lever from the N (Neutral)

position or any drive position to the P

(Park) position. Apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking

brake first, then move the shift lever to

the P (Park) position.

CAUTION

Use this position only when the

vehicle is completely stopped.

R (Reverse):

Use this position to back up. Always be

sure the vehicle is completely stopped

before selecting the R (Reverse) position.

The brake pedal must be depressed and

the shift lever button pushed in to move

the shift lever from the P (Park) posi-

tion, the N (Neutral) position or any

drive position to the R (Reverse) posi-

tion.

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is en-

gaged. The engine can be started in this

position. You may shift to the N (Neutral)

position and restart a stalled engine while

the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward

driving.

Manual shift mode

When the shift lever is in the manual shift

gate, the transmission is ready for the

manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be

selected manually by moving the shift

lever up or down.

When shifting up, move the shift lever to

the + (up) side. The transmission shifts to

the higher range.

When shifting down, move the shift lever

to the − (down) side. The transmission

shifts to the lower range.

When canceling the manual shift mode,

return the shift lever to the D (Drive)

position. The transmission returns to the

normal driving mode.

In the manual shift mode, the shift range

is displayed on the position indicator in

the meter.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as

follows:

7 (7th):

Use this position for all normal forward

driving at highway speeds.

6 (6th) and

5 (5th):

Use these positions when driving up long

slopes, or for engine braking when driving

down long slopes.

4 (4th),

3 (3rd) and

2 (2nd):

Use these positions for hill climbing or

engine braking on downhill grades.

1 (1st):

Use this position when climbing steep

hills slowly or driving slowly through deep

snow, or for maximum engine braking on

steep downhill grades.

. Remember not to drive at high speeds

for extended periods of time in lower

than 7th gear. This reduces fuel econ-

omy.

. Moving the shift lever rapidly to the

same side twice will shift the ranges in

succession.

. In the manual shift mode, the trans-

mission may not shift to the se-

lected gear or may automatically

shift to the other gear. This helps

maintain driving performance and

reduces the chance of vehicle da-

mage or loss of control.

. When the transmission does not

shift to the selected gear, the Auto-

matic Transmission (AT) position in-

dicator light (in the vehicle

information display) will blink and

the buzzer will sound.

. In the manual shift mode, the trans-

mission automatically shifts down

to 1st gear before the vehicle comes

to a stop. When accelerating again, it

is necessary to shift up to the

desired range.

Accelerator downshift — In D (Drive)

position —

For passing or hill climbing, fully depress

the accelerator pedal to the floor. This

shifts the transmission down into the

lower gear, depending on the vehicle

speed.

Fail-safe

When the fail-safe operation occurs, note

that the transmission will be locked in any

of the forward gears according to the

condition.

If the vehicle is driven under extreme

conditions, such as excessive wheel

spinning and subsequent hard braking,

the fail-safe system may be activated.

This will occur even if all electrical

circuits are functioning properly. In this

case, push the switch to the OFF posi-

tion and wait for 3 seconds. Then push

the ignition switch back to the ON

position. The vehicle should return to

its normal operating condition. If it does

not return to its normal operating con-

dition, have the transmission checked

and repaired, if necessary. It is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Starting and driving 5-21

5-22 Starting and driving

SSD0946

Shift lock release

If the battery charge is low or discharged,

the shift lever may not be moved from the

P (Park) position even with the brake

pedal depressed and the shift lever but-

ton pushed.

To move the shift lever, perform the

following procedure:

1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the shift lock cover

using a

suitable tool.

4. Push down the shift lock

as illu-

strated.

5. Push the shift lever button

and

move the shift lever to N (Neutral)

position

while holding down the

shift lock.

The vehicle may be moved to the desired

location.

If the lever cannot be moved out of P

(Park), have the automatic transmission

system checked as soon as possible. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

WARNING

. Be sure the parking brake is fully

released before driving. Failure to

do so can cause brake failure and

lead to an accident.

. Do not release the parking brake

from outside the vehicle.

. Do not use the gear shift in place

of the parking brake. When park-

ing, be sure the parking brake is

fully engaged.

. To help avoid risk of injury or

death through unintended opera-

tion of the vehicle and/or its

systems, do not leave children,

people who require the assis-

tance of others or pets unat-

tended in your vehicle.

Additionally, the temperature in-

side a closed vehicle on a warm

day can quickly become high

enough to cause a significant risk

of injury or death to people and

pets.

PARKING BRAKE

SPA2331

To apply: Fully depress the parking brake

pedal

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake

2. Depress the parking brake pedal

and the parking brake will be released.

3. Before driving, be sure the brake

warning light goes out.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the

LDW and I-LI systems could result in

serious personal injury or death.

. The LDW and I-LI systems will not

prevent loss of control. It is the

driver’s responsibility to stay

alert, drive safely, keep the vehi-

cle in the traveling lane, and be in

control of the vehicle at all times.

. The I-LI system may activate if

you change lanes without first

activating your turn signal or, for

example, if a construction zone

directs traffic to cross an existing

lane marker. If this occurs, you

may need to apply corrective

steering to complete your lane

change.

. Because the I-LI system may not

activate under the road, weather,

and lane marker conditions de-

scribed in this section, it may not

activate every time your vehicle

begins to leave its lane and you

will need to apply corrective

steering.

. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system

— warns the driver with a warning

light and chime that the vehicle is

beginning to leave the driving lane.

. Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) sys-

tem

— warns the driver with a warning

light and chime, and helps assist

the driver to return the vehicle to

the center of the traveling lane by

applying the brakes to the left or

right wheels individually (for a short

period of time).

Starting and driving 5-23

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)/

INTELLIGENT LANE INTERVENTION

(I-LI) (if so equipped)

5-24 Starting and driving

JVS0907X

The LDW and I-LI systems use a camera

installed behind the windshield to moni-

tor the lane markers of your traveling

lane.

JVS1094X

I-LI ON indicator light/LDW indicator light

(on the instrument panel)

Warning systems switch

Dynamic driver assistance switch

Center multi-function control panel

LDW SYSTEM OPERATION

The LDW system operates above approxi-

mately 45 MPH (70 km/h) and when the

lane markings are clear.

If the vehicle approaches either the left or

right side of the traveling lane, the LDW

indicator light (orange) on the instrument

panel will flash and a warning chime will

sound.

NOTE:

The LDW system is not designed to

warn when you operate the lane

change signal and change traveling

lanes in the direction of the signal.

(The LDW system will become operable

again approximately 2 seconds after

the lane change signal is turned off.)

JVS1130X

Warning systems switch

Warning systems ON indicator light

Center multi-function control panel

TURNING THE LDW SYSTEM ON/OFF

The warning systems switch is used to

turn on and off the LDW system when it is

activated on the center display using the

center multi-function control panel

. See

“How to enable/disable the LDW system”

(P.5-26). When the warning systems

Starting and driving 5-25

5-26 Starting and driving

switch is turned off, the warning

systems ON indicator light

on the

switch is off.

The warning systems switch

will turn

on and off the LDW and BSW (if so

equipped) systems at the same time.

JVS1043X

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE LDW

SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the LDW system.

1. Push the SETTING button

2. Touch [Driver Assistance].

3. Touch [Lane Assist].

4. Touch [Lane Departure Warning] to

turn the system ON/OFF.

I-LI SYSTEM OPERATION

The I-LI system operates above approxi-

mately 45 MPH (70 km/h) and when the

lane markings are clear.

If the vehicle approaches either the left or

right side of the traveling lane, the LDW

indicator light (orange) on the instrument

panel will flash and a warning chime will

sound. Then, the I-LI system will auto-

matically apply the brakes for a short

period of time to help assist the driver to

return the vehicle to the center of the

traveling lane.

NOTE:

. The I-LI system is not designed to

work when you operate the lane

change signal and change traveling

lanes in the direction of the signal.

(The I-LI system will become oper-

able again approximately 2 seconds

after the lane change signal is

turned off.)

. The I-LI braking assist will not oper-

ate or will stop operating and only a

warning chime will sound under the

following conditions.

— When the brake pedal is de-

pressed.

— When the steering wheel is turned

as far as necessary for the vehicle

to change lanes.

— When the accelerator pedal is

depressed while brake control

assist is provided.

— When the ICC, I-DC, I-BSI, BSW, I-

FCW or AEB warnings sound.

— When the hazard warning flashers

are operated.

— When driving on a curve at a high

speed.

. While the I-LI system is operating,

you may hear a sound of brake

operation. This is normal and indi-

cates that the I-LI system is operat-

ing properly.

JVS1095X

I-LI ON indicator light (green) (on the

instrument panel)

Dynamic driver assistance switch

Center multi-function control panel

TURNING THE I-LI SYSTEM ON/OFF

To turn on the I-LI system, push the

dynamic driver assistance switch

the steering wheel after starting the

engine. The I-LI ON indicator light (green)

on the instrument panel will illuminate.

Push the dynamic driver assistance

Starting and driving 5-27

5-28 Starting and driving

switch again to turn off the I-LI system.

The I-LI ON indicator light (green)

will

turn off.

The dynamic driver assistance switch

used for the I-LI, I-BSI (if so equipped) and

I-DC systems.

When the dynamic driver assistance

switch

is pushed, the I-BSI and I-DC

systems will also turn on or off simulta-

neously. The I-LI system can be individu-

ally set to on or off on the center display

using the center multi-function control

panel

If the system is set to off, the system will

not turn on even if the dynamic driver

assistance switch

is pushed to on. To

set the system to on or off on the center

display, see “How to enable/disable the I-

LI system” (P.5-28).

JVS1043X

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE I-LI

SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable the

I-LI system.

1. Push the SETTING button

2. Touch [Driver Assistance].

3. Touch [Lane Assist].

4. Touch [Lane Departure Prevention] to

turn the system ON/OFF.

LDW/I-LI SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for the LDW and I-LI systems.

Failure to operate the vehicle in

accordance with these system lim-

itations could result in serious injury

or death.

. The system will not operate at

speeds below 45 MPH (70 km/h)

or if it cannot detect lane mar-

kers.

. The I-LI system is primarily in-

tended for use on well-developed

freeways or highways. It may not

detect the lane markers in certain

roads, weather or driving condi-

tions.

. Do not use the I-LI system under

the following conditions as it may

not function properly:

— During bad weather (rain, fog,

snow, etc.).

— When driving on slippery

roads, such as on ice or snow,

etc.

— When driving on winding or

uneven roads.

— When there is a lane closure

due to road repairs.

— When driving in a makeshift or

temporary lane.

— When driving on roads where

the lane width is too narrow.

— When driving without normal

tire conditions (for example,

tire wear, low tire pressure,

installation of spare tire, tire

chains, non-standard wheels).

— When the vehicle is equipped

with non-original brake parts

or suspension parts.

— When towing a trailer or other

vehicle.

. The camera may not detect lane

markers in the following situa-

tions and the LDW and I-LI sys-

tems may not operate properly.

— On roads where there are

multiple parallel lane markers,

lane markers that are faded or

not painted clearly, yellow

painted lane markers, non-

standard lane markers, or

lane markers covered with

water, dirt, snow, etc.

— On roads where the discontin-

ued lane markers are still

detectable.

— On roads where there are

sharp curves.

— On roads where there are

sharply contrasting objects,

such as shadows, snow,

water, wheel ruts, seams or

lines remaining after road re-

pairs. (The LDW and I-LI sys-

tems could detect these items

as lane markers.)

— On roads where the traveling

lane merges or separates.

— When the vehicle’s traveling

direction does not align with

the lane marker.

— When traveling close to the

vehicle in front of you, which

obstructs the lane camera

unit detection range.

— When rain, snow or dirt ad-

heres to the windshield in

front of the lane camera unit.

— When the headlights are not

bright due to dirt on the lens

or if the aiming is not adjusted

properly.

— When strong light enters the

lane camera unit. (For exam-

ple, the light directly shines on

the front of the vehicle at

sunrise or sunset.)

— When a sudden change in

brightness occurs. (For exam-

ple, when the vehicle enters or

exits a tunnel or under a

bridge.)

. Excessive noise will interfere with

the warning chime sound, and

the chime may not be heard.

Starting and driving 5-29

5-30 Starting and driving

JVS0882X

I-LI ON indicator light (green) (on the

instrument panel)

Warning systems ON indicator light

Dynamic driver assistance switch

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAIL-

ABLE

Condition A:

Under the following conditions, a beep

will sound and the I-LI system will be

canceled automatically. The I-LI ON in-

dicator light (green)

will blink, and the I-

LI system cannot be activated:

. When the VDC system (except TCS

function) or ABS operates.

. When the VDC system is turned off.

. When the SNOW mode switch is

turned on.

. When the 4WD shift switch is in the 4H

or 4L position (for 4WD models).

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer

exist, turn off the I-LI system. Push the

dynamic driver assistance switch

again

to turn the I-LI system back on.

Condition B:

LDW system: If the vehicle is parked in

direct sunlight under high temperature

conditions (over approximately 104°F

(40°C)) and then the LDW system is turned

on, the LDW system may be deactivated

automatically, and the warning systems

ON indicator light

on the switch will

blink.

I-LI system: If the vehicle is parked in

direct sunlight under high temperature

conditions (over approximately 104°F

(40°C)) and then the I-LI system is turned

on, the I-LI system will be turned off

automatically, a beep will sound and the

I-LI ON indicator light (green)

will blink.

The LDW and I-LI systems are not avail-

able until the conditions no longer exist.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer

exist, the LDW system will resume auto-

matically.

For the I-LI system, push the dynamic

driver assistance switch

again to turn

the I-LI system back on.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

LDW system: When the LDW system

malfunctions, it will cancel automatically,

and the LDW indicator light (orange) will

illuminate.

I-LI system: When the I-LI system mal-

functions, it will be turned off automati-

cally, a beep will sound, and the LDW

indicator light (orange) will illuminate.

Action to take:

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place

the vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn

the engine off and restart the engine. If

the LDW indicator light (orange) con-

tinues to illuminate, have the system

checked. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

SSD0453

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The lane camera unit for the LDW/I-LI

systems is located above the inside

mirror.

To keep the proper operation of the LDW/

I-LI systems and prevent a system mal-

function, be sure to observe the following:

. Always keep the windshield clean.

. Do not attach a sticker (including

transparent material) or install an

accessory near the camera unit.

. Do not place reflective materials, such

as white paper or a mirror, on the

instrument panel. The reflection of

sunlight may adversely affect the

camera unit’s capability of detecting

the lane markers.

. Do not strike or damage the areas

around the camera unit. Do not touch

the camera lens or remove the screw

located on the camera unit. It is

recommended you contact a NISSAN

dealer if the camera unit is damaged

due to an accident.

Starting and driving 5-31

5-32 Starting and driving

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the

BSW system could result in serious

injury or death.

. The BSW system is not a replace-

ment for proper driving proce-

dure and is not designed to

prevent contact with vehicles or

objects. When changing lanes, al-

ways use the side and rear mir-

rors and turn and look in the

direction your vehicle will move

to ensure it is safe to change

lanes. Never rely solely on the

BSW system.

. There is a limitation to the detec-

tion capability of the radar. Not

every moving object or vehicle

will be detected. Using the BSW

system under some road, ground,

lane marker, traffic or weather

conditions could lead to improper

system operation. Always rely on

your own operation to avoid ac-

cidents.

The BSW system helps alert the driver of

other vehicles in adjacent lanes when

changing lanes.

JVS0908X

The BSW system uses radar sensors

installed near the rear bumper to detect

other vehicles in an adjacent lane.

SSD1030

Detection zone

The radar sensors can detect vehicles on

either side of your vehicle within the

detection zone shown as illustrated. This

detection zone starts from the outside

mirror of your vehicle and extends ap-

proximately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear

bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0 m)

sideways.

BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) (if so

equipped)

JVS1096X

Side indicator light

BSW system warning light

Warning systems switch

Center multi-function control panel

BSW SYSTEM OPERATION

The BSW system operates above approxi-

mately 20 MPH (32 km/h).

If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the

detection zone, the side indicator light

illuminates.

If the turn signal is then activated, the

system chimes (twice) and the side in-

dicator light flashes. The side indicator

light continues to flash until the detected

vehicle leaves the detection zone.

NOTE:

. The side indicator light illuminates

for a few seconds when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position.

. The brightness of the side indicator

light is adjusted automatically de-

pending on the brightness of the

ambient light.

. If a vehicle comes into the detection

zone after the driver activates the

turn signal, then only the side in-

dicator light flashes and no chime

sounds. For additional information,

refer to “BSW driving situations”

(P.5-36).

Starting and driving 5-33

5-34 Starting and driving

JVS1130X

Warning systems switch

Warning systems ON indicator light

Center multi-function control panel

TURNING THE BSW SYSTEM ON/OFF

The warning systems switch is used to

turn on and off the BSW system when it is

activated on the center display using the

center multi-function control panel

. See

“How to enable/disable the BSW system”

(P.5-34). When the warning systems

switch

is turned off, the warning

systems ON indicator light

on the

switch is off.

The warning systems switch

will turn

on and off the LDW and BSW systems at

the same time.

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE BSW

SYSTEM

The BSW system can be turned off

permanently using the center display.

JVS1043X

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the BSW system.

1. Push the SETTING button

2. Touch [Driver Assistance].

3. Touch [Blind Spot Assist].

4. Touch [Blind Spot Warning] to turn the

system ON/OFF.

BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for the BSW system. Failure to

operate the vehicle in accordance

with these system limitations could

result in serious injury or death.

. The BSW system cannot detect all

vehicles under all conditions.

. The radar sensors may not be

able to detect and activate BSW

when certain objects are present

such as:

— Pedestrians, bicycles, animals.

— Vehicles such as motorcycles,

low height vehicles, or high

ground clearance vehicles.

— Oncoming vehicles.

— Vehicles remaining in the de-

tection zone when you accel-

erate from a stop.

— A vehicle merging into an

adjacent lane at a speed ap-

proximately the same as your

vehicle.

— A vehicle approaching rapidly

from behind.

— A vehicle which your vehicle

overtakes rapidly.

— A vehicle that passes through

the detection zone quickly.

. The radar sensor’s detection zone

is designed based on a standard

lane width. When driving in a

wider lane, the radar sensors

may not detect vehicles in an

adjacent lane. When driving in a

narrow lane, the radar sensors

may detect vehicles driving two

lanes away.

. The radar sensors are designed

to ignore most stationary objects,

however objects such as guard-

rails, walls, foliage and parked

vehicles may occasionally be de-

tected. This is a normal operation

condition.

. The following conditions may re-

duce the ability of the radar to

detect other vehicles:

— Severe weather

— Road spray

— Ice/frost/snow build-up on

the vehicle

— Dirt build-up on the vehicle

. Do not attach stickers (including

transparent material), install ac-

cessories or apply additional

paint near the radar sensors.

These conditions may reduce the

ability of the radar to detect other

vehicles.

Starting and driving 5-35

5-36 Starting and driving

. Excessive noise (for example,

audio system volume, open vehi-

cle window) will interfere with the

chime sound, and it may not be

heard.

BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS

Indicator on

Indicator off

Indicator flashing

JVS0737X

Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind

Another vehicle approaching from

behind

Illustration 1: The side indicator light

illuminates if a vehicle enters the detec-

tion zone from behind in an adjacent lane.

JVS0738X

Illustration 2 – Approaching from behind

Illustration 2: If the driver activates the

turn signal, then the system chimes

(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

. The radar sensors may not detect

vehicles which are approaching ra-

pidly from behind.

. If the driver activates the turn signal

before a vehicle enters the detection

zone, the side indicator light will

flash but no chime will sound when

the other vehicle is detected.

JVS0739X

Illustration 3 – Overtaking another vehicle

Overtaking another vehicle

Illustration 3: The side indicator light

illuminates if you overtake a vehicle and

that vehicle stays in the detection zone

for approximately 3 seconds.

The radar sensors may not detect slower

moving vehicles if they are passed

quickly.

JVS0740X

Illustration 4 – Overtaking another vehicle

Illustration 4: If the driver activates the

turn signal while another vehicle is in the

detection zone, then the system chimes

(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

. When overtaking several vehicles in

a row, the vehicles after the first

vehicle may not be detected if they

are traveling close together.

. The radar sensors may not detect

slower moving vehicles if they are

passed quickly.

. If the driver activates the turn signal

before a vehicle enters the detection

zone, the side indicator light will

flash but no chime will sound when

the other vehicle is detected.

Starting and driving 5-37

5-38 Starting and driving

JVS0741X

Illustration 5 – Entering from the side

Entering from the side

Illustration 5: The side indicator light

illuminates if a vehicle enters the detec-

tion zone from either side.

JVS0742X

Illustration 6 – Entering from the side

Illustration 6: If the driver activates the

turn signal, then the system chimes

(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

. The radar sensors may not detect a

vehicle which is traveling at about

the same speed as your vehicle

when it enters the detection zone.

. If the driver activates the turn signal

before a vehicle enters the detection

zone, the side indicator light will

flash but no chime will sound when

the other vehicle is detected.

JVS0687X

BSW system warning light (orange)

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAIL-

ABLE

When radar blockage is detected, the

system will be turned off automatically,

a beep will sound and the BSW system

warning light (orange)

will blink. The

system is not available until the condi-

tions no longer exist.

The radar sensors may be blocked by

temporary ambient conditions such as

splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked

condition may also be caused by objects

such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the

radar sensors.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer

exist, the system will resume automati-

cally.

If the BSW system warning light (orange)

continues to blink, have the system

checked. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

When the system malfunctions, it will be

turned off automatically, a beep will

sound and the BSW system warning light

(orange) will illuminate.

Action to take:

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place

the vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn

the engine off and restart the engine.

If the BSW system warning light continues

to illuminate, have the system checked. It

is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

Starting and driving 5-39

5-40 Starting and driving

JVS0908X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The two radar sensors for the BSW

system are located near the rear bumper.

Always keep the area near the radar

sensors clean.

The radar sensors may be blocked by

temporary ambient conditions such as

splashing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be

caused by objects such as ice, frost or

dirt obstructing the radar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstruct-

ing the area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including trans-

parent material), install accessories or

apply additional paint near the radar

sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around

the radar sensors.

It is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer if the area around the radar

sensors is damaged due to a collision.

Radio frequency statement

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules and RSS-310 of Industry Cana-

da.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference.

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

Frequency of operation: 24.05GHz —

24.25GHz

Field Strength: Not greater than 2.5V/m

peak (0.25V/m average) at a distance of 3

The manufacturer is not responsible for

any radio or TV interference caused by

unauthorized modifications to this equip-

ment. Such modifications could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the I-

BSI system could result in serious

injury or death.

. The I-BSI system is not a replace-

ment for proper driving proce-

dures and is not designed to

prevent contact with vehicles or

objects. When changing lanes, al-

ways use the side and rear mir-

rors and turn and look in the

direction your vehicle will move

to ensure it is safe to change

lanes. Never rely solely on the I-

BSI system.

. There is a limitation to the detec-

tion capability of the radar. Not

every moving object or vehicle

will be detected. Using the I-BSI

system under some road, ground,

lane marker, traffic or weather

conditions could lead to improper

system operation. Always rely on

your own operation to avoid ac-

cidents.

The I-BSI system helps alert the driver of

other vehicles in adjacent lanes when

changing lanes and helps assist the driver

INTELLIGENT BLIND SPOT

INTERVENTION (I-BSI) (if so equipped)

to return the vehicle to the center of the

traveling lane.

JVS0910X

The I-BSI system uses radar sensors

installed near the rear bumper to detect

other vehicles in an adjacent lane. In

addition to the radar sensors, the I-BSI

system uses a camera

installed behind

the windshield to monitor the lane mar-

kers of your traveling lane.

SSD1030

Detection zone

The radar sensors can detect vehicles on

either side of your vehicle within the

detection zone shown as illustrated.

This detection zone starts from the out-

side mirror of your vehicle and extends

approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind the

rear bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0

m) sideways.

Starting and driving 5-41

5-42 Starting and driving

JVS1097X

Side indicator light

I-BSI ON indicator light (green)/I-BSI sys-

tem warning light (orange)

Dynamic driver assistance switch

Center multi-function control panel

I-BSI SYSTEM OPERATION

The I-BSI system operates above approxi-

mately 37 MPH (60 km/h).

If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the

detection zone, the side indicator light

illuminates.

If the turn signal is then activated, the

system chimes (twice) and the side in-

dicator light flashes. The side indicator

light continues to flash until the detected

vehicle leaves the detection zone.

If the I-BSI system is ON and your vehicle

approaches a lane marker while another

vehicle is in the detection zone, the

system chimes (three times) and the side

indicator light flashes. Then the I-BSI

system slightly applies the brakes to help

return the vehicle back to the center of

the driving lane. The I-BSI system oper-

ates regardless of turn signal usage.

NOTE:

. I-BSI warning and system applica-

tion of the brakes will only be

activated if the side indicator light

is already illuminated when your

vehicle approaches a lane marker.

If another vehicle comes into the

detection zone after your vehicle

has crossed a lane marker, no I-BSI

warning or system application of the

brakes will be activated. (See “I-BSI

driving situations” (P.5-46).)

. The I-BSI system is typically acti-

vated earlier than the Intelligent

Lane Intervention (I-LI) system when

your vehicle is approaching a lane

marker.

JVS1098X

I-BSI ON indicator light (green)

Dynamic driver assistance switch

Center multi-function control panel

TURNING THE I-BSI SYSTEM ON/

OFF

To turn on the I-BSI system, push the

dynamic driver assistance switch

the steering wheel after starting the

engine. The I-BSI ON indicator light

(green)

on the instrumental panel will

illuminate.

Push the dynamic driver assistance

switch

again to turn off the I-BSI

system. The I-BSI ON indicator light

(green)

will turn off.

The dynamic driver assistance switch

used for the I-BSI, I-LI and I-DC systems.

When the dynamic driver assistance

switch

is pushed, the I-LI and I-DC

systems will also turn on or off simulta-

neously. The I-BSI system can be indivi-

dually set to on or off on the center

display using the center multi-function

control panel

If the system is set to off, the system will

not turn on even if the dynamic driver

assistance switch

is pushed to on. To

set the system to on or off on the center

display, see “How to enable/disable the I-

BSI system” (P.5-44).

Starting and driving 5-43

5-44 Starting and driving

JVS1043X

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE I-BSI

SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the I-BSI system.

1. Push the SETTING button

2. Touch [Driver Assistance].

3. Touch [Blind Spot Assist].

4. Touch [Blind Spot Intervention] to turn

the system ON/OFF.

I-BSI SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for the I-BSI system. Failure to

operate the vehicle in accordance

with these system limitations could

result in serious injury or death.

. The I-BSI system cannot detect all

vehicles under all conditions.

. The radar sensors may not be

able to detect and activate I-BSI

when certain objects are present

such as:

— Pedestrians, bicycles, animals.

— Vehicles such as motorcycles,

low height vehicles, or high

ground clearance vehicles.

— Vehicles remaining in the de-

tection zone when you accel-

erate from a stop.

— Oncoming vehicles.

— A vehicle merging into an

adjacent lane at a speed ap-

proximately the same as your

vehicle.

— A vehicle approaching rapidly

from behind.

— A vehicle which your vehicle

overtakes rapidly.

— A vehicle that passes through

the detection zone quickly.

. The radar sensor’s detection zone

is designed based on a standard

lane width. When driving in a

wider lane, the radar sensors

may not detect vehicles in an

adjacent lane. When driving in a

narrow lane, the radar sensors

may detect vehicles driving two

lanes away.

. The radar sensors are designed

to ignore most stationary objects,

however objects such as guard-

rails, walls, foliage and parked

vehicles may occasionally be de-

tected. This is a normal operation

condition.

. The camera may not detect lane

markers in the following situa-

tions and the I-BSI system may

not operate properly.

— On roads where there are

multiple parallel lane markers;

lane markers that are faded or

not painted clearly; yellow

painted lane markers; non-

standard lane markers; lane

markers covered with water,

dirt, snow, etc.

— On roads where discontinued

lane markers are still detect-

able.

— On roads where there are

sharp curves.

— On roads where there are

sharply contrasting objects,

such as shadows, snow,

water, wheel ruts, seams or

lines remaining after road re-

pairs.

— On roads where the traveling

lane merges or separates.

— When the vehicle’s traveling

direction does not align with

the lane markers.

— When traveling close to the

vehicle in front of you, which

obstructs the lane camera

unit detection range.

— When rain, snow or dirt ad-

heres to the windshield in

front of a lane camera unit.

— When the headlights are not

bright due to dirt on the lens

or if aiming is not adjusted

properly.

— When strong light enters a

lane camera unit. (For exam-

ple: light directly shines on the

front of the vehicle at sunrise

or sunset.)

— When a sudden change in

brightness occurs. (For exam-

ple: when the vehicle enters or

exits a tunnel or under a

bridge.)

. Do not use the I-BSI system under

the following conditions because

the system may not function

properly.

— During bad weather. (For ex-

ample: rain, fog, snow, etc.)

— When driving on slippery

roads, such as on ice or snow,

etc.

— When driving on winding or

uneven roads.

— When there is a lane closure

due to road repairs.

— When driving in a makeshift or

temporary lane.

— When driving on roads where

the lane width is too narrow.

— When driving with a tire that is

not within normal tire condi-

tions (for example, tire wear,

low tire pressure, installation

of spare tire, tire chains, non-

standard wheels).

— When the vehicle is equipped

with non-original brake parts

or suspension parts.

— When towing a trailer or other

vehicle.

. Excessive noise (for example,

audio system volume, open vehi-

cle window) will interfere with the

chime sound, and it may not be

heard.

Starting and driving 5-45

5-46 Starting and driving

I-BSI DRIVING SITUATIONS

Indicator on

Indicator off

Indicator flashing

JVS0737X

Illustration 1 - Approaching from behind

Another vehicle approaching from

behind

Illustration 1: The side indicator light

illuminates if a vehicle enters the detec-

tion zone from behind in an adjacent lane.

JVS0738X

Illustration 2 - Approaching from behind

Illustration 2: If the driver activates the

turn signal then the system chimes

(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

JVS0760X

Illustration 3 - Approaching from behind

Illustration 3: If the I-BSI system is on and

your vehicle approaches a lane marker

while another vehicle is in the detection

zone, the system chimes (three times)

and the side indicator light flashes. Then

the I-BSI system slightly applies the

brakes to help return the vehicle back to

the center of the driving lane.

NOTE:

. The radar sensors may not detect

vehicles which are approaching ra-

pidly from behind.

. If the driver activates the turn signal

before a vehicle enters the detection

zone, the side indicator light will

flash but no chime will sound when

the other vehicle is detected.

JVS0739X

Illustration 4 - Overtaking another vehicle

Overtaking another vehicle

Illustration 4: The side indicator light

illuminates if you overtake a vehicle and

that vehicle stays in the detection zone

for approximately 3 seconds.

Starting and driving 5-47

5-48 Starting and driving

JVS0740X

Illustration 5 - Overtaking another vehicle

Illustration 5: If the driver activates the

turn signal while another vehicle is in the

detection zone, then the system chimes

(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

JVS0761X

Illustration 6 - Overtaking another vehicle

Illustration 6: If the I-BSI system is on and

your vehicle approaches a lane marker

while another vehicle is in the detection

zone, the system chimes (three times)

and the side indicator light flashes. Then,

the I-BSI system slightly applies the

brakes on the appropriate side to help

return the vehicle back to the center of

the driving lane.

NOTE:

. When overtaking several vehicles in

a row, the vehicles after the first

vehicle may not be detected if they

are traveling close together.

. The radar sensors may not detect

slower moving vehicles if they are

passed quickly.

. If the driver activates the turn signal

before a vehicle enters the detection

zone, the side indicator light will

flash but no chime will sound when

the other vehicle is detected.

JVS0741X

Illustration 7 - Entering from the side

Entering from the side

Illustration 7: The side indicator light

illuminates if a vehicle enters the detec-

tion zone from either side.

NOTE:

The radar sensors may not detect a

vehicle which is traveling at about the

same speed as your vehicle when it

enters the detection zone.

JVS0742X

Illustration 8 - Entering from the side

Illustration 8: If the driver activates the

turn signal while another vehicle is in the

detection zone, then the side indicator

light flashes and a chime will sound twice.

NOTE:

If the driver activates the turn signal

before a vehicle enters the detection

zone, the side indicator light will flash

but no chime will sound when another

vehicle is detected.

JVS0761X

Illustration 9 - Entering from the side

Illustration 9: If the I-BSI system is on and

your vehicle approaches the lane marker

while another vehicle is in the detection

zone, the system chimes (three times)

and the side indicator light flashes. The I-

BSI system slightly applies the brakes on

the appropriate side to help return the

vehicle back to the center of the driving

lane.

Starting and driving 5-49

5-50 Starting and driving

JVS0742X

Illustration 10 - Entering from the side

Illustration 10: The I-BSI system will not

operate if your vehicle is on a lane marker

when another vehicle enters the detec-

tion zone. In this case only the BSW

system operates.

NOTE:

. The radar sensors may not detect a

vehicle which is traveling at about

the same speed as your vehicle

when it enters the detection zone.

. If the driver activates the turn signal

before a vehicle enters the detection

zone, the side indicator light will

flash but no chime will sound when

the other vehicle is detected.

. I-BSI braking will not operate or will

stop operating and only a warning

chime will sound under the following

conditions.

— When the brake pedal is de-

pressed.

— When the vehicle is accelerated

during I-BSI system operation.

— When steering quickly

— When the ICC, I-DC, I-FCW or AEB

warnings sound.

— When the hazard warning flashers

are operated.

— When driving on a curve at a high

speed.

JVS0687X

I-BSI ON indicator light (green)/I-BSI sys-

tem warning light (orange)

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAIL-

ABLE

. Under the following conditions, a

chime will sound, the I-BSI ON indica-

tor light (green)

will blink and the I-

BSI system will be turned off auto-

matically. The I-BSI system will not be

available until the conditions no long-

er exist.

— When the VDC system (except TCS

function) or ABS operates.

— When the VDC system is turned off.

Action to take:

Turn off the I-BSI system and turn it on

again when the above conditions no

longer exist.

. Under the following conditions, the I-

BSI system will be turned off auto-

matically, a chime will sound and the I-

BSI system warning light (orange)

will blink. The I-BSI system is not

available until the conditions no long-

er exist.

— When the camera detects that the

interior temperature is high (over

approximately 104°F (40°C)).

— When radar blockage is detected.

The radar sensors may be blocked by

temporary ambient conditions such as

splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked

condition may also be caused by objects

such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the

radar sensors.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer

exist, turn the I-BSI system off and turn

it on again. If the I-BSI system warning

light (orange)

continues to blink even

Starting and driving 5-51

5-52 Starting and driving

after the I-BSI system is turned on again,

stop the vehicle in a safe location, place

the shift lever in the P (Park) position and

turn the engine off. Check for and remove

objects obscuring the radar sensors on

the rear bumper, and restart the engine.

If the I-BSI system warning light (orange)

continues to blink, have the I-BSI

system checked. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

When the I-BSI system malfunctions, it will

be turned off automatically, a chime will

sound and the I-BSI system warning light

(orange) will illuminate.

Action to take:

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place

the shift lever in the P (Park) position, turn

the engine off and restart the engine.

If the warning light (orange) continues to

illuminate, have the I-BSI system checked.

It is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

JVS0910X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The two radar sensors for the I-BSI

system are located near the rear bumper.

Always keep the area near the radar

sensors clean.

The radar sensors may be blocked by

temporary ambient conditions such as

splashing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be

caused by objects such as ice, frost or

dirt obstructing the radar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstruct-

ing the area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including trans-

parent material), install accessories or

apply additional paint near the radar

sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around

the radar sensors.

It is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer if the area around the radar

sensors is damaged due to a collision.

The lane camera unit

for I-BSI system is

located above the inside mirror. To keep

the proper operation of I-BSI and prevent

a system malfunction, be sure to observe

the following:

. Always keep the windshield clean.

. Do not attach a sticker (including

transparent material) or install an

accessory near the camera unit.

. Do not place reflective materials, such

as white paper or a mirror, on the

instrument panel. The reflection of

sunlight may adversely affect the

camera unit’s capability of detecting

the lane markers.

. Do not strike or damage the areas

around the camera unit. Do not touch

the camera lens or remove the screw

located on the camera unit. It is

recommended you contact a NISSAN

dealer if the camera unit is damaged

due to an accident.

Radio frequency statement

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules and RSS-310 of Industry Cana-

da.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference.

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

Frequency of operation: 24.05GHz —

24.25GHz

Field Strength: Not greater than 2.5V/m

peak (0.25V/m average) at a distance of 3

The manufacturer is not responsible for

any radio or TV interference caused by

unauthorized modifications to this equip-

ment. Such modifications could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the I-BI

system could result in serious injury

or death.

. The I-BI system is not a replace-

ment for proper driving proce-

dure, is not designed to prevent

contact with vehicles or objects

and does not provide full brake

power. When backing out of park-

ing spaces, always use the inside

and rear mirrors and turn and

look in the direction you will

move. Never rely solely on the I-

BI system.

. There is a limitation to the detec-

tion capability of the radar or the

sonar. Using the I-BI system un-

der some road, ground, traffic or

weather conditions could lead to

improper system operation. Al-

ways rely on your own operation

to avoid accidents.

The I-BI system can help alert the driver of

an approaching vehicle or objects behind

the vehicle when the driver is backing out

of a parking space.

JVS0912X

The I-BI system uses radar sensors

installed on both sides near the rear

bumper to detect an approaching vehicle

and sonar sensors

to detect objects in

the rear.

Starting and driving 5-53

INTELLIGENT BACK-UP

INTERVENTION (I-BI) (if so equipped)

5-54 Starting and driving

JVS0173X

JVS0698X

The radar sensors detect an approach-

ing vehicle from up to approximately 49 ft

(15 m) away. The sonar sensors

detect

stationary objects behind the vehicle up

to approximately 4.9 ft (1.5 m). Refer to the

illustration for approximate zone cover-

age areas

JVS1099X

Side indicator light

I-BI system indicator

I-BI system key (on the center display)

Center multi-function control panel

JVS0173X

I-BI SYSTEM OPERATION

When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)

position and the vehicle speed is less than

approximately 5 MPH (8 km/h), the I-BI

system operates.

If the radar detects a vehicle approaching

from the side or the sonar detects close

stationary objects behind the vehicle, the

system gives visual and audible warnings.

If the driver does not apply the brakes, the

system automatically applies the brake

for a moment when the vehicle is moving

backwards. After the automatic brake

application, the driver must depress the

brake pedal to maintain brake pressure. If

the driver’s foot is on the accelerator

Starting and driving 5-55

5-56 Starting and driving

pedal, the system pushes the accelerator

upward before applying the brake. If you

continue to accelerate, the system will

not engage the brake.

JVS0304X

Center display

JVS0197X

I-BI ON indicator

When the shift lever is placed in the R

(Reverse) position, the indicator on the I-

BI system key

illuminates on the center

display and I-BI ON indicator appears on

the vehicle information display.

SSD1086

Side indicator light

JVS0307X

If the radar detects an approaching

vehicle from the side, the system chimes

(once), the side indicator light on the side

the vehicle is approaching from flashes

and a yellow rectangular frame

ap-

pears on the center display.

JVS0172X

Illustration 1

JVS0173X

Illustration 2

Starting and driving 5-57

5-58 Starting and driving

. In the case of several vehicles ap-

proaching in a row (Illustration 1) or in

the opposite direction (Illustration 2), a

chime may not be issued to the I-BI

system after the first vehicle passes

the sensors.

. The sonar system chime indicating

there is an object behind the vehicle

has a higher priority than the I-BI

chime (single beep) indicating an ap-

proaching vehicle. If the sonar system

detects an object behind the vehicle

and the I-BI system detects an ap-

proaching vehicle at the same time,

the following indications are provided:

— The sonar system chime sounds

— The side indicator light on the side

of the approaching vehicle flashes,

and

— A yellow rectangular frame appears

in the center display.

JVS0307X

If an approaching vehicle or close object

behind the vehicle is detected when your

vehicle is backing up, a red frame

will

appear in the center display and the

system will chime three times. Then, the

brakes will be applied momentarily. After

the automatic brake application, the dri-

ver must depress the brake pedal to

maintain brake pressure.

If the driver’s foot is on the accelerator

pedal, the system moves the accelerator

pedal upward before the braking is ap-

plied. However, if you continue to accel-

erate, the system will not engage the

brakes.

The I-BI system does not operate if the

object is very close to the bumper.

JVS0304X

JVS0182X

I-BI OFF indicator

The I-BI system can be turned off tem-

porarily by touching the I-BI system key

on the center display. The indicator on

the I-BI system key turns off and the I-BI

OFF indicator appears on the vehicle

information display.

When the shift lever is placed in the R

(Reverse) position again, the I-BI system is

turned on.

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE I-BI

SYSTEM

The I-BI system can be turned off perma-

nently using the center display.

JVS1043X

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the I-BI system.

1. Push the SETTING button

2. Touch [Camera/Sonar].

3. Touch [Camera].

4. Touch [Back-up Collision Intervention]

to turn the system ON/OFF.

Starting and driving 5-59

5-60 Starting and driving

JVS0479X

I-BI SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for the I-BI system. Failure to

operate the vehicle in accordance

with these system limitations could

result in serious injury or death.

. Always check your surroundings

and turn to check what is behind

you before backing up.

. The radar sensors detect ap-

proaching (moving) vehicles. The

radar sensors cannot detect

every object such as:

— Pedestrians, bicycles, animals

or child operated toy vehicles

— A vehicle that passing at

speeds greater than approxi-

mately 15 MPH (24 km/h)

. The radar sensors may not detect

approaching vehicles in certain

situations:

— Illustration a. When a vehicle

parked next to you obstructs

the beam of the radar sensor.

— Illustration b. When the vehicle

is parked in an angled parking

space.

— Illustration c. When the vehicle

is parked on inclined ground.

— Illustration d. When an ap-

proaching vehicle turns into

your vehicle’s parking lot aisle.

— Illustration e. When the angle

formed by your vehicle and

approaching vehicle is small.

. The following conditions may re-

duce the ability of the radar

sensors to detect other vehicles:

— Severe weather

— Road spray

— Ice/frost/dirt build up on the

vehicle

. Do not attach stickers (including

transparent material), install ac-

cessories or apply additional

paint near the radar sensors.

These conditions may reduce the

ability of the radar sensors to

detect other vehicles.

. The sonar sensors detect station-

ary objects behind the vehicle.

The sonar sensor may not detect:

— Small or moving objects

— Wedge-shaped objects

— Object close to the bumper

(less than approximately 1 ft

(30 cm))

— Thin objects such as rope, wire

and chain, etc.

. The brake engagement by the I-

BI system is not as effective on a

slope as it is on flat ground. When

on a steep slope the system may

not function properly.

. Do not use the I-BI system under

the following conditions because

the system may not function

properly.

— When driving with a tire that is

not within normal tire condi-

tions (for example, tire wear,

low tire pressure, installation

of spare tire, tire chains, non-

standard wheels).

— When the vehicle is equipped

with non-original brake parts

or suspension parts.

— When towing a trailer or other

vehicle.

. Excessive noise (for example,

audio system volume, open vehi-

cle window) will interfere with the

chime sound, and it may not be

heard.

JVS0689X

Vehicle information display

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAIL-

ABLE

Under the following conditions, a chime

will sound and “BCI NOT AVAILABLE”

warning message will appear in the

vehicle information display

, and the I-

BI system will be turned off automatically.

. If the vehicle is parked in direct sun-

light under high temperature condi-

tions (over approximately 104°F

(40°C)).

. When side radar blockage is detected.

Turn off the I-BI system and turn it on

again when the above conditions no

longer exist.

Starting and driving 5-61

5-62 Starting and driving

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If the I-BI system malfunctions, it will turn

off automatically, a chime will sound and

“BCI MALFUNCTION” warning message will

appear in the vehicle information display

Action to take

Stop the vehicle in a safe location and

place the shift lever in the P (Park)

position. Turn the engine off and restart

the engine. If the warning message con-

tinues to appear, have the system

checked. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

JVS0908X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The two radar sensors for the I-BI

system are located near the rear bumper.

Always keep the area near the radar

sensors clean.

The radar sensors may be blocked by

temporary ambient conditions such as

splashing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be

caused by objects such as ice, frost or

dirt obstructing the radar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstruct-

ing the area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including trans-

parent material), install accessories or

apply additional paint near the radar

sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around

the radar sensors.

It is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer if the area around the radar

sensors is damaged due to a collision.

Radio frequency statement

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules and RSS-310 of Industry Cana-

da.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference.

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

Frequency of operation: 24.05GHz —

24.25GHz

Field Strength: Not greater than 2.5V/m

peak (0.25V/m average) at a distance of 3

The manufacturer is not responsible for

any radio or TV interference caused by

unauthorized modifications to this equip-

ment. Such modifications could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the ICC

system could result in serious injury

or death.

. ICC is not a collision avoidance or

warning device. For highway use

only and it is not intended for

congested areas or city driving.

Failure to apply the brakes could

result in an accident.

. Always observe posted speed

limits and do not set the speed

over them.

. Always drive carefully and atten-

tively when using either cruise

control mode. Read and under-

stand the Owner’s Manual thor-

oughly before using the cruise

control. To avoid serious injury

or death, do not rely on the

system to prevent accidents or

to control the vehicle’s speed in

emergency situations. Do not use

cruise control except in appropri-

ate road and traffic conditions.

. In the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode, a warning

chime will not sound to warn you

if you are too close to the vehicle

ahead. Pay special attention to

the distance between your vehi-

cle and the vehicle ahead of you

or a collision could occur.

The ICC system maintains a selected

distance from the vehicle in front of you

within the speed range of 0 to 90 MPH (0

to 144 km/h) up to the set speed. The set

speed can be selected by the driver

between 20 to 90 MPH (32 to 144 km/h).

The vehicle travels at a set speed when

the road ahead is clear.

The ICC system can be set to one of two

cruise control modes.

. Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode:

For maintaining a selected distance

between your vehicle and the vehicle

in front of you up to the preset speed.

. Conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-

trol mode:

For cruising at a preset speed.

Starting and driving 5-63

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC)

5-64 Starting and driving

JVS0888X

Displays and indicators

ICC switches

MAIN (ON·OFF) switch

Push the MAIN switch to choose the

cruise control mode between the vehicle-

to-vehicle distance control mode and the

conventional (fixed speed) cruise control

mode.

Once a control mode is activated, it

cannot be changed to the other cruise

control mode. To change the mode, push

the MAIN switch

once to turn the

system off. Then push the MAIN switch

again to turn the system back on and

select the desired cruise control mode.

Always confirm the setting in the ICC

system display.

For the vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-

trol mode, see “Vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance control mode” (P.5-65).

For the conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode, see “Conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode” (P.5-81).

SSD1051

HOW TO SELECT THE CRUISE CON-

TROL MODE

Selecting vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance control mode

To choose the vehicle-to-vehicle distance

control mode

, quickly push and release

the MAIN switch

Selecting the conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode

To choose the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode

, push and hold the

MAIN switch

for longer than approxi-

mately 1.5 seconds. See “Conventional

(fixed speed) cruise control mode” (P.5-81).

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE

CONTROL MODE

In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode, the ICC system automatically

maintains a selected distance from the

vehicle traveling in front of you according

to that vehicle’s speed (up to the set

speed), or at the set speed when the road

ahead is clear.

JVS0913X

The system is intended to enhance the

operation of the vehicle when following a

vehicle traveling in the same lane and

direction.

If the radar sensor

detects a slower

moving vehicle ahead, the system will

reduce the vehicle speed so that your

vehicle follows the vehicle in front at the

selected distance.

The system automatically controls the

throttle and applies the brakes (up to

approximately 40% of vehicle braking

power) if necessary.

The detection range of the sensor is

approximately 650 ft (200 m) ahead.

Starting and driving 5-65

5-66 Starting and driving

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode operation

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode is designed to maintain a selected

distance and reduce the speed to match

the slower vehicle ahead; the system will

decelerate the vehicle as necessary and if

the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the

vehicle decelerates to a standstill. How-

ever, the ICC system can only apply up to

approximately 40% of the vehicle’s total

braking power. This system should only

be used when traffic conditions allow

vehicle speeds to remain fairly constant

or when vehicle speeds change gradually.

If a vehicle moves into the traveling lane

ahead or if a vehicle traveling ahead

rapidly decelerates, the distance between

vehicles may become closer because the

ICC system cannot decelerate the vehicle

quickly enough. If this occurs, the ICC

system will sound a warning chime and

blink the system display to notify the

driver to take necessary action.

The system will cancel and a warning

chime will sound if the speed is below

approximately 15 MPH (24 km/h) and a

vehicle is not detected ahead. The system

will also disengage when the vehicle goes

above the maximum set speed.

See “Approach warning” (P.5-73).

The following items are controlled in the

vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode:

. When there are no vehicles traveling

ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance

control mode maintains the speed set

by the driver. The set speed range is

between approximately 20 and 90

MPH (32 and 144 km/h).

. When there is a vehicle traveling

ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance

control mode adjusts the speed to

maintain the distance, selected by

driver, from the vehicle ahead. The

adjusting speed range is up to the set

speed. If the vehicle ahead comes to a

stop, the vehicle decelerates to a

standstill within the limitations of the

system. The system will cancel once it

judges a standstill with a warning

chime.

. When the vehicle traveling ahead has

moved out from its lane of travel, the

vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode accelerates and maintains ve-

hicle speed up to the set speed.

The ICC system does not control vehicle

speed or warn you when you approach

stationary and slow moving vehicles. You

must pay attention to vehicle operation

to maintain proper distance from vehicles

ahead when approaching toll gates or

traffic congestion.

SSD0254

When driving on the freeway at a set

speed and approaching a slower traveling

vehicle ahead, the ICC system will adjust

the speed to maintain the distance,

selected by the driver, from the vehicle

ahead. If the vehicle ahead changes lanes

or exits the freeway, the ICC system will

accelerate and maintain the speed up to

the set speed. Pay attention to the driving

operation to maintain control of the

vehicle as it accelerates to the set speed.

The vehicle may not maintain the set

speed on winding or hilly roads. If this

occurs, you will have to manually control

the vehicle speed.

Normally when controlling the distance to

a vehicle ahead, this system automati-

cally accelerates or decelerates your ve-

hicle according to the speed of the

vehicle ahead. Depress the accelerator

to properly accelerate your vehicle when

acceleration is required for a lane change.

Depress the brake pedal when decelera-

tion is required to maintain a safe dis-

tance to the vehicle ahead due to its

sudden braking or if a vehicle cuts in.

Always stay alert when using the ICC

system.

SSD0964

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode switches

The system is operated by a MAIN switch

and four control switches, all mounted on

the steering wheel.

1. ACCELERATE/RESUME switch:

Resumes set speed or increases speed

incrementally.

2. COAST/SET switch:

Sets desired cruise speed, reduces

speed incrementally.

3. CANCEL switch:

Deactivates the system without eras-

ing the set speed.

4. DISTANCE switch:

Changes the vehicle’s following dis-

tance:

Long

Middle

Short

5. MAIN switch:

Master switch to activate the system

Starting and driving 5-67

5-68 Starting and driving

SSD1104

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode display and indicators

The display is located between the speed-

ometer and tachometer.

1. MAIN switch indicator:

Indicates that the MAIN switch is ON.

2. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:

Indicates whether it detects a vehicle

in front of you.

3. Set distance indicator:

Displays the selected distance be-

tween vehicles set with the DISTANCE

switch.

4. Indicates your vehicle

5. Set vehicle speed indicator:

Indicates the set vehicle speed.

For Canadian models, the speed is

displayed in km/h.

6. ICC system warning light (orange):

The light comes on if there is a

malfunction in the ICC system.

SSD0979

When the ignition switch is pushed to the

ON position, the indicators come on as

illustrated to check for a burned-out bulb,

and it turns off when the engine is

started.

SSD1052

Operating vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance control mode

To turn on the cruise control, quickly

push and release the MAIN switch

on.

The MAIN switch indicator, set distance

indicator and set vehicle speed indicator

come on and in a standby state for

setting.

SSD1053

To set cruising speed, accelerate your

vehicle to the desired speed, push the

COAST/SET switch and release it. (Vehicle

ahead detection indicator, set distance

indicator and set vehicle speed indicator

come on.) Take your foot off the accel-

erator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain

the set speed.

SSD1105

When the COAST/SET switch is pushed

under the following conditions, the sys-

tem cannot be set and the ICC indicators

will blink for approximately 2 seconds:

. When traveling below 20 MPH (32

km/h) and the vehicle ahead is not

detected

. When the shift lever is not in the D

(Drive) or manual shift mode

. When the parking brake is applied

. When the brakes are operated by the

driver

Starting and driving 5-69

5-70 Starting and driving

SSD1106

When the COAST/SET switch is pushed

under the following conditions, the sys-

tem cannot be set.

A warning chime will sound and the ICC

indicators will blink.

. When the SNOW mode is pushed

(SNOW mode switch) (To use the ICC

system, turn off the SNOW mode

switch, push the MAIN switch to turn

off the ICC and reset the ICC switch by

pushing the MAIN switch again.)

For details about the SNOW mode

switch, see “SNOW mode” (P.5-127).

. When the 4WD shift switch is in the 4H

or 4L position. (To use the ICC system,

place the 4WD shift switch in the AUTO

position, push the MAIN switch to turn

off the ICC system and reset the ICC

switch by pushing the MAIN switch

again (for 4WD models).

For details about the 4WD shift switch,

see “NISSAN all-mode 4WD®” (P.5-116).

. When the VDC system is off (To use

the ICC system, turn on the VDC

system. Push the MAIN switch to turn

off the ICC system and reset the ICC

switch by pushing the MAIN switch

again.)

For details about the VDC system, see

“Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) sys-

tem” (P.5-133).

. When ABS or VDC (including the trac-

tion control system) is operating

. When a wheel is slipping (To use the

ICC system, make sure the wheels are

no longer slipping. Push the MAIN

switch to turn off the ICC, and reset

the ICC system by pushing the MAIN

switch again.)

SSD1107

System set display with vehicle ahead

System set display without vehicle ahead

The driver sets the desired vehicle speed

based on the road conditions. The ICC

system maintains the set vehicle speed,

similar to standard cruise control, as long

as no vehicle is detected in the lane

ahead.

The ICC system displays the set speed.

Vehicle detected ahead:

When a vehicle is detected in the lane

ahead, the ICC system decelerates the

vehicle by controlling the throttle and

applying the brakes to match the speed

of a slower vehicle ahead. The system

then controls the vehicle speed based on

the speed of the vehicle ahead to main-

tain the driver selected distance.

NOTE:

. The stoplights of the vehicle come

on when braking is performed by

the ICC system.

. When the brake operates, a noise

may be heard and/or vibration may

be felt. This is not a malfunction.

When a vehicle ahead is detected, the

vehicle ahead detection indicator comes

on. The ICC system will also display the

set speed and selected distance.

Vehicle ahead not detected:

When a vehicle is no longer detected

ahead, the ICC system gradually acceler-

ates your vehicle to resume the pre-

viously set vehicle speed. The ICC

system then maintains the set speed.

When a vehicle is no longer detected the

vehicle ahead detection indicator turns

off.

If a vehicle ahead appears during accel-

eration to the set vehicle speed or any

time the ICC system is in operation, the

system controls the distance to that

vehicle.

When a vehicle is no longer detected

under approximately 15 MPH (24 km/h),

the system will be canceled.

Starting and driving 5-71

5-72 Starting and driving

SSD1108

When passing another vehicle, the set

speed indicator will flash when the vehicle

speed exceeds the set speed. The vehicle

detect indicator will turn off when the

area ahead of the vehicle is open. When

the pedal is released, the vehicle will

return to the previously set speed.

Even though your vehicle speed is set in

the ICC system, you can depress the

accelerator pedal when it is necessary to

accelerate your vehicle rapidly.

How to change set vehicle speed

To cancel the preset speed, use any of

these methods:

. Push the CANCEL switch. The set

vehicle speed indicator will go out.

. Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle

speed indicator will go out.

. Turn the MAIN switch off. Both the

MAIN switch indicator and set vehicle

speed indicator will go out.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use

one of the following methods:

. Depress the accelerator pedal. When

the vehicle attains the desired speed,

push and release the COAST/SET

switch.

. Push and hold the ACCELERATE/RE-

SUME switch. The set vehicle speed

will increase by approximately 5 MPH

(5 km/h for Canada).

. Push, then quickly release the ACCEL-

ERATE/RESUME switch. Each time you

do this, the set speed will increase by

approximately 1 MPH (1 km/h for

Canada).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use

one of the following methods:

. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed,

push the COAST/SET switch and re-

lease it.

. Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.

The set vehicle speed will decrease by

approximately 5 MPH (5 km/h for

Canada).

. Push, then quickly release the COAST/

SET switch. Each time you do this, the

set speed will decrease by approxi-

mately 1 MPH (1 km/h for Canada).

To resume the preset speed, push and

release the ACCELERATE/RESUME switch.

The vehicle will resume the last set

cruising speed when the vehicle speed is

over 20 MPH (32 km/h).

SSD0967

How to change set distance to

vehicle ahead

The distance to the vehicle ahead can be

selected at any time depending on the

traffic conditions.

Each time the DISTANCE switch

pushed, the set distance will change to

long, middle, short and back to long again

in that sequence.

JVS0732X

. The distance to the vehicle ahead will

change according to the vehicle

speed. The higher the vehicle speed,

the longer the distance.

. If the engine is stopped, the set

distance becomes “long”. (Each time

the engine is started, the initial setting

becomes “long”.)

Approach warning

If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle

ahead due to rapid deceleration of that

vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the

system warns the driver with the chime

and ICC system display. Decelerate by

depressing the brake pedal to maintain a

Starting and driving 5-73

5-74 Starting and driving

safe vehicle distance if:

. The chime sounds.

. The vehicle ahead detection and set

distance indicator blink.

The warning chime may not sound in

some cases when there is a short dis-

tance between vehicles. Some examples

are:

. When the vehicles are traveling at the

same speed and the distance be-

tween vehicles is not changing

. When the vehicle ahead is traveling

faster and the distance between ve-

hicles is increasing

. When a vehicle cuts in near your

vehicle

The warning chime will not sound when:

. Your vehicle approaches other vehi-

cles that are parked or moving slowly.

. The accelerator pedal is depressed,

overriding the system.

NOTE:

The approach warning chime may

sound and the system display may

blink when the radar sensor detects

objects on the side of the vehicle or on

the side of the road. This may cause the

ICC system to decelerate or accelerate

the vehicle. The radar sensor may de-

tect these objects when the vehicle is

driven on winding roads, narrow roads,

hilly roads or when entering or exiting a

curve. In these cases you will have to

manually control the proper distance

ahead of your vehicle.

Also, the sensor sensitivity can be af-

fected by vehicle operation (steering

maneuver or driving position in the lane)

or traffic or vehicle condition (for example,

if a vehicle is being driven with some

damage).

Automatic cancellation

A chime sounds under the following

conditions and the control is automati-

cally canceled.

. When the vehicle ahead is not de-

tected and your vehicle is traveling

below the speed of 15 MPH (24 km/h)

. When the system judges the vehicle is

at standstill

. When the shift lever is not in the D

(Drive) or manual shift mode

. When the parking brake is applied

. When the SNOW mode switch is

pushed on.

. When the 4WD shift switch is in the 4H

or 4L position (for 4WD models)

. When the VDC system is turned off

. When ABS or VDC (including the trac-

tion control system) operates

. When distance measurement be-

comes impaired due to adhesion of

dirt or obstruction to the sensor

. When a wheel slips

. When the radar signal is temporarily

interrupted

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode limitations

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for the ICC system. Failure to

operate the vehicle in accordance

with these system limitations could

result in serious injury or death.

. The system is primarily intended

for use on straight, dry, open

roads with light traffic. It is not

advisable to use the system in

city traffic or congested areas.

. This system will not adapt auto-

matically to road conditions. This

system should be used in evenly

flowing traffic. Do not use the

system on roads with sharp

curves, or on icy roads, in heavy

rain or in fog.

. As there is a performance limit to

the distance control function,

never rely solely on the ICC sys-

tem. This system does not correct

careless, inattentive or absent-

minded driving, or overcome

poor visibility in rain, fog, or other

bad weather. Decelerate the ve-

hicle speed by depressing the

brake pedal, depending on the

distance to the vehicle ahead

and the surrounding circum-

stances in order to maintain a

safe distance between vehicles.

. If the vehicle ahead comes to a

stop, the vehicle decelerates to a

standstill within the limitations of

the system. The system will can-

cel once it judges that the vehicle

has come to a standstill and

sound a warning chime. To pre-

vent the vehicle from moving, the

driver must depress the brake

pedal.

. Always pay attention to the op-

eration of the vehicle and be

ready to manually control the

proper following distance. The

vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-

trol mode of the ICC system may

not be able to maintain the se-

lected distance between vehicles

(following distance) or selected

vehicle speed under some cir-

cumstances.

. The system may not detect the

vehicle in front of you in certain

road or weather conditions. To

avoid accidents, never use the ICC

system under the following con-

ditions:

— On roads where the traffic is

heavy or there are sharp

curves

— On slippery road surfaces

such as on ice or snow, etc.

— During bad weather (rain, fog,

snow, etc.)

— When rain, snow or dirt adhere

to the system sensor

— On steep downhill roads (the

vehicle may go beyond the set

vehicle speed and frequent

braking may result in over-

heating the brakes)

— On repeated uphill and down-

hill roads

— When traffic conditions make

it difficult to keep a proper

distance between vehicles be-

cause of frequent accelera-

tion or deceleration

. Do not use the ICC system if you

are towing a trailer. The system

may not detect a vehicle ahead.

. In some road or traffic conditions,

a vehicle or object can unexpect-

edly come into the sensor detec-

tion zone and cause automatic

braking. You may need to control

the distance from other vehicles

using the accelerator pedal. Al-

ways stay alert and avoid using

the ICC system when it is not

recommended in this section.

The radar sensor will not detect the

following objects:

. Stationary and slow moving vehicles

. Pedestrians or objects in the roadway

. Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

. Motorcycles traveling offset in the

travel lane

The sensor generally detects the signals

returned from the vehicle ahead. There-

fore, if the sensor cannot detect the

reflection from the vehicle ahead, the

ICC system may not maintain the se-

lected distance.

The following are some conditions in

which the sensor cannot detect the

Starting and driving 5-75

5-76 Starting and driving

signals:

. When the snow or road spray from

traveling vehicles reduces the sensor’s

visibility

. When excessively heavy baggage is

loaded in the rear seat or the luggage

area of your vehicle

. When your vehicle is towing a trailer,

etc.

The ICC system is designed to automati-

cally check the sensor’s operation within

the limitation of the system. When the

sensor is covered with dirt or is ob-

structed, the system will automatically

be canceled. If the sensor is covered with

ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag,

etc., the ICC system may not detect them.

In these instances, the vehicle-to-vehicle

distance control mode may not cancel

and may not be able to maintain the

selected following distance from the ve-

hicle ahead. Be sure to check and clean

the sensor regularly.

SSD0252

The detection zone of the ICC sensor is

limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the

detection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicle

distance detection mode to maintain the

selected distance from the vehicle ahead.

A vehicle ahead may move outside of the

detection zone due to its position within

the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may

not be detected in the same lane ahead if

they are traveling offset from the center-

line of the lane. A vehicle that is entering

the lane ahead may not be detected until

the vehicle has completely moved into

the lane. If this occurs, the ICC system

may warn you by blinking the system

indicator and sounding the chime. The

driver may have to manually control the

proper distance away from vehicle tra-

veling ahead.

SSD0253

When driving on some roads, such as

winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or

roads which are under construction, the

ICC sensor may detect vehicles in a

different lane, or may temporarily not

detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This

may cause the ICC system to decelerate

or accelerate the vehicle.

The detection of vehicles may also be

affected by vehicle operation (steering

maneuver or traveling position in the

lane, etc.) or vehicle condition. If this

occurs, the ICC system may warn you

by blinking the system indicator and

sounding the chime unexpectedly. You

will have to manually control the proper

distance away from the vehicle travel-

ing ahead.

Starting and driving 5-77

5-78 Starting and driving

JVS0889X

Warning light and display (example)

MAIN (ON·OFF) switch

SSD1110

System temporarily unavailable

Condition A:

Under the following conditions, the ICC

system is automatically canceled. The

chime will sound and the system will not

be able to be set.

. When the VDC is turned off

. When the ABS or VDC operates

. When a tire slips

. When the SNOW mode switch is

pushed on

. When the 4WD shift switch is in the 4H

or 4L position (for 4WD models)

. When the radar signal is temporarily

interrupted

Action to take:

When the conditions listed above are no

longer present, turn the system off using

the MAIN switch

. Turn the ICC system

back on to use the system.

JVS0481X

Condition B:

Under the following conditions, making it

impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the

ICC system is automatically canceled.

The chime will sound, the ICC system

warning light (orange) will come on and

the “FRONT RADAR OBSTRUCTION” warn-

ing message will appear in the vehicle

information display.

. When the radar sensor area of the

front bumper is covered with dirt or is

obstructed

Action to take:

If the warning light (orange) comes on or

warning message appears, stop the ve-

hicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in

the P (Park) position and turn the engine

off. When the radar signal is temporarily

interrupted, clean the sensor area of the

front bumper and restart the engine. If

the warning light (orange) stays on or

warning message continues to be dis-

played, have the ICC system checked. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

. When driving on roads with limited

road structures or buildings (for ex-

ample, long bridges, deserts, snow

fields, driving next to long walls)

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer

exist, the ICC system will resume auto-

matically.

Starting and driving 5-79

5-80 Starting and driving

SSD0979

Condition C:

When the ICC system is not operating

properly, the chime sounds and the ICC

system warning light (orange) will come

on.

Action to take:

If the warning light comes on, park the

vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off,

restart the engine, resume driving and set

the ICC system again.

If it is not possible to set the system or

the indicator stays on, it may indicate

that the ICC system is malfunctioning.

Although the vehicle is still driveable

under normal conditions, have the ve-

hicle checked. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

JVS0913X

System maintenance

The sensor for the ICC system is

located below the front bumper.

To keep the ICC system operating prop-

erly, be sure to observe the following:

. Always keep the sensor area of the

front bumper clean.

. Do not strike or damage the areas

around the sensor.

. Do not cover or attach stickers or

similar objects on the front bumper

near the sensor area. This could cause

failure or malfunction.

. Do not attach metallic objects near

the sensor area (brush guard, etc.).

This could cause failure or malfunc-

tion.

. Do not alter, remove or paint the front

bumper. It is recommended you con-

tact a NISSAN dealer before customiz-

ing or restoring the front bumper.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired

operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modification not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Ca-

nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interfer-

ence, and

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of

the device.

CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed)

CRUISE CONTROL MODE

This mode allows driving at a speed

between 25 to 90 MPH (40 to 144 km/h)

without keeping your foot on the accel-

erator pedal.

WARNING

. In the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode, a warning

chime does not sound to warn

you if you are too close to the

vehicle ahead, as neither the pre-

sence of the vehicle ahead nor

the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is

detected.

. Pay special attention to the dis-

tance between your vehicle and

the vehicle ahead of you or a

collision could occur.

. Always confirm the setting in the

ICC system display.

. Do not use the conventional

(fixed speed) cruise control mode

when driving under the following

conditions.

— when it is not possible to keep

the vehicle at a set speed

— in heavy traffic or in traffic

that varies in speed

— on winding or hilly roads

— on slippery roads (rain, snow,

ice, etc.)

— in very windy areas

Doing so could cause a loss of

vehicle control and result in an acci-

dent.

Starting and driving 5-81

5-82 Starting and driving

SSD0968

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control switch

1. ACCELERATE/RESUME switch:

Resumes set speed or increases speed

incrementally.

2. COAST/SET switch:

Sets the desired cruise speed, reduces

speed incrementally.

3. CANCEL switch:

Deactivates the system without eras-

ing the set speed.

4. MAIN switch:

Master switch to activate the system.

SSD1013

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode display and indica-

tors

The display is on the vehicle information

display located between the speed-

ometer and tachometer.

1. MAIN switch indicator:

Indicates that the MAIN switch is ON.

2. Cruise set switch indicator:

Displays while the vehicle speed is

controlled by the conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode of the ICC

system.

3. Cruise system warning light:

Comes on if there is a malfunction in

the cruise control system.

SSD0969

Operating conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode

To turn on the conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode, push and

hold the MAIN switch

for longer than

about 1.5 seconds.

When pushing the MAIN switch on, the

conventional (fixed speed) cruise control

mode display and the MAIN switch indi-

cator are displayed on the vehicle infor-

mation display. After you hold the MAIN

switch on for longer than about 1.5

seconds, the ICC system display goes

out. The MAIN switch indicator stays lit.

You can now set your desired cruising

speed. Pushing the MAIN switch again will

turn the system completely off.

When the ignition switch is pushed to the

OFF position, the system is also automa-

tically turned off.

To use the ICC system again, quickly push

and release the MAIN switch (vehicle-to-

vehicle distance control mode) or push

and hold it (conventional cruise control

mode) again to turn it on.

When the Intelligent Distance Control (I-

DC) system is on, the conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode cannot be

turned on even though the MAIN switch is

pushed and held.

To turn on the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode, turn off the I-DC

system. See “Intelligent Distance Control

(I-DC)” (P.5-85).

CAUTION

To avoid accidentally engaging

cruise control, make sure to turn

the MAIN switch off when not using

the ICC system.

SSD0970

To set cruising speed, accelerate your

vehicle to the desired speed, push the

COAST/SET switch and release it. (The

SET indicator will come on in the display.)

Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.

. To pass another vehicle, depress the

accelerator pedal. When you release

the pedal, the vehicle will return to the

previously set speed.

. The vehicle may not maintain the set

speed when going up or down steep

hills. If this happens, manually main-

tain vehicle speed.

To cancel the preset speed, use any of

the following methods:

Starting and driving 5-83

5-84 Starting and driving

1. Push the CANCEL switch. The SET

indicator will turn off.

2. Tap the brake pedal. The SET indicator

will turn off.

3. Turn the MAIN switch off. Both the

MAIN switch indicator and SET indica-

tor will turn off.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use

one of the following three methods:

1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When

the vehicle attains the desired speed,

push and release the COAST/SET

switch.

2. Push and hold the ACCELERATE/RE-

SUME set switch. When the vehicle

attains the speed you desire, release

the switch.

3. Push, then quickly release the ACCEL-

ERATE/RESUME switch. Each time you

do this, the set speed will increase by

about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use

one of the following three methods:

1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed,

push the COAST/SET switch and re-

lease it.

2. Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.

Release the switch when the vehicle

slows down to the desired speed.

3. Push, then quickly release the COAST/

SET switch. Each time you do this, the

set speed will decrease by about 1

MPH (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and

release the ACCELERATE/RESUME switch.

The vehicle will resume the last set

cruising speed when the vehicle speed is

over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

System temporarily unavailable

Under the following condition, a chime

will sound and the system control is

automatically canceled.

. When the vehicle slows down more

than 8 MPH (13 km/h) below the set

speed

. When the shift lever is shifted to the N

(Neutral) position

. When the parking brake is applied

. When the VDC (including the traction

control system) operates.

. When a wheel slips

JVS0661X

Warning light

When the system is not operating prop-

erly, the chime sounds and the system

warning light (orange) will come on.

Action to take:

If the warning light comes on, park the

vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off,

restart the engine, resume driving and

then perform the setting again.

If it is not possible to set or the indicator

stays on, it may indicate that the

system is malfunctioning. Although the

vehicle is still driveable under normal

conditions, have the vehicle checked. It

is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the I-

DC system could result in serious

personal injury or death.

. Always drive carefully and atten-

tively when using the I-DC sys-

tem. Read and understand the

Owner’s Manual thoroughly be-

fore using the I-DC system. To

avoid serious injury or death, do

not rely on the system to prevent

accidents or to control the vehi-

cle’s speed in emergency situa-

tions. Do not use the I-DC system

except in appropriate road and

traffic conditions.

. This system is only an aid to

assist the driver and is not a

collision warning or avoidance

device. It is the driver’s responsi-

bility to stay alert, drive safely

and be in control of the vehicle at

all times.

. As there is a performance limit to

the distance control function,

never rely solely on the I-DC

system. This system does not

correct careless, inattentive or

absent-minded driving, or over-

come poor visibility in rain, fog, or

other bad weather. Decelerate

the vehicle speed by depressing

the brake pedal, depending on

the distance to the vehicle ahead

and the surrounding circum-

stances in order to maintain a

safe distance between vehicles.

. Always pay attention to the op-

eration of the vehicle and be

ready to manually decelerate to

maintain the proper following

distance. The I-DC system may

not be able to decelerate the

vehicle under some circum-

stances.

. This system only brakes and

moves the accelerator pedal up-

ward to help assist the driver to

maintain a following distance

from the vehicle ahead. Accelera-

tion should be operated by the

driver.

. The I-DC system does not control

vehicle speed or warn you when

you approach stationary and

slow moving vehicles. You must

pay attention to vehicle operation

to maintain proper distance from

vehicles ahead.

Starting and driving 5-85

INTELLIGENT DISTANCE CONTROL

(I-DC) (if so equipped)

5-86 Starting and driving

. The I-DC system automatically

decelerates your vehicle to help

assist the driver to maintain a

following distance from the vehi-

cle ahead. Manually brake when

deceleration is required to main-

tain a safe distance upon sudden

braking by the vehicle ahead or

when a vehicle suddenly appears

in front of you. Always stay alert

when using the I-DC system.

. If the vehicle ahead comes to a

stop, the vehicle decelerates to a

standstill within the limitations of

the system. The system will can-

cel with a warning chime once it

judges that the vehicle has come

to a standstill. To prevent the

vehicle from moving, the driver

must depress the brake pedal.

JVS0913X

The system is intended to assist the driver

to keep a following distance from the

vehicle ahead traveling in the same lane

and direction.

If the radar sensor

detects a slower

moving vehicle ahead, the system will

reduce the vehicle speed to help assist

the driver to maintain a following dis-

tance.

The system automatically controls the

throttle and applies the brakes (up to

approximately 40% of vehicle braking

power) if necessary.

The detection range of the sensor is

approximately 650 ft (200 m) ahead.

JVS1100X

Indicators (on the vehicle information

display)

Dynamic driver assistance switch

Center multi-function control panel

I-DC SYSTEM OPERATION

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the I-

DC system could result in serious

personal injury or death.

. When the vehicle ahead detection

indicator light is not illuminated,

system will not control the vehi-

cle or warn the driver.

. Never place your foot under the

brake pedal. Your foot may be

caught when the system controls

the brake.

. Depending on the position of the

accelerator pedal, the system

may not be able to assist the

driver to release the accelerator

pedal appropriately.

The I-DC system brakes and moves the

accelerator pedal upward according to

the distance from and the relative speed

of the vehicle ahead to help assist the

driver in maintaining a following distance.

The system will decelerate as necessary

and if the vehicle ahead comes to a stop,

the vehicle decelerates to a standstill.

However, the I-DC system can only apply

up to approximately 40% of the vehicle’s

total braking power. If a vehicle moves

into the traveling lane ahead or if a

vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decele-

rates, the distance between vehicles

may become closer because the I-DC

system cannot decelerate the vehicle

Starting and driving 5-87

5-88 Starting and driving

quickly enough. If this occurs, the I-DC

system will sound a warning chime and

blink the system display to notify the

driver to take necessary action.

See “Approach warning” (P.5-89).

SSD0997

System set display with a vehicle ahead

System set display without a vehicle

ahead

The I-DC system helps assist the driver to

keep a following distance to the vehicle

ahead by braking and moving the accel-

erator pedal upward in the normal driving

condition.

When a vehicle ahead is detected:

The vehicle ahead detection indicator

comes on.

When the vehicle approaches a vehicle

ahead:

. If the driver’s foot is not on the

accelerator pedal, the system acti-

vates the brakes to decelerate

smoothly as necessary. If the vehicle

ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle

decelerates to a standstill within the

limitations of the system.

. If the driver’s foot is on the accelerator

pedal, the system moves the accel-

erator pedal upward to assist the

driver to release the accelerator pedal.

When brake operation by the driver is

required:

The system alerts the driver by a warning

chime and blinking the vehicle ahead

detection indicator. If the driver’s foot is

on the accelerator pedal after the warn-

ing, the system moves the accelerator

pedal upward to assist the driver to

switch to the brake pedal.

NOTE:

. The stop lights of the vehicle come

on when braking is performed by

the I-DC system.

. When the brake operates, a noise

may be heard and/or vibration may

be felt. This is not a malfunction.

Overriding the system:

The following driver’s operation overrides

the system operation.

. When the driver depresses the accel-

erator pedal even further while the

system is moving the accelerator

pedal upward, the I-DC system control

of the accelerator pedal is canceled.

. When the driver’s foot is on the accel-

erator pedal, the brake control by the

system is not operated.

. When the driver’s foot is on the brake

pedal, neither the brake control nor

the alert by the system operates.

. When the Intelligent Cruise Control

(ICC) system is set, the I-DC system

will be inactive.

Approach warning

If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle

ahead due to rapid deceleration of that

vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the

system warns the driver with the chime

and I-DC system display. Decelerate by

depressing the brake pedal to maintain a

safe vehicle distance if:

. The chime sounds.

. The vehicle ahead detection indicator

blinks.

The warning chime may not sound in

some cases when there is a short dis-

tance between vehicles. Some examples

are:

. When the vehicles are traveling at the

same speed and the distance be-

tween vehicles is not changing

. When the vehicle ahead is traveling

faster and the distance between ve-

hicles is increasing

. When a vehicle cuts in near your

vehicle

The warning chime will not sound when

your vehicle approaches vehicles that are

parked or moving slowly.

NOTE:

The approach warning chime may

sound and the system display may

blink when the radar sensor detects

objects on the side of the vehicle or on

the side of the road. This may cause the

I-DC system to decelerate or accelerate

the vehicle. The radar sensor may de-

tect these objects when the vehicle is

driven on winding roads, narrow roads,

hilly roads or when entering or exiting a

curve. In these cases you will have to

manually control the proper distance

ahead of your vehicle.

Also, the sensor sensitivity can be af-

fected by vehicle operation (steering

maneuver or driving position in the lane)

or traffic or vehicle condition (for example,

if a vehicle is being driven with some

damage).

Starting and driving 5-89

5-90 Starting and driving

JVS1101X

I-DC system switch indicator (on the

vehicle information display)

Dynamic driver assistance switch

Center multi-function control panel

TURNING THE I-DC SYSTEM ON/OFF

To turn on the I-DC system, push the

dynamic driver assistance switch

the steering wheel after starting the

engine. The I-DC system switch indicator

in the vehicle information display will

appear. Push the dynamic driver assis-

tance switch

again to turn off the I-DC

system. The I-DC system switch indicator

will turn off.

The system will start to operate after the

vehicle speed is above approximately 3

MPH (5 km/h).

The dynamic driver assistance switch

used for the I-DC, I-LI (if so equipped) and

I-BSI (if so equipped) systems. When the

dynamic driver assistance switch

pushed, the I-LI and I-BSI systems will

also turn on or off simultaneously. The I-

DC system can be individually set to on or

off on the center display using the center

multi-function control panel

. If the

system is set to off, the system will not

turn on even if the dynamic driver assis-

tance switch

is pushed to on. To set the

system to on or off on the center display,

see “How to enable/disable the I-DC

system” (P.5-91).

When the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode is operating, the I-

DC system will not operate. (To use the I-

DC system, turn the conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode off, then push

the dynamic driver assistance switch

For details about the conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode, see “Intelli-

gent Cruise Control (ICC)” (P.5-63).

When the engine is turned off, the system

is automatically turned off.

JVS1043X

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE I-DC

SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the I-DC system.

1. Push the SETTING button

2. Touch [Driver Assistance].

3. Touch [Forward Assist].

4. Touch [Distance Control Assist] to turn

the system ON/OFF.

SSD0994

I-DC SYSTEM DISPLAY AND INDICA-

TORS

The display is located between the speed-

ometer and tachometer.

1. I-DC system switch indicator:

Indicates that the dynamic driver

assistance switch is ON.

2. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:

Indicates whether it detects a vehicle

in front of you.

3. I-DC system warning light (orange):

The light comes on if there is a

malfunction in the I-DC system.

Starting and driving 5-91

5-92 Starting and driving

I-DC SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions of the I-DC system. Failure to

operate the vehicle in accordance

with these system limitations could

result in serious injury or death.

. This system will not adapt auto-

matically to road conditions. Do

not use the system on roads with

sharp curves, or on icy roads, in

heavy rain or in fog.

. The I-DC system will not apply

brake control while the driver’s

foot is on the accelerator pedal.

. As there is a performance limit to

the distance control function,

never rely solely on the I-DC

system. This system does not

correct careless, inattentive or

absent-minded driving, or over-

come poor visibility in rain, fog, or

other bad weather. Decelerate

the vehicle speed by depressing

the brake pedal, depending on

the distance to the vehicle ahead

and the surrounding circum-

stances in order to maintain a

safe distance between vehicles.

. The system may not detect the

vehicle in front of you in certain

road or weather conditions. To

avoid accidents, never use the I-

DC system under the following

conditions:

— On roads with sharp curves

— On slippery road surfaces

such as on ice or snow, etc.

— On off-road surfaces such as

on sand or rock, etc.

— During bad weather (rain, fog,

snow, etc.)

— When rain, snow or dirt adhere

to the system sensor

— On steep downhill roads (fre-

quent braking may result in

overheating the brakes)

— On repeated uphill and down-

hill roads

— When towing a trailer or other

vehicle

. In some road or traffic conditions,

a vehicle or object can unexpect-

edly come into the sensor detec-

tion zone and cause automatic

braking. You may need to control

the distance from other vehicles

using the accelerator pedal. Al-

ways stay alert and avoid using

the I-DC system when it is not

recommended in this section.

The radar sensor will not detect the

following objects:

. Stationary and slow moving vehicles

. Pedestrians or objects in the roadway

. Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

. Motorcycles traveling offset in the

travel lane

The following are some conditions in

which the sensor cannot detect the

signals:

. When the snow or road spray from

traveling vehicles reduces the sensor’s

visibility

. When excessively heavy baggage is

loaded in the rear seat or the luggage

room of your vehicle

SSD0252

The detection zone of the sensor is

limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the

detection zone for the system to operate.

A vehicle ahead may move outside of the

detection zone due to its position within

the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may

not be detected in the same lane ahead if

they are traveling offset from the center-

line of the lane. A vehicle that is entering

the lane ahead may not be detected until

the vehicle has completely moved into

the lane. If this occurs, the system may

warn you by blinking the system indi-

cator and sounding the chime. The

driver may have to manually control

the proper distance away from vehicle

traveling ahead.

Starting and driving 5-93

5-94 Starting and driving

SSD0253

When driving on some roads, such as

winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or

roads which are under construction, the

sensor may detect vehicles in a different

lane, or may temporarily not detect a

vehicle traveling ahead. This may cause

the system to work inappropriately.

The detection of vehicles may also be

affected by vehicle operation (steering

maneuver or traveling position in the

lane, etc.) or vehicle condition. If this

occurs, the system may warn you by

blinking the system indicator and

sounding the chime unexpectedly. You

will have to manually control the proper

distance away from the vehicle travel-

ing ahead.

JVS0892X

Warning light and indicators

Dynamic driver assistance switch

SSD0996

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAIL-

ABLE

Condition A:

Under the following conditions, the I-DC

system is automatically canceled. The

chime will sound and the I-DC system

switch indicator will blink. The system will

not be able to be set.

. When the VDC system is off (To use

the I-DC system, turn on the VDC, then

push the dynamic driver assistance

switch.)

For details about the VDC system, see

“Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) sys-

tem” (P.5-133).

Starting and driving 5-95

5-96 Starting and driving

. When the VDC or ABS (including the

traction control system) operates

. When the SNOW mode switch is ON

(To use the I-DC system, turn off the

SNOW mode switch, then turn on the

dynamic driver assistance switch

For details about the SNOW mode

switch, see “SNOW mode switch” (P.2-

46).

. When the 4WD shift switch is in the 4H

or 4L position (for 4WD models)

. When the radar signal is temporarily

interrupted

Action to take:

When the conditions listed above are no

longer present, turn the system off with

the dynamic driver assistance switch

Turn the I-DC system back on to use the

system.

JVS0482X

Condition B:

Under the following conditions, making it

impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the

I-DC system is automatically canceled.

The chime will sound, the I-DC system

warning light (orange) will come on and

the “FRONT RADAR OBSTRUCTION” warn-

ing message will appear in the vehicle

information display.

. When the radar sensor area of the

front bumper is covered with dirt or is

obstructed

Action to take:

If the I-DC system warning light (orange)

comes on and the warning message

appears, stop the vehicle in a safe place,

place the shift lever in the P (Park)

position and turn the engine off. When

the radar signal is temporarily inter-

rupted, clean the sensor area of the front

bumper and restart the engine. If the

warning message continues to be dis-

played, have the I-DC system checked. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

. When driving on roads with limited

road structures or buildings (for ex-

ample, long bridges, deserts, snow

fields, driving next to long walls)

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer

exist, the I-DC system will resume auto-

matically.

SSD0999

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

Condition:

When the I-DC system is not operating

properly, the chime sounds and the

system warning light (“CRUISE” orange)

will come on.

Action to take:

If the warning light comes on, park the

vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off,

restart the engine, and turn on the I-DC

system again.

If it is not possible to set the system or

the indicator stays on, it may indicate

that the system is malfunctioning.

Although the vehicle is still driveable

under normal conditions, have the ve-

hicle checked. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

JVS0913X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The sensor for the I-DC system is

located below the front bumper.

The I-DC system is designed to automa-

tically check the sensor’s operation. When

the sensor is covered with dirt or is

obstructed, the system will automatically

be canceled. If the sensor is covered with

ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag,

etc., the I-DC system may not detect

them. In these instances, the I-DC system

may not be able to decelerate the vehicle

properly. Be sure to check and clean the

sensor regularly.

To keep the I-DC system operating prop-

erly, be sure to observe the following:

Starting and driving 5-97

5-98 Starting and driving

. Always keep the sensor area of the

front bumper clean.

. Do not strike or damage the areas

around the sensor.

. Do not cover or attach stickers or

similar objects on the front bumper

near the sensor area. This could cause

failure or malfunction.

. Do not attach metallic objects near

the sensor area (brush guard, etc.).

This could cause failure or malfunc-

tion.

. Do not alter, remove or paint the front

bumper. It is recommended you con-

tact a NISSAN dealer before customiz-

ing or restoring the front bumper.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired

operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modification not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Ca-

nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interfer-

ence, and

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of

the device.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the

AEB system could result in serious

injury or death.

. The AEB system is a supplemen-

tal aid to the driver. It is not a

replacement for the driver’s at-

tention to traffic conditions or

responsibility to drive safely. It

cannot prevent accidents due to

carelessness or dangerous driv-

ing techniques.

. The AEB system does not func-

tion in all driving, traffic, weather

and road conditions.

The AEB system can assist the driver

when there is a risk of a forward collision

with the vehicle ahead in the traveling

lane.

AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB)

JVS0913X

The AEB system uses a sensor located

below the front bumper to measure the

distance to the vehicle ahead in the

traveling lane.

JVS1102X

Indicators and warnings (on the vehicle

information display)

AEB system warning light (on the instru-

ment panel)

Center multi-function control panel

AEB SYSTEM OPERATION

The AEB system operates at speeds

above approximately 3 MPH (5 km/h).

If a risk of a forward collision is detected,

the AEB system will provide the first

warning to the driver by blinking the

vehicle ahead detection indicator in the

Starting and driving 5-99

5-100 Starting and driving

vehicle information display and providing

an audible warning. In addition, the AEB

system pushes the accelerator pedal up.

If the driver releases the accelerator

pedal, then the system applies partial

braking.

If the driver applies the brakes quickly and

forcefully after the warning, and the AEB

system detects that there is still the

possibility of a forward collision, the

system will automatically increase the

braking force.

If a forward collision is imminent and the

driver does not take action, the AEB

system issues the second visual (flashing)

and audible warning and automatically

applies harder braking.

NOTE:

The vehicle’s stop lights come on when

braking is performed by the AEB sys-

tem.

Depending on vehicle speed and distance

to the vehicle ahead, as well as driving

and roadway conditions, the system may

help the driver avoid a forward collision or

may help mitigate the consequences of a

collision should one be unavoidable.

If the driver is handling the steering

wheel, accelerating or braking, the AEB

system will function later or will not

function.

The automatic braking will cease under

the following conditions:

. When the steering wheel is turned as

far as necessary to avoid a collision.

. When the accelerator pedal is de-

pressed.

. When there is no longer a vehicle

detected ahead.

If the AEB system has stopped the vehicle,

the vehicle will remain at a standstill for

approximately 2 seconds before the

brakes are released.

JVS1103X

AEB system warning light (on the instru-

ment panel)

Center multi-function control panel

TURNING THE AEB SYSTEM ON/OFF

Perform the following steps to turn the

AEB system ON/OFF.

1. Push the SETTING button on the

center multi-function control panel

2. Touch [Driver Assistance].

3. Touch [Emergency Assist].

4. Touch [Forward emergency braking]

to turn the system ON/OFF.

When the AEB system is turned off, the

AEB system warning light (orange)

illuminates.

NOTE:

The AEB system will be automatically

turned ON when the engine is restarted.

The I-FCW system is integrated into the

AEB system. There is not a separate

selection in the display for the I-FCW

system. When the AEB system is turned

off, the I-FCW system is also turned off.

AEB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for the AEB system. Failure to

operate the vehicle in accordance

with these system limitations could

result in serious injury or death.

. The AEB system cannot detect all

vehicles under all conditions.

. The radar sensor does not detect

the following objects:

Starting and driving 5-101

5-102 Starting and driving

— Pedestrians, animals or obsta-

cles in the roadway

— Oncoming vehicles

— Crossing vehicles

. The radar sensor has some per-

formance limitations. If a station-

ary vehicle is in the vehicle’s path,

the AEB system will not function

when the vehicle is driven at

speeds over approximately 45

MPH (70 km/h).

. The radar sensor may not detect

a vehicle ahead in the following

conditions:

— Dirt, ice, snow or other materi-

al covering the radar sensor.

— Interference by other radar

sources.

— Snow or road spray from tra-

veling vehicles.

— If the vehicle ahead is narrow

(e.g. motorcycle)

— When driving on a steep

downhill slope or roads with

sharp curves.

— When towing a trailer or other

vehicle.

. In some road or traffic conditions,

the AEB system may unexpect-

edly push the accelerator pedal

up or apply partial braking. When

acceleration is necessary, con-

tinue to depress the accelerator

pedal to override the system.

. Braking distances increase on

slippery surfaces.

. The system is designed to auto-

matically check the sensor’s func-

tionality, within certain

limitations. The system may not

detect some forms of obstruction

of the sensor area such as ice,

snow, stickers, for example. In

these cases, the system may not

be able to warn the driver prop-

erly. Be sure that you check, clean

and clear the sensor area regu-

larly.

. Excessive noise will interfere with

the warning chime sound, and

the chime may not be heard.

SSD0253

When driving on some roads, such as

winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or

roads which are under construction, the

radar sensor may detect vehicles in a

different lane, or may temporarily not

detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This

may cause the AEB system to work

inappropriately.

The detection of vehicles may also be

affected by vehicle operation (steering

maneuver or traveling position in the

lane, etc.) or vehicle condition. If this

occurs, the system may warn you by

blinking the vehicle ahead detection

indicator and sounding the chime un-

expectedly. You will have to manually

control the proper distance away from

the vehicle traveling ahead.

JVS0675X

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAIL-

ABLE

Condition A

When the radar sensor picks up interfer-

ence from another radar source, making

it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead,

the AEB system is automatically turned

off. The AEB system warning light (or-

ange)

will illuminate.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer

exist, the AEB system will resume auto-

matically.

Starting and driving 5-103

5-104 Starting and driving

Condition B

Under the following conditions, making it

impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the

AEB system is automatically turned off.

The AEB system warning light (orange)

will illuminate and the “FRONT RADAR

OBSTRUCTION” warning message will ap-

pear in the vehicle information display.

. When the sensor area of the front

bumper is covered with dirt or is

obstructed

Action to take:

If the AEB system warning light (orange)

comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe

place, place the shift lever in the P (Park)

position and turn the engine off. Clean

the radar cover below the front bumper

with a soft cloth, and restart the engine. If

the AEB system warning light continues

to illuminate, have the AEB system

checked. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

. When driving on roads with limited

road structures or buildings (for ex-

ample, long bridges, deserts, snow

fields, driving next to long walls)

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer

exist, the AEB system will resume auto-

matically.

Condition C

When the accelerator pedal actuator

detects that the internal motor tempera-

ture is high, the AEB system is automati-

cally turned off. The AEB system warning

light (orange)

will illuminate.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer

exist, the AEB system will resume auto-

matically.

Condition D

When VDC system is OFF, the AEB brake

will not operate. In this case only visible

and audible warning operates. The AEB

system warning light (orange) will illumi-

nate.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer

exist, the AEB system will resume auto-

matically.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If the AEB system malfunctions, it will be

turned off automatically, a chime will

sound, the AEB system warning light

(orange)

will illuminate.

Action to take:

If the warning light (orange)

comes on,

stop the vehicle in a safe location and

place the shift lever in the P (Park)

position. Turn the engine off and restart

the engine. If the warning light continues

to illuminate, have the AEB system

checked. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

JVS0913X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The sensor

is located below the front

bumper.

To keep the system operating properly,

be sure to observe the following:

. Always keep the sensor area of the

front bumper clean.

. Do not strike or damage the areas

around the sensor.

. Do not cover or attach stickers or

similar objects on the front bumper

near the sensor area. This could cause

failure or malfunction.

. Do not attach metallic objects near

the sensor area (brush guard, etc.).

This could cause failure or malfunc-

tion.

. Do not alter, remove or paint the front

bumper. It is recommended you con-

tact a NISSAN dealer before customiz-

ing or restoring the front bumper.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired

operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modification not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Ca-

nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interfer-

ence, and

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of

the device.

Starting and driving 5-105

5-106 Starting and driving

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the I-

FCW system could result in serious

injury or death.

. The I-FCW system helps warn the

driver before a collision but will

not avoid a collision. It is the

driver’s responsibility to stay

alert, drive safely and be in con-

trol of the vehicle at all times.

The I-FCW system can help alert the driver

when there is a sudden braking of a

second vehicle traveling in front of the

vehicle ahead in the same lane.

JVS0913X

The I-FCW system uses a radar sensor

located below the front bumper to mea-

sure the distance to a second vehicle

ahead in the same lane.

INTELLIGENT FORWARD COLLISION

WARNING (I-FCW)

JVS1104X

Vehicle ahead detection indicator (on the

vehicle information display)

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) sys-

tem warning light (on the instrument

panel)

Center multi-function control panel

Starting and driving 5-107

5-108 Starting and driving

JVS0294X

I-FCW SYSTEM OPERATION

The I-FCW system operates at speeds

above approximately 3 MPH (5 km/h).

If there is a potential risk of a forward

collision, the I-FCW system will warn the

driver by blinking the vehicle ahead

detection indicator, and sounding an

audible alert.

JVS1103X

AEB system warning light (on the instru-

ment panel)

Center multi-function control panel

TURNING THE I-FCW SYSTEM ON/

OFF

Perform the following steps to turn the I-

FCW system on or off.

1. Push the SETTING button on the

center multi-function control panel

2. Touch [Driver Assistance].

3. Touch [Emergency Assist].

4. Touch [Forward emergency braking]

to turn the system ON/OFF.

When the I-FCW system is turned off, the

AEB system warning light (orange)

illuminates.

NOTE:

The I-FCW system is integrated into the

AEB system. There is not a separate

selection in the display for the I-FCW

system. When the AEB system is turned

off, the I-FCW system is also turned off.

Starting and driving 5-109

5-110 Starting and driving

JVS0295X

Illustration A

JVS0296X

Illustration B

JVS0297X

Illustration C

JVS0298X

Illustration D

I-FCW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for the I-FCW system. Failure to

operate the vehicle in accordance

with these system limitations could

result in serious injury or death.

. The I-FCW system cannot detect

all vehicles under all conditions.

. The radar sensor does not detect

the following objects:

— Pedestrians, animals or obsta-

cles in the roadway

— Oncoming vehicles

— Crossing vehicles

. (Illustration A) The I-FCW system

does not function when a vehicle

ahead is a narrow vehicle, such as

a motorcycle.

. The radar sensor may not detect

a vehicle ahead in the following

conditions:

— Snow or heavy rain

— Dirt, ice, snow or other materi-

al covering the radar sensor

— Interference by other radar

sources

— Snow or road spray from tra-

velling vehicles.

— Driving in a tunnel

— Towing a trailer or other vehi-

cle

. (Illustration B) When the vehicle

ahead is being towed.

. (Illustration C) When the distance

to the vehicle ahead is too close,

the beam of the radar sensor is

obstructed.

. (Illustration D) When driving on a

steep downhill slope or roads

with sharp curves.

. The system is designed to auto-

matically check the sensor’s func-

tionality, within certain

limitations. The system may not

detect some forms of obstruction

of the sensor area such as ice,

snow, stickers, for example. In

these cases, the system may not

be able to warn the driver prop-

erly. Be sure that you check, clean

and clear the sensor area regu-

Starting and driving 5-111

5-112 Starting and driving

larly.

. Excessive noise will interfere with

the warning chime sound, and

the chime may not be heard.

SSD0253

When driving on some roads, such as

winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or

roads which are under construction, the

radar sensor may detect vehicles in a

different lane, or may temporarily not

detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This

may cause the I-FCW system to work

inappropriately.

The detection of vehicles may also be

affected by vehicle operation (steering

maneuver or traveling position in the

lane, etc.) or vehicle condition. If this

occurs, the system may warn you by

blinking the vehicle ahead detection

indicator and sounding the chime un-

expectedly. You will have to manually

control the proper distance away from

the vehicle traveling ahead.

JVS0675X

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAIL-

ABLE

Condition A

When the radar sensor picks up interfer-

ence from another radar source, making

it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead,

the I-FCW system is automatically turned

off. The AEB system warning light (or-

ange)

will illuminate.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer

exist, the I-FCW system will resume auto-

matically.

Condition B

Under the following conditions, making it

impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the

I-FCW system is automatically turned off.

The AEB system warning light (orange)

will illuminate and the “FRONT RADAR

OBSTRUCTION” warning message will ap-

pear in the vehicle information display.

. When the sensor area of the front

bumper is covered with dirt or is

obstructed

Action to take:

If the AEB system warning light (orange)

comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe

place, place the shift lever in the P (Park)

position and turn the engine off. Clean

the radar cover below the front bumper

with a soft cloth, and restart the engine. If

the warning light continues to illuminate,

have the I-FCW system checked. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

. When driving on roads with limited

road structures or buildings (for ex-

ample, long bridges, deserts, snow

fields, driving next to long walls)

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer

exist, the I-FCW system will resume auto-

matically.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If the I-FCW system malfunctions, it will be

turned off automatically, a chime will

sound, the AEB system warning light

(orange)

will illuminate.

Action to take:

If the warning light (orange)

illuminates,

stop the vehicle in a safe location and

place the shift lever in the P (Park)

position. Turn the engine off and restart

the engine. If the warning light continues

to illuminate, have the I-FCW system

checked. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

Starting and driving 5-113

5-114 Starting and driving

JVS0913X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The sensor

is located below the front

bumper.

To keep the system operating properly,

be sure to observe the following:

. Always keep the sensor area of the

front bumper clean.

. Do not strike or damage the areas

around the sensor.

. Do not cover or attach stickers or

similar objects on the front bumper

near the sensor area. This could cause

failure or malfunction.

. Do not attach metallic objects near

the sensor area (brush guard, etc.).

This could cause failure or malfunc-

tion.

. Do not alter, remove or paint the front

bumper. It is recommended you con-

tact a NISSAN dealer before customiz-

ing or restoring the front bumper.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired

operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modification not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Ca-

nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interfer-

ence, and

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of

the device.

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000

km), follow these recommendations

to obtain maximum engine perfor-

mance and ensure the future relia-

bility and economy of your new

vehicle.

Failure to follow these recommenda-

tions may result in shortened engine

life and reduced engine perfor-

mance.

. Avoid driving for long periods at con-

stant speed, either fast or slow. Do not

run the engine over 4,000 rpm.

. Do not accelerate at full throttle in any

gear.

. Avoid quick starts.

. Avoid hard braking as much as possi-

ble.

. Do not tow a trailer for the first 500

miles (805 km).

Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient

Driving Tips to help you achieve the most

fuel economy from your vehicle.

1. Use smooth accelerator and brake

pedal application.

Avoid rapid starts and stops.

Use smooth, gentle accelerator and

brake application whenever possi-

ble.

Maintain constant speed while

commuting and coast whenever

possible.

2. Maintain constant speed.

Look ahead to try and anticipate

and minimize stops.

Synchronizing your speed with traf-

fic lights allows you to reduce your

number of stops.

Maintaining a steady speed can

minimize red light stops and im-

prove fuel efficiency.

3. Use air conditioning (A/C) at higher

vehicle speeds.

Below 40 MPH (64 km/h), it is more

efficient to open windows to cool

the vehicle due to reduced engine

load.

Above 40 MPH (64 km/h), it is more

efficient to use A/C to cool the

vehicle due to increased aerody-

namic drag.

Recirculating the cool air in the

cabin when the A/C is on reduces

cooling load.

4. Drive at economical speeds and dis-

tances.

Observing the speed limit and not

exceeding 60 MPH (97 km/h)

(where legally allowed) can improve

fuel efficiency due to reduced aero-

dynamic drag.

Maintaining a safe following dis-

tance behind other vehicles re-

duces unnecessary braking.

Safely monitoring traffic to antici-

pate changes in speed permits

reduced braking and smooth accel-

eration changes.

Select a gear range suitable to road

conditions.

5. Use cruise control.

Using cruise control during highway

driving helps maintain a steady

speed.

Cruise control is particularly effec-

tive in providing fuel savings when

driving on flat terrains.

6. Plan for the shortest route.

Utilize a map or navigation system

to determine the best route to save

time.

Starting and driving 5-115

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS

5-116 Starting and driving

7. Avoid idling.

Shutting off your engine when safe

for stops exceeding 30-60 seconds

saves fuel and reduces emissions.

8. Buy an automated pass for toll roads.

Automated passes permit drivers to

use special lanes to maintain cruis-

ing speed through the toll and

avoid stopping and starting.

9. Winter warm up.

Limit idling time to minimize impact

to fuel economy.

Vehicles typically need no more

than 30 seconds of idling at start-

up to effectively circulate the en-

gine oil before driving.

Your vehicle will reach its ideal

operating temperature more

quickly while driving versus idling.

10. Keeping your vehicle cool.

Park your vehicle in a covered

parking area or in the shade when-

ever possible.

When entering a hot vehicle, open-

ing the windows will help to reduce

the inside temperature faster, re-

sulting in reduced demand on your

A/C system.

. Keep your engine tuned up.

. Follow the recommended scheduled

maintenance.

. Keep the tires inflated to the correct

pressure. Low tire pressure increases

tire wear and lowers fuel economy.

. Keep the wheels in correct alignment.

Improper alignment increases tire

wear and lowers fuel economy.

. Use the recommended viscosity en-

gine oil. (See “Engine oil and oil filter

recommendation” (P.10-5).)

WARNING

. Do not attempt to raise two

wheels off the ground and shift

the transmission to any drive or

reverse position with the engine

running. Doing so may result in

drivetrain damage or unexpected

vehicle movement which could

result in serious vehicle damage

or personal injury.

. Do not attempt to test a 4WD

equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel

dynamometer or similar equip-

ment even if the other two

wheels are raised off the ground.

Make sure you inform test facility

personnel that your vehicle is

equipped with 4WD before it is

placed on a dynamometer. Using

the wrong test equipment may

result in drivetrain damage or

unexpected vehicle movement

which could result in serious ve-

hicle damage or personal injury.

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

NISSAN ALL-MODE 4WD® (if so equipped)

CAUTION

. Do not drive the vehicle in the 4HI

or 4LO position on dry hard sur-

face roads. Driving on dry, hard

surfaces in 4HI or 4LO may cause

unnecessary noise, tire wear and

increased fuel consumption.

If the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)

warning light turns on when driv-

ing on dry hard surface roads:

— in the 4HI position, shift the

4WD shift switch to AUTO.

— in the 4LO position, stop the

vehicle and shift the transmis-

sion lever to the N (Neutral)

position with the brake pedal

depressed and shift the 4WD

shift switch to AUTO.

If the 4WD warning light is still

on after the above operation,

have your vehicle checked as

soon as possible. It is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

. The transfer case may be da-

maged if you continue driving

with the 4WD warning light blink-

ing.

See “On-pavement and off-road driving

precautions” (P.5-9) for other precautions

for offroad driving.

NISSAN ALL-MODE 4WD® SYSTEM

The all mode 4WD system provides 3

positions (AUTO, 4HI and 4LO), so you

can select the desired drive mode accord-

ing to the driving conditions.

4WD shift procedure:

Starting and driving 5-117

5-118 Starting and driving

SSD1100

*1: The 4LO and 4HI indicator may flash alternately. Stop the vehicle and be sure to turn the 4WD shift switch after the transmission

shift lever has been shifted to the N (Neutral) position. If the indicator keeps flashing after the 4WD shift procedure, drive slowly

without abrupt maneuvers for a while. Then the indicator will illuminate or turn off.

· Avoid making a turn or abrupt starts while shifting to the 4LO position. Otherwise the gears may grind, damaging the drive system.

*2: While changing in and out of the 4LO position, the engine must be running. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and the 4LO

indicator will not be on or flashing.

*3: Make sure that the 4LO indicator turns on when shifting the 4WD shift switch to the 4L position. The Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) off indicator light will also turn on when 4L is selected. (See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” (P.5-133).)

Starting and driving 5-119

5-120 Starting and driving

The 4WD shift switch is used to select the

4WD mode depending on the driving

conditions. There are 3 types of drive

modes available, AUTO, 4HI and 4LO.

The 4WD shift switch electronically con-

trols the transfer case operation. Rotate

the switch to move between each mode,

AUTO, 4H and 4L.

You must depress the 4WD shift switch

to select 4L, and the vehicle MUST be

stationary and the shift lever in the N

(Neutral) position when changing into

or out of 4L.

WARNING

. When parking, apply the parking

brake before stopping the engine

and make sure that the 4WD shift

indicator is on and the ATP warn-

ing light turns off. Otherwise, the

vehicle could unexpectedly move

even if the automatic transmis-

sion is in the P (Park) position.

. The 4LO and 4HI indicators must

stop blinking and the 4LO or 4HI

indicator must remain illumi-

nated or turn off before shifting

the transmission into gear. If the

shift lever is shifted from the N

(Neutral) position to any other

gear while the 4LO and 4HI in-

dicators are blinking alternately,

the vehicle may move unexpect-

edly.

CAUTION

. Never shift the 4WD shift switch

between 4L and 4H while driving.

. The 4HI position provides greater

traction. Avoid excessive speed,

as it will cause increased fuel

consumption and higher oil tem-

peratures, and could damage dri-

vetrain component. Speeds over

62 MPH (100 km/h) in 4HI is not

recommended.

. The 4LO position provides max-

imum traction. Avoid raising ve-

hicle speed excessively, as the

maximum speed is approxi-

mately 31 MPH (50 km/h).

. When driving straight, shift the

4WD shift switch to the AUTO or

4H position. Do not move the 4WD

shift switch when making a turn

or reversing.

. Do not shift the 4WD shift switch

(between AUTO and 4H) while

driving on steep downhill grades.

Use the engine brake and low

automatic transmission gears

for engine braking.

. Do not operate the 4WD shift

switch (between AUTO and 4H)

with the rear wheels spinning.

. Do not drive on dry hard surface

roads in the 4HI or 4LO position.

Driving on dry hard surfaces in

4HI or 4LO may cause unneces-

sary noise and tire wear. NISSAN

recommends driving in the AUTO

position under these conditions.

. The 4WD transfer case may not

be shifted between 4HI and 4LO

at low ambient temperatures and

the 4LO and 4HI indicators may

blink even when the 4WD shift

switch is shifted. After driving for

a while you can change the 4WD

shift switch between 4H and 4L.

When driving on rough roads,

. Drive carefully according to the road

surface conditions.

When the vehicle is stuck,

. Place stones or wooden blocks under

the tires to free the vehicle.

. Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4L.

. If it is difficult to free the vehicle,

repeat forward and backward move-

ment to increase the movement.

. If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, tire

chains may be effective.

CAUTION

. Do not spin the tires excessively.

Tires will sink deep into the mud,

making it difficult to free the

vehicle.

. Avoid shifting gears with the en-

gine running at high speeds as

this may cause malfunction.

SSD1048

4WD SHIFT SWITCH

. Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the

AUTO, 4H or 4L position, depending on

driving conditions.

. With the switch set to the AUTO

position, distribution of torque to the

front and rear wheels changes auto-

matically, depending on road condi-

tions encountered [ratio; 0 : 100 (2WD)

? 50 : 50 (4WD)]. This results in

improved driving stability.

. If the 4WD shift switch is operated

while making a turn, accelerating or

decelerating or if the ignition switch

is placed in the OFF position while in

the AUTO, 4H or 4L, you may feel a

jolt. This is not abnormal.

. When the vehicle is stopped after

making a turn, you may feel a slight

jolt after the shift lever is shifted to N

(Neutral) or P (Park) position. This

occurs because the transfer clutch is

released and not because of a mal-

function.

CAUTION

. When driving straight, shift the

4WD shift switch to the AUTO or

4H position. Do not move the 4WD

shift switch when making a turn

or reversing.

. Do not shift the 4WD shift switch

while driving on steep downhill

grades. Use the engine brake and

low automatic transmission

gears for engine braking.

. Do not operate the 4WD shift

switch with the rear wheels spin-

ning.

. Before placing the 4WD shift

switch in the 4H position from

AUTO, ensure the vehicle speed is

less than 62 MPH (100 km/h).

Failure to do so can damage the

4WD system.

Starting and driving 5-121

5-122 Starting and driving

. Never shift the 4WD shift switch

between 4L and 4H while driving.

. Engine idling speed is high while

warming up the engine. Be espe-

cially careful when starting or

driving on slippery surfaces with

the 4WD shift switch in AUTO.

SSD1058

4WD shift indicator

4WD SHIFT INDICATOR

The 4WD shift indicator is displayed in the

vehicle information display.

The indicator should turn off within 1

second after placing the ignition switch

in the ON position.

While the engine is running, the 4WD shift

indicator will illuminate the position se-

lected by the 4WD shift switch. (See the

4WD shift procedure list shown in the

“NISSAN all-mode 4WD® system” (P.5-117).)

. The 4WD shift indicator may blink

while shifting from one drive mode

to the other. When the shifting is

completed, the 4WD shift indicator

will come on. If the indicator does

not come on immediately, make

sure the area around the vehicle is

safe, and drive the vehicle straight,

accelerate or decelerate or move the

vehicle in reverse, then shift the 4WD

shift switch.

. If the 4WD warning light comes on, the

4WD shift indicator turns off.

4WD WARNING LIGHT

Warning light

Comes on or

blinks when:

Illuminates

There is a mal-

function in the

4WD system

Blinks ra-

pidly

The transfer

case oil tem-

perature is ab-

normally high

Blinks slowly

The difference

in wheel rota-

tion is large

The 4WD warning light is located in the

meter.

The 4WD warning light comes on when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position. It turns off soon after the engine

is started.

If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD

system when the ignition switch is placed

in the ON position, the 4WD warning light

will either remain illuminated or blink.

If the 4WD warning light comes on, the

4WD shift indicator turns off.

High-temperature transfer case oil makes

the 4WD warning light blink rapidly (about

twice per second). If the warning light

blinks rapidly during operation, stop the

vehicle in a safe place immediately. Then

if the light turns off after a while, you can

continue driving.

A large difference between the diameters

of front and rear wheels will make the

4WD warning light blink slowly (about

once per two seconds). Change the 4WD

shift switch to AUTO and do not drive fast.

CAUTION

. If the 4WD warning light comes

on or blinks slowly during opera-

tion or rapidly after stopping the

vehicle for a while, have your

vehicle checked as soon as pos-

sible. It is recommended you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

. Shifting between 4HI and 4LO is

not recommended when the 4WD

warning light turns on.

. When the 4WD warning light

comes on, the 2WD mode may

be engaged even if the 4WD shift

switch is in AUTO or 4H. Be

especially careful when driving. If

corresponding parts are malfunc-

tioning, the 4WD mode will not be

engaged even if the 4WD shift

switch is shifted.

. Do not drive the vehicle in the 4HI

or 4LO position on dry hard sur-

face roads. Driving on dry, hard

surfaces in 4HI or 4LO may cause

unnecessary noise, tire wear and

increased fuel consumption.

If the 4WD warning light turns on

when driving on dry hard surface

roads:

— in the AUTO or 4HI position,

shift the 4WD shift switch to

AUTO.

— in the 4LO position, stop the

vehicle and shift the transmis-

sion shift lever to the N (Neu-

tral) position and shift the

4WD shift switch to AUTO.

. If the 4WD warning light is still on

after the above operation, have

your vehicle checked as soon as

possible. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

. The transfer case may be da-

maged if you continue driving

with the warning light blinking.

Starting and driving 5-123

5-124 Starting and driving

WARNING

. Never rely solely on the hill start

assist system to prevent the ve-

hicle from moving backward on a

hill. Always drive carefully and

attentively. Depress the brake

pedal when the vehicle is stopped

on a steep hill. Be especially care-

ful when stopped on a hill on

frozen or muddy roads. Failure

to prevent the vehicle from rolling

backwards may result in a loss of

control of the vehicle and possi-

ble serious injury or death.

. The hill start assist system is not

designed to hold the vehicle at a

standstill on a hill. Depress the

brake pedal when the vehicle is

stopped on a steep hill. Failure to

do so may cause the vehicle to

roll backwards and may result in

a collision or serious personal

injury.

. The hill start assist system may

not prevent the vehicle from roll-

ing backwards on a hill under all

load or road conditions. Always

be prepared to depress the brake

pedal to prevent the vehicle from

rolling backwards. Failure to do

so may result in a collision or

serious personal injury.

The hill start assist system automatically

keeps the brakes applied to help prevent

the vehicle from rolling backwards in the

time it takes the driver to release the

brake pedal and apply the accelerator

when the vehicle is stopped on a hill.

The hill start assist system will operate

automatically under the following condi-

tions:

. The transmission is shifted to a for-

ward or reverse gear.

. The vehicle is stopped completely on a

hill by applying the brake.

The maximum holding time is 2 seconds.

After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to

roll back and the hill start assist system

will stop operating completely.

The hill start assist system will not

operate when the transmission is shifted

to the N (Neutral) or P (Park) position or

on a flat and level road.

When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

warning light illuminates in the meter, the

hill start assist system will not operate.

(See “Warning lights, indicator lights and

audible reminders” (P.2-10).)

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM

SD1006MA

WARNING

. Do not stop or park the vehicle

over flammable materials such as

dry grass, waste paper or rags.

They may ignite and cause a fire.

. Never leave the engine running

while the vehicle is unattended.

. Do not leave children unattended

inside the vehicle. They could

unknowingly activate switches

or controls. Unattended children

could become involved in serious

accidents.

. To help avoid risk of injury or

death through unintended opera-

tion of the vehicle and/or its

systems, do not leave children,

people who require the assis-

tance of others or pets unat-

tended in your vehicle.

Additionally, the temperature in-

side a closed vehicle on a warm

day can quickly become high

enough to cause a significant risk

of injury or death to people and

pets.

. Safe parking procedures require

that both the parking brake be

applied and the transmission be

placed in the P (Park) position.

Failure to do so could cause the

vehicle to move unexpectedly or

roll away and result in an acci-

dent.

. Make sure the automatic trans-

mission shift lever has been

pushed as far forward as it can

go and cannot be moved without

depressing the foot brake pedal.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from roll-

ing into the street when parked on a

sloping drive way, it is a good practice

to turn the wheels as illustrated.

HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB:

Turn the wheels into the curb and

move the vehicle forward until the

curb side wheel gently touches the

curb.

HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB:

Turn the wheels away from the curb

and move the vehicle back until the

curb side wheel gently touches the

curb.

HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO

CURB:

Starting and driving 5-125

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

5-126 Starting and driving

Turn the wheels toward the side of

the road so the vehicle will move away

from the center of the road if it moves.

4. Push the ignition switch to the OFF

position.

SIC4474

The TOW MODE should be used when

pulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavy

load. Driving the vehicle in the TOW MODE

with no trailer/load or light trailer/light

load will not cause any damage. However,

fuel economy may be reduced, and the

transmission/engine driving characteris-

tics may feel unusual.

Push the TOW MODE switch to activate

TOW MODE. The indicator light on the

TOW MODE switch illuminates when the

TOW MODE is selected. Push the TOW

MODE switch again to turn the TOW

MODE OFF.

TOW MODE is automatically canceled

when the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF position.

TOW MODE

SIC4454

For driving or starting the vehicle on

snowy roads or slippery areas, turn the

SNOW mode on.

To turn the SNOW mode on, push the

SNOW mode switch. The SNOW mode

indicator light on the meter panel will

illuminate. When the SNOW mode is

activated, engine output is controlled to

avoid wheel spin.

To turn the SNOW mode off, push the

switch and the indicator on the meter

panel will turn off. Turn the SNOW mode

off for normal driving and fuel economy.

SSD0622

WARNING

. The sonar system is a conveni-

ence but it is not a substitute for

proper parking. Always look

around and check that it is safe

to do so before parking. Always

move slowly.

. Read and understand the limita-

tions of the sonar system as

contained in this section. Incle-

ment weather may affect the

function of the sonar system; this

may include reduced perfor-

mance or a false activation.

. This system is not designed to

prevent contact with small or

moving objects.

. The system is designed as an aid

to the driver in detecting large

stationary objects to help avoid

damaging the vehicle. The sys-

tem will not detect small objects

below the bumper, and may not

detect objects that are too close

to the bumper or on the ground.

. If your vehicle sustains damage

to the bumper fascia, leaving it

misaligned or bent, the sensing

zone may be altered causing in-

Starting and driving 5-127

SNOW MODE SONAR SYSTEM (if so equipped)

5-128 Starting and driving

accurate measurement of obsta-

cles or false alarms.

CAUTION

Keep the interior of the vehicle as

quiet as possible to hear the tone

clearly.

The sonar system sounds a tone to warn

the driver of obstacles near the bumper.

When the “Interrupt Display” is turned on

in the Sonar settings, the sonar indicator

will also appear in the center display. (See

“Sonar indicator” (P.5-129).) The system

detects front obstacles when the shift

lever is in the D (Drive) position or N

(Neutral) position. The system detects

both front and rear obstacles when the

shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.

The system may not detect objects at

speeds above 6 MPH (10 km/h) and may

not detect certain angular or moving

objects.

The sonar system detects obstacles up to

3.9 ft (1.2 m) from the bumper with a

decreased coverage area at the outer

corners of the bumper. Refer to the

illustration for approximate zone cover-

age areas. As you move closer to the

obstacle, the rate of the tone increases.

When the obstacle is less than 11.8 in (30

cm) away, the tone will sound continu-

ously.

Keep the corner/center sensors (located

on the bumper fascia) free from snow, ice

and large accumulations of dirt (do not

clean the sensors with sharp objects). If

the sensors are covered, it will affect the

accuracy of the sonar system.

The sensitivity level of the corner/center

sensors can be adjusted (higher or lower)

in the Sonar settings on the center dis-

play. (See “Sonar settings” (P.5-128).)

The intermittent tone will stop in 3

seconds when an obstacle is detected

by only the corner sensor and the dis-

tance does not change.

JVS1043X

SONAR SETTINGS

To set up the sonar function to your

preferred settings, push the SETTING

button

, select the “Camera/Sonar” key

and then select the “Sonar” key on the

center display.

Sonar:

When this item is turned on, the front and

rear sonar is activated. When this item is

turned off (indicator turns off), the front

and rear sonar is deactivated.

FR sensor only:

When this item is turned on, only the front

sonar is activated.

Interrupt Display:

When this item is turned on, the sonar

display will interrupt the current view to

indicate that the obstacles are around

the vehicle.

Sonar Sensitivity:

Adjust the sensitivity level of the sonar.

Sonar Volume:

Adjust the tone volume of the sonar.

JVS1085X

Sonar display

Corner sensor indicator

Center sensor indicator

RearView Monitor display

SONAR INDICATOR

With the “Interrupt Display” turned on in

the Sonar settings, when the corner/

center sensors detect obstacles near the

bumper, a tone will sound and the sonar

indicator will appear in the center display

. When the RearView Monitor is dis-

played, the sonar indicator will appear in

the upper corner of the display

The sonar indicators

and

indicate the

position of the object and the distance to

the object with its color and rate of

blinking.

When an object is detected, the indicator

(green) appears and blinks (the tone

sounds intermittently). When the vehicle

moves closer to the object, the color of

the indicator turns yellow and the rate of

blinking increases (the rate of the tone

increases). When the bumper is very close

to the object, less than 11.8 in (30 cm)

away, the indicator stops blinking and

turns red (the tone sounds continuously).

When the RearView Monitor is dis-

played, the colors of the sonar indicator

and the distance guide lines in the rear

view indicate different distances to the

object.

When the

is touched, the sonar will

be turned off temporarily.

The sonar indicator can be turned off in

Starting and driving 5-129

5-130 Starting and driving

the Sonar settings on the center display.

(See “Sonar settings” (P.5-128).) When the

sonar indicator is off, only a tone sounds

when the sonar detect obstacles.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is

turned off while driving, the power

assist for the steering will not work.

Steering will be harder to operate.

The power assisted steering uses a hy-

draulic pump, driven by the engine, to

assist steering.

If the engine stops or the drive belt

breaks, you will still have control of the

vehicle. However, much greater steering

effort is needed, especially in sharp turns

and at low speeds.

BRAKING PRECAUTIONS

The brake system has two separate

hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunc-

tions, you will still have braking ability at

two wheels.

You may feel a small click and hear a

sound when the brake pedal is fully

depressed slowly. This is not a malfunc-

tion and indicates that the brake assist

mechanism is operating properly.

Hydraulically-assisted brakes

The hydraulically-assisted brake system is

designed to use a hydraulic pump driven

electrically, to assist braking. If the engine

stops, you can stop the vehicle by de-

pressing the foot brake pedal. However,

greater foot pressure on the foot brake

pedal will be required to stop the vehicle.

The stopping distance will be longer.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven

through water, the brakes may get wet.

As a result, your braking distance will be

longer and the vehicle may pull to one

side during braking.

To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe

speed while lightly tapping the brake

pedal to heat-up the brakes. Do this until

the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving

the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM

function correctly.

PARKING BRAKE BREAK-IN

Break in the parking brake shoes when-

ever the stopping effect of the parking

brake is weakened or whenever the

parking brake shoes and/or drums/ro-

tors are replaced, in order to assure the

best braking performance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle

service manual. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake

pedal while driving. This will cause over-

heating of the brakes, wearing out the

brake and pads faster and reduce gas

mileage.

To help save the brakes and to prevent

the brakes from overheating, reduce

speed and downshift to a lower gear

before going down a slope or long grade.

Overheated brakes may reduce braking

performance and could result in loss of

vehicle control.

WARNING

. While driving on a slippery sur-

face, be careful when braking,

accelerating or downshifting.

Abrupt braking or accelerating

could cause the wheels to skid

and result in an accident.

. If the engine is not running or is

turned off while driving, the

power assist for the brakes will

not work. Braking will be harder.

BRAKE ASSIST

When the force applied to the brake pedal

exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is

activated generating greater braking

force than a conventional brake booster

even with light pedal force.

WARNING

The Brake Assist is only an aid to

assist braking operation and is not a

collision warning or avoidance de-

vice. It is the driver’s responsibility to

stay alert, drive safely and be in

control of the vehicle at all times.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)

WARNING

. The Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) is a sophisticated device,

but it cannot prevent accidents

resulting from careless or dan-

gerous driving techniques. It can

help maintain vehicle control dur-

ing braking on slippery surfaces.

Remember that stopping dis-

tances on slippery surfaces will

be longer than on normal sur-

Starting and driving 5-131

BRAKE ASSIST

5-132 Starting and driving

faces even with ABS. Stopping

distances may also be longer on

rough, gravel or snow covered

roads, or if you are using tire

chains. Always maintain a safe

distance from the vehicle in front

of you. Ultimately, the driver is

responsible for safety.

. Tire type and condition may also

affect braking effectiveness.

— When replacing tires, install

the specified size of tires on

all four wheels.

— When installing a spare tire,

make sure that it is the proper

size and type as specified on

the Tire and Loading Informa-

tion label. See “Tire and load-

ing information label” (P.10-

12).

— For detailed information, see

“Wheels and tires” (P.8-30).

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) con-

trols the brakes so the wheels do not lock

during hard braking or when braking on

slippery surfaces. The system detects the

rotation speed at each wheel and varies

the brake fluid pressure to prevent each

wheel from locking and sliding. By pre-

venting each wheel from locking, the

system helps the driver maintain steering

control and helps to minimize swerving

and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

Depress the brake pedal with firm steady

pressure, but do not pump the brakes.

The ABS will operate to prevent the

wheels from locking up. Steer the vehicle

to avoid obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing

so may result in increased stopping

distances.

Self-test feature

The ABS includes electronic sensors, elec-

tric pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a

computer. The computer has a built-in

diagnostic feature that tests the system

each time you start the engine and move

the vehicle at a low speed in forward or

reverse. When the self-test occurs, you

may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a

pulsation in the brake pedal. This is

normal and does not indicate a malfunc-

tion. If the computer senses a malfunc-

tion, it switches the ABS off and

illuminates the ABS warning light on the

instrument panel. The brake system then

operates normally, but without anti-lock

assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during

the self-test or while driving, have the

vehicle checked. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Normal operation

The ABS operates at speeds above 3 to 6

MPH (5 to 10 km/h). The speed varies

according to road conditions.

When the ABS senses that one or more

wheels are close to locking up, the

actuator rapidly applies and releases

hydraulic pressure. This action is similar

to pumping the brakes very quickly. You

may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal

and hear a noise from under the hood or

feel a vibration from the actuator when it

is operating. This is normal and indicates

that the ABS is operating properly. How-

ever, the pulsation may indicate that road

conditions are hazardous and extra care

is required while driving.

The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) sys-

tem uses various sensors to monitor

driver inputs and vehicle motion. Under

certain driving conditions, the VDC sys-

tem helps to perform the following func-

tions.

. Controls brake pressure to reduce

wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel

so power is transferred to a non

slipping drive wheel on the same axle.

. Controls brake pressure and engine

output to reduce drive wheel slip

based on vehicle speed (traction con-

trol function).

. Controls brake pressure at individual

wheels and engine output to help the

driver maintain control of the vehicle

in the following conditions:

— understeer (vehicle tends to not

follow the steered path despite

increased steering input)

— oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due

to certain road or driving condi-

tions).

The VDC system can help the driver to

maintain control of the vehicle, but it

cannot prevent loss of vehicle control in

all driving situations.

When the VDC system operates, the VDC

warning light

in the instrument panel

flashes so note the following:

. The road may be slippery or the

system may determine some action

is required to help keep the vehicle on

the steered path.

. You may feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal and hear a noise or vibration

from under the hood. This is normal

and indicates that the VDC system is

working properly.

. Adjust your speed and driving to the

road conditions.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the

VDC warning light

illuminates in the

instrument panel. The VDC system auto-

matically turns off.

The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the

VDC system. The VDC off indicator

illuminates to indicate the VDC system is

off. When the VDC switch is used to turn

off the system, the VDC system still

operates to prevent one drive wheel from

slipping by transferring power to a non

slipping drive wheel. The VDC warning

light

flashes if this occurs. All other

VDC functions are off, and the VDC

warning light

will not flash. The VDC

system is automatically reset to on when

the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position then back to the ON position.

When the 4L position is selected with the

4WD shift switch, the VDC system is

disabled and the VDC off indicator light

illuminates (for 4WD models).

See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warn-

ing light” (P.2-17) and “Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) off indicator light” (P.2-20).

The computer has a built-in diagnostic

feature that tests the system each time

you start the engine and move the vehicle

forward or in reverse at a slow speed.

When the self-test occurs, you may hear a

“clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the

brake pedal. This is normal and is not an

indication of a malfunction.

WARNING

. The VDC system is designed to

help improve driving stability but

does not prevent accidents due

to abrupt steering operation at

high speeds or by careless or

dangerous driving techniques.

Reduce vehicle speed and be

especially careful when driving

and cornering on slippery sur-

faces and always drive carefully.

. Do not modify the vehicle’s sus-

pension. If suspension parts such

as shock absorbers, struts,

springs, stabilizer bars, bushings

and wheels are not NISSAN re-

commended for your vehicle or

Starting and driving 5-133

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM

5-134 Starting and driving

are extremely deteriorated, the

VDC system may not operate

properly. This could adversely

affect vehicle handling perfor-

mance, and the VDC warning light

may illuminate.

. If brake related parts such as

brake pads, rotors and calipers

are not NISSAN recommended or

are extremely deteriorated, the

VDC system may not operate

properly and the VDC warning

light

may illuminate.

. If engine control related parts are

not NISSAN recommended or are

extremely deteriorated, the VDC

warning light

may illuminate.

. When driving on extremely in-

clined surfaces such as higher

banked corners, the VDC system

may not operate properly and the

VDC warning light

may illumi-

nate. Do not drive on these types

of roads.

. When driving on an unstable sur-

face such as a turntable, ferry,

elevator or ramp, the VDC warn-

ing light

may illuminate. This

is not a malfunction. Restart the

engine after driving onto a stable

surface.

. If wheels or tires other than the

NISSAN recommended ones are

used, the VDC system may not

operate properly and the VDC

warning light

may illuminate.

. The VDC system is not a substi-

tute for winter tires or tire chains

on a snow covered road.

SIC4455

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

OFF SWITCH

The vehicle should be driven with the

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ON

for most driving conditions.

When the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,

the VDC system reduces the engine out-

put to reduce wheel spin. The engine

speed will be reduced even if the accel-

erator is depressed to the floor. If max-

imum engine power is needed to free a

stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system, push the VDC OFF switch.

The VDC off indicator light

will

illuminate.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart

the engine to turn ON the system.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing,

apply deicer through the key hole. If the

lock becomes frozen, heat the key before

inserting it into the key hole or use the

Intelligent Key system.

ANTIFREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that

the outside temperature will drop below

32°F (0°C), check antifreeze to assure

proper winter protection. For additional

information, see “Engine cooling system”

(P.8-4).

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during

extremely cold weather conditions, the

battery fluid may freeze and damage the

battery. To maintain maximum efficiency,

the battery should be checked regularly.

For additional information, see “Battery”

(P.8-11).

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without

antifreeze, drain the cooling system, in-

cluding the engine block. Refill before

operating the vehicle. For details, see

“Engine cooling system” (P.8-4).

TIRE EQUIPMENT

SUMMER tires have a tread designed to

provide superior performance on dry

pavement. However, the performance of

these tires will be substantially reduced in

snowy and icy conditions. If you operate

your vehicle on snowy or icy roads,

NISSAN recommends the use of MUD &

SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all four

wheels. It is recommended you consult a

NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, speed

rating and availability information.

For additional traction on icy roads,

studded tires may be used. However,

some U.S. states and Canadian provinces

prohibit their use. Check local, state and

provincial laws before installing studded

tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of

studded snow tires, on wet or dry

surfaces, may be poorer than that of

non-studded snow tires.

Tire chains may be used. For details, see

“Tire chains” (P.8-37).

Starting and driving 5-135

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

5-136 Starting and driving

For four-wheel drive

If you install snow tires, they must also be

the same size, brand, construction and

tread pattern on all four wheels.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following

items be carried in the vehicle during

winter:

. A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to

remove ice and snow from the win-

dows and wiper blades.

. A sturdy, flat board to be placed under

the jack to give it firm support.

. A shovel to dig the vehicle out of

snowdrifts.

. Extra window washer fluid to refill the

reservoir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

. Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing

rain), very cold snow or ice can be

slick and very hard to drive on.

The vehicle will have much less

traction or “grip” under these

conditions. Try to avoid driving

on wet ice until the road is salted

or sanded.

. Whatever the condition, drive

with caution. Accelerate and slow

down with care. If accelerating or

downshifting too fast, the drive

wheels will lose even more trac-

tion.

. Allow more stopping distance

under these conditions. Braking

should be started sooner than on

dry pavement.

. Allow greater following distances

on slippery roads.

. Watch for slippery spots (glare

ice). These may appear on an

otherwise clear road in shaded

areas. If a patch of ice is seen

ahead, brake before reaching it.

Try not to brake while on the ice,

and avoid any sudden steering

maneuvers.

. Do not use the cruise control on

slippery roads.

. Snow can trap dangerous ex-

haust gases under your vehicle.

Keep snow clear of the exhaust

pipe and from around your vehi-

cle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so

equipped)

Engine block heaters are used to assist in

cold temperature starting.

The engine block heater should be used

when the outside temperature is 20°F

(−7°C) or lower.

To use the engine block heater

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the en-

gine block heater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into

a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged exten-

sion cord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground

Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected,

grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be

plugged in for at least 2 - 4 hours,

depending on outside temperatures,

to properly warm the engine coolant.

Use an appropriate timer to turn the

engine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and

properly store the cord to keep it

away from moving parts.

WARNING

. Do not use your engine block

heater with an ungrounded elec-

trical system or a 2-pronged

adapter. You can be seriously

injured by an electrical shock if

you use an ungrounded connec-

tion.

. Disconnect and properly store the

engine block heater cord before

starting the engine. Damage to

the cord could result in an elec-

trical shock and can cause ser-

ious injury.

. Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-

pronged extension cord rated

for at least 10A. Plug the exten-

sion cord into a Ground Fault

Interrupt (GFI) protected,

grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure

to use the proper extension cord

or a grounded outlet can result in

a fire or electrical shock and

cause serious personal injury.

Starting and driving 5-137

5-138 Starting and driving

MEMO

6 In case of emergency
Hazard warning flasher switch ......................................... 6-2
Roadside assistance program ........................................... 6-2
Emergency engine shut off .................................................. 6-3
Flat tire .................................................................................................. 6-3
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .......... 6-3
Changing a flat tire .............................................................. 6-4
Jump starting ............................................................................... 6-12
Push starting ................................................................................. 6-14
If your vehicle overheats .................................................... 6-14
Towing your vehicle ............................................................... 6-16
Towing recommended by NISSAN ..................... 6-17
Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) ...... 6-19
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) manual shifting
(4WD models) ............................................................................... 6-20
When 4WD warning light illuminates ............... 6-20
Operating procedure ..................................................... 6-21

6-2 In case of emergency

SIC2574

Push the switch on to warn other drivers

when you must stop or park under

emergency conditions. All turn signal

lights will flash.

WARNING

. If stopping for an emergency, be

sure to move the vehicle well off

the road.

. Do not use the hazard warning

flashers while moving on the

highway unless unusual circum-

stances force you to drive so

slowly that your vehicle might

become a hazard to other traffic.

. Turn signals do not work when

the hazard warning flasher lights

are on.

The flasher can be actuated with the

ignition switch in any position.

When an impact that could activate the

supplemental air bags is detected, the

hazard warning flasher lights blink auto-

matically. If the hazard warning flasher

switch is pushed twice, the hazard warn-

ing flashers will turn off.

WARNING

Do not turn the hazard warning

flasher switch to off until you can

make sure that it is safe to do so.

Also, the hazard flasher warning may

not blink automatically depending

on the force of impact.

Some state laws may prohibit the use of

the hazard warning flasher switch while

driving.

In the event of a roadside emergency,

Roadside Assistance Service is available

to you. Please refer to your Warranty

Information Booklet (U.S.) or Warranty &

Roadside Assistance Information Booklet

(Canada) for details.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE PROGRAM

To shut off the engine in an emergency

situation while driving, perform the fol-

lowing procedure:

. Rapidly push the push-button ignition

switch 3 consecutive times in less

than 1.5 seconds, or

. Push and hold the push-button igni-

tion switch for more than 2 seconds.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS-

TEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It

monitors tire pressure of all tires except

the spare. When the low tire pressure

warning light is lit and the CHECK TIRE

PRESSURE warning appears in the vehicle

information display, one or more of your

tires is significantly under-inflated. If the

vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn

you of it by the low tire pressure warning

light. This system will activate only when

the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16

MPH (25 km/h). For more details, see “Low

tire pressure warning light” (P.2-15) and

“Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”

(P.5-5).

WARNING

. If the low tire pressure warning

light illuminates or Low Pressure

information is displayed on the

monitor screen while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneu-

vers or abrupt braking, reduce

vehicle speed, pull off the road

to a safe location and stop the

vehicle as soon as possible. Driv-

ing with under-inflated tires may

permanently damage the tires

and increase the likelihood of tire

failure. Serious vehicle damage

could occur and may lead to an

accident and could result in ser-

ious personal injury. Check the

tire pressure for all four tires.

Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label to turn the low

tire pressure warning light OFF. If

the light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire

pressure, a tire may be flat. If

you have a flat tire, replace it with

a spare tire as soon as possible.

. Since the spare tire is not

equipped with the TPMS, when a

spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, the TPMS will not

function and the low tire pressure

warning light will flash for ap-

proximately 1 minute. The light

will remain on after 1 minute.

Have your tires replaced and/or

TPMS system reset as soon as

possible. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for these

services.

. Replacing tires with those not

originally specified by NISSAN

In case of emergency 6-3

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF FLAT TIRE

6-4 In case of emergency

could affect the proper operation

of the TPMS.

. Do not inject any tire liquid or

aerosol tire sealant into the tires,

as this may cause a malfunction

of the tire pressure sensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instruc-

tions below.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road

and away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the

parking brake. Move the shift lever to

the P (Park) position.

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic,

and to signal professional road assis-

tance personnel that you need assis-

tance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the

vehicle and stand in a safe place, away

from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

. Make sure the parking brake is

securely applied and the auto-

matic transmission is in the P

(Park) position.

. Never change tires when the ve-

hicle is on a slope, ice or slippery

areas. This is hazardous.

. Never change tires if oncoming

traffic is close to your vehicle.

Wait for professional road assis-

tance.

MCE0001A

Blocking wheels

Place suitable blocks at both the front

and back of the wheel diagonally oppo-

site the flat tire to prevent the vehicle

from moving when it is jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the

vehicle may move and result in

personal injury.

JVE0219X

Getting the spare tire and tools

1. Open the liftgate.

2. Raise the cargo floor board using the

handle

JVE0422X

WARNING

When removing jacking tools, be

sure the rubber sound suppressor

, used to control jack stand from

rattling against metal, is not at-

tached to the jacking tool. If rubber

sound suppressor remains on jack

when vehicle is being jacked up, the

vehicle will be unstable and may fall

off jack stand causing serious injury

of death.

3. Remove the cargo floor cover.

4. Remove the jacking tools.

In case of emergency 6-5

6-6 In case of emergency

JVE0423X

5. Securely screw to connect the T-

shaped end of the jack rod and the

extension bar

as illustrated.

6. Fit the square end of the jack rod into

the square hole of the wheel nut

wrench to form a handle

7. Locate the oval opening above the

middle of the rear bumper.

8. Place the T-shaped end of the jack rod

through the opening and direct it

towards the spare wheel winch as-

sembly, located directly above the

spare wheel.

SCE0916

CAUTION

Do not insert the jack rod straight as

it is designed to be inserted at an

angle as shown.

9. Seat the T-shaped end of the jack rod

into the T-shaped opening of the

spare wheel winch. Apply pressure to

keep the jack rod engaged in the

spare wheel winch and turn the jack

rod counterclockwise to lower the

spare wheel.

SCE0377

10. Once the spare wheel is completely

lowered, remove the jack rod and

reach under the vehicle to remove

the hanging plate.

11. Carefully slide the spare wheel from

under the rear of the vehicle.

After preparing the spare tire, to remove

the rod, pull out the rod while moving the

rod to the right and left with the screw of

the extension facing the side.

CAUTION

When storing the wheel, make sure

that the hanging plate is in the

center of the wheel and then lift it

up into the storage area.

JVE0349X

CAUTION

When storing the wheel, be sure to

mount the wheel horizontally. Secur-

ing the wheel that is in a tilted

position as illustrated may cause

In case of emergency 6-7

6-8 In case of emergency

looseness and dropping of the wheel

while driving. Lower the wheel on the

ground again, and make sure that

the hanging plate is properly set.

Hang the wheel again and make sure

that the wheel is held horizontally,

then store the wheel.

Jacking up the vehicle and remov-

ing the damaged tire

WARNING

. Never get under the vehicle while

it is supported only by the jack. If

it is necessary to work under the

vehicle, support it with safety

stands.

. Use only the jack provided with

your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do

not use the jack provided with

your vehicle on other vehicles.

The jack is designed for lifting

only your vehicle during a tire

change.

. Use the correct jack-up points.

Never use any other part of the

vehicle for jack support.

. Never jack up the vehicle more

than necessary.

. Never use blocks on or under the

jack.

. Do not start or run the engine

while vehicle is on the jack, as it

may cause the vehicle to move.

. Do not allow passengers to stay

in the vehicle while it is on the

jack.

Carefully read the caution label at-

tached to the jack body and the follow-

ing instructions.

SCE0875

Jack-up point

1. Place the jack directly under the jack-

up points as illustrated.

The jack should be used on level firm

ground.

SCE0876

2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two

turns by turning counterclockwise

with the wheel nut wrench. Do not

remove the wheel nuts until the tire

is off the ground.

NCE130

3. Install the assembled jack rod into the

jack as shown.

4. Carefully raise the vehicle until the

clearance between the tire and

ground is achieved.

5. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the

jack lever and rod with both hands

and turn the jack lever.

NOTE:

Before jacking up the vehicle, make

sure the ignition switch is placed in

the OFF position. If the vehicle is lifted

up with the engine running, the auto-

leveling suspension will become dis-

abled after 120 seconds. To reset the

auto-leveling suspension, cycle the

In case of emergency 6-9

6-10 In case of emergency

ignition switch ON/OFF one time.

SCE0910

Installing the spare tire

The full-size temporary use only spare

tire (if so equipped) is designed for

emergency use. (See specific instruc-

tions under the heading “Wheels and

tires” (P.8-30).)

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the sur-

face between the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and

tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten

wheel nuts alternately and evenly in

the sequence illustrated (

, , , , ,

) until they are tight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire

touches the ground. Then, with the

wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel

nuts securely in the sequence as

illustrated. Lower the vehicle comple-

tely.

WARNING

. Incorrect wheel nuts or impro-

perly tightened wheel nuts can

cause the wheel to become loose

or come off. This could cause an

accident.

. Do not use oil or grease on the

wheel studs or nuts. This could

cause the nuts to become loose.

. Retighten the wheel nuts when

the vehicle has been driven for

600 miles (1,000 km) (also in

cases of a flat tire, etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the

wheel nuts to the specified torque

with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

98 ft-lb (133 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept

tightened to specification at all

times. It is recommended that

wheel nuts be tightened to speci-

fications at each lubrication inter-

val.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD

pressure.

COLD pressure:

After the vehicle has been parked

for three hours or more or driven

less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on

the Tire and Loading Information

label affixed to the driver side

center pillar.

After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD

tire pressure, the display of the tire

pressure information may show higher

pressure than the COLD tire pressure

after the vehicle has been driven more

than 1 mile (1.6 km). This is because the

tire pressurizes as the tire temperature

rises. This does not indicate a system

malfunction.

Stowing the damaged tire and

tools

1. Securely store the damaged tire, jack

and tools in the storage area.

2. Close the cargo floor cover.

3. Replace the cargo floor board.

4. Close the liftgate.

WARNING

. Always make sure that the spare

tire and jacking equipment are

properly secured after use. Such

items can become dangerous

projectiles in an accident or sud-

den stop.

. The full-size temporary use only

spare tire (if so equipped) is de-

signed for emergency use. (See

specific instructions under the

heading “Wheels and tires” (P.8-

30).)

In case of emergency 6-11

6-12 In case of emergency

To start your engine with a booster

battery, the instructions and precautions

below must be followed.

WARNING

. If done incorrectly, jump starting

can lead to a battery explosion,

resulting in severe injury or

death. It could also damage your

vehicle.

. Explosive hydrogen gas is always

present in the vicinity of the

battery. Keep all sparks and

flames away from the battery.

. Do not allow battery fluid to come

into contact with eyes, skin,

clothing or painted surfaces. Bat-

tery fluid is a corrosive sulphuric

acid solution which can cause

severe burns. If the fluid should

come into contact with anything,

immediately flush the contacted

area with water.

. Keep the battery out of the reach

of children.

. The booster battery must be

rated at 12 volts. Use of an im-

properly rated battery can da-

mage your vehicle.

. Whenever working on or near a

battery, always wear suitable eye

protectors (for example, goggles

or industrial safety spectacles)

and remove rings, metal bands,

or any other jewelry. Do not lean

over the battery when jump start-

ing.

. Do not attempt to jump start a

frozen battery. It could explode

and cause serious injury.

. Your vehicle has an automatic

engine cooling fan. It could come

on at any time. Keep hands and

other objects away from it.

JUMP STARTING

JVE0485X

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.

Failure to do so could result in

damage to the charging system and

cause personal injury.

1. Remove the engine compartment

cover, if necessary. See “Engine com-

partment check locations” (P.8-3).

2. If the booster battery is in another

vehicle

, position the two vehicles (

and ) to bring their batteries into

close proximity to each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to

touch.

3. Apply parking brake. Move the shift

lever to the P (Park) position. Switch

off all unnecessary electrical systems

(light, heater, air conditioner, etc.).

4. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so

equipped). Cover the battery with a

firmly wrung out moist cloth

reduce explosion hazard.

5. Connect jumper cables in the se-

quence as illustrated (

? ? ?

CAUTION

. Always connect positive (+) to

positive (+) and negative (−) to

body ground (as illustrated) —

not to the battery.

. Make sure the jumper cables do

not touch moving parts in the

engine compartment and that

clamps do not contact any other

metal.

6. Start the engine of the booster vehicle

and let it run for a few minutes.

7. Keep the engine speed of the booster

vehicle

at about 2,000 rpm, and

start the engine of the vehicle being

jump started

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor en-

gaged for more than 10 seconds. If

the engine does not start right away,

place the ignition switch in the OFF

position and wait 10 seconds before

trying again.

In case of emergency 6-13

6-14 In case of emergency

8. After starting your engine, carefully

disconnect the negative cable and

then the positive cable (

? ?

? ).

9. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped).

Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to

cover the vent holes as it may be

contaminated with corrosive acid.

10. Put the battery cover on.

Do not attempt to start the engine by

pushing.

CAUTION

. Automatic transmission models

cannot be push-started or tow-

started. Attempting to do so may

cause transmission damage.

. Three way catalyst equipped

models should not be started by

pushing since the three way cat-

alyst may be damaged.

. Never try to start the vehicle by

towing it; when the engine starts,

the forward surge could cause

the vehicle to collide with the

tow vehicle.

CAUTION

. Do not continue to drive if your

vehicle overheats. Doing so could

cause engine damage or a vehicle

fire.

. To avoid the danger of being

scalded, never remove the radia-

tor cap or coolant reservoir cap

while the engine is still hot. When

the radiator cap or coolant reser-

voir cap is removed, pressurized

hot water will spurt out, possibly

causing serious injury.

. Do not open the hood if steam is

coming out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by

an extremely high temperature gauge

reading), or if you feel a lack of engine

power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take

the following steps:

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road,

apply the parking brake and move the

shift lever to the P (Park) position.

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the heater and air condi-

tioner. Open all the windows, move

the heater or air conditioner tempera-

ture control to maximum hot and fan

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

control to high speed.

3. If engine overheating is caused by

climbing a long hill on a hot day, run

the engine at a fast idle (approxi-

mately 1,500 rpm) until the tempera-

ture gauge indication returns to

normal.

4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen

for steam or coolant escaping from

the radiator before opening the hood.

(If steam or coolant is escaping, turn

off the engine.) Do not open the hood

further until no steam or coolant can

be seen.

5. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the

engine, stand clear to prevent get-

ting burned.

6. Visually check drive belts for damage

or looseness. Also check if the cooling

fan is running. The radiator hoses and

radiator should not leak water. If cool-

ant is leaking or the cooling fan does

not run, stop the engine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands,

hair, jewelry or clothing to come into

contact with, or get caught in, engine

belts or the engine cooling fan. The

engine cooling fan can start at any

time.

7. After the engine cools down, check

the coolant level in the reservoir tank

with the engine running. Add coolant

to the reservoir tank if necessary. Have

your vehicle repaired. It is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

In case of emergency 6-15

6-16 In case of emergency

When towing your vehicle, all State (Pro-

vincial in Canada) and local regulations

for towing must be followed. Incorrect

towing equipment could damage your

vehicle. Towing instructions are available

from a NISSAN dealer. Local service op-

erators are familiar with the applicable

laws and procedures for towing. To

assure proper towing and to prevent

accidental damage to your vehicle,

NISSAN recommends that you have a

service operator tow your vehicle. It is

advisable to have the service operator

carefully read the following precautions.

WARNING

. Never ride in a vehicle that is

being towed.

. Never get under your vehicle after

it has been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

. When towing, make sure that the

transmission, axles, steering sys-

tem and powertrain are in work-

ing condition. If any of these

conditions apply, dollies or a

flatbed tow truck must be used.

. Always attach safety chains be-

fore towing.

For information about towing your vehi-

cle behind a recreational vehicle (RV), see

“Flat towing” (P.10-29).

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

SCE0925

Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY

NISSAN

Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be

towed with the driving (rear) wheels off

the ground or place the vehicle on a flat

bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

. Never tow automatic transmis-

sion models with the rear wheels

on the ground or four wheels on

the ground (forward or back-

ward), as this may cause serious

and expensive damage to the

transmission. If it is necessary to

tow the vehicle with the front

wheels raised, always use towing

dollies under the rear wheels.

. When towing rear wheel drive

models with the front wheels on

the ground or on towing dollies:

Place the ignition in the ACC or ON

position, and secure the steering

wheel in a straight-ahead posi-

tion with a rope or similar device.

In case of emergency 6-17

6-18 In case of emergency

SCE0907

Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) models

NISSAN recommends that towing dollies

be used when towing your vehicle or the

vehicle be placed on a flat bed truck as

illustrated.

CAUTION

Never tow 4WD models with any of

the wheels on the ground as this

may cause serious and expensive

damage to the powertrain.

JVE0350X

Front

JVE0351X

Rear

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck

vehicle)

WARNING

. Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

. Do not spin your tires at high

speed. This could cause them to

explode and result in serious in-

jury. Parts of your vehicle could

also overheat and be damaged.

Pulling a stuck vehicle

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,

etc., use a tow strap or other device

designed specifically for vehicle recovery.

Always follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for the recovery device.

Attach the tow strap to the towing hook.

CAUTION

. Tow chains or cables must be

attached only to the main struc-

tural members of the vehicle or

the towing hooks. Otherwise, the

vehicle body will be damaged.

. Use the towing hook only to free

a vehicle stuck in sand, snow,

mud, etc. Never tow the vehicle

for a long distance using only the

towing hook.

. The towing hook is under tre-

mendous force when used to free

a stuck vehicle. Never pull the

hook at an angle.

. Always pull the cable straight out

from the front or rear of the

vehicle.

. Pulling devices should be routed

so they do not touch any part of

the suspension, steering, brake or

cooling systems.

. Pulling devices such as ropes or

canvas straps are not recom-

mended for use in vehicle towing

or recovery.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,

etc., use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system.

2. Make sure the area in front and

behind the vehicle is clear of obstruc-

tions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left

to clear an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and

backward.

Shift back and forth between R

(Reverse) and D (Drive).

Apply the accelerator as little as

possible to maintain the rocking

motion.

Release the accelerator pedal be-

fore shifting between R and D.

Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH

(55 km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a

few tries, contact a professional tow-

ing service to remove the vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-19

6-20 In case of emergency

This section describes the procedure for

manually shifting the vehicle into the 4WD

mode (4L position) in case of an emer-

gency.

WHEN 4WD WARNING LIGHT ILLU-

MINATES

If the 4WD warning light illuminates while

driving, there may be a malfunction in the

4WD system. Stop the vehicle and have

the vehicle checked as soon as possible. It

is recommended you contact a NISSAN

dealer for this service. (See “NISSAN all-

mode 4WD®” (P.5-116).)

When the vehicle is stuck on an uneven

road (desert, mud, etc.) and the 4WD

warning light is illuminated, be sure to

place the 4WD shift switch in the 4L

position. If only the rear wheels are

spinning, this means that the transfer

has not switched to the 4L position

electrically.

If this situation occurs, contact a dealer or

road assistance service for help. If an

immediate service is not available, per-

form the following procedure to switch to

the 4L position manually and free the

vehicle.

CAUTION

Only perform this procedure in an

emergency.

If the vehicle is driven for a long

period of time over a long distance

with a component detached, foreign

material such as water, sand, etc.

may enter from the opening and this

may cause a malfunction in the

drivetrain system. After freeing a

vehicle that has become stuck, it is

recommended you contact a NISSAN

dealer for inspection and repair.

WARNING

. Ensure your safety before per-

forming the operations. The ve-

hicle may move unexpectedly.

. Place the ignition switch in the

OFF position, apply the parking

brake and let the vehicle cool

down.

. Do not perform the following

procedure immediately after

driving the vehicle. Parts such as

exhaust components, the trans-

mission, etc. are very hot and

may cause a burn injury.

. Make sure that the parts that will

be operated as well as related

parts cool down before perform-

ing the operation.

. Burrs or projecting portions of

metal components may cause

unexpected injury to your fingers

or arms. Pay special attention in

regard to your safety while re-

moving and installing these

parts. Wear work gloves and pro-

tective arm covers.

CAUTION

While removing and installing the

parts, prevent the removed parts

from getting dirty with water, dirt or

sand. Protect the parts using a cover

such as a clean cloth, etc.

FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD)

MANUAL SHIFTING (4WD models)

OPERATING PROCEDURE

Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position and apply the parking brake. Let

the vehicle cool down before performing

the following procedure.

SCE0959

4WD shift motor assembly

1. Check that the ignition switch is in the

OFF position.

CAUTION

The following procedure includes the

removal of the electrical system

components. Therefore, make sure

that the ignition switch is in the OFF

position before proceeding.

SCE0960

4WD shift motor harness connector

2. Unlock the upper lock of the har-

ness connector of the 4WD shift motor

assembly, then remove the harness

connector.

3. Cover the connector to prevent it

from getting dirty, and then fasten

the connector to the vehicle using a

suitable rope so that the connector

does not contact the exhaust muffler,

etc.

In case of emergency 6-21

6-22 In case of emergency

CAUTION

The connector must be fastened

securely. Not doing so may result in

damage to the connector due to

interference with other parts.

SCE0961

4. Remove the 4 bolts that secure the

4WD shift motor using the wrench

that is equipped in the vehicle.

5. Remove the 4WD shift motor assem-

bly.

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow the assembly

to contact water, dirt or sand.

SCE0962

6. Completely insert the wrench into the

internal gear

of the transfer.

7. Fully turn the wrench clockwise

far as it will go. This shifts the transfer

to the 4L position.

8. Install the 4WD shift motor assembly.

Securely tighten the 4 bolts using the

wrench.

CAUTION

. Do not connect the harness con-

nector of the 4WD shift motor

after the above procedure has

been performed.

. The 4 bolts are tightened to

temporarily install the 4WD shift

motor so that water, dirt or sand

does not enter inside the system.

Therefore, they should only be

tightened to the proper tighten-

ing torque. It is recommended

you contact a NISSAN dealer for

inspection and repair.

9. With the 4WD system in the 4L posi-

tion, free the stuck vehicle. (See “Ve-

hicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle)”

(P.6-19) for details.)

CAUTION

After manually shifting the vehicle to

the 4L position, it is recommended

you contact a NISSAN dealer for

inspection and repair as soon as

possible.

In case of emergency 6-23

6-24 In case of emergency

MEMO

7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior ........................................................................... 7-2
Washing ......................................................................................... 7-2
Waxing ............................................................................................ 7-2
Removing spots ...................................................................... 7-3
Underbody ................................................................................... 7-3
Glass ................................................................................................. 7-3
Wheels ............................................................................................. 7-3
Chrome parts ............................................................................ 7-4
Tire dressing .............................................................................. 7-4
Cleaning interior ........................................................................... 7-5
Air fresheners ......................................................................... 7-5
Floor mats ................................................................................. 7-5
Seat belts ................................................................................... 7-7
Corrosion protection ................................................................ 7-7
Most common factors contributing to
vehicle corrosion .................................................................. 7-7
Environmental factors influence the rate
of corrosion .............................................................................. 7-7
To protect your vehicle from corrosion ............ 7-8

7-2 Appearance and care

In order to maintain the appearance of

your vehicle, it is important to take proper

care of it.

To protect the paint surface, wash your

vehicle as soon as you can:

. after a rainfall to prevent possible

damage from acid rain

. after driving on coastal roads

. when contaminants such as soot, bird

droppings, tree sap, metal particles or

bugs get on the paint surface

. when dust or mud builds up on the

surface

Whenever possible, store or park your

vehicle inside a garage or in a covered

area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park

in a shady area or protect the vehicle with

a body cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint

surface when putting on or removing

the body cover.

WASHING

Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet

sponge and plenty of water. Clean the

vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap, a

special vehicle soap or general purpose

dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lu-

kewarm (never hot) water.

CAUTION

. Do not use car washes that use

acid in the detergent. Some car

washes, especially brushless

ones, use some acid for cleaning.

The acid may react with some

plastic vehicle components, caus-

ing them to crack. This could

affect their appearance, and also

could cause them not to function

properly. Always check with your

car wash to confirm that acid is

not used.

. Do not wash the vehicle with

strong household soap, strong

chemical detergents, gasoline or

solvents.

. Do not wash the vehicle in direct

sunlight or while the vehicle body

is hot, as the surface may become

water-spotted.

. Avoid using tight-napped or

rough cloths, such as washing

mitts. Care must be taken when

removing caked-on dirt or other

foreign substances so the paint

surface is not scratched or da-

maged.

. Lock all doors before going

through automatic car wash.

Locking doors helps prevent

fuel-filler door from opening and

becoming damaged.

Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of

clean water.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the

doors, hatches and hood are particularly

vulnerable to the effects of road salt.

Therefore, these areas must be regularly

cleaned. Make sure that the drain holes in

the lower edge of the door are open.

Spray water under the body and in the

wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash

away road salt.

Avoid leaving water spots on the paint

surface by using a damp chamois to dry

the vehicle.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface

and helps retain new vehicle appearance.

Polishing is recommended to remove

built-up wax residue and to avoid a

weathered appearance before reapplying

wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choos-

ing the proper product.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

. Wax your vehicle only after a thorough

washing. Follow the instructions sup-

plied with the wax.

. Do not use a wax containing any

abrasives, cutting compounds or clea-

ners that may damage the vehicle

finish.

Machine compound or aggressive polish-

ing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish

may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,

insects, and tree sap as quickly as possi-

ble from the paint surface to avoid lasting

damage or staining. Special cleaning

products are available at a NISSAN dealer

or any automotive accessory stores.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter,

the underbody must be cleaned regularly.

This will prevent dirt and salt from build-

ing up and causing the acceleration of

corrosion on the underbody and suspen-

sion. Before the winter period and again

in the spring, the underseal must be

checked and, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and

dust film from the glass surfaces. It is

normal for glass to become coated with a

film after the vehicle is parked in the hot

sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will

easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the

windows, do not use sharp-edged

tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine-

based disinfectant cleaners. They

could damage the electrical conduc-

tors, radio antenna elements or rear

window defroster elements.

WHEELS

Wash the wheels when washing the

vehicle to maintain their appearance.

. Clean the inner side of the wheels

when the wheel is changed or the

underside of the vehicle is washed.

. Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents

or corrosion. Such damage may cause

loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire

bead.

. NISSAN recommends that the road

wheels be waxed to protect against

road salt in areas where it is used

during winter.

CAUTION

Do not use abrasive cleaners when

washing the wheels.

Aluminum alloy wheels

Wash regularly with a sponge dampened

in a mild soap solution, especially during

winter months in areas where road salt is

used. Salt could discolor the wheels if not

removed.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid

staining or discoloring the wheels:

. Do not use a cleaner that uses

strong acid or alkali contents to

clean the wheels.

. Do not apply wheel cleaners to

the wheels when they are hot.

The wheel temperature should be

the same as ambient tempera-

ture.

Appearance and care 7-3

7-4 Appearance and care

. Rinse the wheel to completely

remove the cleaner within 15

minutes after the cleaner is ap-

plied.

Bright wheels (if so equipped)

The bright wheels use a different coating

process than typical aluminum alloy

wheel and they are not plated wheels.

These wheels are clear-coated and re-

quire the following special cleaning. They

should be regularly washed with a soft

sponge soaked in a lot of water. After

washing with water, wipe clean with a

dry, soft cloth and dry completely. When

there is chemical or tire wax, or dirt such

as an antifreeze agent on the surface,

wash them with water as soon as possi-

ble.

CAUTION

. The surfaces of the wheels use a

different coating process than

typical aluminum alloy wheels.

Do not use aluminum alloy wheel

cleaners or abrasive cleaners to

clean the wheels. Using such

cleaners could damage the wheel

surfaces.

. Do not use an automatic car wash

if the vehicle is equipped with

bright wheels. The wheel coating

may be damaged.

. Do not use a brush to wash the

wheels if the vehicle is equipped

with bright wheels. The wheel

coating may be damaged.

CHROME PARTS

Clean chrome parts regularly with a non-

abrasive chrome polish to maintain the

finish.

TIRE DRESSING

NISSAN does not recommend the use of

tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a

coating to the tires to help reduce dis-

coloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing

is applied to the tires, it may react with

the coating and form a compound. This

compound may come off the tire while

driving and stain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take

the following precautions:

. Use a water-based tire dressing. The

coating on the tire dissolves more

easily with an oil-based tire dressing.

. Apply a light coat of tire dressing to

help prevent it from entering the tire

tread/grooves (where it would be

difficult to remove).

. Wipe off excess tire dressing using a

dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing

is completely removed from the tire

tread/grooves.

. Allow the tire dressing to dry as

recommended by tire dressing manu-

facturer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the

interior trim, plastic parts and seats using

a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush.

Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a

clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap

solution, then wipe clean with a dry soft

cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in

order to maintain the appearance of the

leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read

the manufacturer’s recommendations.

Some fabric protectors contain chemicals

that may stain or bleach the seat materi-

al.

Use a cloth dampened only with water, to

clean the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners

(hot steam cleaners) on the seat. This

can damage the seat or occupant

classification sensors. This can also

affect the operation of the air bag

system and result in serious perso-

nal injury.

CAUTION

. Never use benzine, thinner, or any

similar material.

. For cleaning, use a soft cloth,

dampened with water. Never use

a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine,

thinner or any kind of solvent or

paper towel with a chemical

cleaning agent. They will scratch

or cause discoloration to the lens.

. Do not spray any liquid such as

water on the meter lens. Spraying

liquid may cause the system to

malfunction.

. Small dirt particles can be abra-

sive and damaging to the leather

surfaces and should be removed

promptly. Do not use saddle soap,

car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning

fluids, solvents, detergents or

ammonia-based cleaners as they

may damage the leather’s natural

finish.

. Only use fabric protectors ap-

proved by NISSAN.

. Do not use glass or plastic cleaner

on meter or gauge lens covers. It

may damage the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS

Most air fresheners use a solvent that

could affect the vehicle interior. If you use

an air freshener, take the following pre-

cautions:

. Hanging-type air fresheners can

cause permanent discoloration when

they contact vehicle interior surfaces.

Place the air freshener in a location

that allows it to hang free and not

contact an interior surface.

. Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip

on the vents. These products can

cause immediate damage and disco-

loration when spilled on interior sur-

faces.

Carefully read and follow the manufac-

turer’s instructions before using air fresh-

eners.

FLOOR MATS

WARNING

To avoid potential pedal interference

that may result in a collision, injury

or death:

. NEVER place a floor mat on top of

another floor mat in the driver

front position or install them up-

side down or backwards.

Appearance and care 7-5

CLEANING INTERIOR

7-6 Appearance and care

. Use only genuine NISSAN floor

mats or equivalent floor mats

that are specifically designed for

use in your vehicle model and

model year.

. Properly position the mats in the

floorwell using the floor mat po-

sitioning hooks. See “Floor mat

installation” (P.7-6).

. Make sure the floor mat does not

interfere with pedal operation.

. Periodically check the floor mats

to make sure they are properly

installed.

. After cleaning the vehicle interior,

check the floor mats to make

sure they are properly installed.

The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can

extend the life of your vehicle carpet and

make it easier to clean the interior. Mats

should be maintained with regular clean-

ing and replaced if they become exces-

sively worn.

JVA0034X

Front (example)

Floor mat installation

Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat

positioning hook(s). The number and

shape of the floor mat positioning hooks

for each seating position varies depend-

ing on the vehicle.

When installing genuine NISSAN floor

mats, follow the installation instructions

provided with the floor mat and the

following:

1. Position the floor mat in the floorwell

so that the mat grommet holes are

aligned with the hook(s).

2. Secure the grommet holes into the

hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat

is properly positioned.

3. Make sure the floor mat does not

interfere with pedal operation. With

the ignition in the OFF position and

the shift lever in the P (Park) position,

fully apply and release all pedals. The

floor mat must not interfere with

pedal operation or prevent the pedal

from returning to its normal position.

It is recommended you see a NISSAN

dealer for details about installing the

floor mats in your vehicle.

SAI0052

Bracket positions

The illustration shows the location of the

floor mat positioning hooks.

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping

them with a sponge dampened in a mild

soap solution. Allow the belts to dry

completely before using them.

See “Seat belts” (P.1-20).

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up

in the retractor. NEVER use bleach,

dye, or chemical solvents to clean

the seat belts, since these materials

may severely weaken the seat belt

webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORS CON-

TRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORRO-

SION

. The accumulation of moisture-retain-

ing dirt and debris in body panel

sections, cavities, and other areas.

. Damage to paint and other protective

coatings caused by gravel and stone

chips or minor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLU-

ENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on

the vehicle body underside can acceler-

ate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not

dry completely inside the vehicle, and

should be removed for drying to avoid

floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of

high relative humidity, especially those

areas where the temperatures stay above

freezing where atmospheric pollution ex-

ists, or where road salt is used.

Appearance and care 7-7

CORROSION PROTECTION

7-8 Appearance and care

Temperature

A temperature increase will accelerate

the rate of corrosion to those parts which

are not well ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in

the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt

use will accelerate the corrosion process.

Road salt will also accelerate the disin-

tegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM

CORROSION

. Wash and wax your vehicle often to

keep the vehicle clean.

. Always check for minor damage to the

paint and repair it as soon as possible.

. Keep drain holes at the bottom of the

doors open to avoid water accumula-

tion.

. Check the underbody for accumula-

tion of sand, dirt or salt. If present,

wash with water as soon as possible.

CAUTION

. NEVER remove dirt, sand or other

debris from the passenger com-

partment by washing it out with a

hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum

cleaner.

. Never allow water or other liquids

to come in contact with electronic

components inside the vehicle as

this may damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface deicing

are extremely corrosive. They accelerate

corrosion and deterioration of underbody

components such as the exhaust system,

fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor

pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be

cleaned periodically.

For additional protection against rust and

corrosion, which may be required in some

areas, it is recommended you consult a

NISSAN dealer.

8 Do-it-yourself
Maintenance precautions ...................................................... 8-2
Engine compartment check locations ........................ 8-3
VK56VD engine ....................................................................... 8-3
Engine cooling system ............................................................. 8-4
Checking engine coolant level .................................... 8-5
Changing engine coolant ................................................ 8-5
Engine oil ............................................................................................. 8-6
Checking engine oil level ................................................. 8-6
Changing engine oil and filter ..................................... 8-6
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) ............................. 8-8
Power steering fluid ................................................................... 8-8
Brake fluid .......................................................................................... 8-9
Window washer fluid .............................................................. 8-10
Battery ................................................................................................ 8-11
Jump starting ......................................................................... 8-13
Variable voltage control system ................................... 8-13
Drive belts ........................................................................................ 8-13
Spark plugs ..................................................................................... 8-14
Replacing spark plugs ..................................................... 8-14
Air cleaner ....................................................................................... 8-15
Windshield wiper blades ..................................................... 8-16
Cleaning ................................................................................... 8-16
Replacing ................................................................................ 8-16
Rear window wiper blades ............................................... 8-17
Brakes ................................................................................................ 8-17
Self-adjusting brakes ..................................................... 8-17
Brake pad wear warning............................................ 8-17
Brake booster ...................................................................... 8-17
Fuses ................................................................................................... 8-18
Engine compartment .................................................... 8-18
Passenger compartment ........................................... 8-20
Intelligent Key battery replacement .......................... 8-21
Lights .................................................................................................. 8-24
Headlights .............................................................................. 8-24
Exterior and interior lights ........................................ 8-26
Wheels and tires ........................................................................ 8-30
Tire pressure ........................................................................ 8-30
Tire labeling .......................................................................... 8-34
Types of tires ....................................................................... 8-36
Tire chains .............................................................................. 8-37
Changing wheels and tires ...................................... 8-37

8-2 Do-it-yourself

When performing any inspection or main-

tenance work on your vehicle, always

take care to prevent serious accidental

injury to yourself or damage to the

vehicle. The following are general precau-

tions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

. Park the vehicle on a level sur-

face, apply the parking brake

securely and block the wheels to

prevent the vehicle from moving.

Move the shift lever to P (Park).

. Be sure the ignition switch is in

the OFF or LOCK position when

performing any parts replace-

ment or repairs.

. Never connect or disconnect the

battery or any transistorized

component while the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

. Never leave the engine or auto-

matic transmission related com-

ponent harnesses disconnected

while the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

. If you must work with the engine

running, keep your hands, cloth-

ing, hair and tools away from

moving fans, belts and any other

moving parts.

. It is advisable to secure or re-

move any loose clothing and

remove any jewelry, such as

rings, watches, etc. before work-

ing on your vehicle.

. Always wear eye protection

whenever you work on your ve-

hicle.

. If you must run the engine in an

enclosed space such as a garage,

be sure there is proper ventilation

for exhaust gases to escape.

. Never get under the vehicle while

it is supported only by a jack. If it

is necessary to work under the

vehicle, support it with safety

stands.

. Keep smoking materials, flame

and sparks away from fuel tank

and the battery.

. Your vehicle is equipped with an

automatic engine cooling fan. It

may come on at any time without

warning, even if the ignition key is

in the OFF position and the en-

gine is not running. To avoid

injury, always disconnect the ne-

gative battery cable before work-

ing near the fan.

. Because the fuel lines are under

high pressure even when the

engine is off, it is recommended

you visit a NISSAN dealer for

service of the fuel filter or fuel

lines.

CAUTION

. Do not work under the hood while

the engine is hot. Turn the engine

off and wait until it cools down.

. Avoid direct contact with used

engine oil and coolant. Impro-

perly disposed engine oil, coolant,

and/or other vehicle fluids can

damage the environment. Always

conform to local regulations for

disposal of vehicle fluid.

This “8. Do-it-yourself” section gives in-

structions regarding only those items

which are relatively easy for an owner to

perform.

A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is also

available. (See “Owner’s Manual/Service

Manual order information” (P.10-34).)

You should be aware that incomplete or

improper servicing may result in operat-

ing difficulties or excessive emissions, and

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

could affect your warranty coverage. If in

doubt about any servicing, it is recom-

mended you have it done by a NISSAN

dealer.

JVC0965X

VK56VD ENGINE

1. Window washer fluid reservoir

2. Fuse/fusible link holder

3. Engine oil dipstick

4. Power steering fluid reservoir

5. Engine oil filler cap

6. Brake fluid reservoir

7. Fuse/fusible link holder

8. Battery

9. Radiator filler cap

10. Engine coolant reservoir

11. Drive belts

12. Air cleaner

Do-it-yourself 8-3

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

8-4 Do-it-yourself

The engine cooling system is filled at the

factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50%

Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/

Coolant (blue) and 50% water to provide

year-round anti-freeze and coolant pro-

tection. The antifreeze solution contains

rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional

engine cooling system additives are not

necessary.

WARNING

. Never remove the radiator or

coolant reservoir cap when the

engine is hot. Wait until the en-

gine and radiator cool down.

Serious burns could be caused

by high pressure fluid escaping

from the radiator. See precau-

tions in “If your vehicle overheats”

(P.6-14).

. The radiator is equipped with a

pressure type radiator cap. To

prevent engine damage, use only

a genuine NISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

. Never use any cooling system

additives such as radiator sealer.

Additives may clog the cooling

system and cause damage to

the engine, transmission and/or

cooling system.

. When adding or replacing cool-

ant, be sure to use only Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/

Coolant (blue) or equivalent. Gen-

uine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/

Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted to

provide antifreeze protection to

−34°F (−37°C). If additional freeze

protection is needed due to

weather where you operate your

vehicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)

concentrate following the direc-

tions on the container. If an

equivalent coolant other than

Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-

freeze/Coolant (blue) is used, fol-

low the coolant manufacturer’s

instructions to maintain mini-

mum antifreeze protection to

−34°F (−37°C). The use of other

types of coolant solutions other

than Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or

equivalent may damage the en-

gine cooling system.

. The life expectancy of the fac-

tory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles

(168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing

any other type of coolant other

than Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), includ-

ing Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or

the use of non-distilled water will

reduce the life expectancy of the

factory-fill coolant. Refer to the

“9. Maintenance and schedules”

section of this manual for more

details.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

JVM0733X

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir

when the engine is cold. If the coolant

level is below MIN

, open the reservoir

tank cap and add coolant up to the MAX

level. If the reservoir tank is empty,

check the coolant level in the radiator

when the engine is cold. If there is

insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the

radiator with coolant up to the filler

opening and also add it to the reservoir

tank up to the MAX level

Tighten the cap securely after adding

engine coolant.

If the cooling system requires coolant

frequently, have it checked. It is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

It is recommended that major cooling

system repairs be performed by a NISSAN

dealer. The service procedures can be

found in the appropriate NISSAN Service

Manual.

Improper servicing can result in re-

duced heater performance and engine

overheating.

WARNING

. To avoid the danger of being

scalded, never change the cool-

ant when the engine is hot.

. Never remove the radiator cap or

coolant reservoir cap when the

engine is hot. Serious burns could

be caused by high pressure fluid

escaping from the radiator.

. Avoid direct skin contact with

used coolant. If skin contact is

made, wash thoroughly with soap

or hand cleaner as soon as pos-

sible.

. Keep coolant out of reach of

children and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of

properly. Check your local regulations.

Do-it-yourself 8-5

8-6 Do-it-yourself

JVM0728X

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches oper-

ating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than

15 minutes for the oil to drain back

into the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.

Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check

the oil level. It should be within the

range

. If the oil level is below ,

remove the oil filler cap and pour

recommended oil through the open-

ing. Do not overfill

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oil

maintenance intervals or during the

break-in period, depending on the se-

verity of operating conditions.

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly.

Operating the engine with an insuffi-

cient amount of oil can damage the

engine, and such damage is not

covered by warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

Vehicle set-up

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches oper-

ating temperature.

3. Turn the engine off and wait more

than 15 minutes.

4. Raise and support the vehicle using a

suitable floor jack and safety jack

stands.

Place the safety jack stands under

the vehicle jack-up points.

A suitable adapter should be at-

tached to the jack stand saddle.

5. Remove the engine undercover.

Remove the bolts that hold the

undercover in place.

CAUTION

Make sure the correct lifting and

support points are used to avoid

vehicle damage.

ENGINE OIL

SDI2528

Engine oil and filter

1. Place a large drain pan under the

drain plug.

2. Remove the oil filler cap.

3. Remove the drain plug

with a

wrench and completely drain the oil.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself, as

the engine oil is hot.

Waste oil must be disposed of

properly.

Check your local regulations.

4. (Perform steps 4 to 7 only when the

engine oil filter change is needed.)

Loosen the oil filter

with an oil filter

wrench. Remove the oil filter by turn-

ing it by hand.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting

surface with a clean rag.

CAUTION

Be sure to remove any old rubber

gasket remaining on the mounting

surface of the engine. Failure to do

so could lead to engine damage.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with

clean engine oil.

7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a

slight resistance is felt, then tighten

additionally more than 2/3 turn.

Oil filter tightening torque:

11 to 15 ft-lb

(15 to 21 N·m)

8. Clean and re-install the drain plug

with a new washer. Securely tighten

the drain plug with a wrench.

Drain plug tightening torque:

22 to 29 ft-lb

(29 to 39 N·m)

Do not use excessive force.

9. Refill engine with recommended oil

and install the oil filler cap securely.

CAUTION

The dipstick must be inserted in

place to prevent oil spillage from

the dipstick hole while filling the

engine with oil.

See “Capacities and recommended

fluids/lubricants” (P.10-2) for drain

and refill capacity. The drain and refill

capacity depends on the oil tempera-

ture and drain time. Use these speci-

fications for reference only. Always

use the dipstick to determine the

proper amount of oil in the engine.

10. Start the engine and check for leak-

age around the drain plug and the oil

filter. Correct as required.

11. Turn the engine off and wait more

than 15 minutes. Check the oil level

with the dipstick. Add engine oil if

necessary.

Do-it-yourself 8-7

8-8 Do-it-yourself

After the operation

1. Install the engine undercover into

position using the bolts.

2. Lower the vehicle carefully to the

ground.

3. Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.

WARNING

. Prolonged and repeated contact

with used engine oil may cause

skin cancer.

. Try to avoid direct skin contact

with used oil. If skin contact is

made, wash thoroughly with soap

or hand cleaner as soon as pos-

sible.

. Keep used engine oil out of reach

of children.

When checking or replacement is re-

quired, we recommend a NISSAN dealer

for servicing.

CAUTION

. It is recommended that you use

only Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF.

Do not mix with other fluids.

. Using automatic transmission

fluid (ATF) other than Genuine

NISSAN Matic S ATF may cause

deterioration in driveability and

automatic transmission durabil-

ity, and may damage the auto-

matic transmission. Damage

caused by use of fluids other than

as recommended is not covered

by the NISSAN new vehicle limited

warranty.

SDI1765A

Check the fluid level in the reservoir.

The fluid level should be checked using

the HOT range (

: HOT MAX., : HOT MIN.)

at fluid temperatures of 122 to 176°F (50 to

80°C) or using the COLD range (

: COLD

MAX.,

: COLD MIN.) at fluid temperatures

of 32 to 86°F (0 to 30°C).

If the fluid is below the MIN line, add

Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Re-

move the cap and fill through the open-

ing.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF)

POWER STEERING FLUID

CAUTION

. Do not overfill.

. Use Genuine NISSAN PSF or

equivalent.

For further brake fluid specification infor-

mation, see “Capacities and recom-

mended fluids/lubricants” (P.10-2).

WARNING

. Use only new fluid from a sealed

container. Old, inferior or con-

taminated fluid may damage the

brake system. The use of impro-

per fluids can damage the brake

system and affect the vehicle’s

stopping ability.

. Be sure to clean the filler cap

before removing.

. Brake fluid is poisonous and

should be stored carefully in

marked containers out of the

reach of children.

CAUTION

. Do not add brake fluid with the

ignition switch in the ON position

or the engine running. Doing so

could make the brake fluid over-

fill when the ignition switch is

turned off.

. Do not spill the fluid on painted

surfaces. This will damage the

paint. If fluid is spilled, wash the

surface with water.

Do-it-yourself 8-9

BRAKE FLUID

8-10 Do-it-yourself

SDI2513

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the

fluid is below the MIN line

or the brake

warning light comes on, add Genuine

NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or

equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line

To add brake fluid:

1. Be sure the ignition switch is in the

OFF or LOCK position.

2. Depress and release the foot brake

pedal more than 40 times.

3. Open the reservoir filler cap and add

brake fluid up to the MAX line

. (See

“Capacities and recommended fluids/

lubricants” (P.10-2) for the recom-

mended types of brake fluid.)

NOTE:

When the ignition switch is placed in the

ON position after adding brake fluid up

to the MAX line

in the reservoir, the

brake fluid decreases below the MAX

line

. This is normal.

If fluid must be added frequently, the

system should be checked. It is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

SDI2517

WARNING

Antifreeze is poisonous and should

be stored carefully in marked con-

tainers out of the reach of children

and pets.

Fill the window washer fluid reservoir

periodically. Add window washer fluid

when the low window washer fluid warn-

ing illuminates.

To fill the window washer fluid reservoir,

lift the cap off the reservoir tank and pour

the window washer fluid into the tank

opening.

WINDOW WASHER FLUID

Add a washer solvent to the washer for

better cleaning. In the winter season, add

a windshield washer antifreeze. Follow

the manufacturer’s instructions for the

mixture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when

driving conditions require an increased

amount of window washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN

Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner

& Antifreeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

. Do not substitute engine anti-

freeze coolant for window

washer solution. This may result

in damage to the paint.

. Do not fill the window washer

reservoir tank with washer fluid

concentrates at full strength.

Some methyl alcohol based

washer fluid concentrates may

permanently stain the grille if

spilled while filling the window

washer reservoir tank.

. Pre-mix washer fluid concen-

trates with water to the manu-

facturer’s recommended levels

before pouring the fluid into the

window washer reservoir tank. Do

not use the window washer re-

servoir tank to mix the washer

fluid concentrate and water.

. Keep the battery surface clean and

dry. Clean the battery with a solution

of baking soda and water.

. Make certain the terminal connec-

tions are clean and securely tightened.

. If the vehicle is not to be used for 30

days or longer, disconnect the nega-

tive (−) battery terminal cable to pre-

vent discharging it.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery dis-

charge and potential no-start condi-

tions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume

battery power when the engine is

not running (Phone chargers, GPS,

DVD players, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/

or only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to

be charged to maintain battery health.

WARNING

. Do not expose the battery to

flames or electrical sparks. Hy-

drogen gas generated by the

battery is explosive. Do not allow

battery fluid to contact your skin,

Do-it-yourself 8-11

BATTERY

8-12 Do-it-yourself

eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces.

After touching a battery or bat-

tery cap, do not touch or rub your

eyes. Thoroughly wash your

hands. If the acid contacts your

eyes, skin or clothing, immedi-

ately flush with water for at least

15 minutes and seek medical

attention.

. Do not operate the vehicle if the

fluid in the battery is low. Low

battery fluid can cause a higher

load on the battery which can

generate heat, reduce battery life,

and in some cases lead to an

explosion.

. When working on or near a bat-

tery, always wear suitable eye

protection and remove all jew-

elry.

. Battery posts, terminals and re-

lated accessories contain lead

and lead compounds. Wash

hands after handling.

. Keep the battery out of the reach

of children.

DI0137MA

Check the fluid level in each cell (Remove

the battery cover if it is necessary). It

should be between the UPPER LEVEL

and LOWER LEVEL lines.

If it is necessary to add fluid, add only

distilled water to bring the level to the

indicator in each filler opening. Do not

overfill.

SDI1480C

1. Remove the cell plugs .

2. Add distilled water up to the UPPER

LEVEL

line.

If the side of the battery is not clear,

check the distilled water level by

looking directly above the cell; the

condition

indicates OK and the

conditions

needs more to be added.

3. Tighten cell plugs

Vehicles operated in high temperatures

or under severe conditions require fre-

quent checks of the battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump

starting” (P.6-12). If the engine does not

start by jump starting, the battery may

have to be replaced. It is recommended

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION

. Do not ground accessories di-

rectly to the battery terminal.

Doing so will bypass the variable

voltage control system and the

vehicle battery may not charge

completely.

. Use electrical accessories with

the engine running to avoid dis-

charging the vehicle battery.

The variable voltage control system mea-

sures the amount of electrical discharge

from the battery and controls voltage

generated by the generator.

SDI2533

1. Power steering fluid pump

2. Water pump

3. Alternator

4. Crankshaft pulley

5. Air conditioner compressor

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is in the

OFF or LOCK position before servi-

cing drive belts. The engine could

rotate unexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of

unusual wear, cuts, fraying or loosen-

ess. If the belt is in poor condition or

Do-it-yourself 8-13

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM

DRIVE BELTS

8-14 Do-it-yourself

loose, have it replaced or adjusted. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

2. Have the belts checked regularly for

condition and tension in accordance

with the maintenance schedule

shown in the “9. Maintenance and

schedules” section.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and the ignition

switch are off and that the parking

brake is engaged securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to

remove the spark plugs. An incorrect

socket can damage the spark plugs.

SDI2020

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

If replacement is required, it is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

Iridium-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace the iridium-

tipped spark plugs as frequently as the

conventional type spark plugs since they

will last much longer. Follow the main-

tenance schedule shown in the “9. Main-

tenance and schedules” section, but do

not reuse them by cleaning or regapping.

Always replace spark plugs with recom-

mended or equivalent ones.

SPARK PLUGS

SDI2515

To remove the filter, release the lock pins

and pull the unit upward .

The filter element should not be cleaned

and reused. Replace it according to the

maintenance schedule shown in the “9.

Maintenance and schedules” section.

When replacing the filter, wipe the inside

of the air cleaner housing and the cover

with a damp cloth.

WARNING

. Operating the engine with the air

cleaner removed can cause you

or others to be burned. The air

cleaner not only cleans the air, it

stops flame if the engine back-

fires. If it isn’t there, and the

engine backfires, you could be

burned. Do not drive with the air

cleaner removed, and be careful

when working on the engine with

the air cleaner removed.

. Never pour fuel into the throttle

body or attempt to start the

engine with the air cleaner re-

moved. Doing so could result in

serious injury.

Do-it-yourself 8-15

AIR CLEANER

8-16 Do-it-yourself

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using

the windshield washer or if a wiper blade

chatters when running, wax or other

material may be on the blade or wind-

shield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a

washer solution or a mild detergent. Your

windshield is clean if beads do not form

when rinsing with clear water.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth

soaked in a washer solution or a mild

detergent. Then rinse the blade with clear

water. If your windshield is still not clear

after cleaning the blades and using the

wiper, replace the blades.

Worn windshield wiper blades can da-

mage the windshield and impair driver

vision.

When a washer nozzle is clogged

It is recommended you see a NISSAN

dealer if a washer nozzle is clogged or

any malfunction occurs. Do not attempt

to clean the nozzle using a needle or a

pin. Doing so may damage the nozzle.

SDI2048

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Pull the wiper arm.

2. Push the release tab

, and then

move the wiper blade down the wiper

arm

while pushing the release tab

to remove.

3. Insert the new wiper blade onto the

wiper arm until a click sounds.

4. Rotate the wiper blade so the dimple

is in the groove.

CAUTION

. After wiper blade replacement,

return the wiper arm to its origi-

nal position;

otherwise it may be damaged

when the hood is opened.

. Make sure the wiper blades con-

tact the glass; otherwise the arm

may be damaged from wind

pressure.

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

It is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer if checking or replacement is

required.

If the brakes do not operate properly,

have the brakes checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjust-

ing brakes.

The disc-type brakes self-adjust every

time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

Have your brake system checked if

the brake pedal height does not

return to normal. It is recommended

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING

The disc brake pads have audible wear

warnings. When a brake pad requires

replacement, it will make a high pitched

scraping sound when the vehicle is in

motion. This scraping sound will first

occur only when the brake pedal is

depressed. After more wear of the brake

pad, the sound will always be heard even

if the brake pedal is not depressed. Have

the brakes checked as soon as possible if

the wear warning sound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions,

occasional brake squeak, squeal or other

noise may be heard. Occasional brake

noise during light to moderate stops is

normal and does not affect the function

or performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals

should be followed. For additional infor-

mation, see the maintenance schedule

shown in the “9. Maintenance and sche-

dules” section.

BRAKE BOOSTER

Check the brake booster function as

follows:

1. With the engine off, depress and

release the foot brake pedal more

than 20 times. When the foot brake

pedal movement (distance of travel)

remains the same from one pedal

application to the next, continue on

to the next step.

2. While depressing the foot brake pedal,

start the engine.

3. With the foot brake pedal depressed,

stop the engine. Keep the pedal de-

pressed for about 30 seconds.

4. Run the engine for 1 minute without

depressing the foot brake pedal, then

turn it off. Depress the foot brake

pedal several times. The pedal travel

distance will decrease gradually with

Do-it-yourself 8-17

REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADES BRAKES

8-18 Do-it-yourself

each depression as the hydraulic

pressure decreases.

If the brakes do not operate properly,

have the brakes checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

repair.

SDI2518

SDI2532

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than that specified

on the fuse box cover. This could

damage the electrical system or

electronic control units or cause a

fire.

If any electrical equipment does not

operate, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch is pushed

to the OFF or LOCK position and the

headlight switch is turned to OFF.

2. Open the engine hood and remove

the cover on the battery.

3. Remove the fuse/fusible link holder

cover

, or .

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

FUSES

SDI1753

Type A (if so equipped)

SDI1754

Type B (if so equipped)

5. If the fuse is open , replace it with a

new fuse

. Spare fuses are stored in

the passenger compartment fuse box.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the

electrical system checked and re-

paired. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

Fusible links

If any electrical equipment does not

operate and fuses are in good condition,

check the fusible links. If any of these

fusible links are melted, replace only with

genuine NISSAN parts.

Do-it-yourself 8-19

8-20 Do-it-yourself

JVM0200X

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than that specified

on the fuse box cover. This could

damage the electrical system or

electronic control units or cause a

fire.

If any electrical equipment does not

operate, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch is pushed

to the OFF or LOCK position and the

headlight switch is turned to OFF.

2. Open the fuse box lid.

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller

SDI1754

4. If the fuse is open, replace it with a

new fuse.

5. If a new fuse also opens, have the

electrical system checked and re-

paired. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service. Spare

fuses are stored in the fuse box.

SDI2704

Extended storage fuse switch (if so

equipped)

To reduce battery drain, the extended

storage fuse switch comes from the

factory switched off. Prior to delivery of

your vehicle, the switch is pushed in

(switched on) and should always remain

on.

If the extended storage fuse switch is not

pushed in (switched on), the “SHIPPING

MODE ON, PUSH STORAGE FUSE” warning

may appear on the vehicle information

display (if so equipped). See “Vehicle

information display” (P.2-20).

If any electrical equipment does not

operate, remove the extended storage

fuse switch and check for an open fuse.

NOTE:

If the extended storage fuse switch

malfunctions or if the fuse is open, it is

not necessary to replace the switch. In

this case, remove the extended storage

fuse switch and replace it with a new

fuse of the same rating.

How to remove the extended storage

fuse switch:

1. To remove the extended storage fuse

switch, be sure the ignition switch is in

the OFF or LOCK position.

2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the

OFF position.

3. Remove the fuse box cover.

4. Pinch the locking tabs

found on

each side of the storage fuse switch.

5. Pull the storage fuse switch straight

out from the fuse box

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to

swallow the battery and removed

parts.

Do-it-yourself 8-21

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT

8-22 Do-it-yourself

SDI2451

Replace the battery as follows:

1. Release the lock knob at the back of

the Intelligent Key and remove the

mechanical key.

2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit

of the corner and twist it to separate

the upper part from the lower part.

Use a cloth to protect the casing.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery: CR2025 or

equivalent.

Do not touch the internal circuit

and electric terminals as it could

cause a malfunction.

Hold the battery by the edges.

Holding the battery across the

contact points will seriously deplete

the storage capacity.

Make sure that the + side faces the

bottom of the case.

SDI2452

4. Align the tips of the upper and lower

parts

, and then push them together

until it is securely closed

5. Push the buttons two or three times

to check its operation.

If you need any assistance for replace-

ment, it is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference,

and (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

Note: Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Ca-

nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) this device may not

cause interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation of the device.

Do-it-yourself 8-23

8-24 Do-it-yourself

JVM0727X

1. Front turn signal light

2. Front side marker light

3. Front map light

4. Headlight (high beam)

5. Front parking light/Daytime running light

6. Front fog light (if so equipped)

7. Headlight (low-beam)

8. Puddle light (if so equipped)

9. Step light (if so equipped)

10. Side turn signal light

11. Tail light

12. Cargo light

13. High-mounted stop light

14. Rear personal light

15. Rear side marker light

16. Stop light

17. Rear turn signal light

18. Back-up light

19. License plate light

HEADLIGHTS

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens

of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car

wash. A temperature difference between

the inside and the outside of the lens

causes the fog. This is not a malfunction.

If large drops of water collect inside the

lens, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

LIGHTS

Replacing

LED headlight:

If replacement is required, it is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

Halogen headlight bulb:

The headlight (high-beam) is a semi-

sealed beam type which uses a replace-

able headlight (halogen) bulb.

CAUTION

. Do not leave the bulb out of the

headlight reflector for a long

period of time. Dust, moisture,

smoke, etc. entering the head-

light body may affect bulb per-

formance.

. High pressure halogen gas is

sealed inside the halogen bulb.

The bulb may break if the glass

envelope is scratched or the bulb

is dropped.

. Only touch the plastic base when

handling the bulb. Never touch

the glass envelope.

. Aiming is not necessary after

replacing the bulb. When aiming

adjustment is necessary, it is

recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Use the same number and wattage as

originally installed as shown in the chart.

JVM0823X

The high-beam headlight can be replaced

from inside the engine compartment

without removing the headlight assem-

bly.

Do-it-yourself 8-25

8-26 Do-it-yourself

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.

Headlight

High-beam (Halogen) 65

Low-beam*

LED

—

Front turn signal light 28/8 7444NA

Fog light (if so equipped) 35 H8

Front parking light* LED —

Front side marker light* LED

—

Side turn signal light* LED

—

Rear combination light

tail* LED —

back-up 16 W16W

stop 21 W21W

side marker* LED —

turn signal 21 WY21W

License plate light 5 W5W

Puddle light* (if so equipped) LED —

Map light* LED —

Rear personal light 8 —

Cargo light 8 —

Vanity mirror light 1.8 —

Step light (if so equipped) 5 —

Footwell light* (if so equipped) 1.4

—

Glove box light* 1.4

—

High-mounted stop light* LED —

*: It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for replacement.

NOTE: Always check with the Parts Depart-

ment at a NISSAN dealer for the latest

information about parts.

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C, D, E

or F. When replacing a bulb, first remove

the lens and/or cover.

SDI1679

JVM0825X

Front turn signal light

Do-it-yourself 8-27

8-28 Do-it-yourself

SDI2628

Front fog light (if so equipped)

1. Remove the screws and the bolts

using a suitable tool.

2. Remove the clips

and remove the

wheel house inner cover

JVM0335X

Rear combination light (turn signal and stop)

1. Remove the cover by pulling it back-

ward.

2. Remove the bolts

, and gradually pry the

rear combination light whole unit

out-

ward.

SDI2524

Back-up light

Remove the cover on the inside of the

liftgate.

SDI2525

License plate light

SDI2031

Rear personal light

SDI1729

Cargo light

SDI2277

Step light (if so equipped)

SDI2032

Vanity mirror light

Do-it-yourself 8-29

8-30 Do-it-yourself

If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” (P.6-

3).

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It

monitors tire pressure of all tires except

the spare. When the low tire pressure

warning light is lit and the CHECK TIRE

PRESSURE warning appears in the vehicle

information display, one or more of your

tires is significantly under-inflated.

The TPMS will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH

(25 km/h). Also, this system may not

detect a sudden drop in tire pressure

(for example, a flat tire while driving).

For more details, see “Low tire pressure

warning light” (P.2-15), “Tire Pressure Mon-

itoring System (TPMS)” (P.5-5) and “Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ” (P.6-

3).

Tire inflation pressure

Check the pressure of the tires

(including the spare) often and al-

ways prior to long distance trips.

The recommended tire pressure

specifications are shown on the

Tire and Loading Information label

under the “Cold Tire Pressure”

heading. The Tire and Loading In-

formation label is affixed to the

driver side center pillar. Tire pres-

sures should be checked regularly

because:

. Most tires naturally lose air over

time.

. Tires can lose air suddenly when

driven over potholes or other

objects or if the vehicle strikes

a curb while parking.

The tire pressures should be

checked when the tires are cold.

The tires are considered COLD after

the vehicle has been parked for 3 or

more hours, or driven less than 1

mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.

TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert pro-

vides visual and audible signals

outside the vehicle for inflating the

tires to the recommended COLD

tire pressure. (See “TPMS with Easy

Fill Tire Alert” (P.5-8).)

Incorrect tire pressure, including

under inflation, may adversely

affect tire life and vehicle hand-

ling.

WARNING

. Improperly inflated tires can

fail suddenly and cause an

accident.

. The Gross Vehicle Weight

rating (GVWR) is located on

the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. cer-

tification label. The vehicle

weight capacity is indicated

on the Tire and Loading In-

formation label. Do not load

your vehicle beyond this ca-

pacity. Overloading your ve-

hicle may result in reduced

tire life, unsafe operating

conditions due to premature

tire failure, or unfavorable

WHEELS AND TIRES

handling characteristics and

could also lead to a serious

accident. Loading beyond

the specified capacity may

also result in failure of other

vehicle components.

. Before taking a long trip, or

whenever you heavily load

your vehicle, use a tire pres-

sure gauge to ensure that

the tire pressures are at the

specified level.

. For additional information

regarding tires, refer to “Im-

portant Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (US) or “Tire Safety

Information” (Canada) in the

Warranty Information Book-

let.

Do-it-yourself 8-31

8-32 Do-it-yourself

SDI2496

Tire and Loading Information label

Seating capacity: The max-

imum number of occu-

pants that can be seated

in the vehicle.

Vehicle load limit: See “Ve-

hicle loading information”

(P.10-13).

Original size: The size of

the tires originally installed

on the vehicle at the fac-

tory.

Cold tire pressure: Inflate

the tires to this pressure

when the tires are cold.

Tires are considered COLD

after the vehicle has been

parked for 3 or more hours,

or driven less than 1 mile

(1.6 km) at moderate

speeds. The recommended

cold tire inflation is set by

the manufacturer to pro-

vide the best balance of

tire wear, vehicle handling,

driveability, tire noise, etc.,

up to the vehicle’s GVWR.

Tire size — see “Tire label-

ing” (P.8-34).

Spare tire size or compact

spare tire size (if so

equipped)

SDI1949

Checking the tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from

the tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge

squarely onto the valve stem.

Do not press too hard or force

the valve stem sideways, or air

will escape. If the hissing sound

of air escaping from the tire is

heard while checking the pres-

sure, reposition the gauge to

eliminate this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the

gauge stem and compare it to

the specification shown on the

Tire and Loading Information

label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If

too much air is added, press the

core of the valve stem briefly

with the tip of the gauge stem to

release pressure. Recheck the

pressure and add or release air

as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other

tires, including the spare.

SIZE

COLD

TIRE IN-

FLATION

PRES-

SURE

FRONT

ORIGI-

NAL

TIRE

265/70R18

116H

240 kPa,

35 PSI

P275/60R20

114H

240 kPa,

35 PSI

P275/50R22

111H

240 kPa,

35 PSI

REAR

ORIGI-

NAL

TIRE

265/70R18

116H

240 kPa,

35 PSI

P275/60R20

114H

240 kPa,

35 PSI

P275/50R22

111H

240 kPa,

35 PSI

SPARE

TIRE

265/70R18

116H

240 kPa,

35 PSI

265/70R18

116M

350 kPa,

51 PSI

275/60R20

115M

240 kPa,

35 PSI

Do-it-yourself 8-33

8-34 Do-it-yourself

SDI1575

Example

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufac-

turers to place standardized infor-

mation on the sidewall of all tires.

This information identifies and de-

scribes the fundamental character-

istics of the tire and also provides

the tire identification number (TIN)

for safety standard certification.

The TIN can be used to identify

the tire in case of a recall.

SDI1606

Example

Tire size (example:

P215/60R16 94H)

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is

designed for passenger vehicles.

(Not all tires have this informa-

tion.)

2. Three-digit number (215): This

number gives the width in milli-

meters of the tire from sidewall

edge to sidewall edge.

3. Two-digit number (60): This

number, known as the aspect

ratio, gives the tire’s ratio of

height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (16): This

number is the wheel or rim

diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (94):

This number is the tire’s load

index. It is a measurement of

how much weight each tire can

support. You may not find this

information on all tires because

it is not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should

not drive the vehicle faster than

the tire speed rating.

JVM0694X

Example

TIN (Tire Identification

Number) for a new tire

(example: DOT XX XX XXX

XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “De-

partment of Transportation”.

The symbol can be placed

above, below or to the left or

right of the Tire Identification

Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s

identification mark

3. Two-digit code: Tire size

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional)

5. Four numbers represent the

week and year the tire was built.

For example, the numbers 3103

means the 31st week of 2003. If

these numbers are missing, then

look on the other sidewall of the

tire.

Tire ply composition and

material

The number of layers or

plies of rubber-coated fab-

ric in the tire.

Tire manufacturers also

must indicate the materials

in the tire, which include

steel, nylon, polyester, and

others.

Maximum permissible infla-

tion pressure

This number is the greatest

amount of air pressure

that should be put in the

tire. Do not exceed the

maximum permissible in-

flation pressure.

Maximum load rating

This number indicates the

maximum load in kilo-

grams and pounds that

can be carried by the tire.

When replacing the tires on

the vehicle, always use a

tire that has the same load

rating as the factory in-

stalled tire.

Term of “tubeless” or “tube

type”

Indicates whether the tire

requires an inner tube

(“tube type”) or not (“tube-

less”).

The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown,

if the tire has radial struc-

ture.

Manufacturer or brand

name

Manufacturer or brand

name is shown.

Do-it-yourself 8-35

8-36 Do-it-yourself

Other tire-related terminology:

In addition to the many terms that

are defined throughout this sec-

tion, Intended Outboard Sidewall is

(1) the sidewall that contains a

whitewall, bears white lettering or

bears manufacturer, brand and/or

model name molding that is higher

or deeper than the same molding

on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(2) the outward facing sidewall of

an asymmetrical tire that has a

particular side that must always

face outward when mounted on a

vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

. When changing or replacing tires,

be sure all four tires are of the

same type (Example: Summer, All

Season or Snow) and construc-

tion. A NISSAN dealer may be able

to help you with information

about tire type, size, speed rating

and availability.

. Replacement tires may have a

lower speed rating than the fac-

tory equipped tires, and may not

match the potential maximum

vehicle speed. Never exceed the

maximum speed rating of the

tire.

. Replacing tires with those not

originally specified by NISSAN

could affect the proper operation

of the TPMS.

. For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information” (Cana-

da) in the Warranty Information

Booklet.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies all season tires on some

models to provide good performance all

year, including snowy and icy road con-

ditions. All Season tires are identified by

ALL SEASON and/or M&S (Mud and Snow)

on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have

better snow traction than All Season tires

and may be more appropriate in some

areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some

models to provide superior performance

on dry roads. Summer tire performance is

substantially reduced in snow and ice.

Summer tires do not have the tire trac-

tion rating M&S on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in

snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recom-

mends the use of SNOW tires or ALL

SEASON tires on all four wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to

select tires equivalent in size and load

rating to the original equipment tires. If

you do not, it can adversely affect the

safety and handling of your vehicle.

Generally, snow tires will have lower

speed ratings than factory equipped tires

and may not match the potential max-

imum vehicle speed. Never exceed the

maximum speed rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the

same size, brand, construction and tread

pattern on all four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads,

studded tires may be used. However,

some U.S. states and Canadian provinces

prohibit their use. Check local, state and

provincial laws before installing studded

tires. Skid and traction capabilities of

studded snow tires, on wet or dry sur-

faces, may be poorer than that of non-

studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

Use of tire chains may be prohibited

according to location. Check the local

laws before installing tire chains. When

installing tire chains, make sure they are

the proper size for the tires on your

vehicle and are installed according to

the chain manufacturer’s suggestions.

Use only SAE Class S chains. Class “S”

chains are used on vehicles with re-

stricted tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles

that can use Class “S” chains are designed

to meet the SAE standard minimum

clearances between the tire and the

closest vehicle suspension or body com-

ponent required to accommodate the

use of a winter traction device (tire chains

or cables). The minimum clearances are

determined using the factory equipped

tire size. Other types may damage your

vehicle. Use chain tensioners when re-

commended by the tire chain manufac-

turer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links

of the tire chain must be secured or

removed to prevent the possibility of

whipping action damage to the fenders

or underbody. If possible, avoid fully load-

ing your vehicle when using tire chains. In

addition, drive at a reduced speed. Other-

wise, your vehicle may be damaged and/

or vehicle handling and performance may

be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on

the rear wheels and not on the front

wheels.

Never install tire chains on the full-size

temporary use only spare tire (if so

equipped).

Do not use tire chains on dry roads.

Driving with tire chains in such conditions

can cause damage to the various me-

chanisms of the vehicle due to some

overstress.

SDI1662

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the

tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

(See “Flat tire” (P.6-3) for tire repla-

cing procedures.)

As soon as possible, tighten the

wheel nuts to the specified torque

with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

98 ft-lb (133 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept

tightened to the specification at

Do-it-yourself 8-37

8-38 Do-it-yourself

all times. It is recommended that

wheel nuts be tightened to the

specification at each tire rotation

interval.

WARNING

. After rotating the tires,

check and adjust the tire

pressure.

. Retighten the wheel nuts

when the vehicle has been

driven for 600 miles (1,000

km) (also in cases of a flat

tire, etc.).

. Do not include the full-size

temporary use only spare

tire (if so equipped) in the

tire rotation.

. For additional information

regarding tires, refer to “Im-

portant Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (US) or “Tire Safety

Information” (Canada) in the

Warranty Information Book-

let.

SDI1663

1. Wear indicator

2. Wear indicator location

mark

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

. Tires should be periodically

inspected for wear, cracking,

bulging or objects caught in

the tread. If excessive wear,

cracks, bulging or deep cuts

are found, the tire(s) should

be replaced.

. The original tires have built-

in tread wear indicators.

When wear indicators are

visible, the tire(s) should be

replaced.

. Tires degrade with age and

use. Have tires, including the

spare, over 6 years old

checked by a qualified tech-

nician, because some tire

damage may not be ob-

vious. Replace the tires as

necessary to prevent tire

failure and possible perso-

nal injury.

. Improper service of the

spare tire may result in ser-

ious personal injury. If it is

necessary to repair the

spare tire, it is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

. For additional information

regarding tires, refer to “Im-

portant Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (US) or “Tire Safety

Information” (Canada) in the

Warranty Information Book-

let.

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size,

tread design, speed rating and load

carrying capacity as originally equipped.

(See “Specifications” (P.10-7) for recom-

mended types and sizes of tires and

wheels.)

WARNING

. The use of tires other than those

recommended or the mixed use

of tires of different brands, con-

struction (bias, bias-belted or ra-

dial), or tread patterns can

adversely affect the ride, braking,

handling, ground clearance,

body-to-tire clearance, tire chain

clearance, speedometer calibra-

tion, headlight aim and bumper

height. Some of these effects

may lead to accidents and could

result in serious personal injury.

. For Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) mod-

els, if your vehicle was originally

equipped with 4 tires that were

the same size and you are only

replacing 2 of the 4 tires, install

the new tires on the rear axle.

Placing new tires on the front

axle may cause loss of vehicle

control in some driving condi-

tions and cause an accident and

personal injury.

. If the wheels are changed for any

reason, always replace with

wheels which have the same off-

set dimension. Wheels of a differ-

ent off-set could cause prema-

ture tire wear, degrade vehicle

handling characteristics and/or

interference with the brake

discs/drums. Such interference

can lead to decreased braking

efficiency and/or early brake

pad/shoe wear. See “Wheels and

tires” (P.10-8) for wheel off-set

dimensions.

. Since the spare tire is not

equipped with the TPMS, when a

spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, the TPMS will not

function and the low tire pressure

warning light will flash for ap-

proximately 1 minute. The light

will remain on after 1 minute.

Have your tires replaced and/or

TPMS system reset as soon as

possible. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for these

services.

. Replacing tires with those not

originally specified by NISSAN

could affect the proper operation

of the TPMS.

. The TPMS sensor may be da-

maged if it is not handled cor-

rectly. Be careful when handling

the TPMS sensor.

. When replacing the TPMS sensor,

the ID registration may be re-

quired. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for ID regis-

tration.

. Do not use a valve stem cap that

is not specified by NISSAN. The

valve stem cap may become

stuck.

. Be sure that the valve stem caps

are correctly fitted. Otherwise the

valve may be clogged up with dirt

and cause a malfunction or loss

of pressure.

. Do not install a damaged or

deformed wheel or tire even if it

has been repaired. Such wheels

or tires could have structural

damage and could fail without

warning.

Do-it-yourself 8-39

8-40 Do-it-yourself

. The use of retread tire is not

recommended.

. For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information” (Cana-

da) in the Warranty Information

Booklet.

Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) models

CAUTION

. Always use tires of the same type,

size, brand, construction (bias,

bias-belted or radial), and tread

pattern on all four wheels. Failure

to do so may result in a circum-

ference difference between tires

on the front and rear axles which

will cause excessive tire wear and

may damage the transmission,

transfer case and differential

gears.

. ONLY use spare tires specified for

the 4WD model.

If excessive tire wear is found, it is

recommended that all four tires be re-

placed with tires of the same size, brand,

construction and tread pattern. The tire

pressure and wheel alignment should

also be checked and corrected as neces-

sary. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle

handling and tire life. Even with regular

use, wheels can get out of balance.

Therefore, they should be balanced as

required.

Wheel balance service should be per-

formed with the wheels off the vehicle.

Spin balancing the wheels on the vehi-

cle could lead to mechanical damage.

For additional information regarding tires,

refer to “Important Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (US) or “Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the NISSAN Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

Care of wheels

See “Cleaning exterior” (P.7-2) for details

about care of the wheels.

Spare tire

Since the spare tire is not equipped with

the TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted

(TEMPORARY USE ONLY or conventional),

the TPMS will not function.

Spare tire (FULL-SIZE TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire) (Applies ONLY to vehi-

cles equipped with P275/50R22 or

P275/60R20 tires):

Observe the following precautions if the

full-size temporary use only spare tire

must be used, otherwise your vehicle

could be damaged or involved in an

accident.

WARNING

. The full-size temporary use only

spare tire should be used for

emergency use. It should be re-

placed with the standard tire at

the first opportunity to avoid

possible tire or differential da-

mage.

. Drive carefully while the spare tire

is installed. Avoid sharp turns and

abrupt braking while driving. The

vehicle driving performance may

be affected when driving on wet

or snow covered roads.

. When the spare tire is installed,

the following systems may not

work correctly.

— Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-

tem (TPMS)

— Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

System

. Periodically check spare tire in-

flation pressure. Always keep the

spare tire inflated to the pressure

specification shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label.

For Tire and Loading Information

label location, see “Tire and Load-

ing Information label” in the index

of this manual.

. With the spare tire installed do

not drive your vehicle at speeds

faster than 70 MPH (112 km/h).

. When driving on roads covered

with snow or ice, the spare tire

should be used on the front

wheels and original tire used on

the rear wheels (drive wheels).

Use tire chains only on the two

rear original tires.

. Do not use the spare tire on other

vehicles.

. Do not use more than one spare

tire at the same time.

CAUTION

Do not use tire chains on the spare

tire. Tire chains will not fit properly

and may cause damage to the vehi-

cle.

Do-it-yourself 8-41

8-42 Do-it-yourself

MEMO

9 Maintenance and schedules
Maintenance requirement ..................................................... 9-2
General maintenance ......................................................... 9-2
Scheduled maintenance .................................................. 9-2
Where to go for service .................................................... 9-2
General maintenance ................................................................ 9-2
Explanation of maintenance items ......................... 9-2
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ...... 9-5
Emission control system maintenance ................ 9-5
Chassis and body maintenance ................................ 9-6
Maintenance schedules .......................................................... 9-7
Additional maintenance items for severe
operating conditions ........................................................ 9-7
Standard maintenance ........................................................... 9-7
Standard maintenance ................................................... 9-8
Maintenance under severe
driving conditions ..................................................................... 9-10
Maintenance log ........................................................................ 9-11

9-2 Maintenance and schedules

Some day-to-day and regular mainte-

nance is essential to maintain your vehi-

cle in good mechanical condition, as well

as its emission and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make

sure that the scheduled maintenance, as

well as general maintenance, is per-

formed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one

who can ensure that your vehicle receives

the proper maintenance. You are a vital

link in the maintenance chain.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

General maintenance includes those

items which should be checked during

normal day-to-day operation. They are

essential for proper vehicle operation. It is

your responsibility to perform these pro-

cedures regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks

requires minimal mechanical skill and

only a few general automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done

by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you

prefer, a NISSAN dealer.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

The maintenance items listed in this

section are required to be serviced at

regular intervals. However, under severe

driving conditions, additional or more

frequent maintenance will be required.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE

If maintenance service is required or your

vehicle appears to malfunction, have the

systems checked and serviced. It is re-

commended you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained spe-

cialists and are kept up to date with the

latest service information through tech-

nical bulletins, service tips and training

programs. They are completely qualified

to work on NISSAN vehicles before work

begins.

If your vehicle is involved in a collision, it is

recommended that you ask your NISSAN

dealer where the nearest NISSAN Certified

Collision Center is located, or go to http://

collision.nissanusa.com.

You can be confident that a NISSAN

dealer’s service department can perform

the service needed to meet the mainte-

nance requirements on your vehicle.

During the normal day-to-day operation

of the vehicle, general maintenance

should be performed regularly as pre-

scribed in this section. If you detect any

unusual sounds, vibrations or smells, be

sure to check for the cause and have it

checked promptly. In addition, it is re-

commended you visit a NISSAN dealer if

you think that repairs are required.

When performing any checks or mainte-

nance work, closely observe “Mainte-

nance precautions” (P.8-2) of this manual.

EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCE

ITEMS

Additional information on the following

items with “*” is found in the “8. Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be performed from time to time, unless

otherwise specified.

Doors and engine hood: Check that all

doors and the engine hood, operate

properly. Also ensure that all latches lock

securely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch

pins, rollers and links if necessary. Make

sure that the secondary latch keeps the

hood from opening when the primary

latch is released.

When driving in areas using road salt or

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENT GENERAL MAINTENANCE

other corrosive materials, check lubrica-

tion frequently.

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular

basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop

lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and

other lights are all operating properly and

installed securely. Also check headlight

aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When

checking the tires, make sure no wheel

nuts are missing, and check for any loose

wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated

every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge

often and always prior to long distance

trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in

all tires, including the spare, to the

pressure specified. Check carefully for

damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

transmitter components: Replace the

TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve

core and cap when the tires are replaced

due to wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance: If the

vehicle should pull to either side while

driving on a straight and level road, or if

you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear,

there may be a need for wheel alignment.

If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at

normal highway speeds, wheel balancing

may be needed.

For additional information regarding tires,

refer to “Important Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (US) or “Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the NISSAN Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on a

regular basis. Check the windshield at

least every six months for cracks or other

damage. Have a damaged windshield

repaired by a qualified repair facility. It is

recommended that you have a damaged

windshield repaired by a NISSAN dealer, or

a NISSAN Certified Collision Center. To

locate a collision center in your area, refer

to http://collision.nissanusa.com.

Windshield wiper blades*: Check for

cracks or wear if they do not wipe

properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be checked on a regular basis, such as

when performing scheduled mainte-

nance, cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for

smooth operation and make sure the

pedal does not catch or require uneven

effort. Keep the floor mat away from the

pedal.

Automatic transmission P (Park) me-

chanism: On a fairly steep hill, check that

your vehicle is held securely with the shift

lever in the P (Park) position without

applying any brakes.

Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth

operation. If the brake pedal suddenly

goes down further than normal, the pedal

feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take

longer to stop, have your vehicle checked

immediately. It is recommended you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the

floor mat away from the pedal.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull

the vehicle to one side when applied.

Parking brake: Check the parking brake

operation regularly. The vehicle should be

securely held on a fairly steep hill with

only the parking brake applied. If the

parking brake needs adjusted, it is re-

commended you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Seats: Check seat position controls such

as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to

ensure they operate smoothly and that all

latches lock securely in every position.

Check that the head restraints move up

and down smoothly and that the locks (if

so equipped) hold securely in all latched

positions.

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat

Maintenance and schedules 9-3

9-4 Maintenance and schedules

belt system (for example, buckles, an-

chors, adjuster and retractors) operate

properly and smoothly, and are installed

securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts,

fraying, wear or damage.

Steering wheel: Check for changes in the

steering conditions, such as excessive

free play, hard steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes: Make sure

that all warning lights and chimes are

operating properly.

Windshield defroster: Check that the air

comes out of the defroster outlets prop-

erly and in sufficient quantity when oper-

ating the heater or air conditioner.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Check

that the wipers and washer operate

properly and that the wipers do not

streak.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be checked periodically (for example,

each time you check the engine oil or

refuel).

Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell.

It should be between the MAX and MIN

lines. Vehicles operated in high tempera-

tures or under severe condition require

frequent checks of the battery fluid level.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery dis-

charge and potential no-start condi-

tions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume

battery power when the engine is

not running (Phone chargers, GPS,

DVD players, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/

or only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to

be charged to maintain battery health.

Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the

brake fluid level is between the MAX and

MIN lines on the reservoir.

Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant

level when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts*: Make sure that no

belt is frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level*: Check the level after

parking the vehicle on a level spot and

turning off the engine. Wait more than 15

minutes for the oil to drain back into the

oil pan.

Exhaust system: Make sure there are no

loose supports, cracks or holes. If the

sound of the exhaust seems unusual or

there is a smell of exhaust fumes, im-

mediately have the exhaust system in-

spected. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service. (See “Pre-

cautions when starting and driving” (P.5-

4) for exhaust gas (carbon monoxide).)

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for

fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the

vehicle has been parked for a while. Water

dripping from the air conditioner after use

is normal. If you should notice any leaks

or if gasoline fumes are evident, check for

the cause and have it corrected immedi-

ately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines:

Check the level when the fluid is cold, with

the engine off. Check the lines for proper

attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses: Check the front of

the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects,

leaves, etc., that may have accumulated.

Make sure the hoses have no cracks,

deformation, rot or loose connections.

Underbody: The underbody is frequently

exposed to corrosive substances such as

those used on icy roads or to control

dust. It is very important to remove these

substances, otherwise rust will form on

the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around

the exhaust system. At the end of winter,

the underbody should be thoroughly

flushed with plain water, being careful to

clean those areas where mud and dirt

may accumulate. For additional informa-

tion, see “Cleaning exterior” (P.7-2).

Windshield washer fluid*: Check that

there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.

The following descriptions are provided

to give you a better understanding of the

scheduled maintenance items that

should be regularly checked or replaced.

The maintenance schedule indicates at

which mileage/time intervals each item

requires service.

In addition to scheduled maintenance,

your vehicle requires that some items be

checked during normal day-to-day op-

eration. Refer to “General maintenance”

(P.9-2).

Items marked with “*” are recommended

by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation.

You are not required to perform main-

tenance on these items in order to

maintain the warranties which come with

your vehicle. Other maintenance items

and intervals are required.

When applicable, additional information

can be found in the “8. Do-it yourself”

section of this manual.

NOTE:

NISSAN does not advocate the use of

non-OEM approved aftermarket flush-

ing systems and strongly advises

against performing these services on a

NISSAN product. Many of the aftermar-

ket flushing systems use non-OEM ap-

proved chemicals or solvents, the use of

which has not been validated by

NISSAN.

For recommended fuel, lubricants,

fluids, grease, and refrigerant, refer to

“Capacities and recommended fluids/

lubricants” (P.10-2) of this manual.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAIN-

TENANCE

Drive belts*:

Check engine drive belts for wear, fraying

or cracking and for proper tension. Re-

place any damaged drive belts.

Engine air filter:

Replace at specified intervals. When driv-

ing for prolonged periods in dusty condi-

tions, check/replace the filter more

frequently.

Engine coolant*:

Replace coolant at the specified interval.

When adding or replacing coolant, be

sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equiva-

lent with the proper mixture. (Refer to

“Engine cooling system” (P.8-4) to deter-

mine the proper mixture for your area.)

NOTE:

Mixing any other type of coolant or the

use of non-distilled water may reduce

the recommended service interval of

the coolant.

Maintenance and schedules 9-5

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

9-6 Maintenance and schedules

Engine oil and oil filter:

Replace engine oil and oil filter at the

specified intervals. For recommended oil

grade and viscosity refer to “Capacities

and recommended fluids/lubricants”

(P.10-2).

Evaporative Emissions Control Vapor

Lines*:

Check vapor lines for leaks or looseness.

Tighten connections or replace parts as

necessary.

Fuel lines*:

Check the fuel hoses, piping and connec-

tions for leaks, looseness, or deterioration.

Tighten connections or replace parts as

necessary.

Spark plugs:

Replace at specified intervals. Install new

plugs of the type as originally equipped.

CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE

Brake lines and cables:

Visually inspect for proper installation.

Check for chafing, cracks, deterioration,

and signs of leaking. Replace any deterio-

rated or damaged parts immediately.

Brake pads and rotors:

Check for wear, deterioration and fluid

leaks. Replace any deteriorated or da-

maged parts immediately.

Exhaust system:

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler

and hangers for leaks, cracks, deteriora-

tion, and damage. Tighten connections or

replace parts as necessary.

Propeller shaft(s):

Check for damage, looseness, and grease

leakage.

In-cabin microfilter:

Replace at specified intervals. When driv-

ing for prolonged periods in dusty condi-

tions, replace the filter more frequently.

Steering gear and linkage, axle and

suspension parts:

Check for damage, looseness, and leak-

age of oil or grease. Under severe driving

conditions, inspect more frequently.

Tire rotation:

Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles

(12,000 km). When rotating tires, check for

damage and uneven wear. Replace if

necessary.

Transmission fluid/oil, differential oil:

Visually inspect for signs of leakage at

specified intervals.

Off-road maintenance:

Check the following items frequently

whenever you drive off-road through

deep sand, mud or water:

. Brake pads and rotors

. Brake linings and drums

. Brake lines and hoses

. Differential, transmission and transfer

case oil

. Steering linkage

. Propeller shaft(s) and front drive

shafts

. Engine air filter

. Clutch housing drain (AWD only)

To help ensure smooth, safe and eco-

nomical driving, NISSAN provides two

maintenance schedules that may be

used, depending upon the conditions in

which you usually drive. These schedules

contain both distance and time intervals,

up to 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96

months. For most people, the odometer

reading will indicate when service is

needed. However, if you drive very little,

your vehicle should be serviced at the

regular time intervals shown in the sche-

dule.

After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96

months, continue maintenance at the

same mileage/time intervals.

ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS

FOR SEVERE OPERATING CONDI-

TIONS

Additional maintenance items for se-

vere operating conditions; should be

performed on vehicles that are driven

under especially demanding conditions.

Additional maintenance items should be

performed if you primarily operate your

vehicle under the following conditions:

. Repeated short trips of less than 5

miles (8 km).

. Repeated short trips of less than 10

miles (16 km) with outside tempera-

tures remaining below freezing.

. Operating in hot weather in stop-and-

go “rush hour” traffic.

. Extensive idling and/or low speed

driving for long distances, such as

police, taxi or door-to-door delivery

use.

. Driving in dusty conditions.

. Driving on rough, muddy or salt

spread roads.

. Towing a trailer, or using a camper or

car-top carrier.

NOTE:

For vehicles operated in Canada, both

standard and severe maintenance

items should be performed at every

interval.

The following tables show the standard

maintenance schedule. Depending upon

weather and atmospheric conditions,

varying road surfaces, individual driving

habits and vehicle usage, additional or

more frequent maintenance may be re-

quired.

After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96

months, continue maintenance at the

same mileage/time intervals.

Maintenance and schedules 9-7

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES STANDARD MAINTENANCE

9-8 Maintenance and schedules

STANDARD MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace, L = Lubricate

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months,

whichever comes first.

Miles × 1,000

(km × 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

7.5

(12)

(24)

22.5

(36)

(48)

37.5

(60)

(72)

52.5

(84)

(96)

67.5

(108)

(120)

82.5

(132)

(144)

97.5

(156)

105

(168)

112.5

(180)

120

(192)

Air cleaner filter NOTE (1) R R R

Automatic transmission fluid NOTE (2)

Brake fluid$ RR R

Brake lines and cables II II I I I

Brake pads and rotors$ II II I I I

Drive belts NOTE (3) I* I* I* I*

Engine coolant* NOTE (4)(5)

Engine oil & oil filter$ RRR R R R R R R R R R R R R

EVAP vapor lines & Fuel lines I* I* I*

Exhaust system$ II I

Fuel filter NOTE (2)

In-cabin microfilter RR RR R R R

Intake & exhaust valve clearance NOTE (6)

Intelligent Key battery IRRRR

Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD models)$ II II I I I

Propeller shaft grease (4WD models) L L L L L L L

Spark plugs NOTE (7)

Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts$ II I

Tire rotation NOTE (8)

Transfer

fluid & differential gear oil See NOTE (9) I I I I I I I

NOTE:

Maintenance items with “$” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance under severe driving conditions”

(P.9-10).

(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.

(2) Periodic maintenance is not required.

(3) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if

found damaged.

(4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles

(120,000 km) or 60 months.

(5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and

50% demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life

expectancy of the factory fill coolant.

(6) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance.

(7) Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 0.053 in (1.35 mm) even if within specified replacement mileage.

(8) Refer to “Tire rotation” under “General maintenance” (P.9-2).

(9) If towing a trailer, using a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 20,000

miles (32,000 km) or 24 months.

*: Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not

perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance

items and intervals are required.

Maintenance and schedules 9-9

9-10 Maintenance and schedules

The maintenance intervals shown on the

preceding pages are for normal operating

conditions. If the vehicle is mainly oper-

ated under severe driving conditions as

shown below, more frequent mainte-

nance must be performed on the follow-

ing items as shown in the table.

Severe driving conditions

. Repeated short trips of less than 5

miles (8 km).

. Repeated short trips of less than 10

miles (16 km) with outside tempera-

tures remaining below freezing.

. Operating in hot weather in stop-and-

go “rush hour” traffic.

. Extensive idling and/or low speed

driving for long distances, such as

police, taxi or door-to-door delivery

use.

. Driving in dusty conditions.

. Driving on rough, muddy, or salt

spread roads.

. Towing a trailer, or using a camper or

car-top carrier

Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect

and correct or replace as necessary.

Maintenance item Maintenance opera-

tion

Maintenance interval

Brake fluid Replace Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12

months

Brake pads & rotors Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6

months

Engine oil & oil filter Replace Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6

months

Exhaust system Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6

months

Propeller shaft & drive shaft

boots (4WD models)

Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6

months

Steering gear & linkage, axle &

suspension parts

Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6

months

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE

DRIVING CONDITIONS

7,500 Miles (12,000 km) or 6 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 12 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

22,500 Miles (36,000 km) or 18 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 24 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

37,500 Miles (60,000 km) or 30 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 36 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

52,500 Miles (84,000 km) or 42 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 48 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

67,500 Miles (108,000 km) or 54 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-11

MAINTENANCE LOG

9-12 Maintenance and schedules

75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 60 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

82,500 Miles (132,000 km) or 66 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 72 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

97,500 Miles (156,000 km) or 78 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or 84 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

112,500 Miles (180,000 km) or 90 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or 96 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

________ Miles (________ km) or ____ Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

________ Miles (________ km) or ____ Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

________ Miles (________ km) or ____ Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

________ Miles (________ km) or ____ Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

________ Miles (________ km) or ____ Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

________ Miles (________ km) or ____ Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

________ Miles (________ km) or ____ Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

________ Miles (________ km) or ____ Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

________ Miles (________ km) or ____ Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

________ Miles (________ km) or ____ Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

________ Miles (________ km) or ____ Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-13

9-14 Maintenance and schedules

________ Miles (________ km) or ____ Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

________ Miles (________ km) or ____ Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

________ Miles (________ km) or ____ Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

10 Technical and consumer information
Capacities and
recommended fluids/lubricants .................................... 10-2
Fuel information .................................................................. 10-3
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation........ 10-5
Air conditioning system refrigerant and
lubricant recommendations ...................................... 10-6
Specifications ................................................................................ 10-7
Engine .......................................................................................... 10-7
Wheels and tires .................................................................. 10-8
Dimensions .............................................................................. 10-9
When traveling or registering in
another country ..................................................................... 10-10
Vehicle identification .......................................................... 10-10
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) plate .............................................................................. 10-10
Vehicle identification number
(chassis number) ............................................................. 10-10
Engine serial number ................................................... 10-11
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ............. 10-11
Emission control information label .................. 10-11
Tire and loading information label ................... 10-12
Air conditioner specification label ..................... 10-12
Installing front license plate ......................................... 10-12
Vehicle loading information ......................................... 10-13
Terms ..................................................................................... 10-13
Vehicle load capacity ................................................ 10-14
Securing the load ......................................................... 10-15
Loading tips ...................................................................... 10-16
Measurement of weights ....................................... 10-16
Towing a trailer ...................................................................... 10-17
Maximum load limits ................................................. 10-17
Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)/
maximum Gross Axle Weight (GAW) .............. 10-19
Towing load/specification ..................................... 10-21
Towing safety ................................................................ 10-22
Flat towing ......................................................................... 10-29
Uniform tire quality grading ........................................ 10-30
Treadwear .......................................................................... 10-30
Traction AA, A, B and C ........................................... 10-30
Temperature A, B and C ......................................... 10-30
Emission control system warranty ......................... 10-31
Reporting safety defects ................................................ 10-31
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) test ....................................................................................... 10-32
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ......................................... 10-33
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual
order information ................................................................. 10-34

10-2 Technical and consumer information

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the

procedure instructed in the “8. Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fluid type

Capacity (approximate)

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

Metric

Measure

Imperial

Measure

Fuel 98.4 L 26 gal 21-5/8 gal ā See “Fuel information” (P.10-3).

Engine oil*1 With oil filter change 6.5 L 6-7/8 qt 5-3/4 qt ā Genuine “NISSAN Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” (or equivalent) is recom-

mended.

ā If the above motor oil (or engine oil) is not available, a synthetic

0W-20 GF-5 SN motor oil (or engine oil) may be used. Damage

caused by the use of motor oil (or engine oil) other than as

recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

For additional information, see “Engine oil and oil filter recom-

mendation” (P.10-5)

Drain and refill

*1: For additional informa-

tion, see “Changing engine

oil and filter” (P.8-6).

Without oil filter change 6.2 L 6-1/2 qt 5-1/2 qt

Engine coolant with reservoir 16.3 L 17-1/4 qt 14-3/8 qt ā Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)

or equivalent

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) — — — ā Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF

ā NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF ONLY in

NISSAN automatic transmissions. Do not mix with other fluids.

Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN Matic S

ATF may damage the automatic transmission. Damage caused

by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered

under the NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Transfer fluid — — — ā Genuine NISSAN Transfer Fluid for ATX90A transfer

ā Using transfer fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Transfer Fluid

may damage the transfer, which is not covered by the NISSAN

New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Front differential gear oil — — — ā Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or

equivalent conventional (non-synthetic) oil

Rear differential gear oil — — — ā Genuine NISSAN HYPOID FLUID · S1 GL-5 75W-80 or equivalent

Power steering fluid (PSF) Refill to the proper oil level according to the

instructions in the “8. Do-it-yourself” section.

ā Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent

ā DEXRON

VI type ATF may also be used.

Brake fluid ā Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*2 or equivalent

DOT 3

*2: Available in mainland U.S.A through a NISSAN dealer.

Multi-purpose grease — — — ā NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — ā HFC-134a (R-134a)

ā For additional information, see “Vehicle identification” (P.10-10) for

air conditioner specification label.

Air conditioning system lubricants — — — ā NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or exact equivalent

Window washer fluid — — — ā Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &

Antifreeze or equivalent

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED

FLUIDS/LUBRICANTS

FUEL INFORMATION

VK56VD engine

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an

octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-

Knock Index) number (Research octane

number 91).

CAUTION

. Using a fuel other than that spe-

cified could adversely affect the

emission control system, and

may also affect warranty cover-

age.

. Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because

this will damage the three-way

catalyst.

. Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in

your vehicle. Your vehicle is not

designed to run on E-15 or E-85

fuel. Using E-15 or E-85 fuel in a

vehicle not specifically designed

for E-15 or E-85 fuel can adversely

affect the emission control de-

vices and systems of the vehicle.

Damage caused by such fuel is

not covered by the NISSAN new

vehicle limited warranty.

. Do not use fuel that contains the

octane booster methylcyclopen-

tadienyl manganese tricarbonyl

(MMT). Using fuel containing

MMT may adversely affect vehicle

performance and vehicle emis-

sions. Not all fuel dispensers are

labeled to indicate MMT content,

so you may have to consult your

gasoline retailer for more details.

Note that Federal and California

laws prohibit the use of MMT in

reformulated gasoline.

. U.S. government regulations re-

quire ethanol dispensing pumps

to be identified by a small,

square, orange and black label

with the common abbreviation or

the appropriate percentage for

that region.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that

meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter

(WWFC) specifications where it is avail-

able. Many of the automobile manufac-

turers developed this specification to

improve emission system and vehicle

performance. Ask your service station

manager if the gasoline meets the

World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-

cations.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing

reformulated gasolines. These gasolines

are specially designed to reduce vehicle

emissions. NISSAN supports efforts to-

wards cleaner air and suggests that you

use reformulated gasoline when avail-

able.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain-

ing oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE

and methanol with or without advertising

their presence. NISSAN does not recom-

mend the use of fuels of which the

oxygenate content and the fuel compat-

ibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily

determined. If in doubt, ask your service

station manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline,

please take the following precautions as

the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle

performance problems and/or fuel sys-

tem damage.

. The fuel should be unleaded and

have an octane rating no lower than

that recommended for unleaded

gasoline.

. If an oxygenate-blend, excepting a

methanol blend, is used, it should

Technical and consumer information 10-3

10-4 Technical and consumer information

contain no more than 10% oxyge-

nate. (MTBE may, however, be added

up to 15%.)

. E-15 fuel contains more than 10%

oxygenate. E-15 fuel will adversely

affect the emission control devices

and systems of the vehicle and

should not be used. Damage caused

by such fuel is not covered by the

NISSAN new vehicle limited war-

ranty.

. If a methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 5% methanol

(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It

should also contain a suitable

amount of appropriate cosolvents

and corrosion inhibitors. If not prop-

erly formulated with appropriate

cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors,

such methanol blends may cause

fuel system damage and/or vehicle

performance problems. At this time,

sufficient data is not available to

ensure that all methanol blends are

suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles.

If any undesirable driveability problems

such as engine stalling or hard hot

starting are experienced after using oxy-

genate-blend fuels, immediately change

to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a

low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during

refueling. Gasoline containing oxyge-

nates can cause paint damage.

E-15 fuel

E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately

15% fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gaso-

line. E-15 can only be used in vehicles

designed to run on E-15 fuel. Do not use E-

15 in your vehicle. U.S. government reg-

ulations require fuel ethanol dispensing

pumps to be identified with small, square,

orange and black label with the common

abbreviation or the appropriate percen-

tage for that region.

E-85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately

85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gaso-

line. E-85 can only be used in a Flexible

Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 fuel in

your vehicle. U.S. government regulations

require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to

be identified by a small, square, orange

and black label with the common abbre-

viation or the appropriate percentage for

that region.

Fuel containing MMT

MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manga-

nese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting

additive. NISSAN does not recommend

the use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel

may adversely affect vehicle perfor-

mance, including the emissions control

system. Note that while some fuel pumps

label MMT content, not all do, so you may

have to consult your gasoline retailer for

more details.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of

any aftermarket fuel additives (Example:

fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, in-

take valve deposit removers, etc.) which

are sold commercially. Many of these

additives intended for gum, varnish or

deposit removal may contain active sol-

vent or similar ingredients that can be

harmful to the fuel system and engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating lower than recommended above

can cause persistent, heavy spark

knock. (Spark knock is a metallic rap-

ping noise.) If severe, this can lead to

engine damage. If you detect a persis-

tent heavy spark knock even when

using gasoline of the stated octane

rating, or if you hear steady spark knock

while holding a steady speed on level

roads, it is recommended you have a

NISSAN dealer correct the condition.

Failure to correct the condition is mis-

use of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is

not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing will result in

knocking, after-run or overheating. This

in turn may cause excessive fuel con-

sumption or damage to the engine. If any

of the above symptoms are encountered,

have your vehicle checked. It is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for

servicing.

However, now and then you may notice

light spark knock for a short time while

accelerating or driving up hills. This is

no cause for concern, because you get

the greatest fuel benefit when there is

light spark knock for a short time under

heavy engine load.

JVT0342X

API certification mark

API service symbol

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RE-

COMMENDATION

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade,

quality, and viscosity engine oil to ensure

satisfactory engine life and performance,

see “Capacities and recommended fluids/

lubricants” (P.10-2). NISSAN recommends

the use of an energy conserving oil in

order to improve fuel economy.

Select only engine oils that meet the

American Petroleum Institute (API) certifi-

cation or International Lubricant Standar-

dization and Approval Committee (ILSAC)

certification and SAE viscosity standard.

These oils have the API certification mark

on the front of the container. Oils which

do not have the specified quality label

should not be used as they could cause

engine damage.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of

oil additives. The use of an oil additive is

not necessary when the proper oil type is

used and maintenance intervals are fol-

lowed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or

has been previously used should not be

used.

Technical and consumer information 10-5

10-6 Technical and consumer information

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness

changes with temperature. Because of

this, it is important that the engine oil

viscosity be selected based on the tem-

peratures at which the vehicle will be

operated before the next oil change.

Choosing an oil viscosity other than that

recommended could cause serious en-

gine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new vehicle is equipped with a high-

quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When

replacing, use the genuine oil filter or its

equivalent for the reason described in

change intervals.

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals for

your engine are based on the use of the

specified quality oils and filters. Oil and

filter other than the specified quality, or

oil and filter change intervals longer than

recommended could reduce engine life.

Damage to engines caused by improper

maintenance or use of incorrect oil and

filter quality and/or viscosity is not cov-

ered by the new NISSAN vehicle limited

warranties.

Your engine was filled with a high quality

engine oil when it was built. You do not

have to change the oil before the first

recommended change interval. Oil and

filter change intervals depend upon how

you use your vehicle.

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM RE-

FRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT RE-

COMMENDATIONS

The air conditioning system in your

NISSAN vehicle must be charged with

the refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and

the lubricant, NISSAN A/C system oil

Type S or the exact equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or

lubricant may cause severe damage

to the air conditioning system and

may require the replacement of all

air conditioner system components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your

NISSAN vehicle will not harm the earth’s

ozone layer. Although this refrigerant

does not affect the earth’s atmosphere,

certain governmental regulations require

the recovery and recycling of any refrig-

erant during automotive air conditioning

system service. Your NISSAN dealer has

the trained technicians and equipment

needed to recover and recycle your air

conditioning system refrigerant.

It is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer when servicing your air condition-

ing system.

ENGINE

Model VK56VD

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle

Cylinder arrangement

8-cylinder, V-slanted at 90°

Bore × Stroke in (mm)

3.858 × 3.622 (98 × 92)

Displacement cu in (cm

) 338.78 (5,552)

Firing order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2

Idle speed rpm

See the emission control information

label on the underside of the hood.

Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) degree/rpm

Spark plug Standard DILKAR7B11

Spark plug gap (Normal)

in (mm)

0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

STI0397B

Technical and consumer information 10-7

SPECIFICATIONS

10-8 Technical and consumer information

WHEELS AND TIRES

Road wheel

Type Size Offset in (mm)

Conventional

18 × 8J

1.18 (30)

20 × 8J

22 × 8J

Spare

18 × 8J

20 × 8J

Tire

Type Size Pressure PSI (kPa) [Cold]

Conventional

265/70R18 116H

35 (240)

P275/60R20 114H

P275/50R22 111H

Spare

265/70R18 116H

265/70R18 116M

51 (350)

275/60R20 115M

35 (240)

DIMENSIONS

Overall length in (mm) 208.9 (5,305)

Overall width in (mm) 79.9 (2,030)

Overall height

in (mm) 75.8 (1,925)

Front tread in (mm) 67.5 (1,715)

Rear tread

in (mm) 67.9 (1,725)

Wheelbase in (mm) 121.1 (3,075)

Technical and consumer information 10-9

10-10 Technical and consumer information

If you plan to travel in another country,

you should first find out if the fuel

available is suitable for your vehicle’s

engine.

Using fuel with too low an octane rating

may cause engine damage. All gasoline

vehicles must be operated with unleaded

gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your

vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel

is not available.

When transferring the registration of

your vehicle to another country, state,

province or district, it may be necessary

to modify the vehicle to meet local laws

and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor

vehicle emission control and safety stan-

dards vary according to the country,

state, province or district; therefore, vehi-

cle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into

another country, state, province or dis-

trict and registered, its modifications,

transportation, and registration are the

responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not

responsible for any inconvenience that

may result.

STI0431

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number plate is

attached as shown. This number is the

identification for your vehicle and is used

in the vehicle registration.

STI0708

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(chassis number)

The number is stamped as shown.

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING

IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

STI0709

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as

shown.

STI0448

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION

LABEL

The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.)

certification label is affixed as shown. This

label contains valuable vehicle informa-

tion, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-

ings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR), month and year of manufacture,

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc.

Review it carefully.

STI0738

EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION

LABEL

The emission control information label is

attached as shown.

Technical and consumer information 10-11

10-12 Technical and consumer information

STI0494

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION

LABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on the

Tire and Loading Information label affixed

to the pillar as illustrated.

STI0739

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is

attached as shown.

To install the front license plate bracket

to your vehicle, it is recommended you

contact a NISSAN dealer.

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

WARNING

. It is extremely dangerous to

ride in a cargo area inside

the vehicle. In a collision,

people riding in these areas

are more likely to be ser-

iously injured or killed.

. Do not allow people to ride

in any area of vehicle that is

not equipped with seats and

seat belts.

. Be sure everyone in your

vehicle is in a seat and using

a seat belt properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize your-

self with the following terms before

loading your vehicle:

. Curb Weight (actual weight of

your vehicle) - vehicle weight

including: standard and optional

equipment, fluids, emergency

tools, and spare tire assembly.

This weight does not include

passengers and cargo.

. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) -

curb weight plus the combined

weight of passengers and cargo.

. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-

ing) - maximum total combined

weight of the unloaded vehicle,

passengers, luggage, hitch, trai-

ler tongue load and any other

optional equipment. This infor-

mation is located on the F.M.V.S.

S./C.M.V.S.S. label.

. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

- maximum weight (load) limit

specified for the front or rear

axle. This information is located

on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.

. GCWR (Gross Combined Weight

Rating) - The maximum total

weight rating of the vehicle,

passengers, cargo, and trailer.

. Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load

limit, Total load capacity - max-

imum total weight limit specified

of the load (passengers and

cargo) for the vehicle. This is

the maximum combined weight

of occupants and cargo that can

be loaded into the vehicle. If the

vehicle is used to tow a trailer,

the trailer tongue weight must

be included as part of the cargo

load. This information is located

on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label.

. Cargo capacity - permissible

weight of cargo, the weight of

total occupants weight sub-

tracted from the load limit.

Technical and consumer information 10-13

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

10-14 Technical and consumer information

STI0445

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your

vehicle shown as “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo” on

the Tire and Loading Information

label. Do not exceed the number of

occupants shown as “Seating Ca-

pacity” on the Tire and Loading

Information label.

To get “the combined weight of

occupants and cargo”, add the

weight of all occupants, then add

the total luggage weight. Examples

are shown in the illustration.

Steps for determining correct load

limit

1. Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX

kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s

placard.

2. Determine the combined weight

of the driver and passengers

that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight

of the driver and passengers

from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For ex-

ample, if the XXX amount equals

1400 lbs. and there will be five

150 lb. passengers in your vehi-

cle, the amount of available

cargo and luggage load capacity

is 650 lbs. (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) =

650 lbs) or (640 − 340 (5 x 70) =

300 kg.)

5. Determine the combined weight

of luggage and cargo being

loaded on the vehicle. That

weight may not safely exceed

the available cargo and luggage

load capacity calculated in Step

6. If your vehicle will be towing a

trailer, load from your trailer will

be transferred to your vehicle.

Consult this manual to deter-

mine how this reduces the avail-

able cargo and luggage load

capacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle,

confirm that you do not exceed

the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight

Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle. (See

“Measurement of weights” (P.10-16).)

Also check tires for proper inflation

pressures. See the Tire and Loading

Information label.

SIC4446

SECURING THE LOAD

There are tie down hooks located in the

cargo area as shown. The tie down hooks

can be used to secure cargo with ropes or

other types of straps.

Do not apply a total load of more than

22 lb (10 kg) to a single hook

or 7 lb (3

kg) to a single hook

when securing

cargo.

WARNING

. Properly secure all cargo with

ropes or straps to help prevent it

from sliding or shifting. Do not

Technical and consumer information 10-15

10-16 Technical and consumer information

place cargo higher than the seat-

backs. In a sudden stop or colli-

sion, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

. The child restraint top tether

strap may be damaged by con-

tact with items in the cargo area.

Secure any items in the cargo

area. Your child could be seriously

injured or killed in a collision if the

top tether strap is damaged.

. Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR or the

maximum front and rear GAWRs.

If you do, parts of your vehicle

can break, tire damage could

occur, or it can change the way

your vehicle handles. This could

result in loss of control and cause

personal injury.

LOADING TIPS

. The GVW must not exceed GVWR

or GAWR as specified on the F.M.

V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification la-

bel.

. Do not load the front and rear

axle to the GAWR. Doing so will

exceed the GVWR.

WARNING

. Properly secure all cargo to

help prevent it from sliding

or shifting. Do not place

cargo higher than the seat-

backs. In a sudden stop or

collision, unsecured cargo

could cause personal injury.

. Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR or

the maximum front and rear

GAWRs. If you do, parts of

your vehicle can break, tire

damage could occur, or it

can change the way your

vehicle handles. This could

result in loss of control and

cause personal injury.

. Overloading not only can

shorten the life of your ve-

hicle and the tire, but can

cause unsafe vehicle hand-

ling and long braking dis-

tance. This may cause a

premature tire failure, which

could result in a serious

accident and personal in-

jury. Failures caused by

overloading are not covered

by the vehicle’s warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent

weight shifts that could affect the

balance of your vehicle. When the

vehicle is loaded, drive to a scale

and weigh the front and the rear

wheels separately to determine

axle loads. Individual axle loads

should not exceed either of the

gross axle weight ratings (GAWR).

The total of the axle loads should

not exceed the gross vehicle

weight rating (GVWR). These ratings

are given on the vehicle certifica-

tion label. If weight ratings are

exceeded, move or remove items

to bring all weights below the

ratings.

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of a

trailer and its cargo can adversely

affect vehicle handling, braking and

performance and may lead to acci-

dents.

CAUTION

. Do not tow a trailer or haul a

heavy load for the first 500 miles

(800 km). Your engine, axle or

other parts could be damaged.

. For the first 500 miles (800 km)

that you tow a trailer, do not drive

over 50 MPH (80 km/h) and do

not make starts at full throttle.

This helps the engine and other

parts of your vehicle wear in at

the heavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be

used primarily to carry passengers and

cargo. Remember that towing a trailer

places additional loads on your vehicle’s

engine, drivetrain, steering, braking and

other systems.

A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is

available on the website at

www.nissanusa.com. This guide includes

information on trailer towing capability

and the special equipment required for

proper towing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS

Maximum trailer loads

Never allow the total trailer load to

exceed the value specified in the “Towing

load/specification” (P.10-21). The total trai-

ler load equals trailer weight plus its

cargo weight.

. When towing a trailer load of 3,500

lbs (1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a

brake system MUST be used.

The maximum Gross Combined Weight

Rating (GCWR) should not exceed the

value specified in the following “Towing

Load/Specification” chart.

STI0541

The GCWR equals the combined weight of

the towing vehicle (including passengers

and cargo) plus the total trailer load.

Towing loads greater than these or using

improper towing equipment could ad-

versely affect vehicle handling, braking

and performance.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer

is not only related to the maximum trailer

loads, but also the places you plan to tow.

Tow weights appropriate for level high-

way driving may have to be reduced on

very steep grades or for low traction

situations (for example, on slippery boat

ramps).

Temperature conditions can also affect

Technical and consumer information 10-17

TOWING A TRAILER

10-18 Technical and consumer information

towing. For example, towing a heavy

trailer in high outside temperatures on

graded roads can affect engine perfor-

mance and cause overheating. The trans-

mission high fluid temperature and

engine protection mode, which helps

reduce the chance of transmission and

engine damage, could activate and auto-

matically decrease engine power. Vehicle

speed may decrease under high load.

Plan your trip carefully to account for

trailer and vehicle load, weather and road

conditions.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced

engine power and vehicle speed.

The reduced speed may be lower

than other traffic, which could in-

crease the chance of a collision. Be

especially careful when driving. If the

vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv-

ing speed, pull to the side of the road

in a safe area. Allow the engine to

cool and return to normal operation.

See “If your vehicle overheats” (P.6-

14).

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from im-

proper towing procedures is not

covered by NISSAN warranties.

STI0542

Tongue load

When using a weight carrying or a weight

distributing hitch, keep the tongue load

between 10 to 15% of the total trailer load

or use the trailer tongue load specified by

the trailer manufacturer. The tongue load

must be within the maximum tongue

load limits shown in the following “Towing

Load/Specification” chart. If the tongue

load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo

to allow for proper tongue load.

TI1012M

MAXIMUM GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT

(GVW)/MAXIMUM GROSS AXLE

WEIGHT (GAW)

The GVW of the towing vehicle must not

exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label. The GVW equals the

combined weight of the unloaded vehicle,

passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue

load and any other optional equipment. In

addition, front or rear GAW must not

exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label.

Towing capacities are calculated assum-

ing a base vehicle with driver and any

options required to achieve the rating.

Additional passengers, cargo and/or op-

tional equipment, such as the trailer hitch,

will add weight to the vehicle and reduce

your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity

and trailer tongue load.

The vehicle and trailer need to be

weighed to confirm the vehicle is within

the GVWR, Front GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross

Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) and

Towing capacity.

All vehicle and trailer weights can be

measured using platform type scales

commonly found at truck stops, highway

weigh stations, building supply centers or

salvage yards.

To determine the available payload capa-

city for tongue/king pin load, use the

following procedure.

1. Locate the GVWR on the F.M.V.S.S./C.

M.V.S.S. certification label.

2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with

all of the passengers and cargo that

are normally in the vehicle when

towing a trailer.

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight

from the GVWR. The remaining

amount is the available maximum

tongue/king pin load.

To determine the available towing capa-

city, use the following procedure.

1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the

“Towing Load/Specification” chart

found later in this section.

2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight

from the GCWR. The remaining

amount is the available maximum

towing capacity.

To determine the Gross Trailer Weight,

weigh your trailer on a scale with all

equipment and cargo, that are normally

in the trailer when it is towed. Make sure

the Gross trailer weight is not more than

the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown on

the trailer and is not more than the

calculated available maximum towing

capacity.

Also weigh the front and rear axles on the

scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle

Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight are

not more than Front Gross Axle Weight

and Rear Gross Axle Weight on the F.M.V.S.

S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The cargo

in the trailer and vehicle may need to be

moved or removed to meet the specified

ratings.

Example:

. Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as

weighed on a scale - including pas-

sengers, cargo and hitch - 5,822 lb.

(2,641 kg).

Technical and consumer information 10-19

10-20 Technical and consumer information

. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

from F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label - 7,300 lb. (3,311 kg).

. Gross Combined Weight Rating

(GCWR) from “Towing Load/Specifica-

tion” chart - 14,700 lb. (6,668 kg).

. Maximum Trailer towing capacity

from “Towing Load/Specification”

chart - 8,500 lb. (3,856 kg).

7,300 lb. (3,311 kg)

GVWR

− 5,822 lb. (2,641 kg)

GVW

= 1,478 lb. (670 kg)

Available for tongue

weight

14,700 lb. (6,668 kg)

GCWR

− 5,822 lb. (2,641 kg)

GVW

= 8,878 lb. (4,027 kg)

Capacity available for

towing

1,478 lb. (670 kg) /

Available tongue

weight

8,878 lb. (4,027 kg)

Available capacity

= 11 % tongue weight

The available towing capacity may be less

than the maximum towing capacity due

to the passenger and cargo load in the

vehicle.

Remember to keep trailer tongue weight

between 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or

within the trailer tongue load specifica-

tion recommended by the trailer manu-

facturer. If the tongue load becomes

excessive, rearrange the cargo to obtain

the proper tongue load. Do not exceed

the maximum tongue weight specifica-

tion shown in the “Towing load/specifica-

tion” chart even if the calculated available

tongue weight is greater than 15%. If the

calculated tongue weight is less than 10%,

reduce the total trailer weight to match

the available tongue weight.

Always verify that available capacities are

within the required ratings.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION

WARNING

The towing capacities provided in

this manual are for general reference

only. The safe towing capacity of

your vehicle is affected by dealer

and factory installed options and

passenger and cargo loads. You

must weigh the vehicle and trailer

as described in this manual to de-

termine the actual vehicle towing

capacity. Do not exceed the pub-

lished maximum towing capacity, or

the GCWR or the GVWR shown on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification la-

bel. Doing so can result in an acci-

dent causing serious personal injury

or property damage.

Towing load/specification chart

Axle Type

Two-Wheel Drive (2WD)

Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)

Maximum Towing Capacity*1, *2 8,500 lb (3,856 kg)

Maximum Tongue Load 850 lb (385 kg)

Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rat-

ing

14,450 lb (6,554 kg)

14,700 lb (6,668 kg)

1: The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any

options required to achieve the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional

equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing

capacity.

2: Use of a weight-distributing hitch system is recommended when towing over 5,000 lb (2,267

kg).

Technical and consumer information 10-21

10-22 Technical and consumer information

TOWING SAFETY

Trailer hitch

Your vehicle is equipped with a trailer tow

package. The trailer tow package in-

cludes a receiver-type frame mounted

hitch. This hitch is rated for the maximum

towing capacity of this vehicle when the

proper towing equipment is used. Choose

a proper ball mount and hitch ball that is

rated for the trailer to be towed. Genuine

NISSAN ball mounts and hitch balls are

available from a NISSAN dealer.

JVT0457X

To access the trailer hitch , remove the

trailer hitch cover located on the lower

part of the rear bumper.

To remove the trailer hitch cover:

1. Remove the 2 bolts.

2. Pull the bottom of the cover straight

backward to remove the inner side

and upper clips.

JVT0458X

To install the trailer hitch cover:

1. Insert the upper clips to the recesses

, and then push in the cover to its

original position.

2. Install the 2 bolts

Bolt tightening torque:

2.2 to 3.3 ft-lb (3 to 4.4 N·m)

Do not use excessive force.

WARNING

Trailer hitch components have spe-

cific weight ratings. Your vehicle may

be capable of towing a trailer heavier

than the weight rating of the hitch

components. Never exceed the

weight rating of the hitch compo-

nents. Doing so can cause serious

personal injury or property damage.

Hitch ball

Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and

weight rating for your trailer:

. The required hitch ball size is stamped

on most trailer couplers. Most hitch

balls also have the size printed on top

of the ball.

. Choose the proper class hitch ball

based on the trailer weight.

. The diameter of the threaded shank of

the hitch ball must be matched to the

ball mount hole diameter. The hitch

ball shank should be no more than

1/16″ smaller than the hole in the ball

mount.

. The threaded shank of the hitch ball

must be long enough to be properly

secured to the ball mount. There

should be at least 2 threads showing

beyond the lock washer and nut.

Ball mount

The hitch ball is attached to the ball

mount and the ball mount is inserted into

the hitch receiver. Choose a proper class

ball mount based on the trailer weight.

Additionally, the ball mount should be

chosen to keep the trailer tongue level

with the ground.

Weight carrying hitches

A weight carrying or “dead weight” ball

mount is one that is designed to carry the

whole amount of tongue weight and

gross weight directly on the ball mount

and on the receiver.

Weight distribution hitch

This type of hitch is also called a “load-

leveling” or “equalizing” hitch. A set of bars

attach to the ball mount and to the trailer

to distribute the tongue weight (hitch

weight) of your trailer. Many vehicles

cannot carry the full tongue weight of a

given trailer, and need some of the

tongue weight transferred through the

frame and pushing down on the front

wheels. This gives stability to the tow

vehicle.

A weight-distributing hitch system (Class

IV) is recommended if you plan to tow

trailers with a maximum weight over

5,000 lbs (2,267 kg). Check with the trailer

Technical and consumer information 10-23

10-24 Technical and consumer information

and towing equipment manufacturers to

determine if they recommend the use of a

weight-distributing hitch system.

NOTE:

A weight-distributing hitch system may

affect the operation of trailer surge

brakes. If you are considering use of a

weight-distributing hitch system with a

surge brake-equipped trailer, check

with the surge brake, hitch or trailer

manufacturer to determine if and how

this can be done.

Follow the instructions provided by the

manufacturer for installing and using the

weight-distributing hitch system.

General set-up instructions are as follows:

1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level sur-

face. With the ignition switch in the ON

position and the doors closed, allow

the vehicle to stand for several min-

utes so that it can level.

2. Measure the height of a reference

point on the front and rear bumpers

at the center of the vehicle.

3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and

adjust the hitch equalizers so that the

front bumper height is within 0 - .5

inches (0 - 13 mm) of the reference

height measured in step 2. The rear

bumper should be no higher than the

reference height measured in step 2.

WARNING

Properly adjust the weight distribut-

ing hitch so the rear of the bumper is

no higher than the measured refer-

ence height when the trailer is at-

tached. If the rear bumper is higher

than the measured reference height

when loaded, the vehicle may handle

unpredictably which could cause a

loss of vehicle control and cause

serious personal injury or property

damage.

Sway control device

Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts and buf-

feting caused by other vehicles can affect

trailer handling. Sway control devices

may be used to help control these affects.

If you choose to use one, contact a

reputable trailer hitch supplier to make

sure the sway control device will work

with the vehicle, hitch, trailer and the

trailer’s brake system. Follow the instruc-

tions provided by the manufacturer for

installing and using the sway control

device.

Class I hitch

Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver,

ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to

tow trailers of a maximum weight of

2,000 lb (907 kg).

Class II hitch

Class II trailer hitch equipment (receiver,

ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to

tow trailers of a maximum weight of

3,500 lb (1,588 kg).

Class III hitch

Class III trailer hitch equipment (receiver,

ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to

tow trailers of a maximum weight of

5,000 lb (2,267 kg).

Class IV hitch

Class IV trailer hitch equipment (receiver,

ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to

tow trailers of a maximum weight of

10,000 lb (4,545 kg). A weight distributing

hitch should be used to tow trailers that

weigh over 5,000 lb (2,267 kg).

Your vehicle may be equipped with Class

IV trailer hitch equipment that has a

10,000 lb (4,545 kg) maximum weight

rating, but your vehicle is only capable of

towing the maximum trailer weights

shown in the “Towing Load/Specification”

chart earlier in this section.

CAUTION

. Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

. Do not modify the vehicle ex-

haust system, brake system, etc.

. Do not attach any additional

hitches to your vehicle because

a hitch is already mounted to

your vehicle frame.

Tire pressures

. When towing a trailer, inflate the

vehicle tires to the recom-

mended cold tire pressure indi-

cated on the Tire and Loading

Information label.

. Trailer tire condition, size, load

rating and proper inflation pres-

sure should be in accordance

with the trailer and tire manu-

facturers’ specifications.

Safety chains

Always use a suitable chain between your

vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains

should be crossed and should be at-

tached to the hitch, not to the vehicle

bumper or axle. Be sure to leave enough

slack in the chains to permit turning

corners.

STI0745

Trailer lights (if so equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a towing

package, which also includes the 7-pin

trailer harness connector located under

the trailer hitch cover on the rear bumper.

CAUTION

. When splicing into the vehicle

electrical system, a commercially

available power-type module/

converter must be used to pro-

vide power for all trailer lighting.

This unit uses the vehicle battery

as a direct power source for all

Technical and consumer information 10-25

10-26 Technical and consumer information

trailer lights while using the ve-

hicle tail light, stoplight and turn

signal circuits as a signal source.

The module/converter must draw

no more than 15 milliamps from

the stop and tail lamp circuits.

Using a module/converter that

exceeds these power require-

ments may damage the vehicle’s

electrical system. See a reputable

trailer retailer to obtain the prop-

er equipment and to have it

installed.

. Do not connect electrical devices

that draw more than 40 amps to

the vehicle. The fusible link may

melt.

Trailer lights should comply with federal

and/or local regulations. For assistance in

hooking up trailer lights, contact a NISSAN

dealer or reputable trailer retailer.

Trailer brakes

When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.

(1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake

system MUST be used. However, most

states require a separate braking system

on trailers with a loaded weight above a

specific amount. Make sure the trailer

meets the local regulations and the

regulations where you plan to tow.

Several types of braking systems are

available.

Surge Brakes - The surge brake actuator

is mounted on the trailer tongue with a

hydraulic line running to each trailer

wheel. Surge brakes are activated by the

trailer pushing against the hitch ball

when the tow vehicle is braking. Hydraulic

surge brakes are common on rental

trailers and some boat trailers. In this

type of system, there is no hydraulic or

electric connection for brake operation

between the tow vehicle and the trailer.

Electric Trailer Brakes - Electric braking

systems are activated by an electronic

signal sent from a trailer brake controller

(special brake sensing module).

Have a professional supplier of towing

equipment make sure the trailer brakes

are properly installed and demonstrate

proper brake function testing.

WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake system

directly to the vehicle brake system.

Pre-towing tips

. Be certain your vehicle maintains a

level position when a loaded or un-

loaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive

the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose-

up or nose-down condition; check for

improper tongue load, overload, worn

suspension or other possible causes

of either condition.

. Always secure items in the trailer to

prevent load shift while driving.

. Keep the cargo load as low as possible

in the trailer to keep the trailer center

of gravity low.

. Load the trailer so approximately 60%

of the trailer load is in the front half

and 40% is in the back half. Also make

sure the load is balanced side to side.

. Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure,

vehicle tire pressure, trailer light op-

eration, and trailer wheel lug nuts

every time you attach a trailer to the

vehicle.

. Be certain your rearview mirrors con-

form to all federal, state or local

regulations. If not, install any mirrors

required for towing before driving the

vehicle.

. Determine the overall height of the

vehicle and trailer so the required

clearance is known.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understand-

ing of the vehicle’s behavior, you should

practice turning, stopping and backing up

in an area which is free from traffic.

Steering stability, and braking perfor-

mance will be somewhat different than

under normal driving conditions.

. Always secure items in the trailer to

prevent load shift while driving.

. Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a

pin or lock to prevent the coupler from

inadvertently becoming unlatched.

. Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or

stops.

. Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

. Always drive your vehicle at a moder-

ate speed. Some states or provinces

have specific speed limits for vehicles

that are towing trailers. Obey the local

speed limits.

. When backing up, hold the bottom of

the steering wheel with one hand.

Move your hand in the direction in

which you want the trailer to go. Make

small corrections and back up slowly.

If possible, have someone guide you

when you are backing up.

Always block the wheels on both vehicle

and trailer when parking. Parking on a

slope is not recommended; however, if

you must do so:

CAUTION

If you move the shift lever to the P

(Park) position before blocking the

wheels and applying the parking

brake, transmission damage could

occur.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Have someone place blocks on the

downhill side of the vehicle and trailer

wheels.

3. After the wheel blocks are in place,

slowly release the brake pedal until

the blocks absorb the vehicle load.

4. Apply the parking brake.

5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

6. Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) models:

Make sure that the 4WD shift switch is

engaged in the AUTO, 4HI or 4LO

position and the Automatic Transmis-

sion (AT) park warning light is turned

off.

7. Turn off the engine.

To drive away:

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Start the engine.

3. Shift the transmission into gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and

trailer are clear from the blocks.

6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

7. Have someone retrieve and store the

blocks.

. While going downhill, the weight of the

trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may

decrease overall stability. Therefore, to

maintain adequate control, reduce

your speed and shift to a lower gear.

Avoid long or repeated use of the

brakes when descending a hill, as this

reduces their effectiveness and could

cause overheating. Shifting to a lower

gear instead provides “engine braking”

and reduces the need to brake as

frequently.

. If the engine coolant temperature

rises to a high temperature, see “If

your vehicle overheats” (P.6-14).

. Trailer towing requires more fuel than

normal circumstances.

. Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s

first 500 miles (800 km).

. Have your vehicle serviced more often

than at intervals specified in the

recommended maintenance schedule

shown in the "9. Maintenance and

Technical and consumer information 10-27

10-28 Technical and consumer information

schedules" section.

. When making a turn, your trailer

wheels will be closer to the inside of

the turn than your vehicle wheels. To

compensate for this, make a larger

than normal turning radius during the

turn.

. Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-

versely affect vehicle/trailer handling,

possibly causing vehicle sway. When

being passed by larger vehicles, be

prepared for possible changes in

crosswinds that could affect vehicle

handling.

Do the following if the trailer begins to

sway:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator

pedal to allow the vehicle to coast

and steer as straight ahead as the

road conditions allow. This combina-

tion will help stabilize the vehicle.

Do not correct trailer sway by

steering or applying the brakes.

2. When the trailer sway stops, gently

apply the brakes and pull to the side

of the road in a safe area.

3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is

balanced as described earlier in this

section.

. Be careful when passing other vehi-

cles. Passing while towing a trailer

requires considerably more distance

than normal passing. Remember the

length of the trailer must also pass the

other vehicle before you can safely

change lanes.

. Use the Tow mode or downshift the

transmission to a lower gear for en-

gine braking when driving down steep

or long hills. This will help slow the

vehicle without applying the brakes.

. Avoid holding the brake pedal down

too long or too frequently. This could

cause the brakes to overheat, result-

ing in reduced braking efficiency.

. Increase your following distance to

allow for greater stopping distances

while towing a trailer. Anticipate stops

and brake gradually.

. NISSAN recommends that the cruise

control not be used while towing a

trailer.

. While towing a trailer, do not use the

following systems (if so equipped):

— the Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

system

— the Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-

LI) system

— the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) sys-

tem

— the Intelligent Blind Spot Interven-

tion (I-BSI) system

— the Intelligent Back-up Intervention

(I-BI) system

— the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

system

— the Intelligent Distance Control (I-

DC) system

— the Automatic Emergency Braking

(AEB) system

— the Intelligent Forward Collision

Warning (I-FCW) system

. Some states or provinces have speci-

fic regulations and speed limits for

vehicles that are towing trailers. Obey

the local speed limits.

. Check your hitch, trailer wiring har-

ness connections, and trailer wheel

lug nuts after 50 miles (80 km) of

travel and at every break.

. When launching a boat, do not allow

the water level to go over the exhaust

tail pipe or rear bumper.

. Make sure you disconnect the trailer

lights (if so equipped) before backing

the trailer into the water or the trailer

lights may burn out.

When towing a trailer, the transmission

fluid should be changed more fre-

quently. For additional information,

see the "9. Maintenance and schedules"

section.

TOW mode

Using TOW mode is recommended when

pulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavy

load. Push the TOW MODE switch to

activate tow mode. The TOW MODE

indicator light in the meter illuminates

when TOW mode is selected. Push the

TOW MODE switch again to turn TOW

mode off. TOW mode is automatically

cancelled when the ignition switch is

placed in the OFF position.

TOW mode includes the following fea-

tures:

. Grade logic — Adjusts transmission

shifts when pulling a trailer or hauling

a load up a grade.

. Downhill Speed Control (DSC) — auto-

matically downshifts when driving

down a grade with a trailer or heavy

load to help control vehicle speed.

Driving the vehicle in the TOW mode with

no trailer/load or light trailer/light load

will not cause any damage. However, fuel

economy may be reduced and the trans-

mission/engine driving characteristics

may feel unusual.

When towing a trailer, the transmission

fluid should be changed more fre-

quently. For additional information,

see the "9. Maintenance and schedules"

section.

FLAT TOWING

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels

on the ground is sometimes called flat

towing. This method is sometimes used

when towing a vehicle behind a recrea-

tional vehicle, such as a motor home.

CAUTION

. Failure to follow these guidelines

can result in severe transmission

damage.

. Whenever flat towing your vehi-

cle, always tow forward, never

backward.

. DO NOT tow any automatic trans-

mission vehicle with all four

wheels on the ground (flat tow-

ing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE inter-

nal transmission parts due to lack

of transmission lubrication.

. DO NOT tow a Four-Wheel Drive

(4WD) vehicle with any of the

wheels on the ground. Doing so

may cause serious and expensive

damage to the powertrain.

. For emergency towing proce-

dures refer to “Towing recom-

mended by NISSAN” (P.6-17).

Automatic Transmission

Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) models:

Do not tow a 4WD vehicle with any of the

wheels on the ground.

Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models:

To tow a vehicle equipped with an auto-

matic transmission, an appropriate vehi-

cle dolly MUST be placed under the towed

vehicle’s drive wheels. Always follow the

dolly manufacturer’s recommendations

when using their product.

Technical and consumer information 10-29

10-30 Technical and consumer information

DOT (Department Of Transportation)

Quality Grades: All passenger car tires

must conform to federal safety require-

ments in addition to these grades.

Quality grades can be found where ap-

plicable on the tire sidewall between

tread shoulder and maximum section

width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tempera-

ture A

TREADWEAR

The treadwear grade is a comparative

rating based on the wear rate of the tire

when tested under controlled conditions

on a specified government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would

wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as

well on the government course as a tire

graded 100. The relative performance of

tires depends upon actual conditions of

their use, however, and may depart sig-

nificantly from the norm due to variations

in driving habits, service practices and

differences in road characteristics and

climate.

TRACTION AA, A, B AND C

The traction grades, from highest to low-

est, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades

represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet

pavement as measured under controlled

conditions on specified government test

surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire

marked C may have poor traction perfor-

mance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this

tire is based on straight-ahead brak-

ing traction tests, and does not

include acceleration, cornering, hy-

droplaning, or peak traction charac-

teristics.

TEMPERATURE A, B AND C

The temperature grades A (the highest),

B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance

to the generation of heat and its ability to

dissipate heat when tested under con-

trolled conditions on a specified indoor

laboratory test wheel. Sustained high

temperature can cause the material of

the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,

and excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-

sponds to a level of performance which

all passenger car tires must meet under

the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dard No. 109. Grades B and A represent

higher levels of performance on the

laboratory test wheel than the minimum

required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that is properly

inflated and not overloaded. Exces-

sive speed, under-inflation, or exces-

sive loading, either separately or in

combination, can cause heat build-

up and possible tire failure.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

Your NISSAN is covered by the following

emission warranties.

For USA:

. Emission Defects Warranty

. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found

with other vehicle warranties in your

Warranty Information Booklet that comes

with your NISSAN. If you did not receive a

Warranty Information Booklet, or it has

become lost, you may obtain a replace-

ment by writing to:

. NISSAN Division

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada:

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found

with other vehicle warranties in your

Warranty and Roadside Assistance Infor-

mation that comes with your NISSAN. If

you did not receive a Warranty and Road-

side Assistance Information, or it has

become lost, you may obtain a replace-

ment by writing to:

. Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario,

L4W 4Z5

For USA

If you believe that your vehicle has

a defect which could cause a crash

or could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the Na-

tional Highway Traffic Safety Ad-

ministration (NHTSA) in addition to

notifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar com-

plaints, it may open an investiga-

tion, and if it finds that a safety

defect exists in a group of vehicles,

it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot

become involved in individual pro-

blems between you, your dealer, or

NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-

888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-

9153); go to http://www.safercar.

gov; or write to: Administrator,

NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,

Washington, D.C. 20590. You can

also obtain other information

about motor vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.

Technical and consumer information 10-31

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

10-32 Technical and consumer information

You may notify NISSAN by contact-

ing our Consumer Affairs Depart-

ment, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1

(1-800-647-7261).

For Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has

a defect which could cause a crash

or could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform Trans-

port Canada in addition to notifying

NISSAN.

If Transport Canada receives com-

plaints, it may open an investiga-

tion, and if it finds that a safety

defect exists in a group of vehicles,

it may request that NISSAN con-

duct a recall campaign. However,

Transport Canada cannot become

involved in individual problems be-

tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

You may contact Transport Cana-

da’s Defect Investigations and Re-

calls Division toll free at 1-800-333-

0510. You may also report safety

defects online at:

https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/

7/ PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx.

Additional information concerning

motor vehicle safety may be ob-

tained from Transport Canada’s

Road Safety Information Centre at

1-800-333-0371 or online at www.

tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speak-

ers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiterou-

tiere (French speakers).

To notify NISSAN of any safety

concerns please contact our Con-

sumer Information Centre toll free

at 1-800-387-0122.

WARNING

A vehicle equipped with Four-Wheel

Drive (4WD) should never be tested

using a two wheel dynamometer

(such as the dynamometers used by

some states for emissions testing),

or similar equipment. Make sure you

inform test facility personnel that

your vehicle is equipped with 4WD

before it is placed on a dynam-

ometer. Using the wrong test equip-

ment may result in transmission

damage or unexpected vehicle

movement which could result in

serious vehicle damage or personal

injury.

Due to legal requirements in some states

and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may

be required to be in what is called the

“ready condition” for an Inspection/Main-

tenance (I/M) test of the emission control

system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”

when it is driven through certain driving

patterns. Usually, the “ready condition”

can be obtained by ordinary usage of

the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is

repaired or the battery is disconnected,

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/

MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

the vehicle may be reset to a “not ready

condition”. Before taking the I/M test,

check the vehicle’s inspection/mainte-

nance test readiness condition. Place the

ignition switch in the ON position without

starting the engine. If the Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for

20 seconds and then blinks for 10 sec-

onds, the I/M test condition is “not ready”.

If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds,

the I/M test condition is “ready”.

It is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer to set “ready condition” or to

prepare the vehicle for testing.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event

Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of

an EDR is to record, in certain crash or

near crash-like situations, such as an air

bag deployment or hitting a road obsta-

cle, data that will assist in understanding

how a vehicle’s systems performed. The

EDR is designed to record data related to

vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a

short period of time, typically 30 seconds

or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed

to record such data as:

. How various systems in your vehicle

were operating;

. Whether or not the driver and passen-

ger safety belts were buckled/fas-

tened;

. How far (if at all) the driver was

depressing the accelerator and/or

brake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle was traveling.

. Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better

understanding of the circumstances in

which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your

vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation

occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR

under normal driving conditions and no

personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and

crash location) are recorded. However,

other parties, such as law enforcement,

could combine the EDR data with the type

of personally identifying data routinely

acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required and access to the

vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition

to the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN

dealer, other parties, such as law enforce-

ment, that have the special equipment,

can read the information if they have

access to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data

will only be accessed with the consent of

the vehicle owner or lessee or as other-

wise required or permitted by law.

Technical and consumer information 10-33

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)

10-34 Technical and consumer information

Genuine NISSAN Service Manual for this

model year and prior can be purchased. A

genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the

best source of service and repair informa-

tion for your vehicle. This manual is the

same one used by the factory-trained

technicians working at NISSAN dealers.

Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manual can also

be purchased.

For USA:

For current pricing and availability of

genuine NISSAN Service Manuals, con-

tact:

www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of

genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, con-

tact:

1-800-247-5321

For Canada:

To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN

Service Manual or Owner’s Manual for this

model year and prior, contact a NISSAN

dealer. For the phone number and loca-

tion of a NISSAN dealer in your area, call

the NISSAN Satisfaction Center at 1-800-

387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN repre-

sentative will assist you.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

MEMO

Technical and consumer information 10-35

10-36 Technical and consumer information

MEMO

11 Index

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) .................... 5-131

Advanced Air Bag System.................................... 1-60

Air bag system

Advanced Air Bag System............................. 1-60

Front passenger air bag and

status light................................................................. 1-62

Front-seat mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag system..................... 1-68

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air

bag system................................................................ 1-68

Air bag warning labels ............................................ 1-70

Air bag warning light................................. 1-71, 2-17

Air cleaner housing filter....................................... 8-15

Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation............................... 4-35

Air conditioner service...................................... 4-43

Air conditioner specification label....... 10-12

Air conditioning system

refrigerant and lubricant

recommendations ................................ 4-43, 10-6

Automatic air conditioner ............................. 4-36

In-cabin microfilter.............................................. 4-43

Alarm, How to stop alarm (see vehicle

security system)............................................................ 2-31

Alcohol, drugs and driving................................... 5-10

All-mode 4WD.............................................................. 5-116

Antenna............................................................................... 4-43

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) .................... 5-131

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)

warning light................................................................... 2-11

Appearance care

Exterior appearance care ................................. 7-2

Interior appearance care................................... 7-5

Armrest................................................................................ 1-11

Audible reminders....................................................... 2-20

Auto closure .................................................................... 3-25

Automatic

Air conditioner ........................................................ 4-36

Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) ........ 8-8

Door locks...................................................................... 3-6

Drive positioner...................................................... 3-40

Driving with

automatic transmission.................................. 5-18

Seat positioner ....................................................... 3-40

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB).......... 5-98

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)

system warning light................................................ 2-11

Average fuel consumption and speed....... 2-28

Avoiding collision and rollover.............................. 5-8

Back door (See liftgate).......................................... 3-22

Battery.................................................................................. 8-11

Battery saver system.......................... 2-39, 2-67

Intelligent Key.......................................................... 8-21

Variable voltage control system .............. 8-13

Before starting the engine................................... 5-16

Belts (See drive belts)............................................... 8-13

Blind Spot Warning (BSW)..................................... 5-32

Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/Intelligent

Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) system

warning light................................................................... 2-12

Booster seats.................................................................. 1-51

Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ............ 5-131

Brake booster.......................................................... 8-17

Brake fluid ..................................................................... 8-9

Brake system ....................................................... 5-130

Parking brake operation................................. 5-22

Warning light............................................................ 2-12

Break-in schedule .................................................... 5-115

Brightness control

Instrument panel.................................................. 2-40

Bulb check/instrument panel............................ 2-11

Bulb replacement........................................................ 8-24

Cabin air filter................................................................. 4-43

Capacities and

recommended fluids/lubricants...................... 10-2

Car phone or CB radio............................................ 4-44

Cargo floor box............................................................. 2-60

Cargo light ........................................................................ 2-70

Catalytic converter, Three way catalyst ....... 5-4

Child restraints .............................................................. 1-32

Booster seats........................................................... 1-51

LATCH system......................................................... 1-35

Precautions on child restraints................. 1-33

Top tether strap.................................................... 1-37

Child safety....................................................................... 1-30

Child safety rear door lock ...................................... 3-6

Chimes

Audible reminders................................................ 2-20

Seat belt warning light and chime......... 2-16

Circuit breaker, Fusible link ................................. 8-19

Cleaning exterior and interior................... 7-2, 7-5

Climate control.............................................................. 4-35

Coat hooks ....................................................................... 2-59

Cockpit..................................................................................... 2-3

Cold weather driving............................................. 5-135

Console box..................................................................... 2-56

Console light ................................................................... 2-69

11-2

Coolant

Capacities and

recommended fluids/lubricants............... 10-2

Changing engine coolant ................................. 8-5

Checking engine coolant level...................... 8-5

Corrosion protection .................................................... 7-7

Cruise control

Fixed speed cruise control (on

ICC system)................................................................ 5-81

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) ................. 5-63

Cup holders...................................................................... 2-53

Daytime running light system........................... 2-39

Dimensions....................................................................... 10-9

Drive belts.......................................................................... 8-13

Drive positioner............................................................. 3-40

Driving

Cold weather driving..................................... 5-135

Driving with

automatic transmission.................................. 5-18

On-pavement and off-road driving .......... 5-9

Precautions when starting

and driving.................................................................... 5-4

Safety precautions .............................................. 5-10

Economy, Fuel............................................................. 5-116

Elapsed time.................................................................... 2-28

Emission control information label............ 10-11

Emission control system warranty ............ 10-31

Engine

Before starting the engine............................ 5-16

Break-in schedule ............................................ 5-115

Capacities and recommended fluids/

lubricants .................................................................... 10-2

Changing engine coolant ................................. 8-5

Changing engine oil and filter ...................... 8-6

Checking engine coolant level...................... 8-5

Checking engine oil level................................... 8-6

Coolant temperature gauge .......................... 2-7

Emergency engine shut off.......................... 5-15

Engine block heater ....................................... 5-136

Engine compartment

check locations......................................................... 8-3

Engine cooling system........................................ 8-4

Engine oil........................................................................ 8-6

Engine oil and oil

filter recommendation ..................................... 10-5

Engine oil replacement indicator ............ 2-26

Engine oil viscosity.............................................. 10-6

Engine serial number.................................... 10-11

Engine specifications......................................... 10-7

Engine start operation indicator.............. 2-23

If your vehicle overheats................................ 6-14

Oil pressure gauge................................................. 2-8

Protection mode................................................... 5-17

Remote engine start

operation indicator ............................................. 2-23

Starting the engine............................................. 5-16

Entry/exit function, Automatic

drive positioner ............................................................. 3-40

Event Data Recorders (EDR)............................. 10-33

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ......................... 5-4

Explanation of scheduled

maintenance items........................................................ 9-5

Extended storage fuse warning...................... 2-24

Extended storage switch ...................................... 8-21

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ...... 10-11

Filter

Air cleaner housing filter................................ 8-15

Changing engine oil and filter ...................... 8-6

Flashers (See hazard warning

flasher switch).................................................................... 6-2

Flat tire..................................................................................... 6-3

Flat towing..................................................................... 10-29

Flexible seating.............................................................. 1-12

Floor mat cleaning......................................................... 7-5

Fluid

Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) ........ 8-8

Brake fluid ..................................................................... 8-9

Capacities and

recommended fluids/lubricants............... 10-2

Engine coolant........................................................... 8-4

Engine oil........................................................................ 8-6

Power steering fluid .............................................. 8-8

Window washer fluid ......................................... 8-10

Fog light switch............................................................ 2-41

Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)

NISSAN all-mode 4WD®................................ 5-116

Front passenger air bag and

status light........................................................................ 1-62

Front power seat adjustment............................... 1-4

Front seat

Front seat adjustment ......................... 1-4, 1-11

Front-seat active head restraint..................... 1-19

Fuel

Capacities and

recommended fluids/lubricants............... 10-2

Fuel economy...................................................... 5-116

Fuel information.................................................... 10-3

Fuel octane rating ............................................... 10-3

Fuel-filler cap............................................................ 3-26

Fuel-filler door......................................................... 3-26

Gauge................................................................................ 2-8

LOOSE FUEL CAP warning............................. 3-29

Fuel efficient driving tips.................................... 5-115

Fuses...................................................................................... 8-18

Fusible links...................................................................... 8-19

Garage door opener

HomeLink®

Universal Transceiver......................... 2-70, 2-74

Gas cap................................................................................ 3-26

Gauge........................................................................................ 2-5

Engine coolant temperature gauge......... 2-7

Engine oil pressure gauge ............................... 2-8

Fuel gauge .................................................................... 2-8

Odometer....................................................................... 2-6

Speedometer .............................................................. 2-6

Tachometer.................................................................. 2-7

Trip computer ......................................................... 2-28

General maintenance ................................................... 9-2

Glove box ........................................................................... 2-56

Hazard warning flasher switch ............................ 6-2

Head restraints/headrests................................... 1-14

Headlights

Bulb replacement................................................. 8-24

Headlight switch ................................................... 2-37

Heated seats ................................................................... 2-43

Heated steering wheel............................................ 2-42

Heater

Automatic air conditioner ............................. 4-36

Engine block heater ....................................... 5-136

Heater and air conditioner

operation..................................................................... 4-35

Hill start assist system ......................................... 5-124

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver..... 2-70, 2-74

Hood release ................................................................... 3-21

Hook

Coat hooks ................................................................ 2-59

Luggage hook......................................................... 2-59

Horn........................................................................................ 2-42

Ignition switch (Push-button)............................ 5-13

Immobilizer system.................................................... 2-31

In-cabin microfilter..................................................... 4-43

Indicator

Lights.............................................................................. 2-17

Vehicle information display.......................... 2-20

Inside mirror .................................................................... 3-31

Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test............. 10-32

Instrument brightness control ......................... 2-40

Instrument panel............................................................. 2-4

Intelligent Around View Monitor ..................... 4-10

Intelligent Auto Headlight system ................. 2-38

Intelligent Back-up Intervention (I-BI)......... 5-53

Intelligent Blind Spot

Intervention (I-BSI) ...................................................... 5-40

Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI)

ON indicator light........................................................ 2-18

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) ........................ 5-63

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system

main switch indicator....................................... 2-25

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system

warning light................................................................... 2-14

Intelligent Distance Control (I-DC) ................. 5-85

Intelligent Distance Control (I-DC) system

warning light................................................................... 2-13

Intelligent Forward Collision Warning

(I-FCW)................................................................................ 5-106

Intelligent Key..................................................................... 3-2

Intelligent Key system ................................................. 3-7

Battery replacement.......................................... 8-21

Key operating range............................................. 3-9

Key operation.......................................................... 3-10

Warning light............................................................ 2-14

Warning signals...................................................... 3-12

Intelligent Key warning light .............................. 2-14

Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI).................. 5-23

Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) ON

indicator light (green) .............................................. 2-18

Intelligent Rear View Mirror................................. 3-32

Interior light replacement..................................... 8-26

Interior light switch.................................................... 2-68

Interior lights................................................................... 2-68

ISOFIX child restraint ................................................ 1-35

Jump starting ................................................................. 6-12

Keyless entry (See remote keyless

entry system).................................................................. 3-15

Keys............................................................................................ 3-2

For Intelligent Key system................................ 3-7

Labels

Air bag warning labels ..................................... 1-70

Air conditioner specification label....... 10-12

Emission control information label .... 10-11

Engine serial number.................................... 10-11

11-3

11-4

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label............................................................................. 10-11

Tire and Loading

information label................................ 8-32, 10-12

Vehicle identification number (VIN) .... 10-10

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator

light (orange)................................................................... 2-14

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)/Intelligent

Lane Intervention (I-LI)............................................ 5-23

LATCH system................................................................ 1-35

License plate, Installing front

license plate.................................................................. 10-12

Liftgate................................................................................. 3-22

Light

Air bag warning light......................................... 1-71

Bulb replacement................................................. 8-24

Cargo light ................................................................. 2-70

Fog light switch..................................................... 2-41

Headlight switch ................................................... 2-37

Headlights bulb replacement ..................... 8-24

Indicator lights........................................................ 2-17

Interior light switch............................................. 2-68

Interior lights............................................................ 2-68

Map lights................................................................... 2-69

Replacement ............................................................ 8-24

Vanity mirror lights............................................. 2-70

Warning/indicator lights and

audible reminders................................................ 2-11

Lights, Exterior and interior

light replacement........................................................ 8-26

Linking Intelligent Key (air conditioner)..... 4-43

Loading information (See vehicle

loading information) .............................................. 10-13

Lock

Automatic door locks........................................... 3-6

Door locks...................................................................... 3-4

Liftgate lock .............................................................. 3-22

Power door lock....................................................... 3-4

Locking with mechanical key................................ 3-4

Loose fuel cap warning.......................................... 3-26

Low outside temperature warning............... 2-25

Low tire pressure warning light ...................... 2-15

Low tire pressure warning system

(See Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS))...................................................................................... 5-5

Luggage hooks ............................................................. 2-59

Maintenance........................................................................ 9-2

Battery........................................................................... 8-11

General maintenance ........................................... 9-2

Inside the vehicle..................................................... 9-3

Maintenance indicators................................... 2-26

Maintenance log.................................................... 9-11

Maintenance precautions................................. 8-2

Maintenance requirements............................. 9-2

Maintenance schedules...................................... 9-7

Maintenance under severe

driving conditions ................................................ 9-10

Outside the vehicle ................................................ 9-2

Seat belt maintenance..................................... 1-29

Standard maintenance....................................... 9-7

Maintenance schedules.............................................. 9-7

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).................... 2-18

Map lights.......................................................................... 2-69

Master warning light................................................. 2-16

Mechanical key (Intelligent Key system)....... 3-3

Memory storage, Automatic

drive positioner ............................................................. 3-41

Meter

Trip computer ......................................................... 2-28

Meters and gauges........................................................ 2-5

Instrument brightness control .................. 2-40

Mirror

Inside mirror ............................................................. 3-31

Intelligent Rear View Mirror.......................... 3-32

Outside mirrors...................................................... 3-38

Vanity mirror ............................................................ 3-40

Monitor

Intelligent Around View Monitor .............. 4-10

Monitor, RearView Monitor...................................... 4-3

Moonroof............................................................................ 2-65

Moving Object Detection (MOD)...................... 4-29

New vehicle break-in............................................. 5-115

NISSAN all-mode 4WD®........................................ 5-116

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ............ 2-31

NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual....................... 4-2

Odometer............................................................................... 2-6

Off-road recovery............................................................ 5-9

Oil

Capacities and recommended

fluids/lubricants..................................................... 10-2

Changing engine oil and filter ...................... 8-6

Checking engine oil level................................... 8-6

Engine oil........................................................................ 8-6

Engine oil pressure gauge ............................... 2-8

Engine oil viscosity.............................................. 10-6

Oil filter replacement indicator ................. 2-26

Operation, operational indicators.................. 2-23

Outside air temperature........................................ 2-29

Outside mirrors............................................................. 3-38

Overheat, If your vehicle overheats.............. 6-14

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order

information.................................................................... 10-34

Panic alarm....................................................................... 3-17

Parking

Brake break-in .................................................... 5-131

Parking brake operation................................. 5-22

Parking on hills................................................... 5-125

Phone

Car phone or CB radio..................................... 4-44

Pocket................................................................................... 2-58

Power

Front seat adjustment ........................................ 1-4

Moonroof..................................................................... 2-65

Power door lock....................................................... 3-4

Power outlet............................................................. 2-50

Power steering ................................................... 5-130

Power steering fluid .............................................. 8-8

Power windows ..................................................... 2-63

Precautions

Braking precautions....................................... 5-130

Child restraints ....................................................... 1-33

Driving safety........................................................... 5-10

Maintenance................................................................ 8-2

On-pavement and off-road driving .......... 5-9

Seat belt usage...................................................... 1-20

Supplemental restraint system................. 1-54

When starting and driving................................ 5-4

Push starting................................................................... 6-14

Push-button ignition switch............................... 5-13

Radio

Car phone or CB radio..................................... 4-44

Rain-sensing auto wiper system .................... 2-34

Rapid air pressure loss................................................ 5-9

Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance

(I/M) test........................................................................... 10-32

Rear bumper cover.................................................... 2-61

Rear door alert .............................................................. 2-48

Rear door lock, Child safety rear

door lock ................................................................................ 3-6

Rear personal lights .................................................. 2-69

Rear window wiper and washer switch .... 2-36

Rear window wiper blades .................................. 8-17

RearView Monitor............................................................ 4-3

RearView Monitor system operation............... 4-4

Recorders, Event data .......................................... 10-33

Registering your vehicle in

another country ........................................................ 10-10

Remote engine start................................................. 3-19

Remote keyless entry system........................... 3-15

Reporting safety defects.................................... 10-31

Roadside assistance program .............................. 6-2

Rollover.................................................................................... 5-8

Roof

Moonroof..................................................................... 2-66

Roof rack..................................................................... 2-60

Safety

Child seat belts....................................................... 1-30

Towing safety...................................................... 10-22

Seat adjustment

Front power seat adjustment....................... 1-4

Front seats..................................................... 1-4, 1-11

Seat belt(s)

Child safety................................................................ 1-30

Infants............................................................................ 1-31

Injured persons ...................................................... 1-22

Larger children ....................................................... 1-31

Precautions on seat belt usage................ 1-20

Pregnant women.................................................. 1-22

Seat belt cleaning ................................................... 7-7

Seat belt extenders............................................. 1-29

Seat belt maintenance..................................... 1-29

Seat belt warning light and chime......... 2-16

Seat belts .................................................................... 1-20

Seat belts with pretensioners.................... 1-69

Small children.......................................................... 1-31

Three-point type................................................... 1-22

Seat(s)

Climate controlled seats................................. 2-45

Driver-side memory............................................ 3-40

Heated seats ............................................................ 2-43

Seats.................................................................................. 1-3

Security system (NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System), Engine start................. 2-31

Security system, Vehicle

security system............................................................. 2-30

Servicing air conditioner........................................ 4-43

Setting memory function, Automatic

drive positioner ............................................................. 3-42

Shift lever, Shift lock release............................... 5-22

Shift lock release

Transmission............................................................ 5-22

Shifting, Automatic transmission ................... 5-18

SNOW mode.................................................................. 5-127

SNOW mode switch................................................... 2-46

Sonar system............................................................... 5-127

Spare tire............................................................. 8-40, 10-8

Spark plugs....................................................................... 8-14

Speedometer ...................................................................... 2-6

Standard maintenance................................... 9-7, 9-8

Starting

Before starting the engine............................ 5-16

Jump starting .......................................................... 6-12

11-5

11-6

Precautions when starting

and driving.................................................................... 5-4

Push starting............................................................ 6-14

Starting the engine............................................. 5-16

Status light, Front passenger air bag......... 1-62

Steering

Heated steering wheel..................................... 2-42

Power steering ................................................... 5-130

Power steering fluid .............................................. 8-8

Tilt/telescopic steering .................................... 3-29

Storage ................................................................................ 2-53

Sun visors .......................................................................... 3-30

Sunglasses holder....................................................... 2-55

Supplemental air bag warning labels......... 1-70

Supplemental air bag

warning light.................................................... 1-71, 2-17

Supplemental restraint system........................ 1-54

Precautions on supplemental

restraint system .................................................... 1-54

Switch

Fog light switch..................................................... 2-41

Hazard warning flasher switch .................... 6-2

Headlight switch ................................................... 2-37

Ignition switch ........................................................ 5-18

Intelligent Auto Headlight switch............ 2-38

Power door lock switch ..................................... 3-5

SNOW mode switch............................................ 2-46

Turn signal switch ............................................... 2-41

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

OFF switch ................................................................. 2-47

Tachometer.......................................................................... 2-7

Temperature gauge, Engine coolant

temperature gauge ....................................................... 2-7

Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System), Engine start ............................................... 2-31

Three-way catalyst......................................................... 5-4

Tilt/telescopic steering ........................................... 3-29

Tire

Pressure, Low tire pressure

warning light............................................................ 2-15

Tire replacement indicator........................... 2-26

Tires

Flat tire............................................................................. 6-3

Tire and Loading

information label................................ 8-32, 10-12

Tire chains.................................................................. 8-37

Tire dressing................................................................ 7-4

Tire pressure ............................................................ 8-30

Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS) ................................................ 5-5, 6-3

Tire rotation.............................................................. 8-37

Types of tires ........................................................... 8-36

Uniform tire quality grading .................... 10-30

Wheel/tire size ........................................................ 10-8

Wheels and tires.................................................... 8-30

Top

Tether strap child restraints........................ 1-37

TOW mode ..................................................................... 5-126

TOW mode switch....................................................... 2-47

Towing

Flat towing............................................................. 10-29

Tow truck towing................................................. 6-16

Towing a trailer.................................................. 10-17

Towing safety...................................................... 10-22

TPMS, Tire Pressure

Monitoring System............................................. 5-5, 6-3

TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert......................... 5-8

Trailer towing .............................................................. 10-17

Transceiver

HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver................................................. 2-70, 2-74

Transmission

Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) ........ 8-8

Driving with

automatic transmission.................................. 5-18

Transmission shift lever lock release..... 5-22

Transmitter (See remote keyless

entry system).................................................................. 3-15

Traveling or registering your vehicle in

another country ........................................................ 10-10

Trip computer ................................................................ 2-28

Trip odometer................................................................ 2-28

Turn signal switch ...................................................... 2-41

Underbody cleaning...................................................... 7-3

Uniform tire quality grading ............................ 10-30

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

charging connector................................................... 2-52

Vanity mirror ................................................................... 3-40

Vanity mirror lights.................................................... 2-70

Variable voltage control system ..................... 8-13

Vehicle

Dimensions................................................................ 10-9

Identification number (VIN)....................... 10-10

Loading information ...................................... 10-13

Recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle).......... 6-19

Security system...................................................... 2-30

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

OFF switch ................................................................. 2-47

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

system....................................................................... 5-133

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

warning light............................................................ 2-17

Vehicle information display................................. 2-20

Ventilators......................................................................... 4-34

Voltmeter............................................................................... 2-9

Warning

Check tire pressure warning....................... 2-24

Hazard warning flasher switch .................... 6-2

Intelligent Forward Collision

Warning (I-FCW).................................................. 5-106

Lights.............................................................................. 2-11

Loose fuel cap warning................................... 2-24

Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS) ................................................ 5-5, 6-3

Vehicle information display.......................... 2-20

Warning lights, indicator lights and

audible reminders................................................ 2-10

Warning labels, Air bag warning labels...... 1-70

Warning light

4WD warning light........................................... 5-122

Air bag warning light.......................... 1-71, 2-17

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)

warning light............................................................ 2-11

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)

system warning light......................................... 2-11

Brake warning light ............................................ 2-12

Intelligent Key warning light ....................... 2-14

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

indicator light (orange).................................... 2-14

Low tire pressure warning light ............... 2-15

Seat belt warning light and chime......... 2-16

Warranty, Emission control system

warranty .......................................................................... 10-31

Washer switch

Rear window wiper and washer

switch............................................................................. 2-36

Windshield wiper and washer

switch............................................................................. 2-33

Washing................................................................................... 7-2

Waxing...................................................................................... 7-2

Welcome light................................................................. 2-67

Wheel/tire size ............................................................... 10-8

Wheels and tires........................................................... 8-30

Care of wheels........................................................... 7-3

Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels................ 7-3

Cleaning bright wheels....................................... 7-4

Window washer fluid ................................................ 8-10

Window(s)

Cleaning.......................................................................... 7-3

Power windows ..................................................... 2-63

Windshield wiper and washer switch.......... 2-33

Wiper

Rain-sensing auto wiper system ............. 2-34

Rear window wiper and

washer switch......................................................... 2-36

Windshield wiper and

washer switch......................................................... 2-33

Wiper blades ............................................................. 8-16

11-7

FUEL INFORMATION

VK56VD engine

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an

octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-

Knock Index) number (Research octane

number 91).

CAUTION

. Using a fuel other than that spe-

cified could adversely affect the

emission control systems, and

may also affect warranty cover-

age.

. Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because

this will damage the three way

catalyst.

. Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in

your vehicle. Your vehicle is not

designed to run on E-15 or E-85

fuel. Using E-15 or E-85 fuel in a

vehicle not specifically designed

for E-15 or E-85 fuel can adversely

affect the emission control de-

vices and systems of the vehicle.

Damage caused by such fuel is

not covered by the NISSAN new

vehicle limited warranty.

. Do not use fuel that contains the

octane booster methylcyclopen-

tadienyl manganese tricarbonyl

(MMT). Using fuel containing

MMT may adversely affect vehicle

performance and vehicle emis-

sions. Not all fuel dispensers are

labeled to indicate MMT content,

so you may have to consult your

gasoline retailer for more details.

Note that Federal and California

laws prohibit the use of MMT in

reformulated gasoline.

. U.S. government regulations re-

quire ethanol dispensing pumps

to be identified by a small,

square, orange and black label

with the common abbreviation or

the appropriate percentage for

that region.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:

See “Capacities and recommended fluids/

lubricants” (P.10-2) for engine oil and oil

filter recommendation.

COLD TIRE PRESSURES:

The label is typically located on the driver

side center pillar or on the driver’s door.

For additional information, see “Wheels

and tires” (P.8-30).

NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCE-

DURES RECOMMENDATION:

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of

vehicle use, follow the recommendations

outlined in the “Break-in schedule” (P.5-

115). Follow these recommendations for

the future reliability and economy of your

new vehicle.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

Y62-D

Printing : July 2019

Publication No.:

Printed in the U.S.A.

OM20E0 0Y62U0

2020 Nissan Armada

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Nissan 2020 NISSAN ARMADA Questions and Answers

Related Products

DK2 86625 Custom Mount Kit Nissan Titan '04-'15, Armada '04-'15

DK2 Mount Kit for Nissan Frontier Pickup 05-18, Xterra 05-14, Pathfinder 05-15 - Custom Fit and Easy Installation

DK2 86620 Custom Mount Kit Nissan Frontier Pickup '98-'04, Xterra '99-'04

DK2 86615 Custom Mount Kit Nissan Pathfinder '96-'04, Infinity QX4 '97-'03

Vevor JR06D015 Rear Prop Drive Shaft Compatible with 2008-2016 Nissan Rogue S SL SV 2.5L

Nissan 2022 Note e-Power